Es WP Not Annotated

ChevronTexaco Electrical
Safe Work Practice
Revision 3
Contents
1.0 Introduction 1
2.0 Scope 1
3.0 Definitions 2
4.0 Responsibilities 14
4.1 Location Management 14
4.2 Task Supervisor or PIC 15
4.3 Employee 15
4.4 Escort 15
4.5 Contractors and Visitors 15
5.0 Safe Work Practices 16

5.1 Live Parts Work Policy 16
5.1.1 General Policies 16
5.1.2 Exceptions to General Policies 17
5.1.3 Requirements for Live Parts Work 17
5.2 Working On or Near Energized Equipment 18
5.2.1 Hazards 18
5.2.2 Flash Hazard Analysis and Arc Flash Protective Equipment 18
5.2.3 Approach Distances 19
5.2.4 Working on Live Parts 19
5.2.5 Insulated Armored High Voltage Cable 20
5.2.6 Insulated Non-Armored High Voltage Cable 20
5.2.7 Procedures for Climbing Structures While Working On or
Near Live Parts 20
5.2.8 Live Parts Operating at 50 Volts or More 20
5.2.9 Insulating the Worker from Live Parts 21
5.2.10 Working On or Near Installations Not Related to Power Generation,
Transmission and Distribution -- Insulated Tools and
Insulating Gloves 22
5.3 Equipment/Line Status 23
5.3.1 Basic Rule 23
5.3.2 Proper Work Environment 23
Revision 3 TOC-i November 2001

Table of Contents ChevronTexaco Electrical Safe Work Practice
5.3.3 Testing and Verification Techniques for Isolation 24

5.4 De-energizing/Re-energizing Lines and Equipment for
Employee Protections 25
5.4.1 De-energizing Lines and Equipment 25
5.4.2 Re-energizing Lines and Equipment 25
5.5 Power System Switching Procedures 26
5.5.1 Preparation 26
5.5.2 During Switching 26
5.5.3 Job Briefings Prior to New Installations/Modifications 27
5.6 Personal Protective Equipment 28
5.6.1 Clothing/Apparel 28
5.6.2 Head Protection 29
5.6.3 Eye Protection 29
5.6.4 Hand Protection 29
5.7 Tools 30
5.7.1 Live-line Tools 30
5.7.2 Cord-connected Hand and Portable Power Tools 31
5.7.3 Hydraulic and Pneumatic tools 32
5.7.4 Ladders and Platforms 32
5.8 Work Zone 33
5.8.1 Electrical Hazard Barricade Tape/Rope 33
5.8.2 Area Protection 33
5.8.3 Enclosed Spaces 34
5.8.4 Underground Electrical Facilities 36
5.8.5 Trenches and Excavation 38
5.9 Lockout/Tagout 38
5.9.1 General Industry Lockout/Tagout 39
5.9.2 Site Lockout/Tagout Procedures 39
5.9.3 Lockout/Tagout Materials 40
5.9.4 Annual Inspections of Equipment Capable of Being Locked Out
or Tagged Out 41
5.9.5 Removing Lockout/Tagout Devices 41
5.10 Grounding 42
5.10.1 Traditional Methods 43
5.10.2 Equipotential Grounding 45
November 2001 TOC-ii Revision 3

ChevronTexaco Electrical Safe Work Practice Table of Contents
5.10.3 When Grounding is Impractical or Presents a Hazard 46

5.11 Mobile Equipment Operation 46
5.11.1 In General 46
5.11.2 Outrigger-equipped Vehicles 47
5.11.3 Operator Training 47
5.11.4 Operating Zone for Mobile Equipment 47
5.11.5 Grounding Mobile Equipment 49
5.12 Infrared Testing 50
5.12.1 Safety Interlocks 50
5.12.2 PPE for Infrared Testing 50
6.0 New Design, Modifications and Construction 51

6.1 Equipment Design Considerations 51
6.2 Substations 52
6.3 Guarding Live Parts 53
6.4 New Static Capacitor Banks 54
6.5 Lines 54
6.5.1 Recommended Spacing and Dimensional Clearances 54
6.5.2 Design Considerations for Lines 55
6.5.3 Installing and Removing Overhead Lines 55
6.6 Perimeter Fence Grounding 57
6.7 Pipelines, Conveyors, and Metal Structures 57
6.8 Signage 57
6.8.1 Design 58
6.8.2 Location 58
6.9 Equipment Labeling, Marking, and Identification 59
6.9.1 Equipment Operating at Over 600 volts, Nominal 59
6.9.2 Equipment Operating at 600 Volts or Less, Nominal 59
6.9.3 Other 59
7.0 Operation and Maintenance 60

7.1 Substations 60
7.1.1 Enclosures 60
7.1.2 Storing Materials 60
7.1.3 Inspections 60
7.1.4 Servicing Substation and High Voltage Yard Auxiliary Equipment 60
Revision 3 TOC-iii November 2001

7.2 Guarding Live Parts During Operation and Maintenance 60

7.3 Rights-of-Way 61
7.3.1 Storage of Materials in Rights-of-Way 61
8.0 Inspection and Testing of Insulating Rubber Products, Tools, and

Mechanized Equipment 62
8.1 Documentation 62
8.2 Insulating Rubber Products 62
8.2.1 Insulating Rubber Gloves 62
8.2.2 Insulating Rubber Sleeves 62
8.2.3 Insulating Blankets, Line Hoses, and Covers 63
8.3 Tools 63
8.3.1 Live-line Tools 63
8.3.2 Insulated Tools 63
8.4 Mechanized Equipment 64
8.4.1 Insulated Equipment 64
8.4.2 Non-Insulated Equipment 64
8.4.3 Safety Components of Mechanized Equipment 64
9.0 Employee Training 64

9.1 Types of Training 64
9.2 Certification and Record Keeping 65
9.2.1 Certification 65
9.2.2 Record Keeping 65
9.3 Personnel Responsibilities and General Qualifications 65
9.3.1 Responsibilities 65
9.3.2 General Qualifications and Skills Recommended 66
9.4 “Qualified Employee” Training 67
9.5 “Authorized Employee” Training 67
9.6 Refresher Training 68
9.7 Lockout/Tagout Training 68
9.7.1 Tagout Only 69
9.8 Retraining 69
10.0 Facility Work 69

10.1 Location Management 69
10.2 Contractors 70
November 2001 TOC-iv Revision 3

ChevronTexaco Electrical Safe Work Practice Table of Contents
10.3 Non-qualified and Non-authorized Personnel 70

10.4 Electrical System Safety for Operations 70
10.5 Accident/Incident Investigation 70
10.6 Periodic Electrical Safety Reviews 71
11.0 Power System and Electrical Installation Security (Locking) 71

11.1 Safety Lock 71
11.2 Operating System Lock 71
11.3 Preferred Lock System 71
11.4 Equipment Access Interlock Systems 72
11.5 Remote/Other Utility Operations (Clearance, Lockout/Tagout) 72
12.0 References 72
12.1 ANSI (American National Standards Institute) 72
12.2 ASTM (American Society for Testing and Materials) Standard on
Electrical Protective Equipment for Workers, 7th Edition. 73
12.3 CFR (Code of Federal Regulations) 73
12.4 IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers) 73
12.5 NFPA (National Fire Protection Association) 74
12.6 Applicable State and Local Codes 74
Appendix A Clearance and Approach Boundaries Figures and Tables 75
Appendix B Limits of Approach 83

Appendix C Flame Resistant Clothing Recommendations 84
Appendix D Sample Calculation of Flash Protection Boundary DC, Arc in

Open Air Ema, and Arc in Cubic Box Emb 93
Appendix E Recommended Personal Protective Equipment 96
Appendix F Work Area Protection 101
Appendix G Job Briefing Checklist 103
Appendix H Substation Project Installation Safety Assessment Checklist 104
Appendix I Substation Inspection Checklist 107
Appendix J Electrical Control Room Inspection Checklist 111
Appendix K Test Procedure for Daily Inspection of Rubber Gloves 112
Appendix L Safety Tags 113
Revision 3 TOC-v November 2001

Appendix M Grounding Cable and Jumper Ratings 114
Appendix N Equipotential Grounding Techniques 115
Appendix O Principles of Electrical Safety 116
Appendix P OSHA Regulations (Standards - 29 CFR) 117
November 2001 TOC-vi Revision 3

ChevronTexaco Electrical Safe Work Practice
1.0 INTRODUCTION
Most incidents and injuries related to electrical systems can be
avoided by following the safe work practices described in this
document. Besides the personal pain of suffering an injury, incidents
can result in lost time, medical costs, equipment damage, production
loss, and legal costs.
2.0 SCOPE
This document provides the minimum safety knowledge and
procedures that will allow both individuals and facilities to work
with, or in proximity to, energized high and low voltage sources (in
the language of applicable safety standards, this is formally
designated to be “working near” or “working on” live parts - see
Section 3.0 Definitions). Each individual or facility, however, is
responsible for customizing the information presented here to allow
for details and activities specific to the affected facility.
This practice sets minimum safety rules and safe work
recommendations for the design, operation and maintenance of high
and low voltage systems throughout ChevronTexaco facilities. It is
imperative that, at a minimum, these guidelines be met or exceeded to
enhance employee safety. If more stringent local governmental codes
or accepted employee safety practices, design criteria, etc., exist,
follow those codes or standards.
This document applies to all employees, contractors, and visitors
while in proximity to energized conductors, energized exposed parts
of electrical equipment, or such conductors and equipment that
potentially may become energized.
This practice applies to new or modified high and low voltage
installations. Existing installations need not be physically modified to
comply with this document unless qualified personnel consider such
modifications necessary to protect affected persons from a recognized
hazard.
For the purpose of this practice, low voltage means 1000 volts
nominal or less phase-to-phase or conductor-to-conductor, and high
voltage means voltages above 1000 volts ac, phase-to-phase.
Knowledge of this practice by itself does not make a person a NFPA 70E Part II 1.3
qualified electrical worker. Each site should establish guidelines for NFPA 70E Part II 1-5.4.1
informal and formal training, as well as levels of experience needed
for workers in the electrical field or other workers whose job function
would expose them to a potential electrical hazard.
November 2001 1 of 117 Revision 3

3.0 DEFINITIONS
The terms listed in this section are used throughout this practice.
Becoming familiar with them prior to reading the document will help
clarify the material.
OSHA 1910.269(x) Affected Employee (or Affected Person)
OSHA 1910.147(b)
(modified) An employee whose job requires him or her to operate a machine or
use equipment that is being serviced or maintained while under
lockout or tagout, or whose job requires him or her to work in an area
in which such servicing or maintenance is being performed.
An employee whose job includes erecting, installing, constructing,
repairing, adjusting, inspecting, operating, or maintaining the
equipment or manufacturing process from a non-electrical
perspective.
ANSI
American National Standards Institute
Approved
Methods, devices, tools, equipment or practices acceptable to the
Company and/or regulatory body having jurisdiction.
Arc Flash Protective Equipment
Equipment used to safeguard personnel from momentary electrical
arcs. May include flame resistant clothing, flash suits, face
protection, hand protection, and/or foot protection.
ASTM
American Society for Testing and Materials
OSHA 1910.269(x) Attendant
An employee assigned to remain immediately outside the entrance to
an enclosed or other designated location to render assistance as
needed to employees inside the space.
OSHA 1910.269(x) Authorized Employee (or Authorized Person)
(modified)
OSHA 1910.147(b) An employee who locks out or tags out machines or equipment in
(modified) order to perform servicing or maintenance on that machine or
equipment. An “affected employee” becomes an “authorized
employee” when duties include performing service or maintenance
covered under this practice and includes performing the lockout/
tagout procedures.
An employee who has been given, by his or her employer, the
training, authority, and responsibility to perform a specific
assignment in an electrical area.
Revision 3 2 of 117 November 2001

One who can demonstrate by experience and training (as stated in

Section 9.0 of this practice) the ability to recognize potentially
hazardous electrical energy.
Examples include electricians, mechanics, supervisors, operators,
engineers, custodians, painters, etc.
Automatic Circuit Recloser OSHA 1910.269(x)
A self-controlled device for interrupting and reclosing an alternating

current circuit with a predetermined sequence of opening and
reclosing, followed by a resetting, hold-closed, or lockout operation.
Barricade NFPA 70E
A physical obstruction such as tapes, ropes, cones, or A-frame type

wood or metal structures intended to provide a warning about and
limit access to a hazardous area.
Barrier NFPA 70E
A physical obstruction intended to prevent contact with equipment or

live parts, or to prevent unauthorized access to a work area.
Bond OSHA 1910.269(x)
The electrical interconnection of conductive parts designed to

maintain a common electrical potential across the connection.
Bus OSHA 1910.269(x)
A conductor or group of conductors that serves as a common

connection for two or more circuits.
Bushing OSHA 1910.269(x)
(modified)
An insulating structure, including a through conductor (or providing a
passageway for such a conductor), that can be mounted on a barrier,
conducting or otherwise, to insulate the conductor from the barrier
and conduct current from one side of the barrier to the other.
Cable NESC
OSHA 1910.269(x)
A conductor with insulation, or a stranded conductor with or without
insulation and other coverings (single-conductor cable), or a
combination of conductors insulated from one another (multiple-
conductor cable).
Cable Sheath NESC
OSHA 1910.269(x)
A conductive, protective covering applied to cables (may be multiple
layers, one or more of which may be conductive).
Circuit NESC
OSHA 1910.269(x)
A conductor or system of conductors through which an electric
current is intended to flow.

NESC Clearance (Between Objects)

OSHA 1910.269(x)
The clear distance between two objects, measured surface to surface.
OSHA 1910.269(x) Clearance (For Work)
(modified)
Authorization by the proper authority that a specified line or piece of
equipment is safe to work on or in (i.e., de-energized, drained,
purged, depressurized, etc.) and that it is being turned over to the
Person-in-Charge (PIC).
Clearance (From Hazard)
Separation distance from energized lines or equipment.
Close Proximity
An object close enough to reach, fall into, or otherwise accidentally
touch.
Common Lockout System
A lockout system that permits the use of locking devices but is not
unique or uniquely controlled (see Unique Lockout System below).
NESC Communications Lines (Lines, Communications)
Conductors and their supporting or containing structures that are used
for public or private signal or communication service, operate at
potentials not exceeding 400 volts to ground or 750 volts between
any two points of the circuit, and the transmitted power of which does
not exceed 150 watts.
When operated at not more that 90 V ac or 150 V dc, no limit is
placed on the transmitted power of the system. Under specified
conditions, communication lines may include communication circuits
exceeding the preceding, where such circuits are also used to supply
power solely to communication equipment.
NESC Conductor
A material, usually in the form of a wire, cable, or bus bar suitable for
carrying an electric current.
NESC Covered Conductor
OSHA 1910.269(x)
A conductor covered with a dielectric having no rated insulating
strength or having a rated insulating strength less than the voltage of
the circuit in which the conductor is used.
CPR
Cardiopulmonary Resuscitation

Current-carrying Part NESC

OSHA 1910.269(x)
A conducting part in an electric circuit intended to be connected to a
source of voltage. Non-current-carrying parts are those not intended
to be so connected.
Deenergized NFPA 70E
OSHA 1910.269(x)
Free from any electrical connection to a source of potential difference
and from electric charge; not having a potential different from that of
the earth.
Designated Person OSHA 1910.269(x)
(modified)
An employee designated by the employer to perform specific duties
and who is knowledgeable in the construction and operation of the
equipment and the hazards involved.
Dielectric Testing
A controlled method used to test the electrical safety integrity of
personal protective and live-line equipment.
Disconnect
A device designed to connect or disconnect machines, equipment,
and/or other installations from an electrical energy source.
EHV (Extra High Voltages)
For the purposes of this practice, EHV is any voltage above 230 kV.
Electric Line Truck OSHA 1910.269(x)
A truck used to transport personnel, tools, and material for electric

supply line work.
Electric Utility OSHA 1910.269(x)
An organization responsible for the installation, operation, and

maintenance of an electric supply system.
Electrically Safe Work Condition NFPA 70E (modified)
A state in which the conductor or circuit part to be worked on or near

has been disconnected from energized parts, locked/tagged in
accordance with established standards, tested to ensure the absence of
voltage, and grounded in accordance with Section 5.10.
Employee
One employed by another, usually for wages or salary.
OSHA 1910.269(x)

Enclosed Space
A working space, such as a manhole, vault, tunnel, or shaft, that has a
limited means of egress or entry, is designed for periodic employee
entry under normal conditions, and does not contain a hazardous
atmosphere. Under abnormal conditions, however, it may contain a
hazardous atmosphere.
Note: Spaces that are enclosed but not designed for employee entry
under normal operating conditions are not considered enclosed
spaces for the purposes of this practice. Similarly, spaces that are
enclosed and that are expected to contain a hazardous atmosphere
are not considered to be enclosed spaces for the purposes of this
practice.
NESC Energized (Alive, Live)
OSHA 1910.269(x)
Electrically connected to a source of potential difference, or
electrically charged as to have a potential significantly different from
the earth in the vicinity.
OSHA 1910.269(x) Energy Isolating Device
OSHA 1910.147(b)
A physical device that prevents the transmission or release of energy,
including, but not limited to, a manually operated electric circuit
breaker, a disconnect switch, a manually operated switch, a slide gate,
a slip blind, a line valve, blocks, and any similar device with a visible
indication of the position of the device.
Push buttons, selector switches, and other control-circuit-type
devices are not energy isolating devices.
OSHA 1910.269(x) Energy Source
OSHA 1910.147(b)
(modified) Any electrical, mechanical, hydraulic, pneumatic, chemical, nuclear,
thermal, or other energy source that could cause injury to personnel.
Equipotential Grounding (Earthing)
A grounding (earthing) scheme which places the worker in an
envelope of equal potential. When everything that the worker can
touch is of the same potential, no current can flow through the worker
between two different touch points.
OSHA 1910.269(x) Equipment (Electrical)
A general term including material (fittings, devices, appliances,
fixtures, etc.) that is used as part of, or in connection with, an
electrical installation.
Escort
A “qualified employee” (see definition below) who accompanies
non-qualified employees or visitors in the vicinity of electrical
equipment or lines.

Exposed (Live Parts)

Not suitably guarded, isolated, or insulated. Capable of being
inadvertently touched or approached within an unsafe distance.
Flash Hazard NFPA 70E
A dangerous condition associated with the possible release of energy

caused by an electrical arc.
Flash Protection Boundary
The threshold distance at which unprotected human skin may be
subject to a second-degree burn.
The distance within which a person needs to wear personal protective
equipment appropriate for the potential arc flash energy for any
exposed part of the body.
Ground (Earth) NFPA 70E
OSHA 1910.269(x)
A conducting connection, whether intentional or accidental, between
an electrical circuit or equipment and the earth or to some other
conducting body that serves in place of the earth.
Grounded (Earthed) NFPA 70E
OSHA 1910.269(x)
Connected to earth or to some conducting body that serves in place of
the earth.
Grounding (Earthing)
The act of providing an intentional connection to earth through a
ground connection of sufficiently low impedance and having
sufficient current carrying capacity to prevent voltage build-up that
could result in undue hazard to connected equipment or to persons.
Note: For non-North American installations, earthing is the common
terminology.
Guarded NFPA 70E
OSHA 1910.269(x)
Covered, shielded, fenced, enclosed, or otherwise protected by means
of suitable covers, casings, barriers, rails, screens, mats, or platforms
to remove the likelihood of approach or contact by persons or objects
to a point of danger.
Hazard Risk Analysis
The decision-making process used to determine the degree and extent
of the hazard associated with a particular task, the appropriate
protective equipment needed, and the job planning necessary to
complete the task safely.

OSHA 1910.269(x) Hazardous Atmosphere (as applied to confined/enclosed

spaces, 29 CFR 1910.269)
An atmosphere that may expose employees to the risk of death,
injury, acute illness, incapacitation or render them unable to escape
unaided from an enclosed space, from one or more of the following
causes:
• Flammable gas, vapor, or mist in excess of 10 percent of its
lower flammable limit (LFL).
• Airborne combustible dust at a concentration that meets or
exceeds its LFL.
• Atmospheric oxygen concentration below 19.5 percent or above
23.5 percent.
• Atmospheric concentration of any substance for which a dose or
a permissible exposure limit is published in Subpart G,
Occupational Health and Environmental Control, or in Subpart
Z, Toxic and Hazardous Substances, or Part 1910 of
Occupational Safety and Health Standards for General Industry,
and which could result in employee exposure in excess of its
dose or permissible exposure limit.
• Any other atmospheric condition that is immediately dangerous
to life or health.
High Voltage
AC voltage above 1000 volts, phase-to-phase, or conductor-to-
conductor. However, where governmental codes stipulate voltages
less than 1000 volts phase-to-phase as high voltage, that voltage
should be used as the lower limit.
IEEE
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
NESC, NFPA 70E, and Insulated
OSHA 1910.269(x)
Separated from other conducting surfaces by a dielectric (including
air space) offering a high resistance to the passage of current.
Note: When any object is said to be insulated, it is understood to be
insulated for the conditions to which it is normally subjected.
Otherwise, it is, within the purpose of these rules, uninsulated.
NESC Insulated Conductor
A conductor enclosed within a dielectric material that has a rated
insulating strength equal to or greater than the voltage of the circuit in
which it is used.

Insulation (Cable) NESC
That which is relied upon to insulate the conductor from other

conductors or conducting parts or from ground.
ISO
International Standards Organization
Isolated NESC, NFPA 70E, and
OSHA 1910.399(a)
Not readily accessible to persons unless special means of access are
used.
Limited Approach Boundary NFPA 70E
A shock protection boundary to be crossed by only qualified

employees (at a distance from a live part) which is not to be crossed
by unqualified employees unless escorted by a qualified employee.
Limited (Hazardous) Work
Any work, other than prohibited or restricted work, that requires the
employee to approach exposed energized conductors or circuit parts
with conductive objects or unguarded body parts within the “limited
approach boundary.”
Line Clearance Tree Trimming OSHA 1910.269(x)
(modified)
The pruning, trimming, repairing, maintaining, removing, or clearing OSHA 1910.399(a) modified
of trees or cutting of brush within 10 feet (305 cm) of live parts.
Live-line Tool
A wooden or fiberglass rod, handle, or pole rated for the voltage
involved and used to touch, or come in close proximity to, live parts.
Live Parts NFPA 70E
Electric conductors, buses, terminals, or components that are

uninsulated or exposed and a shock hazard exists.
Lockout OSHA 1910.147(b)
The placement of a lockout device on an energy-isolating device in

accordance with an established procedure to ensure that the energy-
isolating device and the equipment being controlled cannot be
operated until the lockout device is removed. (See Unique Lockout
System, below.)
Lockout Device OSHA 1910.147(b)
(modified)
A device that utilizes a positive means (such as a keyed lock) to hold
an energy-isolating device in the safe position, thus preventing the
energizing of a machine or equipment.

Location Manager
General manager of the facility.
Low Voltage
Any electrical circuit that normally operates at 1000 volts nominal or
less phase-to-phase or conductor-to-conductor. However, where
governmental codes stipulate voltages less than 1000 volts phase-to-
phase as high voltage, that voltage should be used as the upper limit.
NESC Manhole
OSHA 1910.269(x)
A subsurface enclosure which personnel may enter for the purpose of
installing, operating, and maintaining submersible equipment or
cable.
Mobile Equipment
This includes but is not limited to cranes, bucket trucks, aerial lifts,
and similar types of equipment.
Near Proximity
A minimum clearance of 10 feet (305 cm) to energized lines and
equipment operating at 50 kV, or less. This distance increases
4 inches (10 cm) for every 10 kV over 50 kV.
Non-hazardous Work
Work that is not considered to be “prohibited,” “restricted,” or
“limited” work. An example is working on control circuits below
50 V ac or dc to ground.
Note: Energized parts that operate at less than 50 volts are not
required to be de-energized to satisfy an “electrically safe work
condition.” However, consideration should be given to the capacity
of the source, any overcurrent protection between the energy source
and the worker, and whether the work task related to the source
operating at less than 50 volts increases exposure to electrical burns
or to explosion from an electric arc.
Non-insulated Conductor
A conductor that has no insulating properties other than air.
Operating System Lock
A keyed lock placed on an electrical distribution system to prevent
unintentional opening of a disconnect. Operating system locks may
be “unique” or “common lock” systems. This is not a personal safety
lock (see Safety Lock, below).

Person-in-Charge (PIC)
A person in charge of work or employees, regardless of his or her
title. Examples include a supervisor, foreman, lineman in charge, lead
people, etc. or a qualified employee who has been authorized and
designated to be locally in charge of Company work.
Potentially Energized
A non-insulated conductor or device that, by nature of design or
location, may be energized by an adjacent energized conductor,
switch closure, or back-feed.
Prohibited Approach Boundary NFPA 70E
A shock protection boundary to be crossed by only qualified persons

(at a distance from a live part) which, when crossed by a body part or
object, requires the same protection as if direct contact is made with a
alive part.
Prohibited (Live) Work
Work that requires intentional hand, body, or tool contact with
exposed conductors or circuit parts operating at 50 V ac or dc or
above (conductor-to-conductor or conductor-to-ground), or work that
requires approach of exposed, energized conductors or circuit parts to
conductive objects or unguarded body parts closer than the
“prohibited approach boundary” distance listed in Appendix A, Table
A-6.
Qualified Employee (or Qualified Person) NFPA 70E (modified)
One familiar with the construction and operation of the equipment

and the hazards involved. A person trained in and knowledgeable
about the construction and operation of the equipment or the specific
work method, and is trained to recognize and avoid the electrical
hazards that might be present with respect to the equipment or work
method.
Restricted Approach Boundary NFPA 70E
A shock protection boundary to be crossed only by qualified persons

(at a distance from a live part) which, due to its proximity to a shock
hazard, requires the use of shock protection techniques and
equipment when crossed.
Restricted (Proximity) Work
Work that requires approaching exposed, energized (50 V ac or dc or
above) conductors or circuit parts with conductive objects or
unguarded body parts within the “restricted approach boundary”
distance listed in Appendix A, Table A-6.

Rights-of-way (Power Lines)

The area under a power line within 10 feet (305 cm) horizontal to the
nearest conductor for lines rated 50 kV and below. This distance
needs to be increased 4 inches (10 cm) for each 10 kV above 50 kV.
Safety Lock
A controlled keyed lock, intended for personnel protection only, that
is installed at each tagout/lockout location. Personal safety locks are
used to ensure the personal safety of a person working on or near a
live part. This is a unique lock system.
NFPA 70E Shock Hazard
A dangerous condition associated with the possible release of energy
caused by contact with or approach to live parts.
Should
In this practice, means recommended.
Stand-by Person
One whose sole responsibility is to observe the actions of the person
performing the task and ensure that he/she is aware of the associated
potential hazards. The stand-by person should be trained in
recognizing and avoiding electrical hazards, emergency response
techniques (such as CPR), and methods used to free a person from
energized conductors or circuit parts.
NFPA 70E Step Potential
A ground potential gradient difference that can cause current flow
from foot to foot through the body.
NESC Switch
OSHA 1910.269(x)
A device for opening and closing or for changing the connection of a
circuit. In this practice, a switch is understood to be manually
operable, unless otherwise stated.
Switching Authority
The authority given to an employee to carry out a switching operation
on the electrical distribution system. This may be a crew electrician,
the crew subforeman, or the utility supervisor.
OSHA 1910.147 (b) Tagout
The placement of a tagout device on an energy-isolating device in
accordance with an established procedure, to indicate that the energy-
isolating device and the equipment being controlled may not be
operated until the tagout device is removed.

Tagout Device
A prominent warning device, such as a tag and a means of
attachment, which can be securely fastened to an energy-isolating
device in accordance with an established procedure, to indicate that
the energy-isolating device and the equipment being controlled must
not be operated until the tagout device is removed.
“Ten (10) Foot” Rule
An unqualified person must maintain a minimum distance of 10 feet
from live parts (see Limited Approach Boundary, Appendix A, Table
A-6).
To prevent physical contact with energized or isolated ungrounded
power lines, equipment or machines should be operated as follows:
the minimum clearance between the lines and every part of the
equipment or machine or its load should be 10 feet (305 cm) for lines
rated 50 kV or below; this distance is increased 4 inches (10 cm) for
each 10 kV above 50 kV.
Touch Potential NFPA 70E
A ground potential gradient difference that can cause current flow

from hand to hand or hand to foot through the body.
Unique Lockout System
A controlled lockout system (unique lock/one key or unique lock
group/one key) requiring special authorization for use. (See also
Lockout.)
Unqualified Person NFPA 70E
A person who is not a “qualified employee” (see definition above).

Vault OSHA 1910.269(x)
An enclosure, above or below ground, which personnel may enter for

the purpose of installing, operating, or maintaining equipment or
cable.
Voltage NESC
OSHA 1910.269(x)
The effective (rms) potential difference between any two conductors
or between a conductor and ground. Voltages are expressed in
nominal values unless otherwise indicated. The nominal voltage of a
system or circuit is the value assigned to a system or circuit of a given
voltage class for the purpose of convenient designation. The
operating voltage of the system may vary above or below this value.
Working Near (Live Parts) NFPA 70E
Any activity inside the “limited approach boundary.”

NFPA 70E (supplemented) Working On (Live Parts)

Coming in contact with live parts with the hands, feet, or other body
parts, with tools, probes, or with test equipment, regardless of the
personal protective equipment a person is wearing.
There are two categories of “working on”:
Added by ChevronTexaco • Diagnostic (testing) - taking readings or measurements of
electrical equipment that does not require making any physical
change to the equipment.
• Repair - any physical alteration of electrical equipment such as
making or tightening connections, removing or replacing
components, etc.
Work Zone
The space required to safeguard personnel. An area temporarily
marked off by rope, tape, or other barricading devices into which
entry is prohibited for all personnel except those authorized by the
PIC of the work zone.
4.0 RESPONSIBILITIES
4.1 Location Management

The Location Manager or his or her designee:
• Should appoint a qualified employee as the location resource
who remains current on this document and associated references.
The person appointed has the responsibility and authority for
implementing this practice.
• May designate a qualified employee for each functional or
operational area to be responsible for meeting all administrative,
design, construction, maintenance and documentation
requirements of this practice. This responsibility includes system
electrical planning, operation and control. This person is also
responsible for obtaining, reading, understanding/interpreting,
implementing, and maintaining mandated (under law)
governmental codes, policies and practices.
• Approves exceptions to Live Parts Work Policy.
• Approves PPE.
• Approves test equipment.
• Approves the decision to barrier and insulate instead of de-
energize.

4.2 Task Supervisor or PIC NESC 421A (modified)
This individual should be a “qualified employee” (see Section 3.0

Definitions) and is responsible for the following:
• Adopting such precautions as are within the individual’s
authority to prevent accidents, and take positive action to obtain
necessary precautions for those concerns not within the
individual’s authority in order to insure employee safety.
• Ensuring that the site safety rules, training requirements and
operating procedures as contained in this or other practices, are
observed by the employees under his or her direction.
• Preparing all the necessary documentation as required. (i.e.,
Switching Procedures, Confined Space Procedures, Digging
Permits, Welding Permits, etc.)
• Preventing unauthorized persons from approaching places where
electrical work requiring qualification is being performed.
• Ensuring that tools or devices used are suited for the work at
hand, and that applicable tools have been inspected and tested as
required.
4.3 Employee
The employee is the person most responsible for his or her own
safety.
• “Qualified” and “authorized” employees should remain
knowledgeable about applicable electrical safety concerns as
contained in this practice, or other practices.
• “Affected” employees should be aware of electrical hazards
where electrical work is not the primary task but where the
opportunity for contact exists (i.e., during lockout/tagout, when
working near open crane rails or motor control centers and
switchgear, around cable ladders, and resetting devices and
equipment).
4.4 Escort
The escort is a “qualified” employee whose responsibility is to
safeguard the people in his or her care and to ensure that safety
regulations are observed.
4.5 Contractors and Visitors

Contractors and visitors are to follow, at a minimum, all safety
regulations of this facility as contained in this practice.

5.0 SAFE WORK PRACTICES
5.1 Live Parts Work Policy
5.1.1 General Policies

NFPA 70E Part II 2-1.1.1 ChevronTexaco’s general policy is that NO maintenance or
OSHA 1910.333(a)(1) construction/installation work is to be performed on any conductors
and/or exposed equipment parts at 50 volts and above while
energized.
NFPA 70E Part II 2.1.1.1 Electrical equipment and lines should be considered energized unless
put in an electrically safe work condition (i.e., locked/tagged/tried,
tested and grounded in accordance with Sections 5.9 and 5.10).
All test equipment used should be approved by Location
Management.
All tools and/or handling equipment that might make contact with
live parts should be insulated and of an approved design.
NESC 420E (modified) Non current-carrying metal parts, such as transformer cases or circuit
breaker housings, are considered energized to the highest voltage to
which they are exposed until they are known by test to be totally free
of voltage, or unless they are grounded by an equipment grounding
conductor.
NFPA 70E Part II 2-3.5 While working within reach of live parts, the employee should
OSHA 1910.333(c)(8) remove all jewelry and similar conductive apparel if such articles
OSHA 1910.269(l)(6) may inadvertently contact the live parts.
OSHA 1910.269(l)(7) When fuses are installed or removed with one or more terminals
NESC 420N within the enclosure energized at more than 300 volts or with
NFPA 70E Part II 3-3.9.1 exposed parts energized at more than 50 volts, tools and gloves rated
for the voltage should be used.
Only open devices designed to interrupt load current, if the circuit is
under load. Test for the absence of load current when opening devices
not designed to interrupt load.
When work is performed in the proximity of covered (non-insulated)
wires, the work should proceed utilizing the same precautions as
when working with live parts.
Best Practice If repair work (see definition of “Working On (Live Parts)” in Section
OSHA 1910.269(l)(1)(ii) 3.0 Definitions) occurs inside the limited approach boundary and a
shock hazard exists, two employees must be present. One of the two
must be “qualified” and the other either “qualified” or “authorized”.

5.1.2 Exceptions to General Policies

All exceptions, other than those listed below, should be approved by NFPA 70E Part II 2-1.1.1
the Location Manager or his or her designee and require a written Note 1 and 2
documented plan. OSHA 1910.269(o)(1)(note)
1. A qualified employee may perform the following simple jobs:

– Use glow sticks or other high voltage detectors.
– Attach grounds.
– Perform high voltage phasing.
– Take voltage readings.
– Use hot sticks for switching operations.
2. Electrical servicing activities (maintenance troubleshooting and
diagnostic testing) that must be performed on energized
electrical equipment require the worker to take special
precautions. Such activities covered by this practice include:
– Voltage phasing.
– Preventive maintenance observations and meter checks.
– System component adjustment.
– Voltage readings.
– Troubleshooting
– Re-setting device overloads.
When these activities listed as exceptions place the worker in close NFPA 70E Part II 2-1.3.2
proximity to live parts, appropriate personal protective equipment OSHA 1910.269(l)(2)(i-iii),
(PPE) should be utilized. Such PPE, in addition to the minimum basic (L)(6)(i-iii)
PPE requirements for electrical personnel, may include:
• Face shield or flash hood.
• Insulating gloves with leather protectors.
• Flame resistant clothing or flash suit.
The Location Management is responsible for approving the PPE
selection for such activities.
5.1.3 Requirements for Live Parts Work

Before starting any construction work or maintenance work requires NFPA 70E Part II 2-1.1.1
activities, other than the exceptions in Section 5.1.2, that will place OSHA 1910.333(a)(1)
the worker(s) in close proximity to live parts:
• the electrical equipment should be totally de-energized; or
• the work area should be barriered, as appropriate, and insulated.
The decision to barrier and insulate instead of de-energizing should
be made by the Task Supervisor or PIC and approved by the Location
Manager or his or her Designee.

OSHA 1910.269(l)(1) Only persons qualified in the techniques required to work on live
parts should do this work. Safety conditions outlined in this practice
should be utilized for all work on or near live parts.
NFPA 70E Part II 2.3.8 When persons qualified for live part work must do work on live parts,
OSHA 1910.333(a)(2) and they should insulate and use barriers, as appropriate.
(c)(2)
OSHA 1910.269(l)(2)(i-iii)
and(l)(3)
NFPA 70E Part II To cross the prohibited approach boundary and enter the prohibited
Appendix A, A-1.2.2 - space is considered the same as making contact with live parts. Any
A-1.2.4 work on live parts should utilize the procedures defined under
“Working Inside the Prohibited Approach Boundary” (see
Appendix B, item D).
5.2 Working On or Near Energized Equipment
5.2.1 Hazards
Two primary hazards to consider when working on or near energized
equipment are:
• Flash hazard (relates to the thermal energy of an electrical arc).
• Shock hazard.
The following are examples of activities that could create an
electrical arc:
• Doing any switching with doors open on switchgear or motor
starters.
• Installing or removing circuit breakers or motor starter
contactors with the switchgear bus energized.
• Working on motor control centers with open doors (unless the
power components at 480 or 600 volts are well guarded) or when
removing or installing starters.
• Installing or removing safety grounds.
• Taking voltage measurements.
• Working on live parts.
NFPA 70E Part II 2-1.3.3 5.2.2 Flash Hazard Analysis and Arc Flash Protective
Equipment
Flash hazard analysis should be done before a person approaches any
exposed electrical conductor or circuit part that has not been placed in
an electrically safe work condition.
OSHA 1910.269(l)(6)(i-iii) Establish a flash protection boundary and require that all personnel
crossing the boundary wear appropriate arc flash protective
equipment. This will provide protection from vaporized metal, arc
radiation, or hot gases should an arc flash occur on the equipment.

The size of the flash protection boundary is determined by:

• The size of the source transformer or the available short-circuit
MVA.
• The clearing time of the protective device (fuse or circuit
breaker) upstream.
Refer to NFPA 70E-2000, Part II Section 2-1.3.3.2 to determine the
flash protection boundary for a particular application.
Note: See Appendix D, sample calculation of flash protection
boundary. The flash protection boundary may be calculated by using
the formulas in Appendix D.
5.2.3 Approach Distances

The approach distance to live parts varies depending on a person’s NFPA 70E Part II 2-1.3.4
status: OSHA 1910.269(l)(2)
(Table A-6)
• “Affected” persons (persons who are not “authorized” or OSHA 1910.333(c)(3)(i-ii)
“qualified”) should adhere to the limited approach boundary (Table 5-5)
(10-Foot Rule) and not encroach on this distance from a live part.
• “Authorized” persons, who are specifically trained for a task,
may work inside the limited approach boundary but should never
be allowed to work as close as the restricted approach boundary
allowed for a qualified employee, as shown in Appendix A,
Table A-6.
• “Qualified” persons may work up to the restricted approach
boundary distances listed in Table A-6. If a person is working
near the restricted approach boundary for an extended period of
time, it is recommended that special precautions such as
insulating and barricading be used.
A covered conductor is considered to have no insulating strength
whatsoever and should be treated as a non-insulated, live part for the
purpose of determining approach distance.
Note: Refer to Appendix B - Limits of Approach.
5.2.4 Working on Live Parts

Only persons qualified in the techniques required to work on live OSHA 1910.269(l)(1)
parts should be utilized for this work. When such a person must work OSHA 1910.333(c)(2)
on live parts, he or she should insulate and use barriers, as NFPA 70E Part II 2-1.3.4
Appendix A A-1-2, A-1-2.3
appropriate.
Any work on live parts should follow the procedures defined in
“Working Inside the Prohibited Approach Boundary” (see
Appendix B, item D).
Crossing the prohibited approach boundary and entering the
prohibited space is considered the same as making contact with live
parts.

5.2.5 Insulated Armored High Voltage Cable

The 10-Foot Rule does not apply to armored insulated High Voltage
Cable. Work activities may be performed adjacent to this type of
cable while it is energized.
However, this type of cable should not be disturbed or moved while it
is energized without a documented plan approved by the Location
Manager or his or her designee.
5.2.6 Insulated Non-Armored High Voltage Cable

This type of cable does not have the added protection of armor and
the integrity of the insulation should be considered. The approval of
the Location Manager or his or her designee and a documented plan
is recommended before work activities may be performed within
10 feet of this type of cable while it is energized.
This type of cable should not be disturbed or moved while it is
energized.
Exception: Insulated armored and non-armored high voltage cables
may be moved during special applications such as mining dragline
and other moveable substation cables, ship unloader cable reels and
equivalent applications for mobile equipment.
5.2.7 Procedures for Climbing Structures While Working On or

Near Live Parts
OSHA 1910.269(g)(2) and Fall prevention/protection should be used anytime an employee is
Part 1926, subpart E working 6 feet (180 cm) or more above the ground. Use the following
precautions as well as those in the facility’s fall protection program:
• All small equipment and tools to be used aloft should be raised
and lowered using a handline, a canvas bucket or other suitable
container.
• Employees working overhead should take precautions to prevent
tools or material from dropping and falling.
• Employees on the ground should stay clear of overhead work to
reduce the potential of being struck by falling objects.
5.2.8 Live Parts Operating at 50 Volts or More

NFPA 70E Part II 2-1.1.1 Electric lines and equipment should be considered energized unless
they have been put in an electrically safe work condition, i.e., locked
out or tagged out, tested for the absence of voltage, and grounded as
required in this practice. Operating voltages of equipment and lines
should be determined before work is done on or near energized parts.
Only qualified employees may work on, near, or in an area where live
parts operate at 50 volts or more.

Two qualified employees should be present to perform the following OSHA 1910.269(l)(1)(i)
types of work:
• Installation, removal, or repair of lines that are energized at more
than 600 volts.
• Installation, removal, or repair of de-energized lines if there is
exposure to contact with other parts energized at more than 600
volts.
• Installation, removal, or repair of any other equipment if the
employee is exposed to parts energized at more than 600 volts.
• Work that uses mechanical equipment (other than insulated aerial
lifts) near parts energized at more than 600 volts.
Two qualified employees do not need to be present to perform the OSHA 1910.269(l)(1)(ii)
following work functions:
• Routine switching if employer verifies that site conditions allow
this function to be performed safely.
• Work using live-line tools, as long as the employee cannot make
contact with live parts through inadvertent reach.
• Emergency repairs to the extent necessary to safeguard the
general public.
5.2.9 Insulating the Worker from Live Parts

Unless an approved insulating handle is used, no employees may NFPA 70E Part II 2-1.3.4
approach or take any conductive object closer to live parts than the OSHA 1910.269(l)(2)
distances shown in Appendix A, Table A-6, except when:
• The employee is insulated from the energized part (insulating
gloves or insulating gloves and sleeves, rated for the voltage, are
considered to be insulation of the employee only from the
energized part upon which work is being performed);
OR
• The energized part is insulated from the employee and any other
conductive object at a different potential;
OR
• The employee is insulated from any other exposed conductive
objects at a different potential.
If insulating gloves are used to insulate the employee from the live OSHA 1910.269(l)(3)
parts, insulating sleeves should also be used. However, sleeves are
not required for the following conditions:
• If live parts are insulated from the employee and these parts are
not being worked upon;
AND
• If the insulation is placed without exposure to the employee’s
upper arms or to other exposed parts.

OSHA 1910.333(c)(4) Employees may not enter any space that contains live parts unless
NFPA 70E Part II 2-3.4 adequate illumination is provided.
The employer should ensure that, to the extent that other safety-
related conditions permit, the employee works in a position so that a
slip or shock will not bring the employee into contact with live parts.
NFPA 70E Part II 2-3.10 When an employee works in a confined or an enclosed space that
OSHA 1910.333(c)(5) contains live parts, insulating materials such as protective shields or
barriers should be used to prevent inadvertent contact.
5.2.10 Working On or Near Installations Not Related to Power

Generation, Transmission and Distribution -- Insulated
Tools and Insulating Gloves
NFPA 70E Part II 2-3.7 The following applies to working on or near live parts in installations
OSHA 1910.335(a)(2) not related to power generation, transmission, and distribution:
• Employees should use insulated tools or handling equipment if
the tools or handling equipment might make contact with such
conductors or parts.
• Tools used should be rated for the voltage involved.
Commercially available insulated hand tools (pliers,
screwdrivers) are typically rated up to 1000 volts ac.
NFPA 70E Part II 3-3.6, and • Employees should wear insulated gloves with leather protectors.
3-3.9.1
Exception: If working on live parts of circuits or systems rated
51 through 300 volts (phase-to-phase), insulating rubber gloves
are not required when all of the following conditions are
satisfied:
– Fine dexterity is necessary for the task.
– Any insulated hand tools, test instruments and equipment,
test probes, test clips, and test leads required for the task are
visually inspected for external defects and damage prior to
each use.
– The work on the live parts does not expose the worker to
accidental contact with other live parts in the vicinity of the
task.
– Leather gloves are used if necessary for arc flash protection
Note: This exception does not apply to working on 277 volt
phase-to-neutral circuits, since the system phase-to-phase
voltage rating is 480 volts (480Y/277 volts, three-phase,
four-wire).

5.3 Equipment/Line Status
5.3.1 Basic Rule

Electrical equipment and lines should be considered energized until NFPA 70E Part II 2-1.1.1
put in an electrically safe work condition, i.e., disconnected from OSHA 1910.269(l)(1)
energized parts, tested, locked out and/or tagged out, and grounded in OSHA 1910.333(a)(1)
accordance with Section 5.9.
5.3.2 Proper Work Environment

The preferred approach is to “de-energize”.
Equipment to be worked on should normally be tested, de-energized,
locked out and tagged out according to established practices.
While low voltages do not typically require the formalized
procedures and written switching instructions required for high
voltage work, a disciplined, thought-through procedure should be
followed.
If the work to be done is extensive and complex, a formal written
switching order should be followed to de-energize and lockout the
equipment.
Identify all potential voltage sources and make plans to positively NFPA 70E Part II 2-1.1.3
control all conductors and isolating devices. Additionally:
• Determine all possible voltage sources; check all drawings,
diagrams, identification tags, etc.
• Interview individuals familiar with the facility.
• Interrupt all load current and then open isolation devices.
• Where possible, visually verify open disconnects.
• Apply lockout/tagout devices according to procedure.
• Use voltage detection devices adequately rated for the situation
and determine that the voltage detector is operating properly
before and after each test.
• Apply ground connection devices rated for the available short
circuit duty where:
– conductors could become energized;
– induced or stored energy could exist; or
– if the de-energized conductors could become contacted by
energized conductors.

5.3.3 Testing and Verification Techniques for Isolation

NFPA 70E Part II 2-1.1.3(e) Consider all circuits energized until a voltage test positively verifies
NFPA 70E Part II 2-1.1.3(a) them as de-energized. Use the “test before touch” concept.
Recognize that once no voltage is verified, voltage can reappear on a
de-energized system. For example:
• Backfeeds from voltage transformers or control power
transformers.
• Undocumented alternate sources.
• Missed lockouts.
• Equipment not operating at the time of test.
• Lightning.
• Induced voltage.
• Energized line contacting a de-energized line.
• Insulation failure.
The following testing and verification techniques are recommended:
• Test for absence of voltage on molded-case circuit breakers
(1000 volts and less) since they cannot be visually verified.
Caution: Test for voltage both phase-to-ground and phase-to-
phase.
• Purchase panel boards (1000 volts and less) pre-equipped with
locking devices and use these devices for lock out.
• Remove fuses from low-voltage switches that have covered
blades, if applicable, after verifying there is no voltage.
NFPA 70E Part II 2-1.1.3(c) • Withdraw draw-out circuit breakers to the farthest position in the
cubicle (with the line and load stabs disconnected) and
completely remove the circuit breaker if a ground-and-test
device will be applied.
• Open isolation disconnects on circuit breakers within open-air
switchyards. Remove any fuses for additional isolation.
OSHA 1910.269(x) “Energy • Do not rely on control circuit isolation for lock out purposes.
isolating device” Provide primary circuit isolation on circuit breakers and motor
starters (i.e., withdraw, or “rack out,” circuit breakers or open
disconnect switches).

5.4 De-energizing/Re-energizing Lines and Equipment for

Employee Protections
5.4.1 De-energizing Lines and Equipment NFPA 70E Part II 2-1.1.3
Verify an electrically safe work condition using the following

process:
• Determine all possible sources of electrical supply to the specific
equipment. Check applicable up-to-date drawings, diagrams, and
identification tags.
• After properly interrupting the load current, open the
disconnecting device(s) for each source.
• Where it is possible, visually verify that all the blades of the
disconnecting devices are fully open or that drawout-type circuit
breakers are withdrawn to the fully disconnected position.
• Apply lockout/tagout devices in accordance with a documented
and established policy.
• Use an adequately-rated voltage detector to test each phase
conductor or circuit part to verify they are de-energized. Before
and after each test, determine that the voltage detector is
operating satisfactorily.
• Where the possibility of induced voltages or stored electrical
energy exists, ground the phase conductors or circuit parts before
touching them.
• Where it could be reasonably anticipated that the conductors or
circuit parts being de-energized could contact other exposed
energized conductors or circuit parts, apply ground-connecting
devices rated for the available fault duty.
• Establish a work zone in accordance with Section 5.8.
5.4.2 Re-energizing Lines and Equipment OSHA 1910.269(m)(3)(xiii)
OSHA 1910.269(m)(3)(x)
Prior to re-energizing lines and equipment, complete the following OSHA 1910.333(b)(2)(v)
steps:
• Remove all protective grounds.
Caution: Grounds left on equipment when re-energized present a
short circuit hazard. A positive method of control should be used
to assure removal before re-energizing (tags, leaving doors or
covers open, leaving the ground cables clearly visible, use of
magnetic ground signs, etc.).
• Remove all personal safety locks and tags from points of
disconnect.
• Clear all employees from the lines and equipment.
• Re-energize lines and equipment following the facility’s
procedures.

5.5 Power System Switching Procedures
5.5.1 Preparation
Best Practice Written Switching Order
A written switching order is recommended before any switching is
performed on the high voltage distribution power system (this does
not include switching of individual motors). The switching order
should be:
• Written by a qualified employee.
• Reviewed by at least one other qualified employee.
• Signed and dated by both people before it is used.
Best Practice Job Briefing for Switching Procedures
Before starting any switching, hold a job briefing. The person in
charge of the switching order and all employees involved in the
switching should attend.
At a minimum, review the following items:
• Reason switching is being performed.
• One line drawing and/or power system status board to assure that
all involved understand what will occur.
• Each step of the switching order.
• The job assignments for all involved (who will do what).
• Safety issues and required PPE.
• If required:
– Electrical clearance requirements and/or Lockout/tagout
issues.
– Location of safety grounds - to be installed or removed and
by whom.
– Other issues (such as operational limitations).
Best Practice 5.5.2 During Switching
During switching, follow the written switching order in the order in
which the steps are written, check off each switching step when
completed, and record the time of completion.
The following switching procedures are recommended:
• The person receiving a switching command should repeat the
switching command and have it confirmed by the person issuing
the order before executing the command.
• If switching commands are given by radio, use a unique
switching channel. Cross talk on the radio during switching
could cause a switching error.

• When the switching is complete, document the status of the

power system. Use of a status board or pin board is one method
of accomplishing this.
• Document information on power system abnormalities in order
to inform off-shift personnel who may be involved in responding
to power system problems. Post this information near a power
system status board or pin board.
• Post any issues involving open electrical clearances (or parts of
the power system under lockout/tagout), the location of any
safety grounds, and other power system safety issues near the
power system status board or pin board.
• A second person should stand clear and be a safety observer for
the person doing the switching. The safety observer should
ensure that each step the switch operator is about to perform is
correct.
5.5.3 Job Briefings Prior to New Installations/Modifications NFPA 70E Part II 2-3.1.6
OSHA 1910.269(c)(1, 2, 3)
The PIC should conduct a job briefing before starting work on new
installations and modifications to existing installations.
Conduct at least one job briefing before the start of each shift. Hold
additional job briefings if changes occur during the course of the
work that could affect personnel safety.
The job briefing includes the following at a minimum:
• Hazards associated with the job.
• Work procedures involved.
• Special precautions.
• Energy source controls.
• Personal protective equipment requirements.
• Work zones.
During the job briefing, each person involved should ask himself or
herself the following questions prior to starting the task:
• Do I thoroughly understand the job?
• Do I thoroughly understand my role and everyone else’s role in
the job?
• Am I aware of all the hazards I may possibly encounter?
• Am I knowledgeable about all safety rules and required personal
protective equipment applicable to this job?
• Do I have safeguards in place to protect me from unexpected
events?

A brief discussion is satisfactory if the work involved is routine and if

the employee, by virtue of training and experience, can reasonably be
expected to recognize and avoid the hazards involved in the job.
A more extensive discussion is needed:
• If the work is complicated or particularly hazardous, or
• If the employee (qualified or unqualified) cannot be expected to
recognize and avoid the hazards involved in the job.
As work progresses during the day after the initial job briefing, a
person working alone should plan and review his or her work as if a
briefing were held before each task.
Refer to the Job Briefing Checklist in Appendix G.
OSHA 1910.269(g) subpart I 5.6 Personal Protective Equipment
OSHA 1910.132-138
OSHA 1910.335 The following personal protective equipment is recommended for
NFPA 70E Part II 3-1 and protection from arc-flash and shock hazards. Specific personal
Table 3-3.8 protective equipment requirements will be designated during the job
briefing before start of each job. (See the “Hazard Risk Category
Classifications” table in Appendix C.)
OSHA 1910.269(l)(6)(iii) 5.6.1 Clothing/Apparel
NFPA 70E Part II 3-3.5,
3-3.9.1, 3-3.9.2 The employer should ensure that employees who are exposed to live
parts are trained in the hazards of arcs and flames of arcs.
A flash hazard analysis (or application of the tables from
Appendix C) is recommended before a person approaches an exposed
electrical conductor or circuit part that has not been placed in an
electrically safe work condition.
OSHA 1910.269(l)(6)(iii) and It has been demonstrated that wearing flame-resistant clothing (long
note sleeves and long pants) may reduce the severity of burns if an
NFPA 70E Part II 3-3.9.8, electrical flash occurs. Materials that melt, such as acetate, nylon,
3-3.9.7.1
NFPA 70E Part II 2-3.5
polyester, polypropylene, and spandex, either alone or in blends, are
not permitted if these materials will melt into the skin when exposed
to high temperatures and aggravate the burn injury.
Note: Fiber blends that contain materials that melt, such as acetate,
nylon, polyester, polypropylene, and spandex are permitted if such
blends in fabrics meet the requirements of ASTM F1506, and if such
blends in fabrics do not exhibit evidence of a melting and sticking
hazard during arc testing according to ASTM F1959.
Meltable fibers such as acetate, nylon, polyester, spandex, and
polypropylene should not be used in fabric underlayers (underwear)
next to the skin.

Note: Garments worn as underlayers that neither ignite nor melt and
drip in the course of an exposure to electric arc and related thermal
hazards may provide additional thermal protection. An incidental
amount of elastic used on non-melting-fabric underwear or socks is
permitted.
The employer must ensure that conductive articles are not worn in OSHA 1910.269(l)(6)
close proximity or within reaching distance of live parts. This
includes such items as rings, metal watchbands, unrestrained metal-
framed eyewear, metal dangling jewelry and key chains.
5.6.2 Head Protection NFPA 70E Part II 3-3.3
OSHA 1910.335(a)(1)(iv)
Wear Class E hard hats when working in near proximity to energized
or potentially energized conductors or non-insulated, exposed
equipment parts (See ANSI Z89.1).
Keep hard hats clean and in good condition and do not alter them in
any manner, except for the addition of company-approved markings.
5.6.3 Eye Protection NFPA 70E Part II 3-3.4
OSHA 1910.335(a)(1)(v)
Wear approved safety glasses with non-conductive sideshields at all
times when working with or in close proximity to potentially
energized conductors or exposed non-insulated parts. (See ANSI
Z87.1).
Goggles and/or face shields may also be needed for the task.
5.6.4 Hand Protection

Wear leather gloves for arc-flash protection when insulating rubber
gloves are not applicable.
Always use insulating rubber gloves with leather protectors (when NFPA 70E Part II 3-3.5
required for shock protection): ASTM D 120
• When working on energized, or potentially energized,

conductors or equipment.
• As an added means of protection any time while using live-line NFPA 70E Part II 3-3.9.5.3
tools or test probes.
• During the installation or removal of safety grounds.
Exception: If working on live parts of circuits or systems rated 51 Best Practice
through 300 volts (phase-to-phase), insulating rubber gloves may
not be needed when all of the following conditions are satisfied:
– Fine dexterity is necessary for the task.
– Any insulated hand tools, test instruments and equipment,
test probes, test clips, and test leads required for the task are
visually inspected for external defects and damage prior to
each use.

– The work on the live parts does not expose the worker to
accidental contact with other live parts in the vicinity of the
task.
– Leather gloves are used if necessary for arc flash protection.
Note: This exception does not apply to working on 277 volt phase-to-
neutral circuits, since the system phase-to-phase voltage rating is 480
volts (480Y/277 volts, three-phase, four-wire).
OSHA 1910.137(b)(2)(viii) Only use gloves that have been dielectrically tested within the
previous six (6) months. (ref. ASTM F496)
ASTM F496 Inspect and air test gloves before each use and immediately following
any incident that can reasonably be suspected as having caused
damage. Air testing is performed by trapping air in the glove and
examining for pin hole or other apparent leakage. (See Appendix K.)
Store gloves in an approved glove bag or an equivalent protective
location. If possible, store gloves with the cuffs down.
Do not exceed the rating on the glove.
Figure 1 Insulating Rubber Gloves
Maximum Use
Class Test Voltage (AC)
Voltage (AC)
00 500 volts 2,500 volts
0 1,000 volts 5,000 volts
1 7,500 volts 10,000 volts
2 17,000 volts 20,000 volts
3 26,500 volts 30,000 volts
4 36,000 volts 40,000 volts
NFPA 70E Part II 3-4.1.2 5.7 Tools

ASTM F711
OSHA 1910.269(j) 5.7.1 Live-line Tools
Store live-line tools in a clean and dry location. Live-line tools should
not be placed on the ground.
Wipe clean each live-line tool and visually inspect for defects before
use each day.
If, after wiping, the tool has contaminants that could affect its
insulating qualities or if its mechanical integrity is questionable,
remove the tool from service and have it repaired.
Following repair, retest the tool using the testing program procedures
described below.

Testing Procedure OSHA 1910.269(j)(2)(iii)
Remove each live-line tool from service at least every two years and
give it the following examination and tests:
• Thoroughly examine the tool for defects.
• If defects or contaminants that could affect the insulating
qualities or mechanical integrity of the tool are found, the tool
may be repaired and refinished or permanently removed from
service.
• If no defects are detected and no contaminants found, clean and
wax the tool using only a wax approved for live-line tools.
• Use a test method that tests the entire working length of the tool.
• Tools made of fiberglass-reinforced plastic should be tested with
wet conditions applied over the entire working length of the tool.
• If the tool is made of fiberglass-reinforced plastic (FRP), the test OSHA 1910.269(j)(1)(i)
consists of applying 100,000 volts per foot (30 cm) of length for IEEE Std. 978
5 minutes. (ref. IEEE 978)
• Other high voltage tests are acceptable if the employer can
demonstrate that these are equivalent (such as IEEE Std. 978-
1984).
5.7.2 Cord-connected Hand and Portable Power Tools

Use ground fault circuit interrupters when using cord connected Best Practice
portable power tools or other cord connected equipment. NFPA 70E Part II 4-3.4
Visually inspect cord-connected portable power tools, extension NFPA 70E Part II 4-3.3
cords, and other cord-connected equipment before each use.
Periodically inspect all extension cords.
Observe the following precautions for any cord- and plug-connected NFPA 70E Part II 4-3.1
equipment not supplied by premises wiring:
• Use a tool equipped with a cord containing an equipment- OSHA 1910.269(i)(2)(ii)
grounding conductor connected to the tool frame and to a ground
at the other end (if the ground in the work environment increases
the hazard, it may be omitted);
OR
• Use a tool of the double-insulated type;
OR
• Use a tool connected to the power supply through an isolating
transformer with an ungrounded secondary.

Portable and vehicle-mounted generators being used to supply cord-

and plug-connected equipment should meet the following:
Best Practice • The generator frame should have a connection to ground (earth).
OSHA 1910.269(i)(3)
• The generator can supply only the equipment located on the
generator or vehicle and cord- and plug-connected equipment
through receptacles mounted on generator or vehicle.
• Bond the non-current-carrying metal parts of the equipment and
the equipment-grounding conductor terminals of the receptacles
to the generator frame.
• With vehicle-mounted generators, bond the frame of the
generator to the vehicle frame.
• Bond any neutral conductor to the generator frame.
Note: Portable generators may be used for temporary power to
switchgear and/or motor control centers.
5.7.3 Hydraulic and Pneumatic tools

OSHA 1910.269(i)(4) Observe the following precautions:
• Do not exceed safe operating pressures for hydraulic and
pneumatic tools, hoses, valves, pipes, filters, and fittings.
• Where a hydraulic or pneumatic tool may contact exposed live
parts, use a tool designed and maintained for such use.
• For a hydraulic system supplying a hydraulic tool that may
contact exposed live parts, provide protection against loss of
insulating value for the voltage involved due to formation of a
partial vacuum in the hydraulic line (35 feet or 1050 cm or more
elevation between reservoir and hose end, if there are no check
valves, promotes formation of a partial vacuum).
• Provide protection against moisture accumulation in the air
supply where a pneumatic tool is used on energized lines or
equipment or where it could contact exposed live parts.
• Assure that pressure is released before connections are broken,
unless quick acting, self-closing connectors are used. Do not
kink hoses.
• Employees may not use any part of their bodies to locate or
attempt to stop a hydraulic leak.
5.7.4 Ladders and Platforms

OSHA 1910.21 through 30 Use ladders and platforms that comply with Subpart D of 1910.
Ladders and platforms should be:
• Properly secured to prevent their dislodgement.
• Used only in applications for which they were designed.

• Capable of supporting without failure at least 2.5 times the

maximum working load.
• Non-conductive when used for electrical tasks.
Do not exceed the working load for which the ladder or platform was
designed.
5.8 Work Zone

Work zones may be needed to safeguard personnel from potential NFPA 70E Part II 3-4.8,
hazards. Use barricades in conjunction with safety signs to limit or 3-4.7, 2-1.3.5.2
prevent access to work areas where hazards may exist. OSHA 1910.269(l)(2),(u)(4),
(o)(3)
In some instances it is appropriate to barricade or otherwise identify a OSHA 1910.335(a)(2)(ii)

work area as containing electrical hazards not normally encountered and 1910.335(b)
during routine operation of the equipment and/or conductors located
therein. This would normally be the case during maintenance or
renovations to existing installations, and additions to installations
where electrical equipment and/or conductors are located.
Appropriate identification alerts employees of the hazards in their
work areas.
5.8.1 Electrical Hazard Barricade Tape/Rope

Electrical hazard barricade tape/rope is used as a temporary hazard Best Practice
warning.
• “Temporary” in this case means the duration of any work
assignment where there is an active effort to complete a
permanent installation and employee safety is not compromised
by hazards other than electrical (e.g., a falling hazard also exists).
• Red is the recommended color.
• The red tape should be imprinted with wording such as “Danger-
Do Not Enter.”
5.8.2 Area Protection

Areas Accessible to Qualified Employees Only
Qualified employees should do the following:
• Determine the size of the work zone.
• Consider the types and size of conductive materials and
equipment to be used in the area.
• Determine the limited approach boundary (Appendix A, Table
A-6).
• Determine the flash protection boundary.

• If the work exposes energized or moving parts that are normally

protected:
– Display danger signs.
– Erect suitable barricades to restrict other personnel from
entering the area.
When working in a restricted section that adjoins other such sections
(i.e., a portion of a substation, one section of switchgear, a row of
transformers or breakers, or one panel of a switchboard), a qualified
employee should:
• Mark the work area conspicuously.
• Place barriers to prevent accidental contact with live parts in
adjacent sections.
Note: Use designated work zones around “look alike” equipment.
Areas Accessible to Vehicular and Pedestrian Traffic
Where vehicles and non-qualified pedestrian traffic may pass
adjacent to electrical equipment that is under maintenance, operating,
or under construction and the safety of these vehicles and pedestrians
could be compromised, use appropriate warning signs and barricades.
5.8.3 Enclosed Spaces

NFPA 70E Part II These recommendations apply only to enclosed spaces, such as
NESC 423 manholes, unvented vaults, tunnels, etc., that can be entered by
employees. All other confined spaces as defined by OSHA are
covered by 29 CFR 1910.146 (OSHA regulations).
OSHA 1910.269(e) Ensure that the employee uses safe work practices for entry into and
OSHA 1910.146 work within enclosed spaces and for rescue of employees from such
places. If hazards remain after the precautions taken for enclosed
space are exercised or if the escape procedures cannot be met, follow
the permit-space or confined space requirements of 29 CFR
1910.146.
OSHA 1910.269(e)(2) Employees who enter enclosed spaces or serve as attendants should
be trained in the following:
• The hazards of enclosed space entry.
• Enclosed space entry procedures.
• Enclosed space rescue procedures.
Employees should be provided equipment to ensure prompt and safe
rescue.

Before removing any entrance cover to an enclosed space: OSHA 1910.269(e)(3),(e)(4)
• Check for atmospheric pressure and temperature differences

• Determine whether there is a hazardous atmosphere in the
enclosed space
• Eliminate any conditions that make it unsafe to remove the
cover.
After removing the cover to an enclosed space, guard the opening
with a railing or a temporary cover/barrier. Such precautions help
prevent an employee or objects from falling into the enclosed space
and causing injury.
Hazardous Atmosphere in an Enclosed Space
Before an employee enters the space: OSHA 1910.269(e)(9)
• Test the internal atmosphere for oxygen deficiency.

• Test the internal atmosphere for flammable gases and vapors.
For each test, use a direct-reading meter that can both collect and OSHA 1910.269(e)(8)
immediately analyze data samples, thus eliminating the need for off-
site evaluation. Keep all test equipment used to monitor atmosphere
in enclosed spaces calibrated properly.
Caution: Use only test devices approved as intrinsically safe.
Do not enter an enclosed space that contains a hazardous atmosphere OSHA 1910.146
(confined space hazardous atmosphere). See the requirements of 29
CFR 1910.146.
If, while work is being performed in the space, there is reason to OSHA 1910.269(e)(7)
believe that any hazard may exist in the space or that traffic may
cause a hazardous condition, an attendant with first aid training
should be immediately available to render emergency assistance. This
attendant may perform tasks outside the enclosed space.
If flammable gases or vapors are present above a safe level or an OSHA 1910.269(e)(11)
oxygen deficiency exists, use forced air ventilation to maintain a safe
level of oxygen and prevent the accumulation of flammable gases or
vapors from reaching a hazardous concentration.
If flammable gases or vapors are at a safe level, forced ventilation
may be waived, providing there is continuous monitoring to ensure
that there is no increase of either.
Continuous forced air ventilation should meet the following criteria: OSHA 1910.269(e)(12)
• It should be applied for a long enough period before workers are

allowed to enter the enclosed space. This will ensure that a safe
atmosphere exists.

• It should be directed to the employees’ immediate area.

• It should continue until all employees have left the enclosed
space.
The supply for the continuous forced air ventilation should come
from a clean source so that it does not contribute to the hazard in the
enclosed space.
Use of Open Flames in an Enclosed Space
If using open flames in the enclosed space, test for flammable gases
or vapors immediately before using the open flame device and at least
once each hour while the device is being used in the enclosed space.
If there is an indication that one-hour periods are insufficient, test
more frequently.
Note: Use local “Hot Work” procedures if open flames are used.
OSHA 1910.269(t) 5.8.4 Underground Electrical Facilities
OSHA 1910.269(t)(1),(t)(2), The following recommendations for work on underground electrical
(t)(3) installations in manholes and/or vaults are in addition to the
recommendations for enclosed spaces discussed above:
• Use ladders or other climbing devices to enter or exit manholes
or subsurface vaults that exceed 4 feet (122 cm) in depth.
• Do not use cables or hangers as steps to climb in or out of
manholes and vaults.
• Check equipment used to lower materials and tools for weight
support capabilities and defects before use.
• Stand clear of the area directly underneath openings while tools
or materials are lowered or raised.
• While work is being performed in a manhole/vault that contains
energized electric equipment:
– an employee capable of rendering emergency assistance
should be on duty in the immediate vicinity of the manhole
opening. Appropriate training for the attendant includes
CPR, first aid, hazards of enclosed space entry, enclosed
space entry procedures, and enclosed space rescue
procedures.
– all employees should be in constant communication. This
can consist of visual, voice, or signal line communication.
– an employee may enter if the nature of the visit does not
involve the energized cables or equipment but is for the
purpose of housekeeping, inspection, meter reading, or
similar activities. This is permitted only if all confined space
entry requirements are met and the task can be done safely.

• Provide rescue equipment at the worksite to ensure the prompt

and safe rescue of employees from the enclosed space. Rescue
equipment includes a mechanical device to retrieve personnel, a
full body harness (wristlets may be used in lieu of the harness),
and a retrieval line.
• If using pulling tapes, install them in the direction that presents OSHA 1910.269(t)(4)
the least amount of hazard to employees. Station an employee at
the far end of the duct line to ensure that required minimum
approach distances are maintained to protect employees.
• An energized, armored, insulated, high-voltage cable may be
moved only after the Location Manager or his or her designee
has approved a documented plan.
• An energized, insulated, low-voltage cable may be moved only
under the direct supervision of a qualified employee and while
using insulating gloves.
• Before proceeding, inspect any cable to be moved for defects,
using appropriate PPE. See Appendix C for PPE requirements.
Note: The special hazards of an arc-flash event in a confined space
should be considered before a task is planned. In general, cables
connected to a solidly-grounded power system represent a greater
arc-flash hazard than cables (especially single-conductor cables)
connected to a resistance-grounded power system.
• When multiple cables are present, exact identification is required
by electric means unless identification is obvious. Protect all
other cables not being worked on against damage.
• Maintain sheath continuity while work is performed on buried OSHA 1910.269(t)(8)
cable or on cables in manholes, or treat the sheath as energized.
Cables may be defective when any of the following abnormalities are OSHA 1910.269(t)(7)(note)
observed:
• Oil or compound leaking from cable or joints
• Broken cable sheaths
• Broken joint sleeves
• Hot surface temperatures
• Joints swollen beyond normal tolerances.
When any one of these conditions occurs, no employees are permitted
in the manhole while the cable is energized. However, if de-
energizing the cable is not possible, protect employees against
potential hazards by shields or barriers that are capable of containing
the adverse effects of a fault in the joint.
When cutting cable ground both ends where practical. Use a cable
penetrator tool (such as A. B. Chance Company’s catalog number
C600-1625) to penetrate the insulation at the point of the cut if the

cable cannot be visibly traced from the point of the cut to one of the
two ends.
5.8.5 Trenches and Excavation

OSHA 1910.269(f) Part Before starting any trenching and excavation, notify others having
1926, subpart P underground installations in the affected location.
OSHA 1926.652(a)(ii) Normal trenches or excavations less than 5 feet (1.52 m) deep do not
require a protection system if a competent person has determined
there is no cave-in potential.
Note: Safe trenching and excavation operations are covered in
29 CFR 1926.650, 1926.651 and 1926.652.
5.9 Lockout/Tagout
NFPA 70E Part II Chapter 5 This section applies to servicing and maintaining machines and
OSHA 1910.269(d) equipment where unexpected equipment startup or release of stored
OSHA 1910.147 energy could cause injury. (Reference 29 CFR1910.147).
NFPA 70E 5-1, 2-1.3.2 Conductors and parts of electric equipment that have been de-
energized but have not been locked out or tagged out in accordance
with this Practice are treated as energized parts. For information
about work on energized parts, see Section 5.2.
OSHA 1910.269(d)(8)(ii) When servicing is performed by a group of employees, procedures
OSHA 1910.269(d)(8)(ii)(A), should ensure a level of protection equal to that of individual lockout/
(B), (C), (D) tagout devices.
• Assign one authorized employee the primary responsibility for
the group.
• The designated authorized employee determines the exposure
status of individual group members.
• When more than one crew is involved, assign one authorized
employee the responsibility to coordinate affected groups and
ensure continuity of protection.
• Each person should install a personal lock and tag before start of
work on a machine or equipment. Each person then removes his
or her personal lock and tag at the end of work on a machine or
equipment.
OSHA 1910.269(d)(8)(iii) • During shift changes, procedures should be in place to ensure the
continuity of lockout/tagout protection. There should be an
orderly transfer of lockout/tagout devices between off-going and
on-coming employees.
The procedures in this section apply to exposure to electrical hazards
from work on, near, or with conductors or equipment in electric
utilization installations provided that:
• The procedures address electrical safety hazards.

• The procedures incorporate the following:

– A tag used without a lock should be supplemented with at
least one additional safety measure that provides safety
equivalent to that obtained by use of a lock (i.e., removing
an isolating circuit element, blocking a control switch, or
opening an extra disconnecting device).
– A qualified employee uses voltage test equipment to test
circuit elements and electrical parts of equipment to which
employees will be exposed and verifies that the circuits and
parts are de-energized. The test also determines whether a
hazard from induced voltage or voltage backfeed exists.
Check the voltage test equipment for proper operation
immediately before and immediately after this test.
5.9.1 General Industry Lockout/Tagout

Management should establish a program of energy control OSHA 1910.269(d)(2)
procedures, training, and periodic inspections to ensure that before an
employee services a machine or equipment, all potentially hazardous
energy sources are isolated and rendered inoperative.
If equipment is capable of being locked out, lock it out unless the OSHA 1910.269(d)(2)(ii)(B)
employer can demonstrate that tagout alone will provide full
employee protection.
If equipment is not capable of being locked out, tagout alone may be OSHA 1910.269(d)(2)(ii)(A)
used. However, when that equipment is modified or undergoes major
repair, retrofit the equipment to accept a lockout device.
If tagout only is utilized, use additional safety measures, such as OSHA 1910.269(d)(2)(ii)(B)
removal of an isolating element, blocking of a control switch, or (1 & 2)
removal of a valve handle to reduce the likelihood of inadvertent
energization. The employer should also demonstrate compliance with
all tagout related requirements.
5.9.2 Site Lockout/Tagout Procedures

Management should ensure the development of lockout/tagout OSHA 1910.269(d)(2)(iii)
procedures that include:
• A specific statement of the intended use of the procedure.
• Specific procedural steps for shutting down, isolating, blocking,
and securing machines or equipment.
• Specific procedural steps for the placement, removal, and
transfer of lockout or tagout devices and the responsibility for
them.
• Requirements for testing a machine or equipment to determine
and verify the effectiveness of lockout devices, tagout devices,
and other control measures.

OSHA 1910.269(d)(8)(iv) When contractors are involved in lockout/tagout, the on-site

employer and the contractor need to inform each other of their
respective procedures. Adhere strictly to agreed upon lockout/tagout
procedures.
The procedure for actual lockout/tagout is as follows:
• Only the authorized employees who will be servicing the
machine may lockout/tagout the equipment.
• Notify all affected employees in advance of applying or
removing lockout or tagout devices.
OSHA 1910.269(d)(6) • Shut down the machine in an orderly fashion using established
procedures.
• Locate all energy isolating devices and use them to isolate the
equipment from the energy source.
• Install locks to hold the energy isolating device in a “safe” or an
“off” position.
• Install tags to indicate that movement of energy isolating devices
from the “safe” or “off” position is prohibited.
– Where tagout devices are used with energy isolating devices
capable of being locked, affix the tag at the same point at
which a lock would have been attached.
– If the tag cannot be attached directly to the energy isolating
device, locate it as close as possible to the device, in a
position that will be immediately obvious to anyone trying
to operate the device.
OSHA 1910.269(d)(6) • Once lock and tag are in place, relieve all potentially hazardous
(v & vi) sources of stored energy. If stored energy can re-accumulate,
verify that the isolation shut down continues as long as
necessary.
OSHA 1910.269(j)(6)(vii) • Prior to servicing the machine, the authorized employee verifies
that the machine has been de-energized and put in an electrically
safe work condition.
OSHA1910.269(d)(8)(ii)(D) The lockout/tagout program should include a procedure where each
person installs his or her personal lock and tag before start of work
and removes his or her personal lock and tag when they complete
work. The use of “lock boxes” can be used for this purpose.
5.9.3 Lockout/Tagout Materials

OSHA 1910.269(d)(3)(i) Management should supply the lockout/tagout materials including
locks, tags, chains, wedges, key locks, or other hardware for
isolating, securing, or blocking equipment from energy sources.
OSHA 1910.269(d)(3)(ii) Lockout and tagout devices should have the following characteristics:
• Be capable of withstanding the environment to which they are
exposed.

• Be standardized in at least color, shape or size.

• Have provisions for identifying the person who applied the
devices.
• Lockout devices should be substantial enough to prevent
removal without excessive force.
• Tagout devices should be standardized print and format.
• Tagout devices should be substantial enough to prevent
inadvertent removal.
• Tags should warn against the hazardous conditions if re-
energized and include at least one of the following statements:
– Do not start.
– Do not open.
– Do not close.
– Do not energize.
– Do not operate.
5.9.4 Annual Inspections of Equipment Capable of Being

Locked Out or Tagged Out
Management should conduct annual inspections of all equipment NFPA 70E Part II 5-1.2.1
subject to lock out and tag out. OSHA 1910.269(d)(2)(v),
(d)(2)(v)(E)
Authorized employees other than those applying the lockout/tagout
devices should conduct the inspections.
Management should certify that the inspections have been performed
and should record all of the following:
• identity of the machine;
• date of inspection;
• employees included in the inspection; and
• name of the inspector.
Where lockout and tagout procedures are used, the annual inspection
should include a review of the procedures between each authorized
employee and the inspector responsible for monitoring the
employee’s responsibilities.
5.9.5 Removing Lockout/Tagout Devices

Prior to removing lockout/tagout devices and re-energizing the OSHA 1910.269(d)(7)
equipment, the authorized employee should do the following:
• Remove nonessential items from the work area.
• Ensure that all employees are safe.

• Notify affected employees that lockout/tagout devices are going

to be removed.
Only the employee who applied the lockout/tagout devices should
remove them.
OSHA 1910.269(d)(7)(iv) Exception: If the employee who applied the lockout/tagout devices is
(A, B & C) not available to remove them, the devices may be removed under the
direction of the employer by another employee if management:
– Verifies that the authorized employee who applied the
devices is not at the facility; AND
– Makes reasonable efforts to contact the employee who
applied the devices; AND
– Ensures that the authorized employee is informed of the
device removal before he or she resumes work.
Temporary Removal of Devices
OSHA 1910.269(d)(8) When lockout/tagout devices must be temporarily removed from the
machine for testing or positioning, follow these precaution:
• Clear equipment or process of nonessentials items.
• Ensure that all employees are removed from the area or are
safely positioned.
• Remove lockout/tagout devices.
• Energize and proceed with testing/positioning.
• De-energize equipment and re-apply lockout/tagout devices.
5.10 Grounding
NFPA 70E Part II Use approved clothing (see the Appendix C “Hazard Risk Category
Table 3-3.9.1 Classifications” table”), rubber gloves with protectors, hard hat, and
eye protection when testing for voltage and placing/removing
grounding devices.
NFPA 70E Part II 2-1.1.3(f), Use visible maintenance grounds (of adequate size to withstand the
3-4.2.2, 3-4.2.3 available short circuit current, see Appendix M) to assure that the
OSHA 1910.269(n)(4) conductors tested as de-energized remain safe.
ASTM F855
OSHA 1910.269(n) Caution: Grounds left on equipment when re-energized present a

“Grounding for the short circuit hazard. Use a positive method of control to assure
protection of employees” removal before re-energizing (tags, leaving doors or covers open,
leaving the ground cables clearly visible, use of magnetic ground
signs, etc.).
Apply grounds as if the circuit was energized. Insulated cables can
retain a capacitive charge and open wire lines can have induced
voltage—both represent a shock hazard.

Attach the conductor connected to the ground (of a grounding cluster)

first and remove it last.
Special Precautions
Disconnect all auxiliary devices, such as voltage transformers or
control power transformers, by removing all fuses (primary and
secondary) or by racking out.
Account for and remove all grounds prior to re-energizing.
Be aware of other voltage sources when isolating motor starter
circuits.
Remember that motor space heaters are usually supplied from
“foreign” voltage sources.
What Requires Grounding
Grounding should be required as final protection against backfeeds
on:
• All switchgear buses.
• All feeders from substations.
• All open wire lines.
Ground all motors equipped with power factor correction capacitors.
Ground all motor circuits above 600 volts before working on the
motor. Use a switchgear “ground and test device,” or connect grounds
at the load-side cable connections of the circuit breaker or starter.
Special Situation-Ungrounded Systems
Test for voltage both phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase before
applying grounds.
Cable Cutting
Ground both ends where practical. Use a cable penetrator tool (such
as A. B. Chance Company’s catalog number C600-1625) to penetrate
the insulation at the point of the cut if the cable cannot be visibly
traced from the point of the cut to one of the two ends.
5.10.1 Traditional Methods

This section describes a procedure for grounding transmission and
distribution lines and equipment.
• Prior to work on lines or equipment designated as de-energized, NFPA 70E Part II 2-1.1.1,
issue a “clearance” that all isolating points have been locked and 2.1.1.3(f)
tagged and appropriate safety grounds have been installed, as OSHA 1910.269(d)(2)
detailed in this section. (For exceptions, see Section 5.10.3,
below.)

OSHA 1910.269(n)(5) • Before any ground is installed, first test the lines or equipment
for absence of voltage unless a previously installed ground is
present.
• Before installing grounds, visually inspect the grounding
equipment to confirm the equipment’s integrity.
OSHA 1910.269(n)(3) • Install temporary protective grounding equipment at the work
NFPA 70E Part II 3-4.2.1 location.
• If installation of grounds at the work location is not feasible,
install grounds on each side of the work location, as close to the
work location as possible.
• Single-point grounding (equipotential grounding, see Section
5.10.2) is an acceptable means of grounding.
• Ground static capacitors (surge protection capacitors and power
factor correction capacitors) before work is done on them even if
there is no possibility of their becoming energized. Wait five
minutes between isolating the capacitor and applying the
grounds.
Caution: Grounds left on equipment when re-energized present a
short circuit hazard. Use a positive method of control to assure
removal before re-energizing (tags, leaving doors or covers open,
leaving the ground cables clearly visible, use of magnetic ground
signs, etc.).
Grounding Previously Energized Part
OSHA 1910.269(n)(6) Before grounding any previously energized part:
• First connect one end of the grounding device to an effective
ground.
• Next, test the previously energized parts for voltage.
• If the parts are free from voltage, the grounding may be
completed.
Using live-line tools, bring the grounding device into contact with the
previously energized part and securely attach it.
• If the test indicates that the parts are not free from voltage, DO
NOT attach the grounds to the part.
• Determine the source of the voltage to ensure that the presence of
this voltage does not prohibit completion of the grounding.
Removing Grounds
Grounds may be removed temporarily for testing. During the test
procedure, consider the previously grounded lines and equipment as
energized.

When removing grounds: OSHA 1910.269(m)(7)
• First remove the grounding devices from the de-energized parts

using live-line tools.
• Next, remove the connection to the ground.
Take extreme caution. If the connection to the ground is removed first
before the connection to the de-energized part, electric shock and
injury may result.
Protective Grounding Equipment
Protective grounding equipment should be capable of conducting the
maximum ground-fault current that could flow during the time
necessary to clear the fault. This equipment should have an ampacity
greater than, or equal to, that of no. 2/0 AWG copper. A larger
conductor size may be required for higher capacity systems.
An important characteristic of protective grounds is that the OSHA 1910.269(n)(4)
impedance to ground be low enough to guarantee prompt operation of NFPA 70E Part II 3-4.2.4
protective devices. This assures minimum exposure in case of
accidental line or equipment energization.
See Appendix M for information on grounding cable and jumper
ratings.
5.10.2 Equipotential Grounding

Equipotential grounding is a technique used in transmission and
distribution lines. Different methods include single-point, double-
point, remote double-point and personal grounding.
These grounding techniques require much skill. Before using these
methods, complete hands-on training and qualification.
Single-point grounding occurs when the employee connects all
three phases together with jumpers and then attaches the phases
through a single jumper to a cluster bar. The cluster bar is attached to
the pole below the worker’s feet. The cluster bar is connected by a
jumper to the neutral conductor, if available. If a ground fault should
occur, the employee will be at the same voltage as the lines and
current should not flow through his or her body.
Double-point grounding is necessary if work at the pole involves
breaking the circuit. It is necessary to ground sources that may come
from either direction. On both sides of the employee, the phases are
connected to each other, to the cluster bar below the worker’s feet,
and to the neutral.
Remote double-point grounding allows the employee more
movement between the jumper sets but offers less protection than
other methods. The grounds are connected to structures such as
towers on each side of the work location. In this case, fault current
would flow through the towers into the earth. With this method, it is

still possible to have potentially fatal current flow through the

worker’s body. It is not recommended unless additional safeguards
are taken (see Personal Grounding, below).
Personal grounding is where a jumper connects the conductor being
worked on to the cluster bar and to the neutral. These can be installed
quickly and may be used in addition to remote grounding when full
3-phase grounding at the work site is inappropriate.
Note: See Appendix K for figures that illustrate equipotential
grounding.
5.10.3 When Grounding is Impractical or Presents a Hazard

Exceptions to use of grounds:
• Grounding is impracticable.
• Grounding would present greater hazards.
• There is no possibility of contact with another energized source.
• Hazard of induced voltage is not present.
OSHA 1910.269(n)(2) If the employer can demonstrate that the installation of grounds is
impractical or presents a greater hazard, the lines or equipment may
be considered as de-energized if ALL of the following conditions are
met:
• Lines have been de-energized as specified in Section 5.4,
AND
• There is no possibility of contact with another energized source,
AND
• There is no possibility of induced voltage.
5.11 Mobile Equipment Operation
5.11.1 In General
OSHA 1910.269(p)(1)(i) Inspect the critical safety components of mechanical elevating and
rotating equipment before use on each shift. Check the lower and
upper controls to ensure they are functioning correctly. Follow the
manufacturer’s recommended checklist for the inspection.
OSHA 1910.269(p)(1)(ii) No vehicular equipment with an obstructed view to the rear can be
used for off-highway job sites unless one of the following provisions
is met:
• The vehicle has a reverse signal alarm louder than the
surrounding noise level
OR
• A designated employee signals that it is safe to make
movements.

Heavy equipment, with or without attachments, should have roll-over OSHA 1910.269(p)(1)(iv)
protection that meets the requirements of 29 CFR 1926, Subpart W.
Use lifting equipment within its maximum load rating. OSHA 1910.269(p)(3)
Zero clearance is allowable for insulated cable.

When a suspended load creates a hazard for any other employee, the OSHA 1910.269(p)(1)(iii)
mobile equipment operator may not leave his or her position at the
controls.
If a mobile equipment operator notices that operating the equipment OSHA 1910.269(p)(4)
may place it to within 10 feet (305 cm) of energized or potentially minimum approach distance
energized conductors or circuit parts of electrical equipment, he or
she should notify the appropriate Location Management and wait for
further safety instructions.
When potential exposure to electrical hazards can reasonably be
anticipated before the job assignment starts, notify contractors and
location employees before the mobile equipment is moved to the job
site. This notification is the responsibility of location personnel.
5.11.2 Outrigger-equipped Vehicles

Operate outrigger-equipped vehicles with outriggers extended and OSHA 1910.269(p)(2)
firmly set to provide stability.
Outriggers may not be retracted or extended beyond the clear view of
the operator unless all employees are outside the range of possible
equipment motion.
If the work area or terrain prohibits full use of outriggers, operate the
equipment according to the manufacturer’s specifications for
operation without outriggers.
5.11.3 Operator Training

Mobile equipment operators not qualified in electrical work need the
following training if their equipment has the potential of coming as
close as 10 feet (see the “Ten (10) Foot” Rule definition in Section
3.0) to energized lines or equipment:
• Training in the potential electrical shock hazards associated with
equipment operation under these conditions.
• Training in techniques for proper equipment grounding. OSHA 1910.269(p)(4)(iii)(c)
5.11.4 Operating Zone for Mobile Equipment OSHA 1910.269(p)(4)
A potential for electrical shock hazard exists when mobile equipment NFPA 70E Part II 2-2.5
is operated within the 10-Foot Rule area of energized, non-insulated,
high-voltage conductors or to energized, exposed, high voltage
current-carrying equipment parts (or to parts that have the potential
for becoming energized).
To help eliminate this risk, follow the safety recommendations below.

NFPA 70E Part II 2-2.5 Approach Distances

OSHA 1910.333(c)(3)(iii) • For lines and equipment energized at 50 kV or less, employees
may not bring materials or equipment closer than 10 feet (305
cm) to live parts. For more than 50 kV, the distance is 10 feet
plus 4 inches (10 cm) for every 10 kV over 50 kV.
OSHA 1910.269(p)(4)(iii) • Whenever it is possible that any part of a vehicle or its load could
(c)(4) violate the 10-Foot Rule by error, malfunctions, inadvertent
operation, or any other cause, ground the vehicle or barricade
around it.
OSHA 1910.269(p)(4)(ii) • If it is difficult for the operator to accurately determine the
distance between the equipment and the energized parts, assign
another person to observe the clearance and give timely warnings
when the minimum clearance distance is approached.
• It is generally recommended that no equipment or material be
hoisted over energized, non-insulated high voltage conductors or
equipment. Any exception to this policy should require approval
by the Location Manager or his or her designee. Submit a
documented plan for this type of work.
OSHA 1910.269(p)(4)(i) • When operating in close proximity to energized conductors or
circuit parts, inspect all mobile equipment in accordance with the
NFPA 70E Part II 2-2.5.1 section of this practice on inspection and testing of mechanized
(a-c)
equipment (Section 8.4). Properly ground or barricade this
OSHA 1910.333(c)(3)(iii)(c) equipment in accordance with the section on grounding mobile
equipment (Section 5.11.5).
• Post minimum approach distances on a plate of durable non-
conductive material so it is visible to the operator.
Mobile Equipment in Transit
If equipment is in transit with no load and the boom is lowered:
• For voltages less than 50 kV, observe a minimum clearance of
4 feet (122 cm).
• For voltages higher than 50 kV, increase the clearance 4 inches
(10 cm) for every 10 kV over that voltage.
• When visual conditions make it difficult for the operator to
maintain the desired clearance, designate a person to observe
clearance for the operator.
NFPA 70E Part II 2-2.5.1(a) Exception: An exception to this is where lines have been de-
OSHA 1910.333(c)(3)(iii) energized and visibly grounded or where insulating barriers have
been erected to prevent physical contact.

5.11.5 Grounding Mobile Equipment

Apply safety ground leads to mobile equipment as covered by this
section.
Materials
Ground leads should be not less than 2/0 flexible stranded copper
rubber-covered cable to provide physical strength. The cable jacket is
for mechanical protection of the conductor only.
Ground leads should be visually inspected for any type of damage or
wear before installing.
Methods
Only personnel trained in the proper grounding techniques should
attach/detach grounding sets.
Ground mobile equipment prior to raising a crane or derrick boom or
similar equipment.
On a vehicle, trailer, or other mobile equipment (i.e., cranes, line
trucks, and aerial lifts), make a connection from a suitable ground
plate or stud on the vehicle to the best ground available in the
immediate work area.
On distribution circuits, the “best ground” available is normally the
common neutral or ground grid system. The second choice is a tower
or other grounded structure. Only use a driven ground rod as a final
alternative. Instruct workers to stay clear of the driven ground
location. Use other protective means, such as barricades, as necessary
to avoid the “step potential” and “touch potential” hazards that may
occur around the driven rod during a ground fault.
The correct grounding sequence is to:
• First, attach the ground lead to the best available ground.
• Then attach the ground lead to the vehicle.
When removing grounds:
• Remove the ground device only after the crane, derrick boom, or
similar parts of the equipment have been removed from the
vicinity of the potentially energized conductors or equipment.
• First, detach the ground lead from the vehicle.
• Then detach the ground lead from the ground.

5.12 Infrared Testing
5.12.1 Safety Interlocks

NFPA 70E Part II 2-3.11 Safety interlock systems offer a high degree of personnel safety and
OSHA 1910.269(v)(1)(ii) should be utilized in all designs. Generally, do not bypass the
interlock system or otherwise render it inoperative while the
equipment is energized.
Where defeating safety interlocks is required, a temporary by-pass is
allowed only with approval of the switching authority.
Once testing is completed, restore the interlocking system to full
operable condition. Follow procedures for working inside the
restrictive approach boundary when it is necessary to defeat an
electrical safety interlock.
5.12.2 PPE for Infrared Testing

NFPA 70E Part II 2-1.3.3.3 When performing infrared testing on open high and low voltage
systems, workers should wear all of the following approved PPE:
• hard hats;
• safety glasses with side shields;
• approved clothing; and
• safety shoes.
When performing infrared testing on metal-clad, enclosed switchgear
that requires opening the enclosure (exposing energized high voltage
parts), workers should wear the following approved PPE:
• hard hats
• safety glasses with side shields
• approved clothing
• safety shoes
• leather gloves
• protective hood or face shield as appropriate for the task.
See Appendix C for information on dressing for the task.

6.0 NEW DESIGN, MODIFICATIONS AND

CONSTRUCTION
6.1 Equipment Design Considerations

Many equipment design elements are covered in ChevronTexaco’s
Safety in Designs manual. Design, operation, and maintenance
considerations for personnel safety relevant to electrical safety issues
might include the following:
• Separate low-energy circuits from circuits having a large arc
flash hazard.
• Apply current-limiting fuses, where appropriate, to reduce the
arc flash hazard.
• Purchase Motor Control Centers with guards covering internal
live parts above 120 volts.
• For portable equipment, use ground-fault circuit interrupters to
reduce shock hazards.
• The protective system design should include fast protection that
will clear faults as quickly as possible and reduce the arc
exposure time. Differential protection, with a total fault clearing
time of approximately 0.1 second, will greatly reduce arc
exposure and the probability of escalation to a more severe fault
involving two or more phases. Differential protection is
recommended for all switchgear operating at over 1000 volts.
• For all circuit breakers operating at over 1000 volts, specify
“remote closing and tripping” capability using either a plug-in
cord and control or a supervisory control panel switch (for
remote-operation). This will enable the operator to be outside of
the flash protection boundary while closing or tripping a circuit
breaker.
• For switchgear, specify closed-door and remotely operated
“racking” (insertion and removal) capability.
• For all electrical switchgear and control gear of all voltages,
specify insulated bus, which prevents or minimizes arc
propagation within the gear after the fault initiates and can
reduce the arc flash hazard.
Note: Insulated bus for equipment rated 1000 volts or above is the
equivalent of a “covered conductor” (See Section 3.0 Definitions.)
• Specify “grounding balls” (i.e., those manufactured by A. B.
Chance Company) on the load-side terminals of high-voltage
circuit breakers to facilitate the connection of safety grounds.

• For lighting circuits, 120 volt supply is recommended due to the

lower shock hazard to personnel, but other voltages, such as
230 volts or 277 volts, may be considered. (See Section 5.2.10
for use of insulating rubber gloves.)
• Allow adequate access and working space around equipment.
• Specify that all electrical disconnect devices have lockout
capability.
• Provide adequate lighting around electrical equipment.
6.2 Substations
Design and construct all new substations in accordance with national
and local codes and in such a manner as to afford maximum
protection of the public, qualified employees and non-qualified
employees.
When modifying existing substations, all efforts should be made to
upgrade the station to current practices.
When designing, modifying or constructing substations, follow these
recommendations:
• Always provide and maintain sufficient access and working
space.
• For all new or revised 600 volt to 38 kV distribution systems,
consider designs that have no accessible conductors and use
insulated cable and dead-front switchgear. (Generally, this
excludes incoming power feeds.)
• Connect all equipment and structures to a common ground grid.
• Draw-out-type breakers should be in the open position when
removed or inserted. The control circuit should also be blocked
or rendered inoperative if design permits.
• Locate all live parts, including the energized racks of static
capacitors, to provide personnel clearance in accordance with
Appendix A, Table A-1.
• Enclose substations that are not totally enclosed and that have
exposed, energized parts by fences at least seven feet
(2.1 meters) in height, with gates secured by suitable locks.
OSHA 1910.269(u)(3) • Ground all conductive fences around substations.
NESC 92E
• When fences are expanded or a section is removed, maintain the
grounding to prevent electrical shock hazards.
• Use bridging (bonding) conductors at all gates to ensure
electrical continuity to the fence on each side of the gate and to
the gate itself.

• Install substation auxiliary systems in such a fashion that they do

not require maintenance personnel to approach closely to any
non-insulated or unguarded, energized parts.
• Lighting and other auxiliary systems should not be installed on
poles or structures that would require maintenance personnel to
come in close proximity to high voltage, non-insulated lines and
equipment.
• Do not mount auxiliary equipment and services (area lighting,
P.A. systems, etc.) on or in close proximity to, substation/high-
voltage yard structures if such positioning will breach
dimensional clearance restrictions defined elsewhere in this
practice.
6.3 Guarding Live Parts OSHA 1910.269(u)(4)(i)
through (v)(5)
During the design phase or during modifications, follow the
recommendations below.
Guard all live parts operating at 50 volts or more against accidental
contact by locating them in one of the following:
• A cabinet or enclosure.
• A room or vault accessible to only qualified employees.
• A balcony or platform.
For systems exceeding 1000 volts, the above applies with the OSHA 1910.269(v)(4) and
following additions: (v)(5)
• Control access to metal-enclosed equipment with a lock.

• Exposed live parts should be accessible to qualified employees
only.
The following recommendations should be followed for the guarding Also see OSHA 1910.269
of all live parts: (u)(4)(i-v)
• Enclose energized parts installed in rooms and similar spaces

with fences, screens, or walls.
• Lock all entrances not guarded by an attendant.
• At the entrance to enclosures or spaces with live parts, display
signs warning unqualified personnel to keep out.
• Unqualified employees may not enter these rooms and spaces
while supply lines and equipment are energized.
• Place guards around all live parts that have voltages above
150 volts to ground and that have no insulation covering, unless
the location of these parts gives enough horizontal and vertical
clearance to prevent inadvertent contact.
• For protection of personnel and equipment, all live parts should
remain guarded during all functions except fuse replacement or
other needed access permitted to qualified personnel only.

• Put barriers in place when guards are removed to prevent

harmful contact.
• Covers or guards that must at any time be removed while the
parts they guard are energized, should be designed so that they
cannot readily be brought into contact with the energized parts.
NESC 443I 6.4 New Static Capacitor Banks
OSHA 1910.269(w)(1)
All new static capacitor banks should have a permanently installed
grounding switch that is key or mechanically interlocked with the
main line-disconnect switch that connects the capacitor bank to the
system. The interlock ensures that both the line disconnect and the
grounding switches are not closed at the same time.
Place conspicuous signage on all sides of the support frame
accessible to personnel, indicating that the capacitor bank frame is
energized.
NESC Part 2 6.5 Lines
Design and construct all new lines in accordance with national and
local codes and in such a manner as to afford maximum protection for
the safety of the public, qualified employees, and non-qualified
employees.
When modifications are made to existing lines, efforts should be
made to upgrade these lines to current practices.
NESC (See Appendix A of 6.5.1 Recommended Spacing and Dimensional Clearances
this document.)
The following are recommended clearances for lines:
• Electrical supply stations and substations, in accordance with
• Vertical clearance of wires, conductors and cables above ground,
rails, or water, in accordance with Appendix A, Table A-2.
• Lines adjacent to but not attached to buildings, clearances as
shown in Appendix A, Table A-3.
• Where multiple circuits are located on a common structure,
locate communication circuits below supply circuits. Locate
lower voltage circuits below higher voltage circuits. Clearances
should be as shown in Appendix A, Table A-4.
• Where conductors supported on different structures cross each
other, the recommended vertical clearances are as shown in

6.5.2 Design Considerations for Lines

The following are design considerations for lines:
• Give primary consideration to installing insulated cables for all
new or relocated distribution lines, if possible.
• Do not locate non-electrical equipment on electrical structures
that have non-insulated conductors unless the 10-Foot Rule is
observed.
• Do not design supply circuits that use the earth as a conductor for
any part of the circuit.
• Equip all guy wires with guy guards constructed from highly NESC 93C
visible material. Guys should also be grounded and properly
tensioned.
• Effectively ground all circuit-neutral conductors and non-
current-carrying parts of metal or metal reinforced supporting
structures.
• Lighting and other auxiliary systems should not be installed on
poles or structures that would require maintenance personnel to
come in close proximity to high voltage, non-insulated lines and
equipment.
• Install underground services in accordance with national and
local codes. Identify these services on drawings and mark the
area above them with signs.
• Do not mount auxiliary equipment and services (area lighting,
P.A. systems, etc.) on or in close proximity to, substation/high-
voltage yard structures if such positioning will breach
dimensional clearance restrictions defined elsewhere in this
practice.
6.5.3 Installing and Removing Overhead Lines OSHA 1910.269(q)(2)
The employer must confirm the structural capacity of elevated

structures such as poles and towers before they are subjected to the
stresses of climbing or the installation or removal of equipment. If
inadequate, brace or support the structure to prevent failure.
When poles are set, moved, or removed near overhead conductors, OSHA 1910.269(q)(1)(ii)
avoid direct contact between the pole and energized conductors. Wear
protective equipment or use insulated devices to handle poles. Do not
contact the pole with any non-insulated parts of the body.
Guard or place attendants at pole holes where employees are OSHA 1910.269(q)(1)(iv)
working.
Employ precautions during installation or removal of lines near OSHA 1910.269(q)(2)(i)
energized conductors or energized equipment, such as barriers or the
tension stringing method.

OSHA 1910.269(q)(2)(ii) Consider conductors, cables, pulling, and tensioning equipment

energized if the conductor being installed is close enough to
energized conductors that any of the following failures could energize
the installation tools or equipment.
• Failure of the tensioning equipment.
• Failure of the wire or cable being pulled.
• Failure of previously installed lines or equipment.
OSHA 1910.269(p)(4)(iii)(C) Ground vehicles to minimize touch potential and provide rapid
protective relay action to deenergize the lines if equipment failure or
other unexpected event causes the vehicle to come in contact with the
energized line.
Employees on poles or towers or in aerial lifts need not treat the
newly installed conductors as energized if grounds have been
installed on the conductors at the work site.
When a conductor carrying over 600 volts crosses an energized
conductor while being installed or removed, deactivate the automatic-
reclosing feature for the energized lines.
When installing lines parallel to existing energized lines, the
employer is responsible for determining whether or not the possibility
of induced hazardous voltage exists. Work as though the lines are
energized or apply the following rules:
OSHA 1910.269(q)(2)(iv) • Place grounds on each bare conductor so that no point is more
than two (2) miles (3.22 km) from a ground.
• Leave the grounds in place until the conductor installation is
completed between dead-ends.
• Remove grounds during the last phase of aerial clean up.
• Install grounds at each location where employees are working on
bare conductors and at all open dead-ends or catch off points or
on the next adjacent structure.
• When two bare conductors are being spliced, bond and ground
both connectors.
OSHA 1910.269(m)(6) and • When installing safety grounds to lines or equipment, make the
(m)(7) connection to ground first and then connect the other end of the
ground to the line or equipment using live-line tools and
insulated gloves.
• When removing safety grounds, use live-line tools and insulated
gloves. Remove the grounds from the line or equipment first,
then remove the grounds from the ground connection.
OSHA 1910.269(q)(2)(v-xi) Pulling and tensioning devices should be in safe operating condition
and should be leveled and aligned.
Do not exceed the load rating of all associated equipment, such as
stringing lines, pulling lines, conductor grips, rigging and hoists.

Replace or repair defective pulling lines and accessories.

Do not use conductor grips on wire rope, unless the grip is
specifically designed for this application.
Maintain reliable communications between the reel tender and the
pulling rig operator. Only operate the pulling rig when it is safe to do
so.
While a conductor or pulling line is in motion, do not permit
employees directly under overhead operations or on cross arms,
except as necessary to guide the stringing block or board over or
through the stringing sheave.
Observe the following requirements during tower and structure work:
• Do not allow an employee under the tower or structure while
work is in progress, except to assist employees working aloft.
• Use tag lines and other similar devices to position tower sections
being assembled, unless these devices present a greater hazard.
• Keep load lines fully attached until loads are safely secured.
• Except during emergency power restoration, discontinue work
when adverse weather conditions make the work unusually
hazardous.
6.6 Perimeter Fence Grounding OSHA 1910.269(u)(3)
NESC Sections 92E and
During modifications/construction, to minimize the shock hazard 93C6
associated with induced or impressed voltages on perimeter fences,
comply with the following recommendations:
• Where high voltage power lines cross over fences, ground the
fence at the point of crossing and at a distance not to exceed
150 feet (45 m) on either side.
• When fences run under or are parallel to high voltage power
lines, ground them at intervals not to exceed 150 feet (45 m).
• In the condition described in the two points above, bond any gate
or other opening by a buried bonding strap.
When using armored high voltage cables, the grounding practices
described in this section need not apply.
6.7 Pipelines, Conveyors, and Metal Structures

Where these items are parallel to, or pass under, high voltage power
lines, follow proper grounding design.
6.8 Signage
Signs are essential for conveying information regarding a potential
electrical shock hazard. They are also used to convey information
regarding operation and/or maintenance.

This section of the practice makes no attempt to describe all types of

signs, all locations where signs may be required, or all possible
lettering to be used. Use the references listed within this practice to
obtain the necessary information for sign requirements at your
location.
6.8.1 Design
Consider the following for signage requirements:
• Material — Make signs out of a durable material that is
appropriate for the anticipated environmental conditions and
expected length of exposure.
• Colors and shapes — Make the color and shape of the sign
consistent with regulatory and consensus practices requirements.
• Lettering — Use large and highly visible lettering and anticipate
dark or low-light situations.
• International symbols — Use internationally accepted symbols
as much as practicable.
6.8.2 Location
OSHA 1910.269(u)(4)(iii) At a minimum, place signs of warning/information as follows:
(v)(4)(iii)
• On all doors, gates, and fence locations for substations.
• On doors to switchgear rooms and on other similar
compartments where potentially energized exposed electrical
parts are located.
• On all transmission and/or distribution structures where
employee or public presence may be expected.
• In the case of multi-support structures, locate the signs on each
supporting member.
• Where a low-voltage bus is supplied from two or more sources
and presents a back-feed opportunity to the high-voltage system
(and an interlock system is not provided), conspicuously display
a sign that warns of this potential problem.
• If temporary alterations must be made to secondary load supply
systems in order to maintain power supply continuity at the
secondary voltage level (thus presenting a back-feed
opportunity), then conspicuously display a sign warning of this
potential problem until the need for the temporary alteration is
abated.
• At roadways or railways where horizontal or vertical clearance
from energized or potentially energized sources is minimal.
(Refer to Appendix A, Table A-2.)

• At all low profile electrical equipment installations where

physical distance requirements for employees and/or the
requirements for handling of conductive material cannot be met
or are marginal.
• At all overhead pipes, bridges, etc. where adjacent energized
electrical conductors and parts exhibit potential electrical shock
hazards to maintenance or construction personnel.
• Where inadvertent electrical contact is possible.
• On all equipment and devices subject to operation or
manipulation. Use large, prominent, and therefore easily read
lettering.
6.9 Equipment Labeling, Marking, and Identification
6.9.1 Equipment Operating at Over 600 volts, Nominal

Mark each cover or door behind which energized parts exist on
switchgear, unit substations, transformers, pullboxes, covers for
pullboxes, terminal and connection boxes, and motor starters with
“DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE - KEEP OUT”
Mark building services over 600 volts with “DANGER HIGH
VOLTAGE - KEEP OUT”
Mark the feeder or circuit number on the front and rear of permanent
structure of the switchgear or equipment, but not on removable
enclosure covers to the equipment.
6.9.2 Equipment Operating at 600 Volts or Less, Nominal

Mark entrances to guarded rooms or locations with warning signs
prohibiting entry by unqualified personnel.
6.9.3 Other
Indicate the voltage of exposed parts at outdoor switchgear or
transformer locations.
Identify disconnects that have no load interrupting or fault closing
rating with clear signs to prevent improper operation.
If a “backfeed” is possible, identify with a warning sign.
If there is an external or “foreign” voltage source, identify the source
with a warning sign.
Identify clearly all disconnect devices and the equipment with which
they are associated.
Identify clearly the rear doors of switchgear compartments.

7.0 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
7.1 Substations
OSHA 1910.269(u)(6) When entering an attended substation, employees other than those
assigned to station work should report to the employee in charge.
Upon reporting, these employees should receive special safety
instructions and a job briefing.
OSHA 1910.269(u)(4)(iv) 7.1.1 Enclosures
Keep substation enclosures locked at all times except while work is
being performed.
OSHA 1910.269(k) 7.1.2 Storing Materials
Keep substation lots free of debris. Do not store materials and
equipment not necessary for distribution and transmission system
repair and maintenance (R & M) in substation lots.
Establish specific storage locations for distribution and transmission,
repair and maintenance materials. Specifically identify and
periodically inspect the storage location. The Location Manager or
his or her designee should approve storage areas.
7.1.3 Inspections
Periodically inspect substations to determine the general condition of
all equipment, including grounding systems.
Qualified employees should perform the inspection.
7.1.4 Servicing Substation and High Voltage Yard Auxiliary

Equipment
When servicing existing equipment compromises worker safety,
consider relocating such equipment.
If the equipment cannot be relocated, employ alternate safety
procedures such as de-energizing or requiring appropriate personal
safety equipment and clothing for work in close proximity to
energized parts.
NFPA 70E Part II 2-1.3.4 7.2 Guarding Live Parts During Operation and
(a-c) Maintenance
OSHA 1910.269(u)(4) and
(u)(5); (v)(4) and (v)(5) Provide guards around all live parts where the clearance requirements
NESC 124 of Appendix A, Table A-1 cannot be met. (Refer to NESC Section
124.)
When necessary to ensure reasonable safety, guard certain live parts
or give clearances in excess of those specified. Those parts include
those over or near passageways through which material may be
carried and those on or near spaces such as corridors, storerooms, and
boiler rooms used for non-electrical work. Use substantial guards and
completely shield or enclose the energized parts without openings.

Guards for spaces accessible to unqualified personnel should be

removable only by means of tools or keys.
Guard each portion of parts whose potential is unknown in the same
manner as described above. Guarding should be based on the
maximum voltage that may be present on the surface of that portion.
Examples of such parts include telephone wires exposed to induction
from high-voltage lines, ungrounded neutral connections,
ungrounded frames, ungrounded parts of insulators or surge arresters,
or ungrounded instrument cases connected directly to a high-voltage
circuit.
Guards less than 4 inches (10 cm) outside the guard zone should
completely enclose the parts from contact up to the heights listed in
Appendix A, Table A-1 column 2. They should not be closer to the
live parts than the distance specified in Table 1 column 4, except
when suitable insulating material is used with circuits less than 2500
V to ground.
7.3 Rights-of-Way
Maintain rights-of-way in a clear and orderly condition, and keep
trees and brush well clear of overhead lines.
Prohibit any vehicle that could inadvertently come within 10 feet
(305 cm) of an energized line (see the definition of “Ten (10) Foot”
Rule in Section 3.0) from parking in this area. Examples would be
aerial lifts, mobile cranes, dump trucks, dumpsters, and high lift fork
trucks.
7.3.1 Storage of Materials in Rights-of-Way OSHA 1910.269(k)
Do not store material and equipment on rights-of-way under non-

insulated high voltage lines closer than 10 feet (305 cm) horizontal
for lines energized at 50 kV or less.
For lines energized at voltages above 50 kV, add 4 inches (10 cm) for
every 10 kV above 50 kV.
Do not store materials and equipment closer than the distances stated
below in areas that are not restricted to qualified employees and that
are located near live parts:
• For lines and equipment energized at 50 kV or less, the 10-Foot
Rule applies (10 feet or 305 cm).
• For lines and equipment energized at more than 50 kV, the
distance is 10 feet (305 cm) plus 4 inches (10 cm) for every 10
kV over 50 kV.

To these minimum clearances, add enough distance to account for the

following:
• Maximum sag and side swing by conductors.
• Space needed by the equipment used to handle the stored
materials.
In areas restricted to qualified employees, do not store material within
the working space around energized lines or equipment.
8.0 INSPECTION AND TESTING OF INSULATING

RUBBER PRODUCTS, TOOLS, AND MECHANIZED
EQUIPMENT
8.1 Documentation
Maintain test records on all equipment, rubber goods, and live-line
tools.
8.2 Insulating Rubber Products

OSHA 1910.137(b)(2) and 8.2.1 Insulating Rubber Gloves
Tables I-1 through I-6
NFPA 70E Part II 3-2 The employee should visually inspect and air test the gloves at the
beginning of each use. This is the employee’s responsibility.
Electrically test insulating rubber gloves in accordance with the
in-service care of insulating gloves and sleeves, per ASTM F496.
Dielectrically test insulating rubber gloves:
• Before their first use.
• Every 6 months during use.
• When the gloves might have been damaged, test before the next
use.
8.2.2 Insulating Rubber Sleeves

Visually inspect rubber sleeves at the start of each work day in which
they will be used.
Dielectrically test the sleeves:
• Every 12 months thereafter.
Electrically test insulating rubber sleeves in accordance with the
procedures for in-service care of insulating gloves and sleeves
described in ASTM F496.
Store insulating rubber sleeves in canvas bags designed for that
purpose.

8.2.3 Insulating Blankets, Line Hoses, and Covers

This equipment is not designed for permanent installation. Follow the
manufacturer’s specification for use, as exposure may result in ozone
checking, corona cutting, or excessive weathering.
Test and inspect insulating blanket, line hose, and in accordance with
ASTM F478 and F479.
Dielectrically test blankets:
• Every 12 months thereafter.
Test line hoses and covers upon indication that the insulating value is
suspect.
Visually inspect this equipment for defects before use and installation
on energized conductors, devices, or equipment, and at other times if
damage is suspected.
Do not use damaged or possibly damaged equipment until it has
passed an electrical re-test.
8.3 Tools
8.3.1 Live-line Tools

Visually inspect live-line tools for defects and contamination on a OSHA 1910.269(j)(2)(iii)
regularly established basis.
Before using the tool each day, visually inspect it for defective OSHA 1910.269(j)(2)
hardware attachments, cracks, deformities, contamination, proper
operation, and cleanliness.
Wax and then dielectrically test the tool every two years (24 months).
Dielectrically test fiberglass tools while wet. IEEE 978-1984, Guide
For In-Service Maintenance and Electrical Testing of Live-Line
Tools, may be used for reference.
8.3.2 Insulated Tools

Ensure that insulated tools meet the requirements of ASTM F1505 NFPA 70E Part II 2-3.7
Specification for Insulated Hand Tools. OSHA 1910.335(a)(2)

8.4 Mechanized Equipment
8.4.1 Insulated Equipment

For insulated, extendible-boom aerial personnel devices, articulating-
boom aerial personnel devices, and any combination thereof (such as
line trucks):
• Inspect annually (every 12 months).
• Follow the inspection and test methods outlined by the
manufacturer, ANSI A92.2, and ASTM Standard Designation
F914.
• Whenever this equipment is to be used to elevate an employee
into close proximity of energized or potentially energized lines
or equipment, a basket liner should be inserted in the basket.
This liner should totally cover all surfaces exposed to the
employee and should be dielectrically tested per ANSI A92.2
annually (every 12 months).
8.4.2 Non-Insulated Equipment

For non-insulated, digger-derrick, extensible-boom equipment,
follow the inspection and test procedures stated in ANSI A10.31.
8.4.3 Safety Components of Mechanized Equipment

OSHA 1910.269(p)(1)(i) Inspect the critical safety components of mechanical elevating and
rotating equipment before use on each shift.
Check the lower and upper controls to ensure they are functioning
correctly.
Follow the manufacturer’s recommended checklist.
9.0 EMPLOYEE TRAINING
9.1 Types of Training

The following types of training are recommended:
• Initial training
• Qualified employee
• Authorized employee
• Refresher
• Lockout/tagout
• Training on the Electrical Safe Work Practice (this document).
All training should take place in the classroom and/or the on-the-job.

9.2 Certification and Record Keeping

9.2.1 Certification OSHA 1910.269(a)(2)(vii)
The employer should certify all personnel upon demonstration of the

success of the training. Certification may include a dated record of
successfully passing a test or an outline of the course or courses
completed.
Location management should certify who are “qualified” employees, OSHA 1910.269(a)(2)(vii)
“authorized” employees, and who has the qualifications to work in
each area.
Note: A person can be considered “qualified” with respect to certain
equipment and methods (such as maintenance of HVAC equipment)
but still be unqualified for others.
9.2.2 Record Keeping

The location management should ensure that all required training is OSHA 1910.269(a)(2)(vii)
completed and documented. OSHA 1910.269(d)(2)(ix)
Establish and maintain records for each person considered a OSHA 1910.269(a)(2)(vii)
“qualified” employee as defined in Section 3.0 of this practice. The
records should include:
• Name and identification
• Date and time of training
• Content of training (such as a course outline or on-the-job
demonstration of skill)
• Basis for acceptance as “qualified” (e.g., test grade,
demonstration of skill, and work location)
9.3 Personnel Responsibilities and General

Qualifications
9.3.1 Responsibilities
The Employer (e.g., ChevronTexaco) should verify, both through OSHA 1910.269(a)(2)(iii)
regular supervision and inspections conducted at least annually, that NFPA 70E Part II 5-1.2.1
each employee is complying with the required safety-related work OSHA 1910.269(d)(2)
practices.
Note: It is recommended that the facility conduct periodic audits of
the required electrical safe work practices.
Supervisors should make sure procedures are in place and that NFPA 70E Part II 1-3
employees are trained in those procedures.
Employees must follow safe work practice procedures, including NFPA 70E Part II 1-3
using PPE, and understand how an employee’s qualification status
relates to the current task.

OSHA 1910.269(a)(2) 9.3.2 General Qualifications and Skills Recommended

This section lists general training/skills recommended for employees
based on different types of working situations.
OSHA 1910.332 Employees “working on” or “working near” line parts:
NFPA 70E Part II 1-5
• basic mechanical skills;
• basics of electricity;
• troubleshooting and circuit analysis;
• job planning;
• job auditing; and
• CPR and emergency response.
NFPA 70E Part II 1-5.3 Employees working on systems of 50 volts or greater should remain
OSHA 1910.269(b) certified in:
• Cardiopulmonary Resuscitation (CPR); and
• First Aid
NFPA 70E Part II 1.5.1 Personnel involved with selection and safe use of a voltmeter or other
instruments used within the restricted approach boundary
• Proper use of a voltmeter or other instrument where
measurement is expected, anticipated, or required in order to
execute a task safely.
All personnel working in the vicinity (at, or even outside, the limited
approach boundary -- depending on the energy available) of live parts
should have training of the following:
• Hazard recognition - Consider what, where, degree, method of
exposure, and how to avoid all potential hazards.
NFPA 70E Part II 2-1.3.3 • Recognition of flash protection boundary - understand and
2-1.3.3.3 appreciate the hazard of radiated energy from sources of various
energy levels.
NFPA 70E Part II 5-1 • Knowledge of local procedures and lock-and-tag requirements
— Know what is required to work on or near an energized
electrical conductor.
• Personal protective equipment — become familiar with the
following about PPE:
– The appropriate type to use for each situation
– The location of the equipment
– How to use each item properly
The employee is responsible for following PPE usage
procedures and knowing when PPE is required. The
employer is responsible for providing the equipment and
defining procedures.

• Acceptable methods of insulating/isolating persons from shock NFPA 70E Part II 1-5.3 and
and the most appropriate method for shock isolation/insulation 2-3.8
during both work and rescue.
9.4 “Qualified Employee” Training OSHA 1910.332(b)(3)
For a person to be considered a “qualified employee”, he or she must:

• Understand the specific hazards associated with electrical energy OSHA 1910.269(a)(2)(ii)
and be able to identify and understand the relationship of such NFPA 70E Part II 1-5.4.1
hazards to possible injury.
• Be familiar with safety-related work practices, safety procedures,
and other personnel safety requirements that relate to the job or
task assignments.
• Be familiar with any other safety practices, including applicable
emergency procedures related to work and safety.
• Be able to perform cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR) and Also see OSHA
first aid. 1910.269(b)(1)
• Be able to distinguish live parts from the other parts of electric

equipment, machines, and processes.
• Be able to determine the nominal voltage of exposed live parts.
• Know and understand the clearance and minimum approach
distances required when working with the voltages to which he
or she will be exposed.
• Know proper use of special precautionary techniques, personal
protective equipment, insulating and shielding materials, and
insulated tools, when required.
• Understand induced, static, and impressed voltages, grounding
integrity, condition of poles and structures, and circuit and
equipment location.
• Know how to determine the degree and extent of a hazard, the
PPE needed and job planning necessary to perform the task
safely.
• Be familiar with methods of release of victims from contact with
live parts.
9.5 “Authorized Employee” Training

Fundamental concepts include:
• An understanding of the specific hazards associated with
electrical energy.
• How to identify and understand the relationship between
electrical hazards and possible injury.
• Familiarity with safety-related work practices, safety procedures,
and other personnel safety requirements that relate to job
assignments.

• Familiarity with any other safety practices, including applicable

emergency procedures related to work and safety.
Recommended concepts in addition to those above include:
• Skills and techniques necessary to distinguish potential live parts
from the other parts of electric equipment, machines, and
processes.
• Skills and techniques necessary to determine the nominal voltage
of exposed live parts.
• How to recognize when special precautionary techniques,
personal protective equipment, insulating and shielding
materials, and insulated tools are needed.
• Methods of releasing victims from contact with live parts.
9.6 Refresher Training

OSHA 1910.269(a)(2)(iv) Frequent training and reinforcement of electrical safety is essential,
especially for items such as power system components that are
maintained infrequently.
OSHA 1910.269(a)(2)(iv) Establish schedules for refresher training, or retraining of personnel
as the situation dictates:
• To keep abreast of technology, new types of equipment, and
procedural changes.
• To maintain proficient skills.
• If supervisor, periodic audits, or the annual inspection reveals
that the employees are not complying with required safety-
related work practice.
• If seldom used safety-related work practices are employed
(OSHA considers these tasks that are performed less than once
per year), training or retraining should precede the performance
of the task.
Conduct refresher training on this ChevronTexaco Electrical Safe
Work Practice at least every three years.
OSHA 1910.269(d)(2)(vi) 9.7 Lockout/Tagout Training
Management should provide training to ensure that the purpose and
function of the energy control program is understood and that
personnel with knowledge and skill are available for safe application,
usage, and removal of energy control as necessary.
Management should certify that training has been accomplished.
OSHA 1910.269(d)(2)(vi)(A) Authorized employees should be trained to recognize applicable
OSHA 1910.333(b) hazardous energy sources, type and magnitude of energy sources, and
NFPA 70E Part II 5-2 the proper techniques for energy isolation and control.

Affected employees should be instructed in the purpose and use of OSHA 1910.269(d)(2)(vi)(B)
the energy-control procedure.
All other employees who may work in areas where energy control is OSHA 1910.269(d)(2)(vi)(C)
utilized should be instructed about the procedure and the prohibition
against restarting locked/tagged out machines.
9.7.1 Tagout Only OSHA 1910.269(d)(2)(vii)
When tagout alone is used, employees should also be trained in the

following limitations and requirements for tags:
• Tags are warning devices only and do not provide physical
protection.
• A tag is not to be removed without the authorization of the
person who applied it. Do not bypass, ignore, or defeat it.
• Tags should be legible and capable of being understood by all in
the area.
• Tags need to withstand the environment in the workplace.
• Tags need to be securely attached.
9.8 Retraining
Authorized and affected employees should be retrained when the OSHA 1910.269(d)(2)(viii)
following occurs:
• A work assignment changes.
• Equipment changes.
• Energy control procedures change.
• When a periodic inspection reveals inadequacies in the program.
10.0 FACILITY WORK
10.1 Location Management

Location Management should ensure that the following meet or
exceed all safety regulated recommendations of this practice, along
with required and consensus design and safety practices:
• Design criteria for all existing electrical facilities, modifications
to the existing facilities, and new construction.
• Vendor equipment and system design.
All maintenance/construction projects (electrical or otherwise) at the
location should be performed following all of the electrical safety
recommendations of this practice.

10.2 Contractors
Contractors should be aware of and comply with the following:
• At a minimum, all applicable Facility safety specifications apply
to contractor personnel.
• Contractors are responsible for ensuring that equipment they
supply and use meets Facility safety and health practices.
• Key contractor personnel should be trained in the
ChevronTexaco Electrical Safe Work Practice.
• Contractors need to understand or be informed of, the potential
electrical shock hazards associated with their work.
• Contractors need to notify the appropriate Facility representative
of any changing work conditions that relate to potential electric
shock hazards.
As contractor employees are replaced or added, or contractor work is
further sublet, the primary contractor is responsible for advising or
informing new contractor employees of all electrical safety
considerations that may apply to them under this, or other applicable
rules or specifications.
OSHA 1910.335(b)(3) 10.3 Non-qualified and Non-authorized Personnel
NFPA 70E Part II 2-1.3.5
NFPA 70E Part II 3-4.9 Any person without “qualified” or “authorized” training requires an
escort within areas where physical safe work distance clearances (see
Appendix A, Table A-1 and Table A-2) cannot be met. In general, this
includes all secured electrical installations and conductor/bus
minimal clearance from buildings, rooftops, or other structures.
Examples of non-qualified and non-authorized personnel may
include non-trained visitors, non-electrical maintenance employees
(e.g., grass cutters, painters, roof repair personnel), potential
contractor personnel, and equipment vendors.
10.4 Electrical System Safety for Operations

NFPA 70E Part II 1-3 and It is essential that general switching and controlling procedures
5-2 between power generators and user locations be well understood and
documented.
10.5 Accident/Incident Investigation

A local electrical safety team should investigate all electrical
contacts, near misses and switching errors. Recommendations should
be made to improve the electrical safety program.
These recommendations should be sent to the corporate safety
division and corporate business unit managers for further evaluation
and distribution.

It is important that these accidents/incidents and near misses be

evaluated from a fact-finding, versus a “fault finding” approach.
10.6 Periodic Electrical Safety Reviews

It is recommended that a periodic review of electrical systems,
maintenance procedures, and operating practices be done:
• By qualified personnel and/or an outside consulting service
knowledgeable in the electrical safety concerns of the review.
• At least once every two (2) years.
• Be performed more often if changes occur that are likely to
increase the potential for electrical shock hazard (i.e., an
increased frequency of electrical accidents, changes in the work
force, renovation of the current system, or new construction).
11.0 POWER SYSTEM AND ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

SECURITY (LOCKING)
The following locations that have exposed energized, or potentially OSHA 1910.269(u)(4)(iv)
energized, parts should be locked:
• Substations.
• Entrances to switchgear rooms that have exposed energized, or
potentially energized parts.
• Other locations that have energized, or potentially energized high
voltage conductor and exposed parts of electrical equipment.
11.1 Safety Lock

A Safety Lock is a controlled lock with unique lock/one key or
unique lock group/one key.
Its function is to protect personnel, and should be installed on each
tagout/lockout location.
Use of a Safety Lock on high and low voltage distribution systems is
recommended to prevent a switch or breaker from unintentionally
operating. This is important for protecting workers.
11.2 Operating System Lock

The function of an operating system lock is to prevent unintentional
operation of a high voltage line switch. Unique one lock/one key
locks are not required but are strongly recommended for operating
system locks.
11.3 Preferred Lock System

In the interest of overall employee safety, a one lock/one key system
offers the highest degree of safety in any locking situation.

11.4 Equipment Access Interlock Systems

NFPA 70E Part II 2-3.11 Equipment access interlock systems offer a high degree of personal
OSHA 1910.333(c)(10) safety and should be used in all design considerations with the
exception of phasing of conductors following new or revised
installations.
Except for phasing of conductors following new or revised
installations, do not bypass, or otherwise render inoperative, interlock
systems while the equipment is energized. When performing the
phasing task, additional personal protective equipment may be
required.
11.5 Remote/Other Utility Operations (Clearance, Lockout/

Tagout)
Where generating and switching locations are influenced by distance,
do not compromise personnel safety by lack of a positive locking or
other procedure.
It is recommended that a formal written agreement be made between
the parties outlining the agreed upon clearance or lockout/tagout
procedure.
Provide all clearances in writing.
The clearance or lockout/tagout system associated with the remote
location may be used but do not compromise the safety of the Facility
clearance or lockout/tagout policy.
12.0 REFERENCES
Engineering Standards, Latest Edition Applies
12.1 ANSI (American National Standards Institute)

A10.31 Digger Derricks-Safety Requirements, Definitions, and
Specifications
A92.5 Boom-Supported Elevated Work Platforms
B30.5 Mobile and Locomotive Cranes
Z87.1 Practice for Occupational and Educational Eye and Face
Protection
Z89.1 Requirements for Protective Headwear for Industrial
Workers
Z41 Safety-Toe Footwear

12.2 ASTM (American Society for Testing and Materials)

Standard on Electrical Protective Equipment for
Workers, 7th Edition.
F479 Standard Specification for the In-Service Care of
Insulating Blankets
F496 Standard Specification for the In-Service Care of
Insulating Gloves and Sleeves
F914 Standard Test Method for Acoustic Emission Insulated
Aerial Personnel Devices
F478 Specifications for In-Service Care of Insulating Line
Hose and Covers
F855 Specifications for Temporary Grounding Systems to be
Used on De-energized Electric Power Lines and
Equipment
F1505 Specification for Insulated Hand Tools
12.3 CFR (Code of Federal Regulations)

29 CFR (Title 29 - Labor)
http://www.osha-slc.gov/OshStd_toc/OSHA_Std_toc.html
Subpart I 1910.137 Personal Protective Equipment, Electrical
protective devices
Subpart J 1910.146 Permit-required Confined Spaces
Subpart J 1910.147 The control of hazardous energy (lockout/
tagout)
Subpart R 1910.268 Telecommunications
Subpart R 1910.269 Electrical power generation, transmission, and
distribution
Subpart S 1910.301 - 399 Electrical - General
Subpart K 1926.400 - 449 Construction Electrical
Subpart E 1926 Fall Protection
12.4 IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronics

Engineers)
IEEE 978 Guide for In-Service Maintenance and Electrical Testing
of Live-Line Tools.
ANSI/IEEE C2 National Electric Safety Code

12.5 NFPA (National Fire Protection Association)

NFPA 70 National Electrical Code
NFPA 70B Electrical Equipment Maintenance
NFPA 70E Electrical Safety Requirements for Employee Work
Places
12.6 Applicable State and Local Codes

All ChevronTexaco facilities should meet or exceed the above
referenced guidelines, codes and regulations.

Appendix A
Clearance and Approach Boundaries Figures and Tables
Live Part
Guard Zone at Radius

Table A-1, R= Column 4
Horizontal Clearance Vertical Clearance

Table A-1, Column 3 Table A-1, Column 2
Figure A-1 Clearance From Live Parts

(Based on Figure 124-1 NESC C2-2002. From IEEE Std. C2-2002. Copyright 2001 IEEE. All
rights reserved.)

Table A-1 Clearance From Live Parts
Clearance From Live Parts

Note: Obtain distances for intermediate voltages by interpolation.
Nominal
Horizontal Clearance of
Voltage Vertical Clearance of Clearance Guard to Live
Unguarded Parts
Phase to Unguarded Parts Parts
Phase
kV Feet In. m Feet In. m Feet In. m/cm
.151 to 2.4 8 9 2.67 3 4 1.02 0 3 7.6 cm

7.2 8 10 2.69 3 4 1.02 0 4 10.1 cm
13.8 9 0 2.74 3 6 1.07 0 6 15.2 cm
23.0 9 3 2.82 3 9 1.14 0 9 22.8 cm
34.5 9 6 2.90 4 0 1.22 1 0 30.4 cm
46.0 9 10 3.00 4 4 1.32 1 4 40.6 cm
69.0 10 5 3.18 4 11 1.50 1 11 58.4 cm
115.0 11 7 3.53 6 1 1.85 3 1 93.9 cm
138.0 12 2 3.71 6 8 2.03 3 8 1.12 m
161.0 12 10 3.91 7 4 2.24 4 4 1.32 m
230.0 14 10 4.52 9 4 2.84 6 4 1.93 m
362.0 20 2 6.1 14 8 4.5 11 8 3.6 m
550.0 28 4 8.6 22 10 7.0 19 10 6.0 m
(Table derived from Table 124-1 NESC C2-2002. From IEEE Std. C2-2002. Copyright 2001
IEEE. All rights reserved.)

Table A-2 Minimum Basic Vertical Clearance
Minimum Basic Vertical Clearance of Wires, Conductors and Cables Above Ground, Rails or
Water1,2
Note: Voltages are phase-to-ground for effectively grounded circuits.
Clearance Categories (Open Conductors)

Neutrals and
Where wires, conductors, or
cables cross over or
Grounded Guys 0 to 750V 751V to 22kV3
(Phase-to-Gnd) (Phase-to-Gnd)
overhang
Feet Meters Feet Meters Feet Meters
1. Railroad tracks 23.5 7.2 24.5 7.5 26.5 8.1
2. Roads and other areas subject to 15.5 4.7 16.5 5.0 18.5 5.6
truck traffic
3. Residential driveways 15.5 4.7 16.5 5.0 18.5 5.6
4. Other land traversed by vehicles 15.5 4.7 16.5 5.0 18.5 5.6
5. Spaces or ways accessible to 9.5 2.9 12.5 3.8 14.5 4.4

pedestrians only
6. Water areas not subject to 14.0 4.0 15.0 4.6 17.0 5.2
sailboating
7. Water areas subject to

sailboating
• Less than 20 acres 17.5 5.3 18.5 5.6 20.5 6.2
• 20 to 200 acres 25.5 7.8 26.5 8.1 28.5 8.7
• 200 to 2,000 acres 31.5 9.6 32.5 9.9 34.5 10.5
• Over 2,000 acres 37.5 11.4 38.5 11.7 40.5 12.3
8. Areas subject to sailboat Clearances above ground shall be 5 feet (1.5 meters) greater than item 7
launching above.
Where wires, conductors, or cables run along and within the limits of highway or other road right-of-way, but do not
overhang the roadway
9. Roads in urban districts 15.5 4.7 16.5 5.0 18.5 5.6
10. Roads in rural districts where it 13.5 4.1 14.5 4.4 16.5 5.0
is unlikely that vehicles will cross
under the line
1. For unguarded rigid live parts (fuse cutouts, pole transformer bushing, etc.) clearance, refer to
Table 232-2 NESC C2-2002.
2. For clearances of insulated conductors see Table 232-1 NESC C2 -2002.
3. Increase distances 4 in. (10 cm) for each 10 kV over 22 kV phase to ground.
(Table is based on Table 232-1 NESC C2-2002. From IEEE Std. C2-2002. Copyright 2001 IEEE.
All rights reserved.)

Table A-3 Clearance of Exposed, Non-insulated Items
Clearance Of Exposed/Non-insulated Wires, Conductors, Cables and Unguarded Live Parts

Adjacent But Not Attached to Buildings and Other Installations Except Bridges
Minimum Clearance
Application 751 V - 22 kV1
Phase to Ground
Feet Meters
A. Buildings
· Horizontal 7.5 2.30
· Vertical
- Over or under roofs of projections not accessible to pedestrians 12.5 3.8
- Over or under balconies and roofs accessible to pedestrians 13.5 4.1
- Over roofs accessible to mobile equipment but not subject to truck 13.5 4.1
traffic
- Over roofs accessible to truck traffic 18.5 5.6
B. Signs, chimneys, billboards, radio and television antennas,

tanks, and other installations not classified as buildings or
bridges
· Horizontal 7.5 7.5
· Vertical over or under catwalks and other surfaces upon which personnel 13.5 4.1
walk
· Vertical over or under other portions of such installations 8.0 2.30
1. Distances shall increase 4 in. (10 cm) for each 10kV over 22 kV phase to ground.
(Table is based on Table 234-1 NESC C2-2002 From IEEE Std. C2-2002. Copyright 2001 IEEE.

Table A-4 Vertical Clearance Between Conductors
Vertical Clearance Between Conductors at Supports on Same Structure

(Distance In Inches and Centimeters)
Upper Level Conductors
Open Supply Cables

Lower Level Conductors
or Cables 0 - 8.7 kV 8.7 - 50 kV
Same Utility Different Utilities
in. cm in. cm in cm
Communication Conductors 40 100 40 100 40 Plus 100

and Cables “A”
Triplex & Quadplex 161 411 16 Plus 41 40 Plus 100

0-750 V Supply Cable “A” “A”
Open Conductors over 16 41 16 Plus 41 40 Plus 100

750V to 8.7kV “A” “A”
Open Conductors over 16 Plus 41 162,3 Plus 412,3

8.7 kV to 22kV “A” “A”
Open Conductors >22 kV to 16 Plus 41 16 Plus 41

50kV “A” “A”
“A” = 0.4 inches (1.0 cm) per kV over 8.7 kV
1. Increase to 40" (100 cm) if conductors are operated by different utilities.

2. Increase to 40" (100 cm) if live line maintenance is performed and adjacent circuits are neither de-ener-
gized nor covered.
3. Example:
Different utilities, other utility does live line maintenance 26.6 kV circuit above a 13.9 kV circuit. Phases
may be displaced by 180 degrees, therefore voltage difference is considered to be
26.6 + 13.9 = 40.5 kV
A = 0.4 (40.5 - 8.7) = 12.72" (32 cm)
Clearance = 40 + 13 = 53" (133 cm)
(Table is based on Table 235-5 NESC C2-2002 From IEEE Std. C2-2002. Copyright 2001 IEEE.

Table A-5 Basic Vertical Clearance
Basic Vertical Clearance of Wires, Conductors and Cables Carried

on Different Supporting Structures
Upper Level Conductors
Supply Cables Meeting

Rule 230C1 & Supply Open Supply
Lower Level Conductors Cables of 0-750 V Conductors over
meeting Rule 230C2 or 750 V to 22 kV
230C31
Feet Meters Feet Meters
Communication Conductors, Cables and 2 0.60 52 1.50

Messengers
Open Supply Conductors 0-750 V; Supply 2 0.60 2 0.60

Cables over 750 V meeting rule 230C2 or 230C3
Open Supply Conductors 750 V to 22 kV 23 0.603 2 0.60
Trolley and Electrified Railroad Conductors 44 1.204 6 1.80
Guys, span wires, neutral conductors and surge 2 0.60 2 0.60

protection wires
1. Rules 230C1, C2, and C3 cover cables supported on effectively grounded bare messengers or neutral
conductors, cables having effectively grounded sheaths or shields, or 5 kV non-shielded cables supported
and cabled together on effectively grounded bare messengers.
2. This clearance may be reduced to 4 ft. (1.20 m) where supply conductors of 750 V to 8.7 kV cross a com-
munication line more than 6 ft. (1.80 m) horizontally from a communications structure.
3. This type crossing is not recommended.
4. Trolley and electrified railroad contact conductors of more than 750V should have at least 6 ft. (1.80 m) of
clearance.
(Table is based on Table 233-1 NESC C2-2002. See the NESC table and notes for complete
details. From IEEE Std. C2-2002. Copyright © 2001 IEEE. All rights reserved.)

Figure A-2 Limits of Approach
(Reprinted with permission from NFPA 70E-2000, Standard for Electrical Safety Requirements
for Employee Workplaces, copyright © 2000, National Fire Protection Association, Quincy, MA
02269. This is not the complete and official position of the NFPA on the referenced subject, which
is represented only by the standard in its entirety)

Table A-6 Approach Boundaries

(This table is based on NFPA 70E-2000, Part II, Table 2-1.3.4. Reprinted with permission from
NFPA 70E-2000, Standard for Electrical Safety Requirements for Employee Workplaces,
copyright © 2000, National Fire Protection Association, Quincy, MA 02269. This is not the
complete and official position of the NFPA on the referenced subject, which is represented only by
the Standard in its entirety.
Approach Boundaries
Restricted Prohibited
Limited Approach Boundary Approach Approach
Nominal System Boundary Boundary
Voltage Range,
Phase to Phase Exposed Includes
Exposed Fixed
Moveable Inadvertent
Circuit Part
Conductor Movement Adder
0 - 50 Not specified Not specified Not specified Not specified
51 - 300 10 ft. 0 in. 3 ft.6 in. Avoid contact Avoid contact
301 - 750 10 ft. 0 in. 3 ft.6 in. 1 ft. 0 in. 0 ft. 1 in.
751 V - 15 kV 10 ft. 0 in. 5 ft.0 in. 2 ft. 2 in. 0 ft. 7 in.
15.1 - 36 kV 10 ft. 0 in. 6 ft.0 in. 2 ft. 7 in. 0 ft. 10 in.
46.1 - 72.5 kV 10 ft. 0 in. 8 ft.0 in. 3 ft. 3 in. 2 ft. 1 in.
138 - 145 kV 11 ft. 0 in. 10 ft.0 in. 3 ft. 7 in. 3 ft. 1 in.
345 -362 kV 15 ft. 4 in. 15 ft.4 in. 8 ft. 6 in. 8 ft. 0 in.
765 - 800 kV 23 ft. 9 in. 23 ft. 9 in. 14 ft. 11 in. 14 ft. 5 in.
Notes:
1. Affected Persons, persons who are not authorized or qualified must not cross the limited approach boundary.
(See Appendix B, Item B.1; Section 5.2.3)
2. Authorized Persons, specifically task trained, may work inside the limited approach boundary. However, in no
case should an authorized person be allowed to work as close to live parts as the restricted approach boundary
allowed for a qualified person. (See Section 5.2.3)
3. Qualified persons may work up to the restricted approach boundary. For a qualified person to cross the restricted
approach boundary he/she should follow the rules outlined in Appendix B, Item B.2; Section 5.2.3)
4. Qualified Persons who cross the prohibited approach boundary should follow work procedures required to make
contact with live parts. To cross the prohibited approach boundary is considered the same as making contact with
live parts. (See Appendix B, Item B.2)

Appendix B
Limits of Approach
A. Preparing for Approach to Live Parts
Observing a safe approach distance from live parts is an effective means of maintaining electrical
safety. As the distance between a person and the live parts is decreased, the potential for electrical
accident increases.
B. Safe Approach Distance
1. Unqualified Persons
Unqualified persons are safe when they maintain a distance from the live parts, including the
longest conductive object being handled, so that they cannot contact or enter a specified air
insulation distance to the live parts. This safe approach distance is the limited approach boundary.
Unqualified persons must not cross the flash protection boundary unless they are wearing
appropriate personal protective clothing and are under the close supervision of a qualified person.
Note that the flash protection boundary may be greater than the limited approach boundary for
higher capacity systems.
2. Qualified Persons
Determine the flash protection boundary and, if the boundary is to be crossed, use appropriate arc-
flash protective equipment.
For a person to cross the limited approach boundary and enter the limited space, he or she must be
qualified to perform the job/task. An exception to this is that an “authorized person” is permitted
to cross the limited approach boundary if he or she is specifically trained for the task to be done.
To cross the restricted approach boundary and enter the restricted space, the qualified person
must:
– Have a plan that is documented and approved by authorized management.
– Use personal protective equipment appropriate for working on live parts and rated for the
voltage and energy level involved.
– Be certain that no part of the body enters the prohibited space.
– Minimize the risk due to inadvertent movement by keeping as much of the body out of
the restricted space, using only protected body parts in the space as necessary to
accomplish the work.
To cross the prohibited approach boundary and enter the prohibited space is considered the same
as making contact with live parts, the qualified person must:
– Have specified training to work on live parts and be approved by authorized
management.
– Have a documented plan justifying the need to work that close and have it approved by
authorized management.
– Perform a risk analysis.
– Use personal protective equipment appropriate for working on live parts and rated for the
voltage and energy level involved.

Appendix C
Flame Resistant Clothing Recommendations
A. Initiate a Flash Hazard Analysis

Do a flash hazard analysis before a person approaches any exposed electrical conductor or circuit
part that has not been placed in an electrically safe work condition.
B. Determine the Flash Protection Boundary
The flash protection boundary determined during the flash hazard analysis and is utilized to
initiate the need for personal protective equipment.
Refer to Part II, Chapters 2 and 3 of NFPA 70E-2000 for formulas and other information needed to
establish the flash protection boundary. These chapters in NFPA 70E also contain information and
recommendations that address personal protective equipment required for personnel to cross
inside the flash protection boundary.
For systems which are 600 volts and below, the flash protection boundary is 4.0 feet or the flash
protection boundary may alternatively be calculated using information and formulas outlined in
NFPA 70E-2000.
At voltage levels above 600 volts, the flash protection boundary is the distance at which the
incident energy level equals 1.2 cal/cm2.
For situations where fault clearing time is 0.1 second (or faster), the flash protection boundary is
the distance at which the incident energy level equals 1.5 cal/cm2.
C. Calculate Arc Flash Exposure
Existing knowledge about arc flash exposure at voltage levels above 600 volts is limited. Methods
of calculating the exposure, other than the equations given in NFPA 70E-2000, exist and may be
used. Commercial and shareware programs are available for calculating these values. It is
important to investigate the limitations of any programs to be used.
Experience suggests that the calculation of arc flash exposure above 600 volts is conservative and
becomes more conservative as the voltage increases. It should be noted that all present methods of
calculating incident energy and arc flash exposure at higher voltage levels have limitations.
Equations for calculating the incident energy produced by a three phase arc on systems rated 600
volts and below for an “Arc in Open Air” (E ma) and an “Arc in a Cubic Box” (Emb - arc flashes
emanating from within switchgear, motor control centers, or other electrical equipment
enclosures) may be calculated by using the formulas derived in the IEEE paper by R.L. Doughty,
T.E. Neal, and H. L. Floyd, “Predicting Incident Energy to Better Manage the Electric Arc Hazard
on 600 Volt Power Distribution Systems,” IEEE, IAS 45th Annual PCIC Conference Sept.28-30,
1998.
Note: See Appendix D for Sample Calculation of Flash Protection Boundary Dc, Arc in Open Air
Ema, and Arc in Cubic Box Emb.
D. Determine PPE Requirements
Flame Resistant (FR) Clothing and Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) is used by the employee

based upon the incident energy exposure associated with the specific task. As an alternative, the
PPE requirements outlined in Table C-1 (extracted from NFPA 70E Table 3-3.9.1) may be used.
For additional information refer to Tables C-2 and C-3 (NFPA Tables 3-3.9.2 and 3-3.9.3), and
Table C-4 (NFPA Table F-1).
Tables 3-3.9.1, 3-3.9.2, 3-3.9.3 and F-1 reprinted with permission from NFPA 70E-2000, Standard
for Electrical Safety Requirements for Employee Workplaces, copyright ® 2000, National Fire
Protection Association, Quincy, MA 02269. This is not the complete and official position of the
NFPA on the referenced subject which is represented only by the standard in its entirety.
Table C-1 Hazard Risk Category Classifications

(Extracted from NFPA 70E-2000, Part II, Table 3-3.9.1 Hazard Risk Category Classifications)
Hazard/
Task (Assumes Equipment is Energized, and Work is V-rated V-rated
Risk
Done Within the Flash Protection Boundary) Gloves Tools
Category
Panelboards rated 240 V and below - See Notes 1 and 3
· Circuit breaker (CB) or fused switch operation with covers on 0 N N
· CB or fused switch operation with covers off 0 N N
· Work on energized parts, including voltage testing 1 Y Y
· Remove / install CBs or fused switches 1 Y Y
· Removal of bolted covers (to expose bare, energized parts) 1 N N
· Opening hinged covers (to expose bare, energized parts) 0 N N
Panelboards or Switchboards rated >240 V and up to 600 V (with molded case or insulated case
circuit breakers) - See Notes 1 and 3
· CB or fused switch operation with covers on 0 N N
· CB or fused switch operation with covers off 1 N N
· Work on energized parts, including voltage testing 2* Y Y
600 V Class Motor Control Centers (MCCs) - See Notes 2 (except as indicated) and 3
· CB or fused switch or starter operation with enclosure doors 0 N N

closed
· Reading a panel meter while operating a meter switch 0 N N
· CB or fused switch or starter operation with enclosure doors open 1 N N
· Work on control circuits with energized parts 120 V or below, 0 Y Y

exposed
· Work on control circuits with energized parts >120 V exposed 2* Y Y

Hazard/
Risk
Category
· Insertion or removal of individual starter “buckets” from MCC - See 3 Y N

Note 4
· Application of safety grounds, after voltage test 2* Y N
· Removal of bolted covers (to expose bare, energized parts) 2* N N
600 V Class Switchgear (with power circuit breakers or fused switches) - See Notes 5 and 6
· CB or fused switch operation with enclosure doors closed 0 N N
· CB or fused switch operation with enclosure doors open 1 N N

exposed
· Work on control circuits with energized parts >120 V exposed 2* Y Y
· Insertion or removal (racking) of CBs from cubicles, doors open 3 N N
· Insertion or removal (racking) of CBs from cubicles, doors closed 2 N N
Other 600 V Class (277 V to 600 V, nominal) Equipment - See Note 3
· Lighting or small power transformers (600 V, maximum) - - -
- Removal of bolted covers (to expose bare, energized parts) 2* N N
- Opening hinged covers (to expose bare, energized parts) 1 N N
- Work on energized parts, including voltage testing 2* Y Y
- Application of safety grounds, after voltage test 2* Y N
· Revenue meters (kW-hour, at primary voltage and current) - - -
- Insertion or removal 2* Y N
· Cable trough or tray cover removal or installation 1 N N
· Miscellaneous equipment cover removal or installation 1 N N
NEMA E2 (fused contactor) Motor Starters, 2.3 kV through 7.2 kV

Hazard/
Risk
Category
· Contactor operation with enclosure doors closed 0 N N
· Contactor operation with enclosure doors open 2* N N

exposed
· Work on control circuits with energized parts >120 V exposed 3 Y Y
· Insertion or removal (racking) of starters from cubicles, doors 3 N N

open
· Insertion or removal (racking) of starters from cubicles, doors 2 N N

closed
· Application of safety grounds, after voltage test 3 Y N
Metal Clad Switchgear, 1 kV and above
· CB or fused switch operation with enclosure doors closed 2 N N
· CB or fused switch operation with enclosure doors open 4 N N

exposed
· Work on control circuits with energized parts >120 V exposed 4 Y Y
· Insertion or removal (racking) of CBs from cubicles, doors open 4 N N
· Insertion or removal (racking) of CBs from cubicles, doors closed 2 N N
· Application of safety grounds, after voltage test 4 Y N
· Opening voltage transformer or control power transformer 4 N N

compartments
Other Equipment 1 kV and above
· Metal clad load interrupter switches, Fused or Unfused - - -
- Switch operation, doors closed 2 N N
- Work on energized parts, including voltage testing 4 Y N

Hazard/
Risk
Category
- Removal of bolted covers (to expose bare, energized parts) 4 N N
- Opening hinged covers (to expose bare, energized parts) 3 N N
· Outdoor disconnect switch operation (hookstick operated) 3 Y Y
· Outdoor disconnect switch operation (gang-operated, from grade) 2 N N
· Insulated cable examination, in manhole or other confined space 4 Y N
· Insulated cable examination, in open area 2 Y N
Legend:
V-rated Gloves are gloves, rated and tested for the maximum line-to-line voltage upon which work will be done.
V-rated Tools are tools rated and tested for the maximum line-to-line voltage upon which work will be done.
2* means that a double-layer switching hood and hearing protection are required for this task in addition to the other
Hazard/Risk Category 2 requirements of Table 3-3.9.2 of Part II (ChevronTexaco Note -- Instead of a switching
hood, an 8 cal/cm2 rated faceshield may be used for this task. See Appendix E of this Practice.)
Y = yes (required)
N = no (not required)
Notes:
1. 25 kA short circuit current available, 0.03 second (2 cycle) fault clearing time
3. For < 10 kA short circuit current available, the Hazard/Risk Category required may be reduced by one Number
5. 65 kA short circuit current available, up to 1.0 second (60 cycle) fault clearing time
6. For < 25 kA short circuit current available, the Hazard/Risk Category required may be reduced by one Number

Table C-2 Protective Clothing and Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) Matrix
(Extracted from NFPA 70E-2000, Part II, Table 3-3.9.2)
Protective Clothing and

Protective Systems for Hazard/Risk Category
Equipment
-1
Hazard/Risk Category Number 0 1 2 3 4
(Note 3)
Untreated Natural Fiber

· T-shirt (short-sleeve) X X X X
· Shirt (long-sleeve) X
· Pants (long) X X X (Note 4) X (Note 6) X X
FR Clothing (Note 1)
· Long-sleeve Shirt X X X (Note 9) X
· Pants X (Note 4) X (Note 6) X (Note 9) X
· Coverall (Note 5) (Note 7) X (Note 9) (Note 5)
· Jacket, Parka, or Rainwear AN AN AN AN
FR Protective Equipment
· Flash Suit Jacket (2-Layer) X
· Flash Suit Pants (2-Layer) X
Head Protection
· Hard Hat X X X X
· FR Hard Hat Liner X X
Eye Protection
· Safety Glasses X X X AL AL AL
· Safety Goggles AL AL AL
Face Protection-Double-Layer AR (Note X X

Switching Hood 8)
Hearing protection (ear canal AR (Note X X

inserts) 8)
Leather Gloves (Note 2) AN X X X
Leather Work Shoes AN X X X

Legend:
AN = As Needed
AL = Select one in group
AR = As Required
X = Minimum Required
Notes:
1. See Table 3-3.9.3. (ATPV is the Arc Thermal Performance Exposure Value for a garment in cal/cm2.)
2. If voltage-rated gloves are required, the leather protectors worn external to the rubber gloves satisfy this
requirement.
3. Class -1 is only defined if determined by Notes 3 or 6 of Table 3-3.9.1 of Part II.
4. “Regular weight” (minimum 12 oz./yd2 fabric weight), untreated, denim cotton blue jeans are acceptable in lieu of
FR pants. The FR pants used for Hazard/Risk Category 1 shall have a minimum ATPV of 5.
5. Alternate is to use FR coveralls (minimum ATPV of 5) instead of FR shirt and FR pants.
6. If the FR pants have a minimum ATPV of 8, long pants of untreated natural fiber are not required beneath the FR
pants.
7. Alternate is to use FR coveralls (minimum ATPV of 5) over untreated natural fiber pants and T-shirt.
8. A double-layer switching hood and hearing protection are required for the tasks designated 2* in Table 3-3.9.1 of
Part II.
9. Alternate is to use two sets of FR coveralls (each with a minimum ATPV of 5) over untreated natural fiber clothing,
instead of FR coveralls over FR shirt and FR pants over untreated natural fiber clothing.

Table C-3 Protective Clothing Characteristics

(Extracted from NFPA 70E-2000, Part II, Table 3-3.9.3)
Typical Protective Clothing Systems
Minimum Arc Thermal

Clothing Description (Number Performance Exposure
Hazard Risk Total Weight
of clothing layers is given in Value (ATPV)* or Breakopen
Category oz./yd2 Threshold Energy (EBT)*
parentheses)
Rating of PPE cal/cm2
0 Untreated Cotton (1) 4.5 - 7 N/A
1 FR Shirt and FR Pants (1) 4.5 - 8 5
2 Cotton Underwear plus FR Shirt and 9 - 12 8

FR Pants (2)

FR Pants plus FR Coverall (3)

FR Pants plus Double Layer
Switching Coat and Pants (4)
* ATPV is defined in the ASTM PS58 standard arc test method for flame resistant (FR) fabrics as the incident
energy that would just cause the onset of a second degree burn (1.2 cal/cm 2) EBT is reported according to
ASTM PS58 and is defined as the highest incident energy which did not cause FR fabric breakopen and did not
exceed the second degree burn criteria. EBT is reported when ATPV cannot be measured due to FR fabric
breakopen.

Table C-4 Simplified, Two-category Flame Resistant Clothing System

(The following quote and table are extracted from NFPA 70E-2000, Part II, Appendix F and Table
F-1)
“The use of Table F-1 [numbered as Table C-4, below] is suggested as a simplified approach to
assure adequate PPE for electrical workers within facilities with large and diverse electrical
systems. The clothing listed in Table F-1 fulfills the minimum FR clothing requirements of Tables
3-3.9.1 and 3-3.9.2. The clothing systems listed in this table should be used with the other PPE
appropriate for the Hazard/ Risk Category. See Table 3-3.9.2.”
Table C-4 Simplified, Two-Category, Flame Resistant Clothing System
CLOTHING* APPLICABLE TASKS
Everyday Work Clothing: All Hazard/Risk Category 1 and 2 tasks listed in

Table 3-3.9.1
FR long-sleeve shirt (minimum ATPV of 5) worn over an
untreated cotton T-shirt with FR pants (minimum ATPV On systems operating at less than 1000 volts, these
of 8) tasks include work on all equipment except
Or · insertion or removal of low-voltage motor starter

“buckets,”
FR coveralls (minimum ATPV of 5) worn over an
untreated cotton T-shirt (or an untreated natural fiber · insertion or removal of power circuit breakers with
long-sleeve shirt) with untreated natural fiber pants. the switchgear doors open, or
· removal of bolted covers from switchgear.
On systems operating at 1000 volts or greater, tasks

also include the operation, insertion, or removal of
switching devices with equipment enclosure doors
closed.
Electrical “Switching” Clothing: All Hazard/Risk Category 3 and 4 tasks listed in

Table 3-3.9.1
Double-layer FR flash jacket and FR bib overalls worn
over either FR coveralls (minimum ATPV of 5) or FR On systems operating at 1000 volts or greater, these
long-sleeve shirt and FR pants (minimum ATPV of 5), tasks include work on exposed energized parts of all
worn over untreated natural fiber long-sleeve shirt and equipment.
pants, worn over an untreated cotton T-shirt
On systems of less than 1000 volts, tasks include
Or insertion or removal of low-voltage motor starter MCC
“buckets,” insertion or removal of power circuit breakers
Insulated FR coveralls (with a minimum ATPV of 25, with the switchgear enclosure doors open, and removal
independent of other layers) worn over untreated of bolted covers from switchgear
natural fiber long-sleeve shirt with untreated denim
cotton blue jeans (“regular weight,” minimum 12 oz./yd. 2
fabric weight), worn over an untreated cotton T-shirt.
* Note other PPE required for the specific tasks listed in Tables 3-3.9.1 and 3-3.9.2, which include double-layer FR
flash hoods, FR hardhat liners, safety glasses or safety goggles, hard hat, hearing protection, leather gloves,
voltage-rated gloves, and voltage-rated tools.

Appendix D
Sample Calculation of Flash Protection Boundary DC, Arc in
Open Air Ema, and Arc in Cubic Box Emb
Note: Dc = distance in feet of person from arc source for a just curable burn
For systems which are 600 volts and below, the flash protection boundary is 4.0 feet, based on the product
of clearing times of 0.1 seconds and the available fault currents of 50 kA or any combination not to exceed
300 kA cycles (5,000 ampere seconds).
At voltage levels above 600 volts, the flash protection boundary is the distance at which the incident
energy level equals 1.2 cal/cm2.
The flash protection boundary can alternatively be calculated as shown below.
A. Sample Calculation - Flash Protection Boundary Dc (just curable burn distance)
1. Calculation is on a 4,160-volt bus.
2. Transformer MVA (and base MVA) = 10 MVA.
3. Transformer impedance on 10 MVA base = 5.5%.
4. Circuit breaker clearing time = 6 cycles.
Note: Required formulas are located in NFPA 70E-2000, Part II, Appendix B-2
Calculate the short-circuit current:
Isc = {[MVA Base x 106] / [1.732 x V]} x {100 / %Z}
= {[10 x 106] / [1.732 x 4,160]} x {100 / 5.5}
= 25,000
Calculate the power in the arc:
P = 1.732 x 4,160 x 25,000 x 10-6 x .7072
P = 90 MW
Calculate the curable burn distance Dc
Dc = {2.65 x [1.732 x 4,160 x 25,000 x 10-6] x 0.1}1/2
= 6.8 or 7 feet
Or, calculate the curable burn distance Dc using an alternative method:
Dc = [53 x 10 x .1]1/2 = 7.28 feet
B. Sample Calculation — Arc in Open Air Ema
Incident Energy produced by a three-phase arc on systems rated 600 volts and below:
Calculate Maximum open arc incident energy Ema
Ema = (5271)(DA)-1.9593 (tA)[0.0016(Isc)2 - 0.0076(Isc) +0.8938] = Ema in cal/cm2

Ema = maximum open arc incident energy, cal/cm2

DA = distance from arc electrodes, inches (for distances 18 inches and greater)
tA = arc duration, seconds
Isc = bolted fault short circuit current, kA (for the range of 16 to 50 kA)
For Isc = 25 kA, tA = 0.1 seconds, DA = 24 inches
Ema = (5271)(24)-1.9593 (0.1)[0.0016(25)2 - 0.0076(25) +0.8938] = 1.8 cal/cm2
Note: This would require a Category 0 PPE system
For Isc = 50 kA, tA = 0.1 seconds, DA = 24 inches
Ema = (5271)(24)-1.9593 (0.1)[0.0016(50)2 - 0.0076(50) +0.8938] = 4.7 cal/cm2
Note: This would require a Category 1 PPE system.
C1. Sample Calculation - Arc in Cubic Box Emb
Calculate Maximum arc in cubic box incident energy Emb
Emb = (1038.7)( DB )-1.4738 (tA)[0.0093(Isc)2 - 0.3453(Isc) + 5.9675] = Emb in cal/cm2
Emb = maximum 20 in. cubic box incident energy, cal/cm2
DB = distance from arc electrodes, inches (for distances 18 inches and greater)
tA = arc duration, seconds
Isc = bolted fault short circuit current, kA (for the range of 16 to 50 kA)
For Isc = 25 kA, tA = 0.1 seconds, DB = 24 inches
Emb = (1038.7)(24)-1.4738 (0.1)[0.0093(25)2 - 0.3453(25) + 5.9675] = 3.0 cal/cm2
Emb = (1038.7)(24)-1.4738 (0.1)[0.0093(50)2 - 0.3453(50) + 5.9675] = 11.5 cal/cm2
C2. Sample Calculation — Arc in Cubic Box Emb -- 480 volt motor starter “bucket” with
upstream protection time of 0.18 second
Emb = (1038.7)( DB )-1.4738 (tA)[0.0093(Isc)2 - 0.3453(Isc) + 5.9675] = Emb in cal/cm2
Emb = (1038.7)(18)-1.4738 (0.18)[0.0093(24)2 - 0.3453(24) + 5.9675] = 8.0 cal/cm2

C.3 Sample Calculation — Arc in Cubic Box Emb -- 480 volt motor starter “bucket” with
upstream protection time of 0.10 second
Emb = (1038.7)( DB)-1.4738 (tA)[0.0093(Isc)2 - 0.3453(Isc) + 5.9675] = Emb in cal/cm2
Emb = (1038.7)(18)-1.4738 (0.10)[0.0093(35)2 - 0.3453(35) + 5.9675] = 7.7 cal/cm2

Appendix E
Recommended Personal Protective Equipment
Manufacturer and
Item Available Sizes Color
Model No. (Note 6)
Clothing (Note 1)
Men’s Coveralls Workrite, 110NMX-45 Short, Regular, Long Royal Blue

4.5 oz. Nomex IIIA Chest sizes 34 - 56
Women’s Coveralls Workrite, 1114SB Lengths Average, Tall Royal Blue

4.5 oz. Nomex IIIA Sizes 6 - 22
Insulated Coveralls Workrite, 590NMX-60 Short, Regular, Long Royal Blue, Navy, Khaki
6.0 oz. Nomex IIIA over Chest sizes 34 - 56
9 oz. Nomex insulation
(Note 3)
Optional Insulated Hood Workrite, 577NMX-60 One size fits all Royal Blue, Navy, Khaki
for above, will fit over hard
hat
Men’s Utility Shirt Workrite, 290NMX-45 Sleeve lengths: Short, Light Blue, Navy, Khaki
(long sleeve), Regular, Long
Women’s Utility Shirt Workrite, 2914xx Sleeve lengths: Short, xx = SL (Light Blue),
(long sleeve), Regular, Long SN (Navy), SK (Khaki)
4.5 oz. Nomex IIIA Sizes 4 - 24
Men’s Utility Shirt Workrite, 290NMX-60 Sleeve lengths: Short, Light Blue, Navy, Khaki
(long sleeve), Regular, Long
Men’s Western Style Shirt Workrite, 228IND-70 Sleeve lengths: Short, Medium Blue, Navy, Royal
(long sleeve), Regular, Long Blue
7.0 oz. Indura Chest sizes S - XXL
Men’s Utility Shirt Workrite, 298IND-70 Sleeve lengths: Short, Medium Blue,
(long sleeve), Regular, Long Khaki
7.0 oz. Indura Chest sizes S - XXL
Men’s Dress Uniform Shirt Bulwark, SCG2LD Regular, S - 3XL Light Blue Denim
(long sleeve), Long M - 3XL
7.0 oz. Indura
Women’s Dress Uniform Bulwark, SCU3LB Regular, S - 3XL Light Blue

Shirt
(long sleeve), Twill Weave
7.0 oz. Indura
Women’s Western Style Workrite, 229IND-70 Sleeve lengths: Short, Navy

Shirt Regular, Long
(long sleeve), Chest sizes S - XXL
7.0 oz. Indura
Men’s Industrial Pants Workrite, 400NMX-75 Waist 28 - 34, Inseam to Royal Blue, Navy, Spruce
7.5 oz. Nomex IIIA 34; Waist 35 - 50, Inseam
to 36

Manufacturer and
Model No. (Note 6)
Men’s Pleated Pants Workrite, 440NMX-75 Waist 28 - 34, Inseam to Navy

to 36
Men’s Jean-cut Denim Workrite, 410NMX-85 Waist 28 - 34, Inseam to Denim

Pants 34; Waist 35 - 50, Inseam
8.5 oz. Nomex IIIA to 36
Men’s Jean-cut Denim Workrite, 418IND-12 Waist 28 - 34, Inseam to Denim

Pants 34; Waist 35 - 50, Inseam
12.5 oz. Indura to 36
Men’s Jean-cut Pants Workrite, 410NMX-75 Waist 28 - 34, Inseam to Royal Blue, Navy
to 36
Men’s Denim Jean Bulwark, PCJ2DD Waist 28 - 50, Inseam to Blue Denim
Twill Weave, 37
11.5 oz. Indura
Women’s Industrial Pants Workrite, 4317Sx Sizes 4 - 24, Inseam to 34 x = B (Royal Blue),
7.5 oz. Nomex IIIA N (Navy)
Women’s Industrial Pants Workrite, 409IND-95 Sizes 4 - 24, Inseam to 34 Navy

9.5 oz. Nomex IIIA
Women’s Work Pant, Twill Bulwark, PCW3NV Sizes 4 - 24, Inseam to 34 Navy
Weave, 9 oz Indura
Hard Hat Liner Workrite, 7900SZ One size fits all Black
4.5 oz. Nomex IIIA over
9 oz. Nomex insulation
Rainwear
Gore-Tex/Nomex Parka Workrite, 610GOR Small - XX Large Yellow, Navy

Jacket and Bib Overall (jacket); 630GOR (overall)
(Note 2)
PVC on a 1.6 oz. Nomex/ Nasco, ArcLite™ 1000 Small - 5X Large (contact Burnt Orange
Kevlar Blend (Note 4) Series (1103JBO for Nasco for sizing)
jacket, 1101TBO for
overall)
PVC on a 2.7 oz Nomex/ Nasco, ArcTuff™ 2000 Small - 5X Large (contact Yellow, Fluorescent
Kevlar Blend (Note 4) Series Nasco for sizing) Orange
Flash Suit (Rated 50 cal/

cm2)
ARC50™ Flash Jacket Oberon, ARC50-CT-xxx xxx = L (42-44),

Multiple layer XL (46-48), 2XL (50-52),
3XL (54-56), 4XL (58-60),
5XL (62-64)
ARC50™ Flash Bib Oberon, ARC50-PANTS- xxx = L (36-38), XL (40-

Overalls (pants) xxx 42), 2XL (44-46), 3XL (48-
Multiple Layer 50), 4XL (52-54), 5XL (56-
58)

Manufacturer and
Model No. (Note 6)
Note: Flash Suits and

Flash Hoods rated 15 cal/
cm2, 31 cal/cm2, and 100
cal/cm2, are also available
from Oberon. See the
Oberon catalog.
Faceshield (for up to 8
cal/cm2 exposure -- i.e.,
Hazard/Risk Category 2)
Face-Fit™ Faceshield, 8 x Oberon, For use with integral Hard Slight green tint
14 in, Arc-X™ Resin 21ARCAF-C+500 Cap (supplied) -- Other
0.080 inch thick window, models available to fit
with anti-fog coating user's specific hard hat
Flash Hood
ARC50™ Multiple-Layer Oberon, ARC50-C For use with integral Hard

Flash Hood -- 7 x 13 in, Cap (supplied)
dual-layer Arc-X™ Resin
with polycarbonate insert
0.080 inch thick window,
with anti-fog coating.
Rated 50 cal/cm2
Replacement Window for Oberon, ARC50AF-H N/A Green tint

Hood, with anti-fog
coating -- Arc-X™ Resin
with polycarbonate insert
0.080 inch thick window
10 oz Nomex IIIA with a 6 Nasco, ArcHood N/A Yellow, Orange, with other
oz double-layer front, colors available
ArcShield™ plastic
chemical “alloy” window,
light greenish amber tint.
Rated 45 cal/cm2
Hand Protection -
Voltage-Rated Gloves
(Note 5)
Low-Voltage Rubber Salisbury, 11-00BL 8 - 12 Blue

Gloves, Class 00 (500
VAC, 750 VDC), 11"
Leather Protectors for Salisbury, 110G (elastic 8 - 12 N/A

Class 00 Rubber Gloves, back) or 100S (pull strap)
10"
Low-Voltage Rubber Salisbury, 5-11Y 8 - 12 Yellow

Gloves, Class 0 (1000
VAC), 11"

Manufacturer and
Model No. (Note 6)
Leather Protectors for Salisbury, 200S 8 - 12 N/A

Class 0 Rubber Gloves, (pull strap)
10"
Glove Bag for Low- Salisbury, 35-12 N/A N/A

Voltage 11" Gloves
High-Voltage Rubber Salisbury, 20-14B 8 - 12 Black

Gloves, Class 2 (17,000
VAC), 14" (Note 4)
Leather Protectors for Salisbury, 133-4 8 - 12 N/A

Class 2 Rubber Gloves,
12"
Glove Bag for High- Salisbury, 35-14 N/A N/A

Voltage 14" Gloves
Glove Liners for use with Salisbury (see Salisbury One size fits all N/A
all rubber gloves under catalog)
various weather
conditions (cotton, fleece,
wool, and thermal)
Notes:
1 Other women’s workwear is available for maternity wear; contact Workrite.
2 This garment qualifies as “2 layers” of FR clothing. A cost-effective “Hazard/Risk Category 4” FR
clothing system could include this garment worn over 4.5 oz. Nomex coveralls and untreated natural
fiber shirt or T-shirt and untreated natural fiber pants, worn with an appropriately rated switching
hood.
3 This garment qualifies as “3-layer” FR clothing. A cost-effective “Hazard/Risk Category 4” FR cloth-
ing system could include this garment worn over an untreated natural fiber shirt, T-shirt, and denim
blue jeans, worn with an appropriately rated switching hood.
4 A cost-effective “Hazard/Risk Category 4” FR clothing system could include this garment worn over
4.5 oz. Nomex fabric, worn with an appropriately rated switching hood. The burnt-orange ArcLite™/
Nomex layered system has been tested and met an ATPV of 40.
5 Where more than one “high voltage” level exists at a facility (e.g., 4.16 kV and 13.8 kV), recommend
keeping only the highest “Class” of high voltage glove available for use.
6 Company addresses, phone numbers, and website links:
Bulwark®
545 Marriott Drive
Nashville, TN 37214
(800-667-0700 --United States and Canada call toll free)
http://www.bulwark.com/
Nasco Industries, Inc

3 NE Twenty-First Street
Washington, IN 47501
(812-254-7393, 800-767-4288 --United States and Canada call toll free)
http://nascoinc.com/index.html

Manufacturer and
Model No. (Note 6)
Oberon Company
435 Coggeshall Street
P.O. Box 61008
New Bedford, MA 02746-0008
(800-322-3348 -- United States and Canada call toll free)
http://www.oberoncompany.com/index.en.html
W. H. Salisbury & Company

7520 North Long Avenue
P.O. Box 1060, Skokie, IL 60077
(847-679-6700)
http://www.whsalisbury.com/
Workrite®
500 East Third Street
P.O. Box 1192
Oxnard, CA 93032-1192
(805-483-0175, 800-521-1888 -- United States and Canada call toll free)
http://www.workrite.com/

Appendix F
Work Area Protection
A. Introduction
Work area protection is the adequate safeguarding or protecting of pedestrians, motorists, workers and
equipment by the use of adequate barriers, warning signs, lights, flags, high visibility vests, traffic cones,
high-level standards, barricade rope or flagpersons on approaches and in the vicinity of work areas,
excavations, open manholes or parked equipment.
Work area protection is accomplished by the use of good informative and protective devices keeping in
mind that a safe installation requires the use of these devices in relation to the location of the employees
and the equipment involved. The use of these devices must be coupled with proper planning, design,
installation, inspection, maintenance and the use of good common sense and will greatly minimize the
possibility of accidents. It is of the utmost importance that the work area be properly identified and that
warning devices say what they mean, to convey the message to the employees well in advance of arrival at
the work area.
The employee must be warned in advance, then regulated and guided safely through or around the work
area. Proper work area protection should be planned to ensure the safety and protection of the public and
the equipment.
High visibility vests or equivalent should be worn by employees whenever working in or around vehicular
traffic areas. If work is to be done at night, wear reflectorized material.
B. Devices to be Used
Only those signs, standards, barricades, flags and cones that conform to federal, state or local codes should
be used.
All state and local traffic codes should be followed when providing work area protection.
During night operations or in periods of reduced visibility, take special precautions. Use adequate
warning equipment, which may include flashing lights, flares or area illumination.
Remove warning devices and equipment as soon as the hazard is eliminated.
Store warning devices and equipment in a proper manner when not in use or removed form the work area.
C. Flagpersons
Use flagpersons or other appropriate traffic controls whenever there is any doubt that effective protection
can be provided by signs, signals and barricades and where state or local standards dictate their use.
Flagpersons should:
Wear a blaze orange warning vest or other high visibility garment. Warning garments worn at night should
be of a reflectorized material.
Place themselves in a protected position to reduce possibility of injury from traffic.
Insure they can fully observe the operation and guide vehicular traffic in such a manner as to minimize the
possibility of accidents or injury.
Face traffic when giving signals.

Give positive, direct signals that leave no doubt as to their meaning.

When flagpersons are used at both ends of a job site, use reliable communications or prearranged signals to
insure proper traffic flow.
Flagpersons using hand-signaling equipment should insure that signals provide sufficient warning to
protect themselves and the work site.
Use signal flags only in an emergency. The flags should be red and at least 24 inches square.
Sign paddles (stop and slow) should be on a 6-foot staff.
In periods of darkness or reduced visibility red lights should be used. Flashlights may be used in
emergencies.

Appendix G
Job Briefing Checklist
Planning Checklist
Identify
o What are the hazards? o Potential for arc flash
o What voltage levels are involved? o Unusual work conditions
o What skills are required? o Is this a multiple-person job?
o “Foreign” voltage source present?
Ask
o Can the equipment be de-energized? o Is a “standby person” required?
o Are there possible backfeeds of the circuits to be worked on?
Check
o Job plans o Safety procedures
o One lines and vendor prints o Vendor information
o Status board o For up-to-date information on plant and vendor

resources
o Individuals familiar with facility?
Know
o What is the job?
o Who is in charge?
o Who else needs to know? … Communicate!
Think
o About the extra event … What if? o Use the right tools and equipment, including PPE
o Lock - Tag - Test - Try o Install barriers and barricades
o Test for voltage - FIRST o What else …?
o Install and remove grounds
Prepare for an emergency

o Standby person CPR trained? o What is the exact work location?
o Telephone location? o How is the equipment shut off in an emergency?
o Fire alarm locations? o Where is the emergency equipment?
o Confined space rescue available if required? o Is the required emergency equipment available?
o Emergency phone numbers? o Radio communications available?
o Extinguisher? o

Appendix H
Substation Project Installation Safety Assessment Checklist
Project Title:_____________________________________ Date:__________________

Auditor:_________________________________________ Time:
Contractor:_______________________________________ Supervisor:
Project Progression:____________________________________ _
Item Yes No N/A Comments
1. Employees wearing proper PPE as required for job o o o

being performed (eye protection, hard hat, boots, etc.)?
2. All wearing protective clothing where necessary? o o o
3. All completed electrical safe work practices safety o o o

orientation?
4. All Hot Work/Confined space Entry/Digging permits o o o

posted and conditions followed
5. Aerial device/crane communication procedures o o o

followed, operators/crew trained?
6. Electrical equipment in good repair, grounded, utilizing o o o
GFCI?
7. Lockout & tagout, procedures followed, training o o o

completed?
8. Excavations/Trenches shored, sloped, set-up properly o o o

(OSHA 1926.650-652)?
9. Training of electrical safe work practices is provided. o o o
10. Are safe work practice rules readily available to all? o o o
11. Enforcement of electrical safe work practices is consis- o o o

tent.
12. All qualified and authorized personnel understand that o o o
“Electrical equipment and lines are considered ener-
gized until put in an electrically safe work condition, i.e.,
tested or otherwise determined to be de-energized, and
grounded” as stated in electrical safety practice.
13. All steps outlined in electrical safety practice to estab- o o o
lish a zero-potential work area are followed.
14. Grounds are installed as per electrical safety practice o o o

and applied in the proper manner.

15. Documented Plans exist for all repetitive high voltage o o o

work and all switching is done from written switching
orders. Clearance and/or lockout/tagout procedures are
adequate.
16. Pre-work briefings are held to discuss Job Plans o o o

(switching orders, clearance procedures, lock/tag
requirements, PPE requirements, job hazards).
17. Documentation shows that equipment, live line tools, o o o

and gloves are tested with appropriate frequency,
maintained, and stored correctly.
18. Live line tools are used for all high voltage work. o o o
19. Safety awareness/behavior meets expectations? o o o
20. Safe approach distances are understood and adhered o o o

to by authorized, and qualified personnel.
21. All mobile equipment operators understand Ten (10) o o o

Foot Rule.
22. Critical safety components of mechanical elevation and o o o
rotating equipment are inspected before use on each
shift using the manufacturers recommended checklist.
23. Electrical hazards are taken into consideration when o o o

mobile equipment is in transit. Escorts are used when
required.
24. Work zones are established. o o o
25. Mobile equipment that could potentially enter the 10 o o o

foot restricted zone is properly grounded and or barri-
caded.
26. Materials, equipment, and temporary structures are not o o o

stored on right-of-ways under non-insulated high
voltage lines closer than 10 feet horizontal.
27. Unnecessary materials and equipment are not stored in o o o

substation yard.
28. Guards are provided around live parts where electrical o o o
safety hazards may exist.
29. A fall prevention survey specific to high-voltage elec- o o o

trical has been completed.
30. Fall arrest equipment is used when appropriate and o o o

inspected before each use.
31. Cranes/Heavy Equipment/Vehicles inspected, safe, set- o o o
up properly?
32. Rigging correct, and in good condition? o o o

33. Roads, walkways properly blocked and flagged where o o o

necessary? Fire accesses clear?
34. Scaffolding properly installed/inspected/tagged? o o o
35. Ladders used Properly o o o
36. Tools used properly? In good condition? o o o
37. Proper lifting methods/material handling? o o o
38. Retaining pins on air hose/tool connections? o o o
39. Welding/cutting equipment used properly and in good o o o

repair?
40. Compressed gas cylinder secured upright and in proper o o o
location?
41. Good housekeeping, environmental conditions safe? o o o
42. Hazardous corners, protrusions, pinch points guarded? o o o
43. Special warning signage posted as necessary? o o o

Appendix I
Substation Inspection Checklist
Plant _________________Substation _________________ Inspection Date _________

Inspector ______________________
1. Signage - Substation Identification, Entry Require- o o o

ments, Electrical Hazard Warning
2. Gates Locked o o o
3. Fence Secure o o o
4. Debris or unauthorized Material In Substation Lot o o o
5. Vegetation in Substation Lot o o o
6. Fence, Gate, Other Metal Surfaces Bonded and o o o

Grounded
7. Guarding and hazard warning - Low Profile Equipment, o o o

Dimensional Clearances, Potential Safety Items
8. Equipment Identification/labels - Switches, Trans- o o o

formers, Breakers
9. Operation Locks on Switches to Prevent Unintentional o o o
Operation
10. Bushings and Insulators in Good Condition o o o
11. Indications of Burning, Arcing or Heat Buildup In Elec- o o o

trical Joints
12. Evidence of Oil Leaks o o o
13. Substation Lighting, Emergency Lighting o o o

NAME OF EQUIPMENT
TRANSFORMER
Name on transformer
Top Oil Temperature
Oil Level
Tank Pressure, psi
Fan operation
Pump operation
Oil leaks?
Abnormal noises?
Condition of:
· Paint
· Bushings
· Terminals, bushing studs, other electrical connections -
evidence of corrosion or heating?
· Radiators
CIRCUIT BREAKER
Name on circuit breaker
Oil leaks?
Condition of:
· Paint
· Bushings
· Terminals, bushing studs, other electrical connections -
evidence of corrosion or heating?
SWITCHES
Name on switch
Switch operating handle and operating pipe bonded to
ground?
Switching ground mat available and bonded to ground?
Switch fully closed or open?
Evidence of corrosion or heating?
STATION BATTERIES
Condition of batteries and terminals
Volts
Battery Station Ventilation
BATTERY CHARGER
Volts
Condition of eyewash station

NAME OF EQUIPMENT
ENCLOSED SWITCHGEAR
Names on switches
“Feed to”, Fed From” information on switch
Condition of cabinet:
· Paint
· Doors closed
· Sign of corrosion or heating?
· Cabinet grounded
SPARE CIRCUIT BREAKERS, GROUNDING AND

TEST DEVICES
Clean and ready for use?
Identification of voltage, ampere, and breaker rating
OTHER EQUIPMENT
SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM OF POWER SYSTEM

Posted in area?
Drawing up to date?

General Comments:
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________

Appendix J
Electrical Control Room Inspection Checklist
Plant _________________ Electrical Control Room __________ Inspection Date _________

Inspector __________________
1. Signage - Identification of Control Room or Area Entry o o o

Requirements, Electrical Hazard Warning
2. Entry Doors Locked, Control of Unauthorized Personnel o o o
3. Storage of Material in Electrical Control Room o o o
4. Items Stored in front of Switchgear or MCCs o o o
5. Debris In Electrical Control Room (Housekeeping items) o o o
6. Single Line Diagram of Power System, Switchgear, and o o o

MCCs Posted in Area, Drawing up to date
7. Equipment Identification (labels) - Switchgear, Trans- o o o

formers, Switches, Breakers
8. Metal Surfaces of Transformers, Switchgear, or MCCs o o o

Bonded and Grounded
9. Switchgear or MCC Doors Open, Covers Missing on o o o
Electrical Equipment Enclosures
10. Guarding and Hazard Warning - Live parts, Low Profile o o o

Equipment, Dimensional Clearances, Potential Safety
Items
11. Evidence of Abnormalities in Electrical Equipment, o o o

Physical Damage, Abnormal noises
12. STATION BATTERIES — Condition of Batteries and o o o
Terminals, Volts, Battery Station Ventilation
13. BATTERY CHARGER — Volts, Condition of Eyewash o o o

Station
14. Electrical Control Room lighting, Emergency Lighting o o o
General Comments:

Appendix K
Test Procedure for Daily Inspection of Rubber Gloves
Inspect insulating rubber gloves and air test the gloves daily, before use, and any other time when it could
be reasonably suspected that damage has occurred.
The following procedure outlines the air test:
1. Hold each glove with the thumb and forefingers as

illustrated.
2. Twirl the glove around quickly to fill with air.
3. Trap the air by squeezing the gauntlet with one

hand. Use the other hand to squeeze the palm,
fingers and thumb while looking for weaknesses or
defects.
4. Hold the glove to the face to detect air leakage or

hold it to the ear and listen for escaping air.
5. Remove insulating gloves suspected of being

defective from service immediately and return the
gloves for testing

Appendix L
Safety Tags

Appendix M
Grounding Cable and Jumper Ratings
(Ref ASTM-F855. Copyright ASTM. Reprinted with permission.)
Calculated Short Circuit Properties1
Withstand Rating
Grounding Cable Size, Continuous
AWG
Symmetrical kA rms Ultimate Capacity2 Symmetrical kA rms 60 Hz Current
60 Hz
Rating,
A rms
15 cycles 30 cycles 6 cycles 15 cycles 30 cycles 60 cycles
Copper Aluminum3 60 Hz
(250 ms) (500 ms) (100 ms) (250 ms) (500 ms) (1 s)
#2 1.0 14.5 10 29 18 13 9 200
1/0 3/0 21 15 47 30 21 14 250
2/0 4/0 27 20 59 37 26 18 300
3/0 250 MCM 36 25 74 47 33 23 350
4/0 300 MCM 43 30 94 60 42 29 500
250 MCM 350 MCM 54 39 120 70 49 35 450
350 MCM 500 MCM 74 54 150 98 69 49 550
1. Withstand and ultimate short circuit properties are based on performance with surges not exceeding 20%
asymmetry factor.
2. Ultimate capacity represents a calculated symmetrical current which the cable or jumper is capable of con-
ducting for the specified time. These currents are based upon the fusing (melting) current-time values for
copper, derived from I. M. Onderdonk’s equation with an ambient temperature of 40oC.
3. Aluminum cables must be two AWG sizes larger than copper for equal current ratings.

Appendix N
Equipotential Grounding Techniques
Single Point Grounding Double Point Grounding
Remote Grounding
Personal Grounding

Appendix O
Principles of Electrical Safety
Understand, accept, and practice all of the following safety principles:
Maintain Distance
An effective way to maintain safety is to keep a safe distance from live parts.
Test Before Touch
Consider every electrical conductor or circuit part energized until proven otherwise.
De-energize if Possible
De-energize all equipment before you work "on" or "near" exposed electrical conductors or circuit parts.
Recognize Potential Hazard
Installing barriers, barricades, and de-energizing (switching) are potentially hazardous tasks.
Plan Every Job
Plan every job carefully, regardless of size.
Anticipate Unexpected Events
Before beginning work, ask "What if..?" and decide what you will do if something goes wrong.
Use the Right Tool for the Job
Identify the tools required and do not perform the task until you have the correct tool.
Use Procedures as Tools
Establish and adhere to procedures to accomplish a job safely.
Isolate the Equipment (put in an Electrically Safe Work Condition)
Lock, Tag, Try and Test.
Identify the Hazard
Identify and address each hazard.
Minimize the Hazard
Use insulating barriers, safety grounds, and safe work practices.
Protect the Person
Avoid exposure to electrical hazards wherever possible. Use appropriate personal protective equipment
(PPE) for each potential hazard.
Assess People’s Abilities
Evaluate each person’s qualifications, capabilities, and physical and mental state at the time a potentially
hazardous task is to be done.
Audit These Principles
Audit the principles frequently to verify that they reflect current practices.

Appendix P
OSHA Regulations (Standards - 29 CFR)
This appendix contains the following OSHA regulations:

1910.137 Electrical protective devices
1910.147 The control of hazardous energy (lockout/tagout)
1910.147AppA Typical minimal lockout procedures
1910.269 Electric Power Generation, Transmission, and Distribution
1910.269AppA Flow Charts
1910.269AppB Working on Exposed Energized Parts
1910.269AppC Protection from Step and Touch Potentials
1910.269AppD Methods of Inspecting and Testing Wood Poles
1910.301 Introduction
1910.302 Electric utilization systems
1910.303 General requirements
1910.304 Wiring design and protection
1910.305 Wiring methods, components, and equipment for general use
1910.306 Specific purpose equipment and installations
1910.307 Hazardous (classified) locations
1910.308 Special systems
1910.331 Scope
1910.332 Training
1910.333 Selection and use of work practices
1910.334 Use of equipment
1910.335 Safeguards for personnel protection
1910.399 Definitions applicable to this subpart
1910SubpartS Authority for 1910 Subpart S
1910SubpartSAppA Reference Documents
1910SubpartSAppB Explanatory Data
1910SubpartSAppC Tables, Notes, and Charts

Electrical protective devices. - 1910.137 Page 1 of 12
Text version
Home Index Search
Regulations (Standards - 29
CFR)
Electrical protective devices. - 1910.137
OSHA Regulations (Standards - 29 CFR) - Table of Contents
l Standard Number: 1910.137

l Standard Title: Electrical protective devices.
l SubPart Number: I
l SubPart Title: Personal Protective Equipment
Interpretation(s)
(a)
"Design requirements." Insulating blankets, matting, covers, line

hose, gloves, and sleeves made of rubber shall meet the following
requirements:
(a)(1)
"Manufacture and marking."
(a)(1)(i)
Blankets, gloves, and sleeves shall be produced by a seamless

process.
(a)(1)(ii)
Each item shall be clearly marked as follows:
(a)(1)(ii)(A)
http://www.osha-slc.gov/OshStd_data/1910_0137.html 11/9/2001
Class 0 equipment shall be marked Class 0.
(a)(1)(ii)(B)
(a)(1)(ii)(C)
(a)(1)(ii)(D)
(a)(1)(ii)(E)
..1910.137(a)(1)(ii)(F)
(a)(1)(ii)(F)
Non-ozone -resistant equipment other than matting shall be marked

Type I.
(a)(1)(ii)(G)
Ozone-resistant equipment other than matting shall be marked

Type II.
(a)(1)(ii)(H)
Other relevant markings, such as the manufacturer's identification

and the size of the equipment, may also be provided.
(a)(1)(iii)
Markings shall be nonconducting and shall be applied in such a

manner as not to impair the insulating qualities of the equipment.
(a)(1)(iv)
Markings on gloves shall be confined to the cuff portion of the
(a)(1)(ii)(B)
(a)(1)(ii)(C)
(a)(1)(ii)(D)
(a)(1)(ii)(E)
..1910.137(a)(1)(ii)(F)
(a)(1)(ii)(F)
Non-ozone -resistant equipment other than matting shall be marked

Type I.
(a)(1)(ii)(G)
Ozone-resistant equipment other than matting shall be marked

Type II.
(a)(1)(ii)(H)
Other relevant markings, such as the manufacturer's identification

and the size of the equipment, may also be provided.
(a)(1)(iii)
Markings shall be nonconducting and shall be applied in such a

manner as not to impair the insulating qualities of the equipment.
(a)(1)(iv)
Markings on gloves shall be confined to the cuff portion of the
glove.
(a)(2)
"Electrical requirements."
(a)(2)(i)
Equipment shall be capable of withstanding the a-c proof-test

voltage specified in Table I-2 or the d-c proof-test voltage specified
in Table I-3.
(a)(2)(i)(A)
The proof test shall reliably indicate that the equipment can
withstand the voltage involved.
(a)(2)(i)(B)
The test voltage shall be applied continuously for 3 minutes for

equipment other than matting and shall be applied continuously for
1 minute for matting.
..1910.137(a)(2)(i)(C)
(a)(2)(i)(C)
Gloves shall also be capable of withstanding the a-c proof-test

voltage specified in Table I-2 after a 16-hour water soak. (See the
note following paragraph (a)(3)(ii)(B) of this section.)
(a)(2)(ii)
When the a-c proof test is used on gloves, the 60-hertz proof-test
current may not exceed the values specified in Table I-2 at any
time during the test period.
(a)(2)(ii)(A)
If the a-c proof test is made at a frequency other than 60 hertz, the
permissible proof-test current shall be computed from the direct
ratio of the frequencies.
(a)(2)(ii)(B)
For the test, gloves (right side out) shall be filled with tap water
and immersed in water to a depth that is in accordance with Table
I-4. Water shall be added to or removed from the glove, as
necessary, so that the water level is the same inside and outside
the glove.
(a)(2)(ii)(C)
After the 16-hour water soak specified in paragraph (a)(2)(i)(C) of

this section, the 60-hertz proof-test current may exceed the values
given in Table I-2 by not more than 2 milliamperes.
(a)(2)(iii)
Equipment that has been subjected to a minimum breakdown

voltage test may not be used for electrical protection. (See the note
following paragraph (a)(3)(ii)(B) of this section.)
..1910.137(a)(2)(iv)
(a)(2)(iv)
Material used for Type II insulating equipment shall be capable of

withstanding an ozone test, with no visible effects. The ozone test
shall reliably indicate that the material will resist ozone exposure in
actual use. Any visible signs of ozone deterioration of the material,
such as checking, cracking, breaks, or pitting, is evidence of failure
to meet the requirements for ozone-resistant material. (See the
note following paragraph (a)(3)(ii)(B) of this section.)
(a)(3)
"Workmanship and finish."
(a)(3)(i)
Equipment shall be free of harmful physical irregularities that can

be detected by the tests or inspections required under this section.
(a)(3)(ii)
Surface irregularities that may be present on all rubber goods

because of imperfections on forms or molds or because of inherent
difficulties in the manufacturing process and that may appear as
indentations, protuberances, or imbedded foreign material are

acceptable under the following conditions:
(a)(3)(ii)(A)
The indentation or protuberance blends into a smooth slope when

the material is stretched.
(a)(3)(ii)(B)
Foreign material remains in place when the insulating material is

folded and stretches with the insulating material surrounding it.
Note: Rubber insulating equipment meeting the following national

consensus standards is deemed to be in compliance with paragraph
(a) of this section:
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) D 120-87,

Specification for Rubber Insulating Gloves.
ASTM D 178-93 (or D 178-88), Specification for Rubber Insulating

Matting.
ASTM D 1048-93 (or D 1048-88a), Specification for Rubber

Insulating Blankets.
ASTM D 1049-93 (or D 1049-88), Specification for Rubber

Insulating Covers.
ASTM D 1050-90, Specification for Rubber Insulating Line Hose.
ASTM D 1051-87, Specification for Rubber Insulating Sleeves.
These standards contain specifications for conducting the various

tests required in paragraph (a) of this section. For example, the a-c
and d-c proof tests, the breakdown test, the water soak procedure,
and the ozone test mentioned in this paragraph are described in
detail in the ASTM standards.
(b)
"In-service care and use."
(b)(1)
Electrical protective equipment shall be maintained in a safe,

reliable condition.
(b)(2)
The following specific requirements apply to insulating blankets,

covers, line hose, gloves, and sleeves made of rubber:
..1910.137(b)(2)(i)
(b)(2)(i)
Maximum use voltages shall conform to those listed in Table I-5.
(b)(2)(ii)
Insulating equipment shall be inspected for damage before each

day's use and immediately following any incident that can
reasonably be suspected of having caused damage. Insulating
gloves shall be given an air test, along with the inspection.
(b)(2)(iii)
Insulating equipment with any of the following defects may not be

used:
(b)(2)(iii)(A)
A hole, tear, puncture, or cut;
(b)(2)(iii)(B)
Ozone cutting or ozone checking (the cutting action produced by

ozone on rubber under mechanical stress into a series of interlacing
cracks);
(b)(2)(iii)(C)
An embedded foreign object;
(b)(2)(iii)(D)
Any of the following texture changes: swelling, softening,
hardening, or becoming sticky or inelastic.
(b)(2)(iii)(E)
Any other defect that damages the insulating properties.
..1910.137(b)(2)(iv)
(b)(2)(iv)
Insulating equipment found to have other defects that might affect

its insulating properties shall be removed from service and returned
for testing under paragraphs (b)(2)(viii) and (b)(2)(ix) of this
section.
(b)(2)(v)
Insulating equipment shall be cleaned as needed to remove foreign

substances.
(b)(2)(vi)
Insulating equipment shall be stored in such a location and in such

a manner as to protect it from light, temperature extremes,
excessive humidity, ozone, and other injurious substances and
conditions.
(b)(2)(vii)
Protector gloves shall be worn over insulating gloves, except as

follows:
(b)(2)(vii)(A)
Protector gloves need not be used with Class 0 gloves, under

limited -use conditions, where small equipment and parts
manipulation necessitate unusually high finger dexterity.
Note: Extra care is needed in the visual examination of the glove

and in the avoidance of handling sharp objects.
(b)(2)(vii)(B)
Any other class of glove may be used for similar work without
protector gloves if the employer can demonstrate that the

possibility of physical damage to the gloves is small and if the class
of glove is one class higher than that required for the voltage
involved. Insulating gloves that have been used without protector
gloves may not be used at a higher voltage until they have been
tested under the provisions of paragraphs (b)(2)(viii) and (b)(2)(ix)
of this section.
..1910.137(b)(2)(viii)
(b)(2)(viii)
Electrical protective equipment shall be subjected to periodic

electrical tests. Test voltages and the maximum intervals between
tests shall be in accordance with Table I-5 and Table I-6.
(b)(2)(ix)
The test method used under paragraphs (b)(2)(viii) and (b)(2)(xi)

of this section shall reliably indicate whether the insulating
equipment can withstand the voltages involved.
Note: Standard electrical test methods considered as meeting this

requirement are given in the following national consensus
standards:
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) D 120-87,

Specification for Rubber Insulating Gloves.
ASTM D 1048-93, Specification for Rubber Insulating Blankets.
ASTM D 1049-93, Specification for Rubber Insulating Covers.
ASTM D 1050-90, Specification for Rubber Insulating Line Hose.
ASTM D 1051-87, Specification for Rubber Insulating Sleeves.
ASTM F 478-92, Specification for In-Service Care of Insulating Line

Hose and Covers.
ASTM F 479-93, Specification for In-Service Care of Insulating

Blankets.
ASTM F 496-93b, Specification for In-Service Care of Insulating
Gloves and Sleeves.
(b)(2)(x)
Insulating equipment failing to pass inspections or electrical tests

may not be used by employees, except as follows:
(b)(2)(x)(A)
Rubber insulating line hose may be used in shorter lengths with the
defective portion cut off.
(b)(2)(x)(B)
Rubber insulating blankets may be repaired using a compatible

patch that results in physical and electrical properties equal to
those of the blanket.
(b)(2)(x)(C)
Rubber insulating blankets may be salvaged by severing the

defective area from the undamaged portion of the blanket. The
resulting undamaged area may not be smaller than 22 inches by 22
inches (560 mm by 560 mm) for Class 1, 2, 3, and 4 blankets.
..1910.137(b)(2)(x)(D)
(b)(2)(x)(D)
Rubber insulating gloves and sleeves with minor physical defects,

such as small cuts, tears, or punctures, may be repaired by the
application of a compatible patch. Also, rubber insulating gloves
and sleeves with minor surface blemishes may be repaired with a
compatible liquid compound. The patched area shall have electrical
and physical properties equal to those of the surrounding material.
Repairs to gloves are permitted only in the area between the wrist
and the reinforced edge of the opening.
(b)(2)(xi)
Repaired insulating equipment shall be retested before it may be

used by employees.
(b)(2)(xii)
The employer shall certify that equipment has been tested in

accordance with the requirements of paragraphs (b)(2)(viii), (b)(2)
(ix), and (b)(2)(xi) of this section. The certification shall identify
the equipment that passed the test and the date it was tested.
Note: Marking of equipment and entering the results of the tests

and the dates of testing onto logs are two acceptable means of
meeting this requirement.
Table I-2. - A-C Proof-Test Requirements

____________________________________________________________________
| |
| | Maximum proof-test current, mA (gloves only)
| |____________________________________________
| | | | |
| Proof-test | 267-mm | 356-mm | 406-mm | 457-mm
Class of | voltage | (10.5-in) | (14-in) | (16-in) | (18-in)
equipment| rms V | glove | glove | glove | glove
_________|____________|___________|_________|_________|____________
| | | |
0........| 5,000 | 8 | 12 | 14 | 16
1........| 10,000 | ......... | 14 | 16 | 18
2........| 20,000 | ......... | 16 | 18 | 20
3........| 30,000 | ......... | 18 | 20 | 22
4........| 40,000 | ......... | ....... | 22 | 24
______________________|___________|_________|_________|____________
Table I-3. - D-C Proof-Test Requirements

____________________________________________________________________
|
Class of equipment | Proof-test voltage
__________________________________|________________________________
|
0.................................| 20,000
1.................................| 40,000
2.................................| 50,000
3.................................| 60,000
4.................................| 70,000
__________________________________|________________________________
Note: The d-c voltages listed in this table are not appropriate for
proof testing rubber insulating line hose or covers. For this
equipment, d -c proof tests shall use a voltage high enough to
indicate that the equipment can be safely used at the voltages
listed in Table I-4. See ASTM D 1050-90 and ASTM D 1049-88 for
further information on proof tests for rubber insulating line hose
and covers.
Table I-4. - Glove Tests - Water Level(1)(2)

____________________________________________________________________
| |
| AC proof test | DC proof test
|____________________|__________________________
| | | |
Class of glove | mm. | in. | mm. | in.
___________________|___________|________|___________|______________
| | | |
0..................| 38 | 1.5 | 38 | 1.5
1..................| 38 | 1.5 | 51 | 2.0
2..................| 64 | 2.5 | 76 | 3.0
3..................| 89 | 3.5 | 102 | 4.0
4..................| 127 | 5.0 | 153 | 6.0
___________________|___________|________|___________|_____________
Footnote(1) The water level is given as the clearance from the cuff
of the glove to the water line, with a tolerance of + or - 13 mm. (+
or - 0.5 in.).
Footnote(2) If atmospheric conditions make the specified clearances
impractical, the clearances may be increased by a maximum of 25 mm.
(1 in.).
Table I-5. - Rubber Insulating Equipment Voltage Requirements

____________________________________________________________________
| | |
Class of | Maximum use | Retest voltage(2) | Retest voltage(2)
equipment | voltage(1) | a - c - rms | d - c - avg
| a - c - rms | |
_____________|_____________|___________________|__________________
| | |
0............| 1,000 | 5,000 | 20,000
1............| 7,500 | 10,000 | 40,000
2............| 17,000 | 20,000 | 50,000
3............| 26,500 | 30,000 | 60,000
4............| 36,000 | 40,000 | 70,000
_____________|_____________|___________________|__________________
Footnote(1) The maximum use voltage is the a-c voltage (rms)
classification of the protective equipment that designates the
maximum nominal design voltage of the energized system that may be
safely worked. The nominal design voltage is equal to the
phase-to-phase voltage on multiphase circuits. However, the
phase-to-ground potential is considered to be the nominal design
voltage:
[1] If there is no multiphase exposure in a system area and if the

voltage exposure is limited to the phase-to-ground potential, or
[2] If the electrical equipment and devices are insulated or isolated

or both so that the multiphase exposure on a grounded wye circuit
is removed.
Footnote(2) The proof-test voltage shall be applied continuously for

at least 1 minute, but no more than 3 minutes.
Table I-6. - Rubber Insulating Equipment Test Intervals
___________________________________________________________________
|
Type of equipment | When to test
___________________________|______________________________________
|
Rubber insulating line hose| Upon indication that insulating value
| is suspect.
Rubber insulating covers | Upon indication that insulating value
| is suspect.
Rubber insulating blankets | Before first issue and every 12 months
| thereafter(1).
Rubber insulating gloves | Before first issue and every 6 months
| thereafter(1).
Rubber insulating sleeves | Before first issue and every 12 months
| thereafter(1).
___________________________|_______________________________________
Footnote(1) If the insulating equipment has been electrically
tested but not issued for service, it may not be placed into service
unless it has been electrically tested within the previous 12 months.
[59 FR 4435, Jan. 31, 1994; 59 FR 33658, June 30, 1994]
The control of hazardous energy (lockout/tagout). - 1910.147 Page 1 of 18
Text version
Home Index Search
CFR)
The control of hazardous energy
(lockout/tagout). - 1910.147

l Standard Title: The control of hazardous energy (lockout/tagout).
l SubPart Number: J
l SubPart Title: General Environmental Controls
Interpretation(s)
(a)
Scope, application and purpose -
(a)(1)
Scope
(a)(1)(i)
This standard covers the servicing and maintenance of machines
and equipment in which the unexpected energization or start up
of the machines or equipment, or release of stored energy could
cause injury to employees. This standard establishes minimum
performance requirements for the control of such hazardous
energy.
(a)(1)(ii)
This standard does not cover the following:
(a)(1)(ii)(A)
Construction, agriculture and maritime employment;
(a)(1)(ii)(B)
Installations under the exclusive control of electric utilities for the
purpose of power generation, transmission and distribution,
including related equipment for communication or metering; and
(a)(1)(ii)(C)
Exposure to electrical hazards from work on, near, or with
conductors or equipment in electric utilization installations, which is
covered by Subpart S of this part; and
..1910.147(a)(1)(ii)(D)
(a)(1)(ii)(D)
Oil and gas well drilling and servicing.
(a)(2)
Application.
(a)(2)(i)
This standard applies to the control of energy during servicing
and/or maintenance of machines and equipment.
(a)(2)(ii)
Normal production operations are not covered by this standard
(See Subpart O of this Part). Servicing and/or maintenance which
takes place during normal production operations is covered by this
standard only if:
(a)(2)(ii)(A)
An employee is required to remove or bypass a guard or other
safety device; or
(a)(2)(ii)(B)
An employee is required to place any part of his or her body into an
area on a machine or piece of equipment where work is actually
performed upon the material being processed (point of operation)
or where an associated danger zone exists during a machine
operating cycle.
Note: Exception to paragraph (a)(2)(ii): Minor tool changes
and adjustments, and other minor servicing activities, which take
place during normal production operations, are not covered by this
standard if they are routine, repetitive, and integral to the use of
the equipment for production, provided that the work is performed
using alternative measures which provide effective protection (See
(a)(1)(ii)(B)
purpose of power generation, transmission and distribution,
including related equipment for communication or metering; and
(a)(1)(ii)(C)
Exposure to electrical hazards from work on, near, or with
conductors or equipment in electric utilization installations, which is
covered by Subpart S of this part; and
..1910.147(a)(1)(ii)(D)
(a)(1)(ii)(D)
Oil and gas well drilling and servicing.
(a)(2)
Application.
(a)(2)(i)
This standard applies to the control of energy during servicing
and/or maintenance of machines and equipment.
(a)(2)(ii)
Normal production operations are not covered by this standard
(See Subpart O of this Part). Servicing and/or maintenance which
takes place during normal production operations is covered by this
standard only if:
(a)(2)(ii)(A)
An employee is required to remove or bypass a guard or other
safety device; or
(a)(2)(ii)(B)
An employee is required to place any part of his or her body into an
area on a machine or piece of equipment where work is actually
performed upon the material being processed (point of operation)
or where an associated danger zone exists during a machine
operating cycle.
Note: Exception to paragraph (a)(2)(ii): Minor tool changes
and adjustments, and other minor servicing activities, which take
place during normal production operations, are not covered by this
standard if they are routine, repetitive, and integral to the use of
the equipment for production, provided that the work is performed
using alternative measures which provide effective protection (See
Subpart O of this Part).

(a)(2)(iii)
This standard does not apply to the following:
..1910.147(a)(2)(iii)(A)
(a)(2)(iii)(A)
Work on cord and plug connected electric equipment for which
exposure to the hazards of unexpected energization or start up of
the equipment is controlled by the unplugging of the equipment
from the energy source and by the plug being under the exclusive
control of the employee performing the servicing or maintenance.
(a)(2)(iii)(B)
Hot tap operations involving transmission and distribution systems
for substances such as gas, steam, water or petroleum products
when they are performed on pressurized pipelines, provided that
the employer demonstrates that-
(a)(2)(iii)(B)(1)
continuity of service is essential;
(a)(2)(iii)(B)(2)
shutdown of the system is impractical; and
(a)(2)(iii)(B)(3)
documented procedures are followed, and special equipment is
used which will provide proven effective protection for employees.
(a)(3)
Purpose.
(a)(3)(i)
This section requires employers to establish a program and utilize
procedures for affixing appropriate lockout devices or tagout
devices to energy isolating devices, and to otherwise disable
machines or equipment to prevent unexpected energization, start
up or release of stored energy in order to prevent injury to
employees.
(a)(3)(ii)
When other standards in this part require the use of lockout or
tagout, they shall be used and supplemented by the procedural and
training requirements of this section.
(b)
Definitions applicable to this section.
Affected employee. An employee whose job requires him/her to
operate or use a machine or equipment on which servicing or
maintenance is being performed under lockout or tagout, or whose
job requires him/her to work in an area in which such servicing or
maintenance is being performed.
Authorized employee. A person who locks out or tags out
machines or equipment in order to perform servicing or
maintenance on that machine or equipment. An affected employee
becomes an authorized employee when that employee's duties
include performing servicing or maintenance covered under this
section.
Capable of being locked out. An energy isolating device is
capable of being locked out if it has a hasp or other means of
attachment to which, or through which, a lock can be affixed, or it
has a locking mechanism built into it. Other energy isolating
devices are capable of being locked out, if lockout can be achieved
without the need to dismantle, rebuild, or replace the energy
isolating device or permanently alter its energy control capability.
Energized. Connected to an energy source or containing residual
or stored energy.
Energy isolating device. A mechanical device that physically
prevents the transmission or release of energy, including but not
limited to the following: A manually operated electrical circuit
breaker; a disconnect switch; a manually operated switch by which
the conductors of a circuit can be disconnected from all ungrounded
supply conductors, and, in addition, no pole can be operated
independently; a line valve; a block; and any similar device used to
block or isolate energy. Push buttons, selector switches and other
control circuit type devices are not energy isolating devices.
Energy source. Any source of electrical, mechanical, hydraulic,
pneumatic, chemical, thermal, or other energy.
Hot tap. A procedure used in the repair, maintenance and services
activities which involves welding on a piece of equipment
(pipelines, vessels or tanks) under pressure, in order to install
connections or appurtenances. it is commonly used to replace or
add sections of pipeline without the interruption of service for air,
gas, water, steam, and petrochemical distribution systems.
Lockout. The placement of a lockout device on an energy isolating
device, in accordance with an established procedure, ensuring that
the energy isolating device and the equipment being controlled

cannot be operated until the lockout device is removed.
Lockout device. A device that utilizes a positive means such as a
lock, either key or combination type, to hold an energy isolating
device in the safe position and prevent the energizing of a machine
or equipment. Included are blank flanges and bolted slip blinds.
Normal production operations. The utilization of a machine or
equipment to perform its intended production function.
Servicing and/or maintenance. Workplace activities such as
constructing, installing, setting up, adjusting, inspecting, modifying,
and maintaining and/or servicing machines or equipment. These
activities include lubrication, cleaning or unjamming of machines or
equipment and making adjustments or tool changes, where the
employee may be exposed to the unexpected energization or
startup of the equipment or release of hazardous energy.
Setting up. Any work performed to prepare a machine or
equipment to perform its normal production operation.
Tagout. The placement of a tagout device on an energy isolating
device, in accordance with an established procedure, to indicate
that the energy isolating device and the equipment being controlled
may not be operated until the tagout device is removed.
Tagout device. A prominent warning device, such as a tag and a
means of attachment, which can be securely fastened to an energy
isolating device in accordance with an established procedure, to
indicate that the energy isolating device and the equipment being
controlled may not be operated until the tagout device is removed.
..1910.147(c)
(c)
General -
(c)(1)
Energy control program. The employer shall establish a program
consisting of energy control procedures, employee training and
periodic inspections to ensure that before any employee performs
any servicing or maintenance on a machine or equipment where
the unexpected energizing, startup or release of stored energy
could occur and cause injury, the machine or equipment shall be
isolated from the energy source and rendered inoperative.
(c)(2)
Lockout/tagout.
(c)(2)(i)
If an energy isolating device is not capable of being locked out, the
employer's energy control program under paragraph (c)(1) of this
section shall utilize a tagout system.
(c)(2)(ii)
If an energy isolating device is capable of being locked out, the
employer's energy control program under paragraph (c)(1) of this
section shall utilize lockout, unless the employer can demonstrate
that the utilization of a tagout system will provide full employee
protection as set forth in paragraph (c)(3) of this section.
(c)(2)(iii)
After January 2, 1990, whenever replacement or major repair,
renovation or modification of a machine or equipment is performed,
and whenever new machines or equipment are installed, energy
isolating devices for such machine or equipment shall be designed
to accept a lockout device.
(c)(3)
Full employee protection.
(c)(3)(i)
When a tagout device is used on an energy isolating device which is
capable of being locked out, the tagout device shall be attached at
the same location that the lockout device would have been
attached, and the employer shall demonstrate that the tagout
program will provide a level of safety equivalent to that obtained by
using a lockout program.
..1910.147(c)(3)(ii)
(c)(3)(ii)
In demonstrating that a level of safety is achieved in the tagout
program which is equivalent to the level of safety obtained by using
a lockout program, the employer shall demonstrate full compliance
with all tagout-related provisions of this standard together with
such additional elements as are necessary to provide the equivalent
safety available from the use of a lockout device. Additional means
to be considered as part of the demonstration of full employee
protection shall include the implementation of additional safety
measures such as the removal of an isolating circuit element,
blocking of a controlling switch, opening of an extra disconnecting
device, or the removal of a valve handle to reduce the likelihood of

inadvertent energization.
(c)(4)
Energy control procedure.
(c)(4)(i)
Procedures shall be developed, documented and utilized for the
control of potentially hazardous energy when employees are
engaged in the activities covered by this section.
Note: Exception: The employer need not document the required
procedure for a particular machine or equipment, when all of the
following elements exist: (1) The machine or equipment has no
potential for stored or residual energy or reaccumulation of stored
energy after shut down which could endanger employees; (2) the
machine or equipment has a single energy source which can be
readily identified and isolated; (3) the isolation and locking out of
that energy source will completely deenergize and deactivate the
machine or equipment; (4) the machine or equipment is isolated
from that energy source and locked out during servicing or
maintenance; (5) a single lockout device will achieve a locker -out
condition; (6) the lockout device is under the exclusive control of
the authorized employee performing the servicing or maintenance;
(7) the servicing or maintenance does not create hazards for other
employees; and (8) the employer, in utilizing this exception, has
had no accidents involving the unexpected activation or
reenergization of the machine or equipment during servicing or
maintenance.
(c)(4)(ii)
The procedures shall clearly and specifically outline the scope,
purpose, authorization, rules, and techniques to be utilized for the
control of hazardous energy, and the means to enforce compliance
including, but not limited to, the following:
(c)(4)(ii)(A)
A specific statement of the intended use of the procedure;
(c)(4)(ii)(B)
Specific procedural steps for shutting down, isolating, blocking and
securing machines or equipment to control hazardous energy;
(c)(4)(ii)(C)
Specific procedural steps for the placement, removal and transfer
of lockout devices or tagout devices and the responsibility for
them; and
..1910.147(c)(4)(ii)(D)
(c)(4)(ii)(D)
Specific requirements for testing a machine or equipment to
determine and verify the effectiveness of lockout devices, tagout
devices, and other energy control measures.
(c)(5)
Protective materials and hardware.
(c)(5)(i)
Locks, tags, chains, wedges, key blocks, adapter pins, self -locking
fasteners, or other hardware shall be provided by the employer for
isolating, securing or blocking of machines or equipment from
energy sources.
(c)(5)(ii)
Lockout devices and tagout devices shall be singularly identified;
shall be the only devices(s) used for controlling energy; shall not be
used for other purposes; and shall meet the following
requirements:
(c)(5)(ii)(A)
Durable.
(c)(5)(ii)(A)(1)
Lockout and tagout devices shall be capable of withstanding the
environment to which they are exposed for the maximum period of
time that exposure is expected.
(c)(5)(ii)(A)(2)
Tagout devices shall be constructed and printed so that exposure to
weather conditions or wet and damp locations will not cause the tag
to deteriorate or the message on the tag to become illegible.
(c)(5)(ii)(A)(3)
Tags shall not deteriorate when used in corrosive environments
such as areas where acid and alkali chemicals are handled and
stored.
..1910.147(c)(5)(ii)(B)
(c)(5)(ii)(B)
Standardized. Lockout and tagout devices shall be standardized

within the facility in at least one of the following criteria: Color;
shape; or size; and additionally, in the case of tagout devices, print
and format shall be standardized.
(c)(5)(ii)(C)
Substantial -
(c)(5)(ii)(C)(1)
Lockout devices. Lockout devices shall be substantial enough to
prevent removal without the use of excessive force or unusual
techniques, such as with the use of bolt cutters or other metal
cutting tools.
(c)(5)(ii)(C)(2)
Tagout devices. Tagout devices, including their means of
attachment, shall be substantial enough to prevent inadvertent or
accidental removal. Tagout device attachment means shall be of a
non-reusable type, attachable by hand, self -locking, and non-
releasable with a minimum unlocking strength of no less than 50
pounds and having the general design and basic characteristics of
being at least equivalent to a one-piece, all environment-tolerant
nylon cable tie.
(c)(5)(ii)(D)
Identifiable. Lockout devices and tagout devices shall indicate the
identity of the employee applying the device(s).
(c)(5)(iii)
Tagout devices shall warn against hazardous conditions if the
machine or equipment is energized and shall include a legend such
as the following: Do Not Start. Do Not Open. Do Not Close. Do
Not Energize. Do Not Operate.
..1910.147(c)(6)
(c)(6)
Periodic inspection.
(c)(6)(i)
The employer shall conduct a periodic inspection of the energy
control procedure at least annually to ensure that the procedure
and the requirements of this standard are being followed.
(c)(6)(i)(A)
The periodic inspection shall be performed by an authorized

employee other than the ones(s) utilizing the energy control
procedure being inspected.
(c)(6)(i)(B)
The periodic inspection shall be conducted to correct any deviations
or inadequacies identified.
(c)(6)(i)(C)
Where lockout is used for energy control, the periodic inspection
shall include a review, between the inspector and each authorized
employee, of that employee's responsibilities under the energy
control procedure being inspected.
(c)(6)(i)(D)
Where tagout is used for energy control, the periodic inspection
and affected employee, of that employee's responsibilities under
the energy control procedure being inspected, and the elements set
forth in paragraph (c)(7)(ii) of this section.
..1910.147(c)(6)(ii)
(c)(6)(ii)
The employer shall certify that the periodic inspections have been
performed. The certification shall identify the machine or
equipment on which the energy control procedure was being
utilized, the date of the inspection, the employees included in the
inspection, and the person performing the inspection.
(c)(7)
Training and communication.
(c)(7)(i)
The employer shall provide training to ensure that the purpose and
function of the energy control program are understood by
employees and that the knowledge and skills required for the safe
application, usage, and removal of the energy controls are acquired
by employees. The training shall include the following:
(c)(7)(i)(A)
Each authorized employee shall receive training in the recognition
of applicable hazardous energy sources, the type and magnitude of
the energy available in the workplace, and the methods and means
necessary for energy isolation and control.
(c)(7)(i)(B)
Each affected employee shall be instructed in the purpose and use
of the energy control procedure.
(c)(7)(i)(C)
All other employees whose work operations are or may be in an
area where energy control procedures may be utilized, shall be
instructed about the procedure, and about the prohibition relating
to attempts to restart or reenergize machines or equipment which
are locked out or tagged out.
(c)(7)(ii)
When tagout systems are used, employees shall also be trained in
the following limitations of tags:
..1910.147(c)(7)(ii)(A)
(c)(7)(ii)(A)
Tags are essentially warning devices affixed to energy isolating
devices, and do not provide the physical restraint on those devices
that is provided by a lock.
(c)(7)(ii)(B)
When a tag is attached to an energy isolating means, it is not to be
removed without authorization of the authorized person responsible
for it, and it is never to be bypassed, ignored, or otherwise
defeated.
(c)(7)(ii)(C)
Tags must be legible and understandable by all authorized
employees, affected employees, and all other employees whose
work operations are or may be in the area, in order to be effective.
(c)(7)(ii)(D)
Tags and their means of attachment must be made of materials
which will withstand the environmental conditions encountered in
the workplace.
(c)(7)(ii)(E)
Tags may evoke a false sense of security, and their meaning needs
to be understood as part of the overall energy control program.
(c)(7)(ii)(F)
Tags must be securely attached to energy isolating devices so that
they cannot be inadvertently or accidentally detached during use.
(c)(7)(iii)
Employee retraining.
..1910.147(c)(7)(iii)(A)
(c)(7)(iii)(A)
Retraining shall be provided for all authorized and affected
employees whenever there is a change in their job assignments, a
change in machines, equipment or processes that present a new
hazard, or when there is a change in the energy control
procedures.
(c)(7)(iii)(B)
Additional retraining shall also be conducted whenever a periodic
inspection under paragraph (c)(6) of this section reveals, or
whenever the employer has reason to believe that there are
deviations from or inadequacies in the employee's knowledge or
use of the energy control procedures.
(c)(7)(iii)(C)
The retraining shall reestablish employee proficiency and introduce
new or revised control methods and procedures, as necessary.
(c)(7)(iv)
The employer shall certify that employee training has been
accomplished and is being kept up to date. The certification shall
contain each employee's name and dates of training.
(c)(8)
Energy isolation. Lockout or tagout shall be performed only by
the authorized employees who are performing the servicing or
maintenance.
(c)(9)
Notification of employees. Affected employees shall be notified
by the employer or authorized employee of the application and
removal of lockout devices or tagout devices. Notification shall be
given before the controls are applied, and after they are removed
from the machine or equipment.
..1910.147(d)
(d)
Application of control. The established procedures for the
application of energy control (the lockout or tagout procedures)
shall cover the following elements and actions and shall be done in
the following sequence:
(d)(1)
Preparation for shutdown. Before an authorized or affected
employee turns off a machine or equipment, the authorized
employee shall have knowledge of the type and magnitude of the
energy, the hazards of the energy to be controlled, and the method
or means to control the energy.
(d)(2)
Machine or equipment shutdown. The machine or equipment
shall be turned off or shut down using the procedures established
for the machine or equipment. An orderly shutdown must be
utilized to avoid any additional or increased hazard(s) to employees
as a result of the equipment stoppage.
(d)(3)
Machine or equipment isolation. All energy isolating devices
that are needed to control the energy to the machine or equipment
shall be physically located and operated in such a manner as to
isolate the machine or equipment from the energy source(s).
(d)(4)
Lockout or tagout device application.
(d)(4)(i)
Lockout or tagout devices shall be affixed to each energy isolating
device by authorized employees.
..1910.147(d)(4)(ii)
(d)(4)(ii)
Lockout devices, where used, shall be affixed in a manner to that
will hold the energy isolating devices in a "safe" or "off" position.
(d)(4)(iii)
Tagout devices, where used, shall be affixed in such a manner as
will clearly indicate that the operation or movement of energy
isolating devices from the "safe" or "off" position is prohibited.
(d)(4)(iii)(A)
Where tagout devices are used with energy isolating devices
designed with the capability of being locked, the tag attachment
shall be fastened at the same point at which the lock would have
been attached.
(d)(4)(iii)(B)
Where a tag cannot be affixed directly to the energy isolating
device, the tag shall be located as close as safely possible to the
device, in a position that will be immediately obvious to anyone
attempting to operate the device.
(d)(5)
Stored energy.
(d)(5)(i)
Following the application of lockout or tagout devices to energy
isolating devices, all potentially hazardous stored or residual energy
shall be relieved, disconnected, restrained, and otherwise rendered
safe.
..1910.147(d)(5)(ii)
(d)(5)(ii)
If there is a possibility of reaccumulation of stored energy to a
hazardous level, verification of isolation shall be continued until the
servicing or maintenance is completed, or until the possibility of
such accumulation no longer exists.
(d)(6)
Verification of isolation. Prior to starting work on machines or
equipment that have been locked out or tagged out, the authorized
employee shall verify that isolation and deenergization of the
machine or equipment have been accomplished.
(e)
Release from lockout or tagout. Before lockout or tagout
devices are removed and energy is restored to the machine or
equipment, procedures shall be followed and actions taken by the
authorized employee(s) to ensure the following:
(e)(1)
The machine or equipment. The work area shall be inspected to
ensure that nonessential items have been removed and to ensure
that machine or equipment components are operationally intact.
(e)(2)
Employees.
(e)(2)(i)
The work area shall be checked to ensure that all employees have
been safely positioned or removed.
(e)(2)(ii)
After lockout or tagout devices have been removed and before a
machine or equipment is started, affected employees shall be
notified that the lockout or tagout device(s) have been removed.
(e)(3)
Lockout or tagout devices removal. Each lockout or tagout
device shall be removed from each energy isolating device by the
employee who applied the device. Exception to paragraph (e)
(3): When the authorized employee who applied the lockout or
tagout device is not available to remove it, that device may be
removed under the direction of the employer, provided that specific
procedures and training for such removal have been developed,
documented and incorporated into the employer's energy control
program. The employer shall demonstrate that the specific
procedure provides equivalent safety to the removal of the device
by the authorized employee who applied it. The specific procedure
shall include at least the following elements:
(e)(3)(i)
Verification by the employer that the authorized employee who
applied the device is not at the facility:
(e)(3)(ii)
Making all reasonable efforts to contact the authorized employee to
inform him/her that his/her lockout or tagout device has been
removed; and
(e)(3)(iii)
Ensuring that the authorized employee has this knowledge before
he/she resumes work at that facility.
..1910.147(f)
(f)
Additional requirements.
(f)(1)
Testing or positioning of machines, equipment or
components thereof. In situations in which lockout or tagout
devices must be temporarily removed from the energy isolating
device and the machine or equipment energized to test or position
the machine, equipment or component thereof, the following

sequence of actions shall be followed:
(f)(1)(i)
Clear the machine or equipment of tools and materials in
accordance with paragraph (e)(1) of this section;
(f)(1)(ii)
Remove employees from the machine or equipment area in
accordance with paragraph (e)(2) of this section;
(f)(1)(iii)
Remove the lockout or tagout devices as specified in paragraph (e)

(3) of this section;
(f)(1)(iv)
Energize and proceed with testing or positioning;
(f)(1)(v)
Deenergize all systems and reapply energy control measures in
accordance with paragraph (d) of this section to continue the
servicing and/or maintenance.
(f)(2)
Outside personnel (contractors, etc.).
(f)(2)(i)
Whenever outside servicing personnel are to be engaged in
activities covered by the scope and application of this standard, the
on-site employer and the outside employer shall inform each other
of their respective lockout or tagout procedures.
..1910.147(f)(2)(ii)
(f)(2)(ii)
The on-site employer shall ensure that his/her employees
understand and comply with the restrictions and prohibitions of the
outside employer's energy control program.
(f)(3)
Group lockout or tagout.
(f)(3)(i)
When servicing and/or maintenance is performed by a crew, craft,
department or other group, they shall utilize a procedure which

affords the employees a level of protection equivalent to that
provided by the implementation of a personal lockout or tagout
device.
(f)(3)(ii)
Group lockout or tagout devices shall be used in accordance with
the procedures required by paragraph (c)(4) of this section
including, but not necessarily limited to, the following specific
requirements:
(f)(3)(ii)(A)
Primary responsibility is vested in an authorized employee for a set
number of employees working under the protection of a group
lockout or tagout device (such as an operations lock);
(f)(3)(ii)(B)
Provision for the authorized employee to ascertain the exposure
status of individual group members with regard to the lockout or
tagout of the machine or equipment and
(f)(3)(ii)(C)
When more than one crew, craft, department, etc. is involved,
assignment of overall job-associated lockout or tagout control
responsibility to an authorized employee designated to coordinate
affected work forces and ensure continuity of protection; and
..1910.147(f)(3)(ii)(D)
(f)(3)(ii)(D)
Each authorized employee shall affix a personal lockout or tagout
device to the group lockout device, group lockbox, or comparable
mechanism when he or she begins work, and shall remove those
devices when he or she stops working on the machine or
equipment being serviced or maintained.
(f)(4)
Shift or personnel changes. Specific procedures shall be utilized
during shift or personnel changes to ensure the continuity of
lockout or tagout protection, including provision for the orderly
transfer of lockout or tagout device protection between off-going
and oncoming employees, to minimize exposure to hazards from
the unexpected energization or start -up of the machine or
equipment, or the release of stored energy.
Note: The following appendix to §1910.147 services as a non-
mandatory guideline to assist employers and employees in

complying with the requirements of this section, as well as to
provide other helpful information. Nothing in the appendix adds to
or detracts from any of the requirements of this section.
[54 FR 36687, Sept. 1, 1989, as amended at 54 FR 42498, Oct. 17,
1989; 55 FR 38685, 38686, Sept. 20, 1990; 61 FR 5507, Feb. 13,
1996]
Typical minimal lockout procedures - 1910.147AppA Page 1 of 4
Text version
Home Index Search
CFR)
Typical minimal lockout procedures -
1910.147AppA
l Standard Number: 1910.147AppA

l Standard Title: Typical minimal lockout procedures
l SubPart Number: J
l SubPart Title: None
General
The following simple lockout procedure is provided to assist

employers in developing their procedures so they meet the
requirements of this standard. When the energy isolating devices
are not lockable, tagout may be used, provided the employer
complies with the provisions of the standard which require
additional training and more rigorous periodic inspections. When
tagout is used and the energy isolating devices are lockable, the
employer must provide full employee protection (see paragraph (c)
(3)) and additional training and more rigorous periodic inspections
are required. For more complex systems, more comprehensive
procedures may need to be developed, documented, and utilized.
Lockout Procedure
Lockout Procedure for
_____________________________________________________________________
(Name of Company for single procedure or identification of equipment

if multiple procedures are used).
Purpose
http://www.osha-slc.gov/OshStd_data/1910_0147_APP_A.html 11/9/2001
This procedure establishes the minimum requirements for the

lockout of energy isolating devices whenever maintenance or
servicing is done on machines or equipment. It shall be used to
ensure that the machine or equipment is stopped, isolated from all
potentially hazardous energy sources and locked out before
employees perform any servicing or maintenance where the
unexpected energization or start-up of the machine or equipment
or release of stored energy could cause injury.
Compliance With This Program
All employees are required to comply with the restrictions and

limitations imposed upon them during the use of lockout. The
authorized employees are required to perform the lockout in
accordance with this procedure. All employees, upon observing a
machine or piece of equipment which is locked out to perform
servicing or maintenance shall not attempt to start, energize, or
use that machine or equipment.
_____________________________________________________________________
Type of compliance enforcement to be taken for violation of the above.
Sequence of Lockout
(1) Notify all affected employees that servicing or maintenance is

required on a machine or equipment and that the machine or
equipment must be shut down and locked out to perform the
servicing or maintenance.
___________________________________________________________________
Name(s)/Job Title(s) of affected employees and how to notify.
(2) The authorized employee shall refer to the company procedure

to identify the type and magnitude of the energy that the machine
or equipment utilizes, shall understand the hazards of the energy,
and shall know the methods to control the energy.
_____________________________________________________________________
Type(s) and magnitude(s) of energy, its hazards and the methods to

control the energy.
(3) If the machine or equipment is operating, shut it down by the

normal stopping procedure (depress the stop button, open switch,
close valve, etc.).
_____________________________________________________________________
Type(s) and location(s) of machine or equipment operating controls.
(4) De-activate the energy isolating device(s) so that the machine

or equipment is isolated from the energy source(s).
_____________________________________________________________________
Type(s) and location(s) of energy isolating devices.
(5) Lock out the energy isolating device(s) with assigned individual
lock(s).
(6) Stored or residual energy (such as that in capacitors, springs,

elevated machine members, rotating flywheels, hydraulic systems,
and air, gas, steam, or water pressure, etc.) must be dissipated or
restrained by methods such as grounding, repositioning, blocking,
bleeding down, etc.
_____________________________________________________________________
Type(s) of stored energy - methods to dissipate or restrain.
(7) Ensure that the equipment is disconnected from the energy

source(s) by first checking that no personnel are exposed, then
verify the isolation of the equipment by operating the push button
or other normal operating control(s) or by testing to make certain
the equipment will not operate.
Caution: Return operating control(s) to neutral or "off" position

after verifying the isolation of the equipment.
_____________________________________________________________________
Method of verifying the isolation of the equipment.
(8) The machine or equipment is now locked out.
"Restoring Equipment to Service." When the servicing or

maintenance is completed and the machine or equipment is ready
to return to normal operating condition, the following steps shall be
taken.
(1) Check the machine or equipment and the immediate area

around the machine to ensure that nonessential items have been
removed and that the machine or equipment components are
operationally intact.
(2) Check the work area to ensure that all employees have been
safely positioned or removed from the area.
(3) Verify that the controls are in neutral.
(4) Remove the lockout devices and reenergize the machine or

equipment. Note: The removal of some forms of blocking may
require reenergization of of the machine before safe removal.
(5) Notify affected employees that the servicing or maintenance is

completed and the machine or equipment is ready for used.
[54 FR 36687, Sept. 1, 1989 as amended at 54 FR 42498, Oct. 17,

1989; 55 FR 38685, Sept. 20, 1990; 61 FR 5507, Feb. 13, 1996]
Electric Power Generation, Transmission, and Distribution. - 1910.269 Page 1 of 107
Text version
Home Index Search
CFR)
Electric Power Generation, Transmission,
and Distribution. - 1910.269

l Standard Title: Electric Power Generation, Transmission, and
Distribution.
l SubPart Number: R
l SubPart Title: Special Industries
Interpretation(s)
(a)
"General."
(a)(1)
"Application."
(a)(1)(i)
This section covers the operation and maintenance of electric power

generation, control, transformation, transmission, and distribution
lines and equipment. These provisions apply to:
(a)(1)(i)(A)
Power generation, transmission, and distribution installations,

including related equipment for the purpose of communication or
metering, which are accessible only to qualified employees;
Note: The types of installations covered by this paragraph include

the generation, transmission, and distribution installations of
electric utilities, as well as equivalent installations of industrial
establishments. Supplementary electric generating equipment that
is used to supply a workplace for emergency, standby, or similar
purposes only is covered under Subpart S of this Part. (See
paragraph (a)(1)(ii)(B) of this section.)
(a)(1)(i)(B)
Other installations at an electric power generating station, as

follows:
(a)(1)(i)(B)(1)
Fuel and ash handling and processing installations, such as coal

conveyors,
(a)(1)(i)(B)(2)
Water and steam installations, such as penstocks, pipelines, and

tanks, providing a source of energy for electric generators, and
(a)(1)(i)(B)(3)
Chlorine and hydrogen systems:
..1910.269(a)(1)(i)(C)
(a)(1)(i)(C)
Test sites where electrical testing involving temporary

measurements associated with electric power generation,
transmission, and distribution is performed in laboratories, in the
field, in substations, and on lines, as opposed to metering, relaying,
and routine line work;
(a)(1)(i)(D)
Work on or directly associated with the installations covered in

paragraphs (a)(1)(i)(A) through (a)(1)(i)(C) of this section; and
(a)(1)(i)(E)
Line-clearance tree-trimming operations, as follows:
(a)(1)(i)(E)(1)
Entire 1910.269 of this Part, except paragraph (r)(1) of this

section, applies to line-clearance tree-trimming operations
performed by qualified employees (those who are knowledgeable in
the construction and operation of electric power generation,
transmission, or distribution equipment involved, along with the
associated hazards).
(a)(1)(i)(E)(2)
Paragraphs (a)(2), (b), (c), (g), (k), (p), and (r) of this section
apply to line-clearance tree -trimming operations performed by line-
clearance tree trimmers who are not qualified employees.
(a)(1)(ii)
Notwithstanding paragraph (A)(1)(i) of this section, 1910.269 of

this Part does not apply:
(a)(1)(ii)(A)
To construction work, as defined in 1910.12 of this Part; or
(a)(1)(ii)(B)
To electrical installations, electrical safety-related work practices, or

electrical maintenance considerations covered by Subpart S of this
Part.
Note 1: Work practices conforming to 1910.332 through 1910.335

of this Part are considered as complying with the electrical safety-
related work practice requirements of this section identified in Table
1 of Appendix A -2 to this section, provided the work is being
performed on a generation or distribution installation meeting
1910.303 through 1910.308 of this Part. This table also identifies
provisions in this section that apply to work by qualified persons
directly on or associated with installations of electric power
generation, transmission, and distribution lines or equipment,
regardless of compliance with 1910.332 through 1910.335 of this

Part.
Note 2: Work practices performed by qualified persons and

conforming to 1910.269 of this Part are considered as complying
with 1910.333(c) and 1910.335 of this Part.
..1910.269(a)(1)(iii)
(a)(1)(iii)
This section applies in addition to all other applicable standards

contained in this Part 1910. Specific references in this section to
other sections of Part 1910 are provided for emphasis only.
(a)(2)
"Training."
(a)(2)(i)
Employees shall be trained in and familiar with the safety-related

work practices, safety procedures, and other safety requirements in
this section that pertain to their respective job assignments.
Employees shall also be trained in and familiar with any other
safety practices, including applicable emergency procedures (such
as pole top and manhole rescue), that are not specifically
addressed by this section but that are related to their work and are
necessary for their safety.
(a)(2)(ii)
Qualified employees shall also be trained and competent in:
(a)(2)(ii)(A)
The skills and techniques necessary to distinguish exposed live

parts from other parts of electric equipment,
(a)(2)(ii)(B)
The skills and techniques necessary to determine the nominal

voltage of exposed live parts,
(a)(2)(ii)(C)
The minimum approach distances specified in this section

corresponding to the voltages to which the qualified employee will
be exposed, and
..1910.269(a)(2)(ii)(D)
(a)(2)(ii)(D)
The proper use of the special precautionary techniques, personal

protective equipment, insulating and shielding materials, and
insulated tools for working on or near exposed energized parts of
electric equipment.
Note: For the purposes of this section, a person must have this
training in order to be considered a qualified person.
(a)(2)(iii)
The employer shall determine, through regular supervision and

through inspections conducted on at least an annual basis, that
each employee is complying with the safety-related work practices
required by this section.
(a)(2)(iv)
An employee shall receive additional training (or retraining) under

any of the following conditions:
(a)(2)(iv)(A)
If the supervision and annual inspections required by paragraph (a)

(2)(iii) of this section indicate that the employee is not complying
with the safety-related work practices required by this section, or
(a)(2)(iv)(B)
If new technology, new types of equipment, or changes in

procedures necessitate the use of safety-related work practices that
are different from those which the employee would normally use, or
(a)(2)(iv)(C)
If he or she must employ safety-related work practices that are not

normally used during his or her regular job duties.
Note: OSHA would consider tasks that are performed less often
than once per year to necessitate retraining before the performance
of the work practices involved.
(a)(2)(v)
The training required by paragraph (a)(2) of this section shall be of

the classroom or on -the-job type.
..1910.269(a)(2)(vi)
(a)(2)(vi)
The training shall establish employee proficiency in the work

practices required by this section and shall introduce the
procedures necessary for compliance with this section.
(a)(2)(vii)
The employer shall certify that each employee has received the
training required by paragraph (a)(2) of this section. This
certification shall be made when the employee demonstrates
proficiency in the work practices involved and shall be maintained
for the duration of the employee's employment.
Note: Employment records that indicate that an employee has

received the required training are an acceptable means of meeting
this requirement.
(a)(3)
"Existing conditions." Existing conditions related to the safety of the

work to be performed shall be determined before work on or near
electric lines or equipment is started. Such conditions include, but
are not limited to, the nominal voltages of lines and equipment, the
maximum switching transient voltages, the presence of hazardous
induced voltages, the presence and condition of protective grounds
and equipment grounding conductors, the condition of poles,
environmental conditions relative to safety, and the locations of
circuits and equipment, including power and communication lines
and fire protective signaling circuits.
(b)
"Medical services and first aid." The employer shall provide medical
services and first aid as required in 1910.151 of this Part. In
addition to the requirements of 1910.151 of this Part, the following
requirements also apply:
..1910.269(b)(1)
(b)(1)
"Cardiopulmonary resuscitation and first aid training." When

employees are performing work on or associated with exposed lines
or equipment energized at 50 volts or more, persons trained in first
aid including cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR) shall be available
as follows:
(b)(1)(i)
For field work involving two or more employees at a work location,

at least two trained persons shall be available. However, only one
trained person need be available if all new employees are trained in
first aid, including CPR, within 3 months of their hiring dates.
(b)(1)(ii)
For fixed work locations such as generating stations, the number of

trained persons available shall be sufficient to ensure that each
employee exposed to electric shock can be reached within 4
minutes by a trained person. However, where the existing number
of employees is insufficient to meet this requirement (at a remote
substation, for example), all employees at the work location shall
be trained.
(b)(2)
"First aid supplies." First aid supplies required by 1910.151(b) of

this Part shall be placed in weatherproof containers if the supplies
could be exposed to the weather.
(b)(3)
"First aid kits." Each first aid kit shall be maintained, shall be
readily available for use, and shall be inspected frequently enough

to ensure that expended items are replaced but at least once per
year.
..1910.269(c)
(c)
"Job briefing." The employer shall ensure that the employee in

charge conducts a job briefing with the employees involved before
they start each job. The briefing shall cover at least the following
subjects: hazards associated with the job, work procedures
involved, special precautions, energy source controls, and personal
protective equipment requirements.
(c)(1)
"Number of briefings." If the work or operations to be performed

during the work day or shift are repetitive and similar, at least one
job briefing shall be conducted before the start of the first job of
each day or shift. Additional job briefings shall be held if significant
changes, which might affect the safety of the employees, occur
during the course of the work.
(c)(2)
"Extent of briefing." A brief discussion is satisfactory if the work

involved is routine and if the employee, by virtue of training and
experience, can reasonably be expected to recognize and avoid the
hazards involved in the job. A more extensive discussion shall be
conducted:
(c)(2)(i)
If the work is complicated or particularly hazardous, or
(c)(2)(ii)
If the employee cannot be expected to recognize and avoid the

hazards involved in the job.
Note: The briefing is always required to touch on all the subjects

listed in the introductory text to paragraph (c) of this section.
(c)(3)
"Working alone." An employee working alone need not conduct a

job briefing. However, the employer shall ensure that the tasks to
be performed are planned as if a briefing were required.
..1910.269(d)
(d)
"Hazardous energy control (lockout/tagout) procedures."
(d)(1)
"Application." The provisions of paragraph (d) of this section apply

to the use of lockout/tagout procedures for the control of energy
sources in installations for the purpose of electric power generation,
including related equipment for communication or metering.
Locking and tagging procedures for the deenergizing of electric
energy sources which are used exclusively for purposes of
transmission and distribution are addressed by paragraph (m) of
this section.
Note 1: Installations in electric power generation facilities that are

not an integral part of, or inextricably commingled with, power
generation processes or equipment are covered under 1910.147
and Subpart S of this Part.
Note 2: Lockout and tagging procedures that comply with

paragraphs (c) through (f) of 1910.147 of this Part will also be
deemed to comply with paragraph of (d) this section if the
procedures address the hazards covered by paragraph (d) of this
section.
(d)(2)
"General."
(d)(2)(i)
The employer shall establish a program consisting of energy control

procedures, employee training, and periodic inspections to ensure
that, before any employee performs any servicing or maintenance
on a machine or equipment where the unexpected energizing, start

up, or release of stored energy could occur and cause injury, the
machine or equipment is isolated from the energy source and
rendered inoperative.
(d)(2)(ii)
The employer's energy control program under paragraph (d)(2) of

this section shall meet the following requirements:
(d)(2)(ii)(A)
If an energy isolating device is not capable of being locked out, the

employer's program shall use a tagout system.
(d)(2)(ii)(B)
If an energy isolating device is capable of being locked out, the

employer's program shall use lockout, unless the employer can
demonstrate that the use of a tagout system will provide full
employee protection as follows:
..1910.269(d)(2)(ii)(B)(1)
(d)(2)(ii)(B)(1)
When a tagout device is used on an energy isolating device which is

capable of being locked out, the tagout device shall be attached at
the same location that the lockout device would have been
attached, and the employer shall demonstrate that the tagout
program will provide a level of safety equivalent to that obtained by
the use of a lockout program.
(d)(2)(ii)(B)(2)
In demonstrating that a level of safety is achieved in the tagout

program equivalent to the level of safety obtained by the use of a
lockout program, the employer shall demonstrate full compliance
with all tagout-related provisions of this standard together with
such additional elements as are necessary to provide the equivalent
safety available from the use of a lockout device. Additional means
to be considered as part of the demonstration of full employee
protection shall include the implementation of additional safety
measures such as the removal of an isolating circuit element,
blocking of a controlling switch, opening of an extra disconnecting

device, or the removal of a valve handle to reduce the likelihood of
inadvertent energizing.
(d)(2)(ii)(C)
After November 1, 1994, whenever replacement or major repair,

renovation, or modification of a machine or equipment is
performed, and whenever new machines or equipment are
installed, energy isolating devices for such machines or equipment
shall be designed to accept a lockout device.
(d)(2)(iii)
Procedures shall be developed, documented, and used for the

control of potentially hazardous energy covered by paragraph (d) of
this section.
..1910.269(d)(2)(iv)
(d)(2)(iv)
The procedure shall clearly and specifically outline the scope,

purpose, responsibility, authorization, rules, and techniques to be
applied to the control of hazardous energy, and the measures to
enforce compliance including, but not limited to, the following:
(d)(2)(iv)(A)
A specific statement of the intended use of this procedure;
(d)(2)(iv)(B)
Specific procedural steps for shutting down, isolating, blocking and

securing machines or equipment to control hazardous energy;
(d)(2)(iv)(C)
Specific procedural steps for the placement, removal, and transfer

of lockout devices or tagout devices and the responsibility for
them; and
(d)(2)(iv)(D)
Specific requirements for testing a machine or equipment to

determine and verify the effectiveness of lockout devices, tagout
devices, and other energy control measures.
(d)(2)(v)
The employer shall conduct a periodic inspection of the energy

control procedure at least annually to ensure that the procedure
and the provisions of paragraph (d) of this section are being
followed.
(d)(2)(v)(A)
The periodic inspection shall be performed by an authorized

employee who is not using the energy control procedure being
inspected.
..1910.269(d)(2)(v)(B)
(d)(2)(v)(B)
The periodic inspection shall be designed to identify and correct any

deviations or inadequacies.
(d)(2)(v)(C)
If lockout is used for energy control, the periodic inspection shall

include a review, between the inspector and each authorized
employee, of that employee's responsibilities under the energy
control procedure being inspected.
(d)(2)(v)(D)
Where tagout is used for energy control, the periodic inspection

and affected employee, of that employee's responsibilities under
the energy control procedure being inspected, and the elements set
forth in paragraph (d)(2)(vii) of this section.
(d)(2)(v)(E)
The employer shall certify that the inspections required by

paragraph (d)(2)(v) of this section have been accomplished. The
certification shall identify the machine or equipment on which the
energy control procedure was being used, the date of the

inspection, the employees included in the inspection, and the
person performing the inspection.
Note: If normal work schedule and operation records demonstrate

adequate inspection activity and contain the required information,
no additional certification is required.
(d)(2)(vi)
The employer shall provide training to ensure that the purpose and
function of the energy control program are understood by
employees and that the knowledge and skills required for the safe
application, usage, and removal of energy controls are acquired by
employees. The training shall include the following:
..1910.269(d)(2)(vi)(A)
(d)(2)(vi)(A)
Each authorized employee shall receive training in the recognition

of applicable hazardous energy sources, the type and magnitude of
energy available in the workplace, and in the methods and means
necessary for energy isolation and control.
(d)(2)(vi)(B)
Each affected employee shall be instructed in the purpose and use

of the energy control procedure.
(d)(2)(vi)(C)
All other employees whose work operations are or may be in an

area where energy control procedures may be used shall be
instructed about the procedures and about the prohibition relating
to attempts to restart or reenergize machines or equipment that
are locked out or tagged out.
(d)(2)(vii)
When tagout systems are used, employees shall also be trained in

the following limitations of tags:
(d)(2)(vii)(A)
Tags are essentially warning devices affixed to energy isolating

devices and do not provide the physical restraint on those devices
that is provided by a lock.
(d)(2)(vii)(B)
When a tag is attached to an energy isolating means, it is not to be

removed without authorization of the authorized person responsible
for it, and it is never to be bypassed, ignored, or otherwise
defeated.
..1910.269(d)(2)(vii)(C)
(d)(2)(vii)(C)
Tags must be legible and understandable by all authorized

employees, affected employees, and all other employees whose
work operations are or may be in the area, in order to be effective.
(d)(2)(vii)(D)
Tags and their means of attachment must be made of materials

which will withstand the environmental conditions encountered in
the workplace.
(d)(2)(vii)(E)
Tags may evoke a false sense of security, and their meaning needs
to be understood as part of the overall energy control program.
(d)(2)(vii)(F)
Tags must be securely attached to energy isolating devices so that

they cannot be inadvertently or accidentally detached during use.
(d)(2)(viii)
Retraining shall be provided by the employer as follows:
(d)(2)(viii)(A)
Retraining shall be provided for all authorized and affected

employees whenever there is a change in their job assignments, a
change in machines, equipment, or processes that present a new
hazard or whenever there is a change in the energy control

procedures.
(d)(2)(viii)(B)
Retraining shall also be conducted whenever a periodic inspection

under paragraph (d)(2)(v) of this section reveals, or whenever the
employer has reason to believe, that there are deviations from or
inadequacies in an employee's knowledge or use of the energy
control procedures.
..1910.269(d)(2)(viii)(C)
(d)(2)(viii)(C)
The retraining shall reestablish employee proficiency and shall

introduce new or revised control methods and procedures, as
necessary.
(d)(2)(ix)
The employer shall certify that employee training has been

accomplished and is being kept up to date. The certification shall
contain each employee's name and dates of training.
(d)(3)
"Protective materials and hardware."
(d)(3)(i)
Locks, tags, chains, wedges, key blocks, adapter pins, self -locking
fasteners, or other hardware shall be provided by the employer for
isolating, securing, or blocking of machines or equipment from
energy sources.
(d)(3)(ii)
Lockout devices and tagout devices shall be singularly identified;

shall be the only devices used for controlling energy; may not be
used for other purposes; and shall meet the following
requirements:
(d)(3)(ii)(A)
Lockout devices and tagout devices shall be capable of withstanding

the environment to which they are exposed for the maximum
period of time that exposure is expected.
..1910.269(d)(3)(ii)(A)(1)
(d)(3)(ii)(A)(1)
Tagout devices shall be constructed and printed so that exposure to

weather conditions or wet and damp locations will not cause the tag
to deteriorate or the message on the tag to become illegible.
(d)(3)(ii)(A)(2)
Tagout devices shall be so constructed as not to deteriorate when

used in corrosive environments.
(d)(3)(ii)(B)
Lockout devices and tagout devices shall be standardized within the

facility in at least one of the following criteria: color, shape, size.
Additionally, in the case of tagout devices, print and format shall be
standardized.
(d)(3)(ii)(C)
Lockout devices shall be substantial enough to prevent removal

without the use of excessive force or unusual techniques, such as
with the use of bolt cutters or metal cutting tools.
(d)(3)(ii)(D)
Tagout devices, including their means of attachment, shall be

substantial enough to prevent inadvertent or accidental removal.
Tagout device attachment means shall be of a non -reusable type,
attachable by hand, self-locking, and non-releasable with a
minimum unlocking strength of no less than 50 pounds and shall
have the general design and basic characteristics of being at least
equivalent to a one-piece, all-environment-tolerant nylon cable tie.
(d)(3)(ii)(E)
Each lockout device or tagout device shall include provisions for the
identification of the employee applying the device.
..1910.269(d)(3)(ii)(F)
(d)(3)(ii)(F)
Tagout devices shall warn against hazardous conditions if the

machine or equipment is energized and shall include a legend such
as the following: Do Not Start, Do Not Open, Do Not Close, Do Not
Energize, Do Not Operate.
Note: For specific provisions covering accident prevention tags, see

1910.145 of this Part.
(d)(4)
"Energy isolation." Lockout and tagout device application and

removal may only be performed by the authorized employees who
are performing the servicing or maintenance.
(d)(5)
"Notification." Affected employees shall be notified by the employer

or authorized employee of the application and removal of lockout or
tagout devices. Notification shall be given before the controls are
applied and after they are removed from the machine or
equipment.
Note: See also paragraph (d)(7) of this section, which requires that
the second notification take place before the machine or equipment
is reenergized.
(d)(6)
"Lockout/tagout application." The established procedures for the

application of energy control (the lockout or tagout procedures)
shall include the following elements and actions, and these
procedures shall be performed in the following sequence:
(d)(6)(i)
Before an authorized or affected employee turns off a machine or

equipment, the authorized employee shall have knowledge of the
type and magnitude of the energy, the hazards of the energy to be
controlled, and the method or means to control the energy.
..1910.269(d)(6)(ii)
(d)(6)(ii)
The machine or equipment shall be turned off or shut down using

the procedures established for the machine or equipment. An
orderly shutdown shall be used to avoid any additional or increased
hazards to employees as a result of the equipment stoppage.
(d)(6)(iii)
All energy isolating devices that are needed to control the energy to
the machine or equipment shall be physically located and operated
in such a manner as to isolate the machine or equipment from
energy sources.
(d)(6)(iv)
Lockout or tagout devices shall be affixed to each energy isolating

device by authorized employees.
(d)(6)(iv)(A)
Lockout devices shall be attached in a manner that will hold the

energy isolating devices in a "safe" or "off" position.
(d)(6)(iv)(B)
Tagout devices shall be affixed in such a manner as will clearly

indicate that the operation or movement of energy isolating devices
from the "safe" or "off" position is prohibited.
(d)(6)(iv)(B)(1)
Where tagout devices are used with energy isolating devices

designed with the capability of being locked out, the tag
attachment shall be fastened at the same point at which the lock
would have been attached.
(d)(6)(iv)(B)(2)
Where a tag cannot be affixed directly to the energy isolating

device, the tag shall be located as close as safely possible to the
device, in a position that will be immediately obvious to anyone

attempting to operate the device.
..1910.269(d)(6)(v)
(d)(6)(v)
Following the application of lockout or tagout devices to energy

isolating devices, all potentially hazardous stored or residual energy
shall be relieved, disconnected, restrained, or otherwise rendered
safe.
(d)(6)(vi)
If there is a possibility of reaccumulation of stored energy to a

hazardous level, verification of isolation shall be continued until the
servicing or maintenance is completed or until the possibility of
such accumulation no longer exists.
(d)(6)(vii)
Before starting work on machines or equipment that have been

locked out or tagged out, the authorized employee shall verify that
isolation and deenergizing of the machine or equipment have been
accomplished. If normally energized parts will be exposed to
contact by an employee while the machine or equipment is
deenergized, a test shall be performed to ensure that these parts
are deenergized.
(d)(7)
"Release from lockout/tagout." Before lockout or tagout devices are

removed and energy is restored to the machine or equipment,
procedures shall be followed and actions taken by the authorized
employees to ensure the following:
(d)(7)(i)
The work area shall be inspected to ensure that nonessential items

have been removed and that machine or equipment components
are operationally intact.
(d)(7)(ii)
The work area shall be checked to ensure that all employees have
been safely positioned or removed.
..1910.269(d)(7)(iii)
(d)(7)(iii)
After lockout or tagout devices have been removed and before a

machine or equipment is started, affected employees shall be
notified that the lockout or tagout devices have been removed.
(d)(7)(iv)
Each lockout or tagout device shall be removed from each energy

isolating device by the authorized employee who applied the
lockout or tagout device. However, if that employee is not available
to remove it, the device may be removed under the direction of the
employer, provided that specific procedures and training for such
removal have been developed, documented, and incorporated into
the employer's energy control program. The employer shall
demonstrate that the specific procedure provides a degree of safety
equivalent to that provided by the removal of the device by the
authorized employee who applied it. The specific procedure shall
include at least the following elements:
(d)(7)(iv)(A)
Verification by the employer that the authorized employee who

applied the device is not at the facility;
(d)(7)(iv)(B)
Making all reasonable efforts to contact the authorized employee to

inform him or her that his or her lockout or tagout device has been
removed; and
(d)(7)(iv)(C)
Ensuring that the authorized employee has this knowledge before

he or she resumes work at that facility.
..1910.269(d)(8)
(d)(8)
"Additional requirements."
(d)(8)(i)
If the lockout or tagout devices must be temporarily removed from

energy isolating devices and the machine or equipment must be
energized to test or position the machine, equipment, or
component thereof, the following sequence of actions shall be
followed:
(d)(8)(i)(A)
Clear the machine or equipment of tools and materials in

accordance with paragraph (d)(7)(i) of this section;
(d)(8)(i)(B)
Remove employees from the machine or equipment area in

accordance with paragraphs (d)(7)(ii) and (d)(7)(iii) of this section;
(d)(8)(i)(C)
Remove the lockout or tagout devices as specified in paragraph (d)

(7)(iv) of this section;
(d)(8)(i)(D)
Energize and proceed with the testing or positioning; and
(d)(8)(i)(E)
Deenergize all systems and reapply energy control measures in

accordance with paragraph (d)(6) of this section to continue the
servicing or maintenance.
..1910.269(d)(8)(ii)
(d)(8)(ii)
When servicing or maintenance is performed by a crew, craft,

department, or other group, they shall use a procedure which
affords the employees a level of protection equivalent to that
provided by the implementation of a personal lockout or tagout
device. Group lockout or tagout devices shall be used in accordance
with the procedures required by paragraphs (d)(2)(iii) and (d)(2)

(iv) of this section including, but not limited to, the following
specific requirements:
(d)(8)(ii)(A)
Primary responsibility shall be vested in an authorized employee for

a set number of employees working under the protection of a group
lockout or tagout device (such as an operations lock);
(d)(8)(ii)(B)
Provision shall be made for the authorized employee to ascertain

the exposure status of all individual group members with regard to
the lockout or tagout of the machine or equipment;
(d)(8)(ii)(C)
When more than one crew, craft, department, or other group is

involved, assignment of overall job-associated lockout or tagout
control responsibility shall be given to an authorized employee
designated to coordinate affected work forces and ensure continuity
of protection; and
(d)(8)(ii)(D)
Each authorized employee shall affix a personal lockout or tagout

device to the group lockout device, group lockbox, or comparable
mechanism when he or she begins work and shall remove those
devices when he or she stops working on the machine or
equipment being serviced or maintained.
..1910.269(d)(8)(iii)
(d)(8)(iii)
Procedures shall be used during shift or personnel changes to

ensure the continuity of lockout or tagout protection, including
provision for the orderly transfer of lockout or tagout device
protection between off -going and on -coming employees, to
minimize their exposure to hazards from the unexpected energizing
or start-up of the machine or equipment or from the release of
stored energy.
(d)(8)(iv)
Whenever outside servicing personnel are to be engaged in

activities covered by paragraph (d) of this section, the on-site
employer and the outside employer shall inform each other of their
respective lockout or tagout procedures, and each employer shall
ensure that his or her personnel understand and comply with
restrictions and prohibitions of the energy control procedures being
used.
(d)(8)(v)
If energy isolating devices are installed in a central location and are

under the exclusive control of a system operator, the following
requirements apply:
(d)(8)(v)(A)
The employer shall use a procedure that affords employees a level

of protection equivalent to that provided by the implementation of
a personal lockout or tagout device.
(d)(8)(v)(B)
The system operator shall place and remove lockout and tagout
devices in place of the authorized employee under paragraphs (d)
(4), (d)(6)(iv), and (d)(7)(iv) of this section.
..1910.269(d)(8)(v)(C)
(d)(8)(v)(C)
Provisions shall be made to identify the authorized employee who is

responsible for (that is, being protected by) the lockout or tagout
device, to transfer responsibility for lockout and tagout devices,
and to ensure that an authorized employee requesting removal or
transfer of a lockout or tagout device is the one responsible for it
before the device is removed or transferred.
(e)
"Enclosed spaces." This paragraph covers enclosed spaces that may

be entered by employees. It does not apply to vented vaults if a
determination is made that the ventilation system is operating to

protect employees before they enter the space. This paragraph
applies to routine entry into enclosed spaces in lieu of the permit-
space entry requirements contained in paragraphs (d) through (k)
of 1910.146 of this Part. If, after the precautions given in
paragraphs (e) and (t) of this section are taken, the hazards
remaining in the enclosed space endanger the life of an entrant or
could interfere with escape from the space, then entry into the
enclosed space shall meet the permit-space entry requirements of
paragraphs (d) through (k) of 1910.146 of this Part.
Note: Entries into enclosed spaces conducted in accordance with

the permit-space entry requirements of paragraphs (d) through (k)
of 1910.146 of this Part are considered as complying with
paragraph (e) of this section.
(e)(1)
"Safe work practices." The employer shall ensure the use of safe
work practices for entry into and work in enclosed spaces and for
rescue of employees from such spaces.
(e)(2)
"Training." Employees who enter enclosed spaces or who serve as

attendants shall be trained in the hazards of enclosed space entry,
in enclosed space entry procedures, and in enclosed space rescue
procedures.
..1910.269(e)(3)
(e)(3)
"Rescue equipment." Employers shall provide equipment to ensure

the prompt and safe rescue of employees from the enclosed space.
(e)(4)
"Evaluation of potential hazards." Before any entrance cover to an

enclosed space is removed, the employer shall determine whether
it is safe to do so by checking for the presence of any atmospheric
pressure or temperature differences and by evaluating whether
there might be a hazardous atmosphere in the space. Any
conditions making it unsafe to remove the cover shall be eliminated
before the cover is removed.
Note: The evaluation called for in this paragraph may take the form
of a check of the conditions expected to be in the enclosed space.
For example, the cover could be checked to see if it is hot and, if it
is fastened in place, could be loosened gradually to release any
residual pressure. A determination must also be made of whether
conditions at the site could cause a hazardous atmosphere, such as
an oxygen deficient or flammable atmosphere, to develop within
the space.
(e)(5)
"Removal of covers." When covers are removed from enclosed

spaces, the opening shall be promptly guarded by a railing,
temporary cover, or other barrier intended to prevent an accidental
fall through the opening and to protect employees working in the
space from objects entering the space.
(e)(6)
"Hazardous atmosphere." Employees may not enter any enclosed

space while it contains a hazardous atmosphere, unless the entry
conforms to the generic permit-required confined spaces standard
in 1910.146 of this Part.
Note: The term "entry" is defined in 1910.146(b) of this Part.
..1910.269(e)(7)
(e)(7)
"Attendants." While work is being performed in the enclosed space,

a person with first aid training meeting paragraph (b) of this
section shall be immediately available outside the enclosed space to
render emergency assistance if there is reason to believe that a
hazard may exist in the space or if a hazard exists because of
traffic patterns in the area of the opening used for entry. That
person is not precluded from performing other duties outside the
enclosed space if these duties do not distract the attendant from
monitoring employees within the space.
Note: See paragraph (t)(3) of this section for additional

requirements on attendants for work in manholes.
(e)(8)
"Calibration of test instruments." Test instruments used to monitor

atmospheres in enclosed spaces shall be kept in calibration, with a
minimum accuracy of + or - 10 percent.
(e)(9)
"Testing for oxygen deficiency." Before an employee enters an

enclosed space, the internal atmosphere shall be tested for oxygen
deficiency with a direct-reading meter or similar instrument,
capable of collection and immediate analysis of data samples
without the need for off-site evaluation. If continuous forced air
ventilation is provided, testing is not required provided that the
procedures used ensure that employees are not exposed to the
hazards posed by oxygen deficiency.
(e)(10)
"Testing for flammable gases and vapors." Before an employee

enters an enclosed space, the internal atmosphere shall be tested
for flammable gases and vapors with a direct-reading meter or
similar instrument capable of collection and immediate analysis of
data samples without the need for off-site evaluation. This test
shall be performed after the oxygen testing and ventilation required
by paragraph (e)(9) of this section demonstrate that there is
sufficient oxygen to ensure the accuracy of the test for
flammability.
..1910.269(e)(11)
(e)(11)
"Ventilation and monitoring." If flammable gases or vapors are

detected or if an oxygen deficiency is found, forced air ventilation
shall be used to maintain oxygen at a safe level and to prevent a
hazardous concentration of flammable gases and vapors from
accumulating. A continuous monitoring program to ensure that no
increase in flammable gas or vapor concentration occurs may be
followed in lieu of ventilation, if flammable gases or vapors are
detected at safe levels.
Note: See the definition of hazardous atmosphere for guidance in
determining whether or not a given concentration of a substance is

considered to be hazardous.
(e)(12)
"Specific ventilation requirements." If continuous forced air

ventilation is used, it shall begin before entry is made and shall be
maintained long enough to ensure that a safe atmosphere exists
before employees are allowed to enter the work area. The forced
air ventilation shall be so directed as to ventilate the immediate
area where employees are present within the enclosed space and
shall continue until all employees leave the enclosed space.
(e)(13)
"Air supply." The air supply for the continuous forced air ventilation
shall be from a clean source and may not increase the hazards in
the enclosed space.
(e)(14)
"Open flames." If open flames are used in enclosed spaces, a test

for flammable gases and vapors shall be made immediately before
the open flame device is used and at least once per hour while the
device is used in the space. Testing shall be conducted more
frequently if conditions present in the enclosed space indicate that
once per hour is insufficient to detect hazardous accumulations of
flammable gases or vapors.
Note: See the definition of hazardous atmosphere for guidance in

determining whether or not a given concentration of a substance is
considered to be hazardous.
..1910.269(f)
(f)
"Excavations." Excavation operations shall comply with Subpart P of

Part 1926 of this chapter.
(g)
"Personal protective equipment."
(g)(1)
"General." Personal protective equipment shall meet the

requirements of Subpart I of this Part.
(g)(2)
"Fall protection."
(g)(2)(i)
Personal fall arrest equipment shall meet the requirements of

Subpart M of Part 1926 of this Chapter.
(g)(2)(ii)
Body belts and safety straps for work positioning shall meet the
requirements of 1926.959 of this Chapter.
(g)(2)(iii)
Body belts, safety straps, lanyards, lifelines, and body harnesses

shall be inspected before use each day to determine that the
equipment is in safe working condition. Defective equipment may
not be used.
(g)(2)(iv)
Lifelines shall be protected against being cut or abraded.
..1910.269(g)(2)(v)
(g)(2)(v)
Fall arrest equipment, work positioning equipment, or travel

restricting equipment shall be used by employees working at
elevated locations more than 4 feet (1.2 m) above the ground on
poles, towers, or similar structures if other fall protection has not
been provided. Fall protection equipment is not required to be used
by a qualified employee climbing or changing location on poles,
towers, or similar structures, unless conditions, such as, but not
limited to, ice, high winds, the design of the structure (for example,
no provision for holding on with hands), or the presence of
contaminants on the structure, could cause the employee to lose

his or her grip or footing.
Note 1: This paragraph applies to structures that support overhead

electric power generation, transmission, and distribution lines and
equipment. It does not apply to portions of buildings, such as
loading docks, to electric equipment, such as transformers and
capacitors, nor to aerial lifts. Requirements for fall protection
associated with walking and working surfaces are contained in
Subpart D of this Part; requirements for fall protection associated
with aerial lifts are contained in 1910.67 of this Part.
Note 2: Employees undergoing training are not considered

"qualified employees" for the purposes of this provision. Unqualified
employees (including trainees) are required to use fall protection
any time they are more than 4 feet (1.2 m) above the ground.
(g)(2)(vi)
The following requirements apply to personal fall arrest systems:
(g)(2)(vi)(A)
When stopping or arresting a fall, personal fall arrest systems shall

limit the maximum arresting force on an employee to 900 pounds
(4 kN) if used with a body belt.
(g)(2)(vi)(B)
When stopping or arresting a fall, personal fall arrest systems shall

limit the maximum arresting force on an employee to 1800 pounds
(8 kN) if used with a body harness.
(g)(2)(vi)(C)
Personal fall arrest systems shall be rigged such that an employee

can neither free fall more than 6 feet (1.8 m) nor contact any lower
level.
(g)(2)(vii)
If vertical lifelines or droplines are used, not more than one

employee may be attached to any one lifeline.
(g)(2)(viii)
Snaphooks may not be connected to loops made in webbing-type

lanyards.
(g)(2)(ix)
Snaphooks may not be connected to each other.
..1910.269(h)
(h)
"Ladders, platforms, step bolts, and manhole steps."
(h)(1)
"General." Requirements for ladders contained in Subpart D of this

Part apply, except as specifically noted in paragraph (h)(2) of this
section.
(h)(2)
"Special ladders and platforms." Portable ladders and platforms

used on structures or conductors in conjunction with overhead line
work need not meet paragraphs (d)(2)(i) and (d)(2)(iii) of 1910.25
of this Part or paragraph (c)(3)(iii) of 1910.26 of this Part.
However, these ladders and platforms shall meet the following
requirements:
(h)(2)(i)
Ladders and platforms shall be secured to prevent their becoming

accidentally dislodged.
(h)(2)(ii)
Ladders and platforms may not be loaded in excess of the working

loads for which they are designed.
(h)(2)(iii)
Ladders and platforms may be used only in applications for which
they were designed.
(h)(2)(iv)
In the configurations in which they are used, ladders and platforms

shall be capable of supporting without failure at least 2.5 times the
maximum intended load.
..1910.269(h)(3)
(h)(3)
"Conductive ladders." Portable metal ladders and other portable

conductive ladders may not be used near exposed energized lines
or equipment. However, in specialized high-voltage work,
conductive ladders shall be used where the employer can
demonstrate that nonconductive ladders would present a greater
hazard than conductive ladders.
(i)
"Hand and portable power tools."
(i)(1)
"General." Paragraph (i)(2) of this section applies to electric

equipment connected by cord and plug. Paragraph (i)(3) of this
section applies to portable and vehicle-mounted generators used to
supply cord-and plug-connected equipment. Paragraph (i)(4) of this
section applies to hydraulic and pneumatic tools.
(i)(2)
"Cord- and plug-connected equipment."
(i)(2)(i)
Cord-and plug-connected equipment supplied by premises wiring is

covered by Subpart S of this Part.
(i)(2)(ii)
Any cord- and plug-connected equipment supplied by other than

premises wiring shall comply with one of the following in lieu of
1910.243(a)(5) of this Part:
(i)(2)(ii)(A)
It shall be equipped with a cord containing an equipment grounding

conductor connected to the tool frame and to a means for
grounding the other end (however, this option may not be used
where the introduction of the ground into the work environment
increases the hazard to an employee); or
..1910.269(i)(2)(ii)(B)
(i)(2)(ii)(B)
It shall be of the double -insulated type conforming to Subpart S of

this Part; or
(i)(2)(ii)(C)
It shall be connected to the power supply through an isolating

transformer with an ungrounded secondary.
(i)(3)
"Portable and vehicle-mounted generators." Portable and vehicle -

mounted generators used to supply cord- and plug-connected
equipment shall meet the following requirements:
(i)(3)(i)
The generator may only supply equipment located on the generator

or the vehicle and cord- and plug-connected equipment through
receptacles mounted on the generator or the vehicle.
(i)(3)(ii)
The non-current-carrying metal parts of equipment and the

equipment grounding conductor terminals of the receptacles shall
be bonded to the generator frame.
(i)(3)(iii)
In the case of vehicle-mounted generators, the frame of the

generator shall be bonded to the vehicle frame.
(i)(3)(iv)
Any neutral conductor shall be bonded to the generator frame.
(i)(4)
"Hydraulic and pneumatic tools."
(i)(4)(i)
Safe operating pressures for hydraulic and pneumatic tools, hoses,

valves, pipes, filters, and fittings may not be exceeded.
Note: If any hazardous defects are present, no operating pressure

would be safe, and the hydraulic or pneumatic equipment involved
may not be used. In the absence of defects, the maximum rated
operating pressure is the maximum safe pressure.
..1910.269(i)(4)(ii)
(i)(4)(ii)
A hydraulic or pneumatic tool used where it may contact exposed

live parts shall be designed and maintained for such use.
(i)(4)(iii)
The hydraulic system supplying a hydraulic tool used where it may

contact exposed live parts shall provide protection against loss of
insulating value for the voltage involved due to the formation of a
partial vacuum in the hydraulic line.
Note: Hydraulic lines without check valves having a separation of

more than 35 feet (10.7 m) between the oil reservoir and the upper
end of the hydraulic system promote the formation of a partial
vacuum.
(i)(4)(iv)
A pneumatic tool used on energized electric lines or equipment or

used where it may contact exposed live parts shall provide
protection against the accumulation of moisture in the air supply.
(i)(4)(v)
Pressure shall be released before connections are broken, unless

quick acting, self-closing connectors are used. Hoses may not be
kinked.
(i)(4)(vi)
Employees may not use any part of their bodies to locate or

attempt to stop a hydraulic leak.
(j)
"Live-line tools."
(j)(1)
"Design of tools." Live-line tool rods, tubes, and poles shall be

designed and constructed to withstand the following minimum
tests:
..1910.269(j)(1)(i)
(j)(1)(i)
100,000 volts per foot (3281 volts per centimeter) of length for 5
minutes if the tool is made of fiberglass-reinforced plastic (FRP), or
(j)(1)(ii)
minutes if the tool is made of wood, or
(j)(1)(iii)
Other tests that the employer can demonstrate are equivalent.
Note: Live-line tools using rod and tube that meet ASTM F711-89,
Standard Specification for Fiberglass-Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Rod
and Tube Used in Live-Line Tools, conform to paragraph (j)(1)(i) of
this section.
(j)(2)
"Condition of tools."
(j)(2)(i)
Each live-line tool shall be wiped clean and visually inspected for
defects before use each day.
(j)(2)(ii)
If any defect or contamination that could adversely affect the

insulating qualities or mechanical integrity of the live-line tool is
present after wiping, the tool shall be removed from service and
examined and tested according to paragraph (j)(2)(iii) of this
section before being returned to service.
(j)(2)(iii)
Live-line tools used for primary employee protection shall be

removed from service every 2 years and whenever required under
paragraph (j)(2)(ii) of this section for examination, cleaning, repair,
and testing as follows:
(j)(2)(iii)(A)
Each tool shall be thoroughly examined for defects.
..1910.269(j)(2)(iii)(B)
(j)(2)(iii)(B)
If a defect or contamination that could adversely affect the

insulating qualities or mechanical integrity of the live-line tool is
found, the tool shall be repaired and refinished or shall be
permanently removed from service. If no such defect or
contamination is found, the tool shall be cleaned and waxed.
(j)(2)(iii)(C)
The tool shall be tested in accordance with paragraphs (j)(2)(iii)(D)

and (j)(2)(iii)(E) of this section under the following conditions:
(j)(2)(iii)(C)(1)
After the tool has been repaired or refinished; and
(j)(2)(iii)(C)(2)
After the examination if repair or refinishing is not performed,

unless the tool is made of FRP rod or foam-filled FRP tube and the
employer can demonstrate that the tool has no defects that could
cause it to fail in use.
(j)(2)(iii)(D)
The test method used shall be designed to verify the tool's integrity
along its entire working length and, if the tool is made of fiberglass-
reinforced plastic, its integrity under wet conditions.
(j)(2)(iii)(E)
The voltage applied during the tests shall be as follows:
(j)(2)(iii)(E)(1)
minute if the tool is made of fiberglass, or
(j)(2)(iii)(E)(2)
minute if the tool is made of wood, or
(j)(2)(iii)(E)(3)
Other tests that the employer can demonstrate are equivalent.
Note: Guidelines for the examination, cleaning, repairing, and in-

service testing of live-line tools are contained in the Institute of
Electrical and Electronics Engineers Guide for In-Service
Maintenance and Electrical Testing of Live-Line Tools, IEEE Std.
978-1984.
..1910.269(k)
(k)
"Materials handling and storage."
(k)(1)
"General." Material handling and storage shall conform to the

requirements of Subpart N of this Part.
(k)(2)
"Materials storage near energized lines or equipment."
(k)(2)(i)
In areas not restricted to qualified persons only, materials or

equipment may not be stored closer to energized lines or exposed
energized parts of equipment than the following distances plus an
amount providing for the maximum sag and side swing of all
conductors and providing for the height and movement of material
handling equipment:
(k)(2)(i)(A)
For lines and equipment energized at 50 kV or less, the distance is

10 feet (305 cm).
(k)(2)(i)(B)
For lines and equipment energized at more than 50 kV, the

distance is 10 feet (305 cm) plus 4 inches (10 cm) for every 10 kV
over 50 kV.
(k)(2)(ii)
In areas restricted to qualified employees, material may not be

stored within the working space about energized lines or
equipment.
Note: Requirements for the size of the working space are contained
in paragraphs (u)(1) and (v)(3) of this section.
(l)
"Working on or near exposed energized parts." This paragraph

applies to work on exposed live parts, or near enough to them, to
expose the employee to any hazard they present.
..1910.269(l)(1)
(l)(1)
"General." Only qualified employees may work on or with exposed

energized lines or parts of equipment. Only qualified employees
may work in areas containing unguarded, uninsulated energized
lines or parts of equipment operating at 50 volts or more. Electric
lines and equipment shall be considered and treated as energized
unless the provisions of paragraph (d) or paragraph (m) of this
section have been followed.
(l)(1)(i)
Except as provided in paragraph (l)(1)(ii) of this section, at least

two employees shall be present while the following types of work
are being performed:
(l)(1)(i)(A)
Installation, removal, or repair of lines that are energized at more

than 600 volts,
(l)(1)(i)(B)
Installation, removal, or repair of deenergized lines if an employee

is exposed to contact with other parts energized at more than 600
volts,
(l)(1)(i)(C)
Installation, removal, or repair of equipment, such as transformers,

capacitors, and regulators, if an employee is exposed to contact
with parts energized at more than 600 volts,
(l)(1)(i)(D)
Work involving the use of mechanical equipment, other than

insulated aerial lifts, near parts energized at more than 600 volts,
and
(l)(1)(i)(E)
Other work that exposes an employee to electrical hazards greater

than or equal to those posed by operations that are specifically
listed in paragraphs (l)(1)(i)(A) through (l)(1)(i)(D) of this section.
..1910.269(l)(1)(ii)
(l)(1)(ii)
Paragraph (l)(1)(i) of this section does not apply to the following

operations:
(l)(1)(ii)(A)
Routine switching of circuits, if the employer can demonstrate that

conditions at the site allow this work to be performed safely,
(l)(1)(ii)(B)
Work performed with live-line tools if the employee is positioned so

that he or she is neither within reach of nor otherwise exposed to
contact with energized parts, and
(l)(1)(ii)(C)
Emergency repairs to the extent necessary to safeguard the

general public.
(l)(2)
"Minimum approach distances." The employer shall ensure that no

employee approaches or takes any conductive object closer to
exposed energized parts than set forth in Table R -6 through Table
R-10, unless:
(l)(2)(i)
The employee is insulated from the energized part (insulating

gloves or insulating gloves and sleeves worn in accordance with
paragraph (l)(3) of this section are considered insulation of the
employee only with regard to the energized part upon which work
is being performed), or
..1910.269(l)(2)(ii)
(l)(2)(ii)
The energized part is insulated from the employee and from any
other conductive object at a different potential, or
(l)(2)(iii)
The employee is insulated from any other exposed conductive

object, as during live-line bare-hand work.
Note: Paragraphs (u)(5)(i) and (v)(5)(i) and of this section contain

requirements for the guarding and isolation of live parts. Parts of
electric circuits that meet these two provisions are not considered
as "exposed" unless a guard is removed or an employee enters the
space intended to provide isolation from the live parts.
(l)(3)
"Type of insulation." If the employee is to be insulated from

energized parts by the use of insulating gloves (under paragraph (l)
(2)(i) of this section), insulating sleeves shall also be used.
However, insulating sleeves need not be used under the following
conditions:
(l)(3)(i)
If exposed energized parts on which work is not being performed

are insulated from the employee and
(l)(3)(ii)
If such insulation is placed from a position not exposing the

employee's upper arm to contact with other energized parts.
(l)(4)
"Working position." The employer shall ensure that each employee,

to the extent that other safety-related conditions at the worksite
permit, works in a position from which a slip or shock will not bring
the employee's body into contact with exposed, uninsulated parts
energized at a potential different from the employee.
(l)(5)
"Making connections." The employer shall ensure that connections

are made as follows:
..1910.269(l)(5)(i)
(l)(5)(i)
In connecting deenergized equipment or lines to an energized

circuit by means of a conducting wire or device, an employee shall
first attach the wire to the deenergized part;
(l)(5)(ii)
When disconnecting equipment or lines from an energized circuit by

means of a conducting wire or device, an employee shall remove
the source end first; and
(l)(5)(iii)
When lines or equipment are connected to or disconnected from

energized circuits, loose conductors shall be kept away from
exposed energized parts.
(l)(6)
"Apparel."
(l)(6)(i)
When work is performed within reaching distance of exposed

energized parts of equipment, the employer shall ensure that each
employee removes or renders nonconductive all exposed
conductive articles, such as key or watch chains, rings, or wrist
watches or bands, unless such articles do not increase the hazards
associated with contact with the energized parts.
(l)(6)(ii)
The employer shall train each employee who is exposed to the

hazards of flames or electric arcs in the hazards involved.
(l)(6)(iii)
The employer shall ensure that each employee who is exposed to
the hazards of flames or electric arcs does not wear clothing that,
when exposed to flames or electric arcs, could increase the extent
of injury that would be sustained by the employee.
Note: Clothing made from the following types of fabrics, either

alone or in blends, is prohibited by this paragraph, unless the
employer can demonstrate that the fabric has been treated to
withstand the conditions that may be encountered or that the
clothing is worn in such a manner as to eliminate the hazard
involved: acetate, nylon, polyester, rayon.
..1910.269(l)(7)
(l)(7)
"Fuse handling." When fuses must be installed or removed with one

or both terminals energized at more than 300 volts or with exposed
parts energized at more than 50 volts, the employer shall ensure
that tools or gloves rated for the voltage are used. When expulsion-
type fuses are installed with one or both terminals energized at
more than 300 volts, the employer shall ensure that each employee
wears eye protection meeting the requirements of Subpart I of this
Part, uses a tool rated for the voltage, and is clear of the exhaust
path of the fuse barrel.
(l)(8)
"Covered (noninsulated) conductors." The requirements of this

section which pertain to the hazards of exposed live parts also
apply when work is performed in the proximity of covered
(noninsulated) wires.
(l)(9)
"Noncurrent-carrying metal parts." Noncurrent-carrying metal parts

of equipment or devices, such as transformer cases and circuit
breaker housings, shall be treated as energized at the highest
voltage to which they are exposed, unless the employer inspects
the installation and determines that these parts are grounded
before work is performed.
(l)(10)
"Opening circuits under load." Devices used to open circuits under
load conditions shall be designed to interrupt the current involved.
Table R-6. - AC Live-Line Work Minimum Approach Distance

____________________________________________________________________
|
| Distance
|___________________________________________________
| |
Nominal voltage | Phase to ground exposure | Phase to phase exposure
in kilovolts |__________________________|________________________
phase to phase | | | |
| (ft-in) | (m) | (ft-in) | (m)
________________|_____________|____________|_____________|__________
| | | |
0.05 to 1.0 | (4) | (4) | (4) | (4)
1.1 to 15.0 | 2-1 | 0.64 | 2-2 | 0.66
15.1 to 36.0 | 2-4 | 0.72 | 2-7 | 0.77
36.1 to 46.0 | 2-7 | 0.77 | 2-10 | 0.85
46.1 to 72.5 | 3-0 | 0.90 | 3-6 | 1.05
72.6 to 121 | 3-2 | 0.95 | 4-3 | 1.29
138 to 145 | 3-7 | 1.09 | 4-11 | 1.50
161 to 169 | 4-0 | 1.22 | 5-8 | 1.71
230 to 242 | 5-3 | 1.59 | 7-6 | 2.27
345 to 362 | 8-6 | 2.59 | 12-6 | 3.80
500 to 550 | 11-3 | 3.42 | 18-1 | 5.50
765 to 800 | 14-11 | 4.53 | 26-0 | 7.91
________________|_____________|____________|_____________|__________
Footnote(1) These distances take into consideration the highest
switching surge an employee will be exposed to on any system with air
as the insulating medium and the maximum voltages shown.
Footnote(2) The clear live-line tool distance shall equal or exceed
the values for the indicated voltage ranges.
Footnote(3) See Appendix B to this section for information on how
the minimum approach distances listed in the tables were derived.
Footnote(4) Avoid contact.

With Overvoltage Factor Phase-to-Ground Exposure
_____________________________________________________________________
|
Maximum | Distance in feet-inches
antici- |___________________________________________________________
pated |
per-unit| Maximum phase-to-phase voltage in kilovolts
transient|___________________________________________________________
over | | | | | | |
voltage | 121 | 145 | 169 | 242 | 362 | 552 | 800
_________|________|________|________|________|________|_______|______
| | | | | | |
1.5 | ...... | ...... | ...... | ...... | ...... | 6-0 | 9-8
1.6 | ...... | ...... | ...... | ...... | ...... | 6-6 | 10-8
1.7 | ...... | ...... | ...... | ...... | ...... | 7-0 | 11-8
1.8 | ...... | ...... | ...... | ...... | ...... | 7-7 | 12-8
1.9 | ...... | ...... | ...... | ...... | ...... | 8-1 | 13-9
2.0 | 2-5 | 2-9 | 3-0 | 3-10 | 5-3 | 8-9 | 14-11
2.1 | 2-6 | 2-10 | 3-2 | 4-0 | 5-5 | 9-4 | .....
2.2 | 2-7 | 2-11 | 3-3 | 4-1 | 5-9 | 9-11 | .....
2.3 | 2-8 | 3-0 | 3-4 | 4-3 | 6-1 | 10-6 | .....

2.4 | 2-9 | 3-1 | 3-5 | 4-5 | 6-4 | 11-3 | .....
2.5 | 2-9 | 3-2 | 3-6 | 4-6 | 6-8 | ..... | .....
2.6 | 2-10 | 3-3 | 3-8 | 4-8 | 7-1 | ..... | .....
2.7 | 2-11 | 3-4 | 3-9 | 4-10 | 7-5 | ..... | .....
2.8 | 3-0 | 3-5 | 3-10 | 4-11 | 7-9 | ..... | .....
2.9 | 3-1 | 3-6 | 3-11 | 5-1 | 8-2 | ..... | .....
3.0 | 3-2 | 3-7 | 4-0 | 5-3 | 8-6 | ..... | .....
_________|________|________|________|________|________|_______|______
Note 1: The distance specified in this table may be applied only
where the maximum anticipated per-unit transient overvoltage has been
determined by engineering analysis and has been supplied by the
employer. Table R-6 applies otherwise.
Note 2: The distances specified in this table are the air,
bare-hand, and live-line tool distances.
Note 3: See Appendix B to this section for information on how the
minimum approach distances listed in the tables were derived and on
how to calculate revised minimum approach distances based on the
control of transient overvoltages.

With Overvoltage Factor Phase-to-Phase Exposure
_____________________________________________________________________
|
Maximum | Distance in feet-inches
antici- |___________________________________________________________
pated |
per-unit | Maximum phase-to-phase voltage in kilovolts
transient|___________________________________________________________
over | | | | | | |
voltage | 121 | 145 | 169 | 242 | 362 | 552 | 800
_________|________|________|________|________|________|_______|______
| | | | | | |
1.5 | ...... | ...... | ...... | ...... | ...... | 7-4 | 12-1
1.6 | ...... | ...... | ...... | ...... | ...... | 8-9 | 14-6
1.7 | ...... | ...... | ...... | ...... | ...... | 10-2 | 17-2
1.8 | ...... | ...... | ...... | ...... | ...... | 11-7 | 19-11
1.9 | ...... | ...... | ...... | ...... | ...... | 13-2 | 22-11
2.0 | 3-7 | 4-1 | 4-8 | 6-1 | 8-7 | 14-10 | 26-0
2.1 | 3-7 | 4-2 | 4-9 | 6-3 | 8-10 | 15-7 | .....
2.2 | 3-8 | 4-3 | 4-10 | 6-4 | 9-2 | 16-4 | .....
2.3 | 3-9 | 4-4 | 4-11 | 6-6 | 9-6 | 17-2 | .....
2.4 | 3-10 | 4-5 | 5-0 | 6-7 | 9-11 | 18-1 | .....
2.5 | 3-11 | 4-6 | 5-2 | 6-9 | 10-4 | ..... | .....
2.6 | 4-0 | 4-7 | 5-3 | 6-11 | 10-9 | ..... | .....
2.7 | 4-1 | 4-8 | 5-4 | 7-0 | 11-2 | ..... | .....
2.8 | 4-1 | 4-9 | 5-5 | 7-2 | 11-7 | ..... | .....
2.9 | 4-2 | 4-10 | 5-6 | 7-4 | 12-1 | ..... | .....
3.0 | 4-3 | 4-11 | 5-8 | 7-6 | 12-6 | ..... | .....
_________|________|________|________|________|________|_______|______
Note 1: The distance specified in this table may be applied only
employer. Table R-6 applies otherwise.
Note 3: See Appendix B to this section for information on how the
minimum approach distances listed in the tables were derived and on

how to calculate revised minimum approach distances based on the
control of transient overvoltages.
Table R-9. - DC Live-Line Work Minimum Approach Distance

With Overvoltage Factor
_____________________________________________________________________
|
| Distance in feet-inches
Maximum anticipated |________________________________________________
per-unit |
transient | Maximum line-to-ground voltage in kilovolts
overvoltage |________________________________________________
| | | | |
| 250 | 400 | 500 | 600 | 750
____________________|_________|__________|________|_______|__________
| | | | |
1.5 or lower........| 3-8 | 5-3 | 6-9 | 8-7 | 11-10
1.6.................| 3-10 | 5-7 | 7-4 | 9-5 | 13-1
1.7.................| 4-1 | 6-0 | 7-11 | 10-3 | 14-4
1.8.................| 4-3 | 6-5 | 8-7 | 11-2 | 15-9
____________________|_________|__________|________|_______|__________
Note 1: The distances specified in this table may be applied only
employer. However, if the transient overvoltage factor is not known,
a factor of 1.8 shall be assumed.
Table R-10. - Altitude Correction Factor

___________________________________________________________________
|
Altitude |
_________________________________________| Correction factor
| | | |
ft | ft | m | m |
__________|___________|_________|________|_________________________
| | | | |
3000 | 10000 | 900 | 3000 | 1.00 | 1.20
4000 | 12000 | 1200 | 3600 | 1.02 | 1.25
5000 | 14000 | 1500 | 4200 | 1.05 | 1.30
6000 | 16000 | 1800 | 4800 | 1.08 | 1.35
7000 | 18000 | 2100 | 5400 | 1.11 | 1.39
8000 | 20000 | 2400 | 6000 | 1.14 | 1.44
9000 | | 2700 | | 1.17 |
__________|___________|_________|________|____________|_____________
Note: If the work is performed at elevations greater than 3000 ft
(900 m) above mean sea level, the minimum approach distance shall be
determined by multiplying the distances in Table R-6 through Table
R-9 by the correction factor corresponding to the altitude at which
work is performed.
(m)
"Deenergizing lines and equipment for employee protection."
..1910.269(m)(1)
(m)(1)
"Application." Paragraph (m) of this section applies to the

deenergizing of transmission and distribution lines and equipment
for the purpose of protecting employees. Control of hazardous
energy sources used in the generation of electric energy is covered
in paragraph (d) of this section. Conductors and parts of electric
equipment that have been deenergized under procedures other
than those required by paragraph (d) or (m) of this section, as
applicable, shall be treated as energized.
(m)(2)
"General."
(m)(2)(i)
If a system operator is in charge of the lines or equipment and their

means of disconnection, all of the requirements of paragraph (m)
(3) of this section shall be observed, in the order given.
(m)(2)(ii)
If no system operator is in charge of the lines or equipment and

their means of disconnection, one employee in the crew shall be
designated as being in charge of the clearance. All of the
requirements of paragraph (m)(3) of this section apply, in the order
given, except as provided in paragraph (m)(2)(iii) of this section.
The employee in charge of the clearance shall take the place of the
system operator, as necessary.
(m)(2)(iii)
If only one crew will be working on the lines or equipment and if

the means of disconnection is accessible and visible to and under
the sole control of the employee in charge of the clearance,
paragraphs (m)(3)(i), (m)(3)(iii), (m)(3)(iv), (m)(3)(viii), and (m)
(3)(xii) of this section do not apply. Additionally, tags required by
the remaining provisions of paragraph (m)(3) of this section need
not be used.
..1910.269(m)(2)(iv)
(m)(2)(iv)
Any disconnecting means that are accessible to persons outside the

employer's control (for example, the general public) shall be
rendered inoperable while they are open for the purpose of
protecting employees.
(m)(3)
"Deenergizing lines and equipment."
(m)(3)(i)
A designated employee shall make a request of the system

operator to have the particular section of line or equipment
deenergized. The designated employee becomes the employee in
charge (as this term is used in paragraph (m)(3) of this section)
and is responsible for the clearance.
(m)(3)(ii)
All switches, disconnectors, jumpers, taps, and other means

through which known sources of electric energy may be supplied to
the particular lines and equipment to be deenergized shall be
opened. Such means shall be rendered inoperable, unless its design
does not so permit, and tagged to indicate that employees are at
work.
(m)(3)(iii)
Automatically and remotely controlled switches that could cause the

opened disconnecting means to close shall also be tagged at the
point of control. The automatic or remote control feature shall be
rendered inoperable, unless its design does not so permit.
(m)(3)(iv)
Tags shall prohibit operation of the disconnecting means and shall

indicate that employees are at work.
..1910.269(m)(3)(v)
(m)(3)(v)
After the applicable requirements in paragraphs (m)(3)(i) through

(m)(3)(iv) of this section have been followed and the employee in
charge of the work has been given a clearance by the system
operator, the lines and equipment to be worked shall be tested to
ensure that they are deenergized.
(m)(3)(vi)
Protective grounds shall be installed as required by paragraph (n)

of this section.
(m)(3)(vii)
After the applicable requirements of paragraphs (m)(3)(i) through

(m)(3)(vi) of this section have been followed, the lines and
equipment involved may be worked as deenergized.
(m)(3)(viii)
If two or more independent crews will be working on the same lines

or equipment, each crew shall independently comply with the
requirements in paragraph (m)(3) of this section.
(m)(3)(ix)
To transfer the clearance, the employee in charge (or, if the

employee in charge is forced to leave the worksite due to illness or
other emergency, the employee's supervisor) shall inform the
system operator; employees in the crew shall be informed of the
transfer; and the new employee in charge shall be responsible for
the clearance.
(m)(3)(x)
To release a clearance, the employee in charge shall:
(m)(3)(x)(A)
Notify employees under his or her direction that the clearance is to

be released;
..1910.269(m)(3)(x)(B)
(m)(3)(x)(B)
Determine that all employees in the crew are clear of the lines and
equipment;
(m)(3)(x)(C)
Determine that all protective grounds installed by the crew have

been removed; and
(m)(3)(x)(D)
Report this information to the system operator and release the

clearance.
(m)(3)(xi)
The person releasing a clearance shall be the same person that

requested the clearance, unless responsibility has been transferred
under paragraph (m)(3)(ix) of this section.
(m)(3)(xii)
Tags may not be removed unless the associated clearance has been
released under paragraph (m)(3)(x) of this section.
(m)(3)(xiii)
Only after all protective grounds have been removed, after all
crews working on the lines or equipment have released their
clearances, after all employees are clear of the lines and
equipment, and after all protective tags have been removed from a
given point of disconnection, may action be initiated to reenergize
the lines or equipment at that point of disconnection.
..1910.269(n)
(n)
"Grounding for the protection of employees."
(n)(1)
"Application." Paragraph (n) of this section applies to the grounding

of transmission and distribution lines and equipment for the
purpose of protecting employees. Paragraph (n)(4) of this section
also applies to the protective grounding of other equipment as
required elsewhere in this section.
(n)(2)
"General." For the employee to work lines or equipment as

deenergized, the lines or equipment shall be deenergized under the
provisions of paragraph (m) of this section and shall be grounded
as specified in paragraphs (n)(3) through (n)(9) of this section.
However, if the employer can demonstrate that installation of a
ground is impracticable or that the conditions resulting from the
installation of a ground would present greater hazards than working
without grounds, the lines and equipment may be treated as
deenergized provided all of the following conditions are met:
(n)(2)(i)
The lines and equipment have been deenergized under the

provisions of paragraph (m) of this section.
(n)(2)(ii)
There is no possibility of contact with another energized source.
(n)(2)(iii)
The hazard of induced voltage is not present.
(n)(3)
"Equipotential zone." Temporary protective grounds shall be placed

at such locations and arranged in such a manner as to prevent each
employee from being exposed to hazardous differences in electrical
potential.
..1910.269(n)(4)
(n)(4)
"Protective grounding equipment."
(n)(4)(i)
Protective grounding equipment shall be capable of conducting the

maximum fault current that could flow at the point of grounding for
the time necessary to clear the fault. This equipment shall have an
ampacity greater than or equal to that of No. 2 AWG copper.
Note: Guidelines for protective grounding equipment are contained

in American Society for Testing and Materials Standard
Specifications for Temporary Grounding Systems to be Used on De-
Energized Electric Power Lines and Equipment, ASTM F855-1990.
(n)(4)(ii)
Protective grounds shall have an impedance low enough to cause

immediate operation of protective devices in case of accidental
energizing of the lines or equipment.
(n)(5)
"Testing." Before any ground is installed, lines and equipment shall

be tested and found absent of nominal voltage, unless a previously
installed ground is present.
(n)(6)
"Order of connection." When a ground is to be attached to a line or

to equipment, the ground-end connection shall be attached first,
and then the other end shall be attached by means of a live-line
tool.
(n)(7)
"Order of removal." When a ground is to be removed, the

grounding device shall be removed from the line or equipment
using a live-line tool before the ground-end connection is removed.
(n)(8)
"Additional precautions." When work is performed on a cable at a

location remote from the cable terminal, the cable may not be
grounded at the cable terminal if there is a possibility of hazardous
transfer of potential should a fault occur.
..1910.269(n)(9)
(n)(9)
"Removal of grounds for test." Grounds may be removed

temporarily during tests. During the test procedure, the employer
shall ensure that each employee uses insulating equipment and is
isolated from any hazards involved, and the employer shall institute
any additional measures as may be necessary to protect each
exposed employee in case the previously grounded lines and
equipment become energized.
(o)
"Testing and test facilities."
(o)(1)
"Application." Paragraph (o) of this section provides for safe work

practices for high-voltage and high-power testing performed in
laboratories, shops, and substations, and in the field and on electric
transmission and distribution lines and equipment. It applies only
to testing involving interim measurements utilizing high voltage,
high power, or combinations of both, and not to testing involving
continuous measurements as in routine metering, relaying, and
normal line work.
Note: Routine inspection and maintenance measurements made by

qualified employees are considered to be routine line work and are
not included in the scope of paragraph (o) of this section, as long
as the hazards related to the use of intrinsic high-voltage or high-
power sources require only the normal precautions associated with
routine operation and maintenance work required in the other
paragraphs of this section. Two typical examples of such excluded
test work procedures are "phasing-out" testing and testing for a
"no-voltage" condition.
(o)(2)
"General requirements."
(o)(2)(i)
The employer shall establish and enforce work practices for the
protection of each worker from the hazards of high-voltage or high-
power testing at all test areas, temporary and permanent. Such
work practices shall include, as a minimum, test area guarding,
grounding, and the safe use of measuring and control circuits. A
means providing for periodic safety checks of field test areas shall
also be included. (See paragraph (o)(6) of this section.)
(o)(2)(ii)
Employees shall be trained in safe work practices upon their initial

assignment to the test area, with periodic reviews and updates
provided as required by paragraph (a)(2) of this section.
..1910.269(o)(3)
(o)(3)
"Guarding of test areas."
(o)(3)(i)
Permanent test areas shall be guarded by walls, fences, or barriers

designed to keep employees out of the test areas.
(o)(3)(ii)
In field testing, or at a temporary test site where permanent fences

and gates are not provided, one of the following means shall be
used to prevent unauthorized employees from entering:
(o)(3)(ii)(A)
The test area shall be guarded by the use of distinctively colored

safety tape that is supported approximately waist high and to which
safety signs are attached,
(o)(3)(ii)(B)
The test area shall be guarded by a barrier or barricade that limits

access to the test area to a degree equivalent, physically and
visually, to the barricade specified in paragraph (o)(3)(ii)(A) of this
section, or
(o)(3)(ii)(C)
The test area shall be guarded by one or more test observers

stationed so that the entire area can be monitored.
(o)(3)(iii)
The barriers required by paragraph (o)(3)(ii) of this section shall be

removed when the protection they provide is no longer needed.
..1910.269(o)(3)(iv)
(o)(3)(iv)
Guarding shall be provided within test areas to control access to

test equipment or to apparatus under test that may become
energized as part of the testing by either direct or inductive
coupling, in order to prevent accidental employee contact with
energized parts.
(o)(4)
"Grounding practices."
(o)(4)(i)
The employer shall establish and implement safe grounding

practices for the test facility.
(o)(4)(i)(A)
All conductive parts accessible to the test operator during the time
the equipment is operating at high voltage shall be maintained at
ground potential except for portions of the equipment that are
isolated from the test operator by guarding.
(o)(4)(i)(B)
Wherever ungrounded terminals of test equipment or apparatus

under test may be present, they shall be treated as energized until
determined by tests to be deenergized.
(o)(4)(ii)
Visible grounds shall be applied, either automatically or manually

with properly insulated tools, to the high-voltage circuits after they
are deenergized and before work is performed on the circuit or item
or apparatus under test. Common ground connections shall be
solidly connected to the test equipment and the apparatus under
test.
..1910.269(o)(4)(iii)
(o)(4)(iii)
In high-power testing, an isolated ground-return conductor system

shall be provided so that no intentional passage of current, with its
attendant voltage rise, can occur in the ground grid or in the earth.
However, an isolated ground-return conductor need not be
provided if the employer can demonstrate that both the following
conditions are met:
(o)(4)(iii)(A)
An isolated ground-return conductor cannot be provided due to the

distance of the test site from the electric energy source, and
(o)(4)(iii)(B)
Employees are protected from any hazardous step and touch

potentials that may develop during the test.
Note: See Appendix C to this section for information on measures

that can be taken to protect employees from hazardous step and
touch potentials.
(o)(4)(iv)
In tests in which grounding of test equipment by means of the

equipment grounding conductor located in the equipment power
cord cannot be used due to increased hazards to test personnel or
the prevention of satisfactory measurements, a ground that the
employer can demonstrate affords equivalent safety shall be
provided, and the safety ground shall be clearly indicated in the
test set-up.
(o)(4)(v)
When the test area is entered after equipment is deenergized, a

ground shall be placed on the high-voltage terminal and any other
exposed terminals.
(o)(4)(v)(A)
High capacitance equipment or apparatus shall be discharged

through a resistor rated for the available energy.
(o)(4)(v)(B)
A direct ground shall be applied to the exposed terminals when the

stored energy drops to a level at which it is safe to do so.
..1910.269(o)(4)(vi)
(o)(4)(vi)
If a test trailer or test vehicle is used in field testing, its chassis

shall be grounded. Protection against hazardous touch potentials
with respect to the vehicle, instrument panels, and other
conductive parts accessible to employees shall be provided by
bonding, insulation, or isolation.
(o)(5)
"Control and measuring circuits."
(o)(5)(i)
Control wiring, meter connections, test leads and cables may not
be run from a test area unless they are contained in a grounded
metallic sheath and terminated in a grounded metallic enclosure or
unless other precautions are taken that the employer can
demonstrate as ensuring equivalent safety.
(o)(5)(ii)
Meters and other instruments with accessible terminals or parts

shall be isolated from test personnel to protect against hazards
arising from such terminals and parts becoming energized during
testing. If this isolation is provided by locating test equipment in
metal compartments with viewing windows, interlocks shall be
provided to interrupt the power supply if the compartment cover is
opened.
(o)(5)(iii)
The routing and connections of temporary wiring shall be made

secure against damage, accidental interruptions and other hazards.
To the maximum extent possible, signal, control, ground, and
power cables shall be kept separate.
..1910.269(o)(5)(iv)
(o)(5)(iv)
If employees will be present in the test area during testing, a test

observer shall be present. The test observer shall be capable of
implementing the immediate deenergizing of test circuits for safety
purposes.
(o)(6)
"Safety check."
(o)(6)(i)
Safety practices governing employee work at temporary or field

test areas shall provide for a routine check of such test areas for
safety at the beginning of each series of tests.
(o)(6)(ii)
The test operator in charge shall conduct these routine safety

checks before each series of tests and shall verify at least the
following conditions:
(o)(6)(ii)(A)
That barriers and guards are in workable condition and are properly
placed to isolate hazardous areas;
(o)(6)(ii)(B)
That system test status signals, if used, are in operable condition;
(o)(6)(ii)(C)
That test power disconnects are clearly marked and readily

available in an emergency;
(o)(6)(ii)(D)
That ground connections are clearly identifiable;
(o)(6)(ii)(E)
That personal protective equipment is provided and used as

required by Subpart I of this Part and by this section; and
(o)(6)(ii)(F)
That signal, ground, and power cables are properly separated.
..1910.269(p)
(p)
"Mechanical equipment."
(p)(1)
"General requirements."
(p)(1)(i)
The critical safety components of mechanical elevating and rotating

equipment shall receive a thorough visual inspection before use on
each shift.
Note: Critical safety components of mechanical elevating and

rotating equipment are components whose failure would result in a
free fall or free rotation of the boom.
(p)(1)(ii)
No vehicular equipment having an obstructed view to the rear may

be operated on off-highway jobsites where any employee is
exposed to the hazards created by the moving vehicle, unless:
(p)(1)(ii)(A)
The vehicle has a reverse signal alarm audible above the

surrounding noise level, or
(p)(1)(ii)(B)
The vehicle is backed up only when a designated employee signals

that it is safe to do so.
(p)(1)(iii)
The operator of an electric line truck may not leave his or her
position at the controls while a load is suspended, unless the
employer can demonstrate that no employee (including the
operator) might be endangered.
(p)(1)(iv)
Rubber -tired, self-propelled scrapers, rubber -tired front-end

loaders, rubber-tired dozers, wheel-type agricultural and industrial
tractors, crawler-type tractors, crawler-type loaders, and motor
graders, with or without attachments, shall have roll-over
protective structures that meet the requirements of Subpart W of
Part 1926 of this chapter.
..1910.269(p)(2)
(p)(2)
"Outriggers."
(p)(2)(i)
Vehicular equipment, if provided with outriggers, shall be operated

with the outriggers extended and firmly set as necessary for the
stability of the specific configuration of the equipment. Outriggers
may not be extended or retracted outside of clear view of the
operator unless all employees are outside the range of possible
equipment motion.
(p)(2)(ii)
If the work area or the terrain precludes the use of outriggers, the
equipment may be operated only within its maximum load ratings
for the particular configuration of the equipment without outriggers.
(p)(3)
"Applied loads." Mechanical equipment used to lift or move lines or

other material shall be used within its maximum load rating and
other design limitations for the conditions under which the work is
being performed.
(p)(4)
"Operations near energized lines or equipment."
(p)(4)(i)
Mechanical equipment shall be operated so that the minimum

approach distances of Table R-6 through Table R-10 are maintained
from exposed energized lines and equipment. However, the
insulated portion of an aerial lift operated by a qualified employee
in the lift is exempt from this requirement.
..1910.269(p)(4)(ii)
(p)(4)(ii)
A designated employee other than the equipment operator shall

observe the approach distance to exposed lines and equipment and
give timely warnings before the minimum approach distance
required by paragraph (p)(4)(i) is reached, unless the employer
can demonstrate that the operator can accurately determine that
the minimum approach distance is being maintained.
(p)(4)(iii)
If, during operation of the mechanical equipment, the equipment

could become energized, the operation shall also comply with at
least one of paragraphs (p)(4)(iii)(A) through (p)(4)(iii)(C) of this
section.
(p)(4)(iii)(A)
The energized lines exposed to contact shall be covered with

insulating protective material that will withstand the type of contact
that might be made during the operation.
(p)(4)(iii)(B)
The equipment shall be insulated for the voltage involved. The

equipment shall be positioned so that its uninsulated portions
cannot approach the lines or equipment any closer than the
minimum approach distances specified in Table R-6 through Table
R-10.
(p)(4)(iii)(C)
Each employee shall be protected from hazards that might arise

from equipment contact with the energized lines. The measures
used shall ensure that employees will not be exposed to hazardous
differences in potential. Unless the employer can demonstrate that
the methods in use protect each employee from the hazards that
might arise if the equipment contacts the energized line, the
measures used shall include all of the following techniques:
..1910.269(p)(4)(iii)(C)(1)
(p)(4)(iii)(C)(1)
Using the best available ground to minimize the time the lines
remain energized,
(p)(4)(iii)(C)(2)
Bonding equipment together to minimize potential differences,
(p)(4)(iii)(C)(3)
Providing ground mats to extend areas of equipotential, and
(p)(4)(iii)(C)(4)
Employing insulating protective equipment or barricades to guard

against any remaining hazardous potential differences.
Note: Appendix C to this section contains information on hazardous

step and touch potentials and on methods of protecting employees
from hazards resulting from such potentials.
(q)
"Overhead lines." This paragraph provides additional requirements

for work performed on or near overhead lines and equipment.
(q)(1)
"General."
(q)(1)(i)
Before elevated structures, such as poles or towers, are subjected

to such stresses as climbing or the installation or removal of
equipment may impose, the employer shall ascertain that the
structures are capable of sustaining the additional or unbalanced
stresses. If the pole or other structure cannot withstand the loads
which will be imposed, it shall be braced or otherwise supported so
as to prevent failure.
Note: Appendix D to this section contains test methods that can be

used in ascertaining whether a wood pole is capable of sustaining
the forces that would be imposed by an employee climbing the
pole. This paragraph also requires the employer to ascertain that
the pole can sustain all other forces that will be imposed by the
work to be performed.
(q)(1)(ii)
When poles are set, moved, or removed near exposed energized

overhead conductors, the pole may not contact the conductors.
..1910.269(q)(1)(iii)
(q)(1)(iii)
When a pole is set, moved, or removed near an exposed energized

overhead conductor, the employer shall ensure that each employee
wears electrical protective equipment or uses insulated devices
when handling the pole and that no employee contacts the pole
with uninsulated parts of his or her body.
(q)(1)(iv)
To protect employees from falling into holes into which poles are to
be placed, the holes shall be attended by employees or physically
guarded whenever anyone is working nearby.
(q)(2)
"Installing and removing overhead lines." The following provisions

apply to the installation and removal of overhead conductors or
cable.
(q)(2)(i)
The employer shall use the tension stringing method, barriers, or

other equivalent measures to minimize the possibility that
conductors and cables being installed or removed will contact
energized power lines or equipment.
(q)(2)(ii)
The protective measures required by paragraph (p)(4)(iii) of this

section for mechanical equipment shall also be provided for
conductors, cables, and pulling and tensioning equipment when the
conductor or cable is being installed or removed close enough to
energized conductors that any of the following failures could
energize the pulling or tensioning equipment or the wire or cable
being installed or removed:
(q)(2)(ii)(A)
Failure of the pulling or tensioning equipment,
..1910.269(q)(2)(ii)(B)
(q)(2)(ii)(B)
Failure of the wire or cable being pulled, or
(q)(2)(ii)(C)
Failure of the previously installed lines or equipment.
(q)(2)(iii)
If the conductors being installed or removed cross over energized

conductors in excess of 600 volts and if the design of the circuit-
interrupting devices protecting the lines so permits, the automatic-
reclosing feature of these devices shall be made inoperative.
(q)(2)(iv)
Before lines are installed parallel to existing energized lines, the

employer shall make a determination of the approximate voltage to
be induced in the new lines, or work shall proceed on the
assumption that the induced voltage is hazardous. Unless the
employer can demonstrate that the lines being installed are not
subject to the induction of a hazardous voltage or unless the lines
are treated as energized, the following requirements also apply:
(q)(2)(iv)(A)
Each bare conductor shall be grounded in increments so that no

point along the conductor is more than 2 miles (3.22 km) from a
ground.
(q)(2)(iv)(B)
The grounds required in paragraph (q)(2)(iv)(A) of this section

shall be left in place until the conductor installation is completed
between dead ends.
..1910.269(q)(2)(iv)(C)
(q)(2)(iv)(C)
The grounds required in paragraph (q)(2)(iv)(A) of this section

shall be removed as the last phase of aerial cleanup.
(q)(2)(iv)(D)
If employees are working on bare conductors, grounds shall also be

installed at each location where these employees are working, and
grounds shall be installed at all open dead -end or catch-off points
or the next adjacent structure.
(q)(2)(iv)(E)
If two bare conductors are to be spliced, the conductors shall be

bonded and grounded before being spliced.
(q)(2)(v)
Reel handling equipment, including pulling and tensioning devices,

shall be in safe operating condition and shall be leveled and
aligned.
(q)(2)(vi)
Load ratings of stringing lines, pulling lines, conductor grips, load-

bearing hardware and accessories, rigging, and hoists may not be
exceeded.
(q)(2)(vii)
Pulling lines and accessories shall be repaired or replaced when

defective.
(q)(2)(viii)
Conductor grips may not be used on wire rope, unless the grip is
specifically designed for this application.
..1910.269(q)(2)(ix)
(q)(2)(ix)
Reliable communications, through two-way radios or other

equivalent means, shall be maintained between the reel tender and
the pulling rig operator.
(q)(2)(x)
The pulling rig may only be operated when it is safe to do so.
Note: Examples of unsafe conditions include employees in locations

prohibited by paragraph (q)(2)(xi) of this section, conductor and
pulling line hang-ups, and slipping of the conductor grip.
(q)(2)(xi)
While the conductor or pulling line is being pulled (in motion) with a
power-driven device, employees are not permitted directly under
overhead operations or on the cross arm, except as necessary to
guide the stringing sock or board over or through the stringing
sheave.
(q)(3)
"Live-line bare-hand work." In addition to other applicable

provisions contained in this section, the following requirements
apply to live-line bare-hand work:
(q)(3)(i)
Before using or supervising the use of the live-line bare-hand

technique on energized circuits, employees shall be trained in the
technique and in the safety requirements of paragraph (q)(3) of
this section. Employees shall receive refresher training as required
by paragraph (a)(2) of this section.
(q)(3)(ii)
Before any employee uses the live-line bare-hand technique on

energized high-voltage conductors or parts, the following
information shall be ascertained:
..1910.269(q)(3)(ii)(A)
(q)(3)(ii)(A)
The nominal voltage rating of the circuit on which the work is to be

performed,
(q)(3)(ii)(B)
The minimum approach distances to ground of lines and other

energized parts on which work is to be performed, and
(q)(3)(ii)(C)
The voltage limitations of equipment to be used.
(q)(3)(iii)
The insulated equipment, insulated tools, and aerial devices and

platforms used shall be designed, tested, and intended for live-line
bare-hand work. Tools and equipment shall be kept clean and dry
while they are in use.
(q)(3)(iv)
The automatic-reclosing feature of circuit-interrupting devices

protecting the lines shall be made inoperative, if the design of the
devices permits.
(q)(3)(v)
Work may not be performed when adverse weather conditions

would make the work hazardous even after the work practices
required by this section are employed. Additionally, work may not
be performed when winds reduce the phase-to-phase or phase-to-
ground minimum approach distances at the work location below
that specified in paragraph (q)(3)(xiii) of this section, unless the
grounded objects and other lines and equipment are covered by
insulating guards.
Note: Thunderstorms in the immediate vicinity, high winds, snow

storms, and ice storms are examples of adverse weather conditions
that are presumed to make live-line bare-hand work too hazardous
to perform safely.
..1910.269(q)(3)(vi)
(q)(3)(vi)
A conductive bucket liner or other conductive device shall be

provided for bonding the insulated aerial device to the energized
line or equipment.
(q)(3)(vi)(A)
The employee shall be connected to the bucket liner or other

conductive device by the use of conductive shoes, leg clips, or
other means.
(q)(3)(vi)(B)
Where differences in potentials at the worksite pose a hazard to

employees, electrostatic shielding designed for the voltage being
worked shall be provided.
(q)(3)(vii)
Before the employee contacts the energized part, the conductive

bucket liner or other conductive device shall be bonded to the
energized conductor by means of a positive connection. This
connection shall remain attached to the energized conductor until
the work on the energized circuit is completed.
(q)(3)(viii)
Aerial lifts to be used for live-line bare-hand work shall have dual
controls (lower and upper) as follows:
(q)(3)(viii)(A)
The upper controls shall be within easy reach of the employee in

the bucket. On a two-bucket-type lift, access to the controls shall
be within easy reach from either bucket.
..1910.269(q)(3)(viii)(B)
(q)(3)(viii)(B)
The lower set of controls shall be located near the base of the
boom, and they shall be so designed that they can override
operation of the equipment at any time.
(q)(3)(ix)
Lower (ground-level) lift controls may not be operated with an

employee in the lift, except in case of emergency.
(q)(3)(x)
Before employees are elevated into the work position, all controls
(ground level and bucket) shall be checked to determine that they
are in proper working condition.
(q)(3)(xi)
Before the boom of an aerial lift is elevated, the body of the truck
shall be grounded, or the body of the truck shall be barricaded and
treated as energized.
(q)(3)(xii)
A boom -current test shall be made before work is started each day,
each time during the day when higher voltage is encountered, and
when changed conditions indicate a need for an additional test. This
test shall consist of placing the bucket in contact with an energized
source equal to the voltage to be encountered for a minimum of 3
minutes. The leakage current may not exceed 1 microampere per
kilovolt of nominal phase-to-ground voltage. Work from the aerial
lift shall be immediately suspended upon indication of a malfunction
in the equipment.
..1910.269(q)(3)(xiii)
(q)(3)(xiii)
The minimum approach distances specified in Table R -6 through

Table R -10 shall be maintained from all grounded objects and from
lines and equipment at a potential different from that to which the
live-line bare-hand equipment is bonded, unless such grounded
objects and other lines and equipment are covered by insulating
guards.
(q)(3)(xiv)
While an employee is approaching, leaving, or bonding to an

energized circuit, the minimum approach distances in Table R-6
through Table R -10 shall be maintained between the employee and
any grounded parts, including the lower boom and portions of the
truck.
(q)(3)(xv)
While the bucket is positioned alongside an energized bushing or

insulator string, the phase-to-ground minimum approach distances
of Table R -6 through Table R-10 shall be maintained between all
parts of the bucket and the grounded end of the bushing or
insulator string or any other grounded surface.
(q)(3)(xvi)
Hand lines may not be used between the bucket and the boom or
between the bucket and the ground. However, non-conductive-type
hand lines may be used from conductor to ground if not supported
from the bucket. Ropes used for live-line bare-hand work may not
be used for other purposes.
(q)(3)(xvii)
Uninsulated equipment or material may not be passed between a

pole or structure and an aerial lift while an employee working from
the bucket is bonded to an energized part.
..1910.269(q)(3)(xviii)
(q)(3)(xviii)
A minimum approach distance table reflecting the minimum

approach distances listed in Table R-6 through Table R-10 shall be
printed on a plate of durable non -conductive material. This table
shall be mounted so as to be visible to the operator of the boom.
(q)(3)(xix)
A non-conductive measuring device shall be readily accessible to

assist employees in maintaining the required minimum approach
distance.
(q)(4)
"Towers and structures." The following requirements apply to work

performed on towers or other structures which support overhead
lines.
(q)(4)(i)
The employer shall ensure that no employee is under a tower or

structure while work is in progress, except where the employer can
demonstrate that such a working position is necessary to assist
employees working above.
(q)(4)(ii)
Tag lines or other similar devices shall be used to maintain control

of tower sections being raised or positioned, unless the employer
can demonstrate that the use of such devices would create a
greater hazard.
(q)(4)(iii)
The loadline may not be detached from a member or section until

the load is safely secured.
(q)(4)(iv)
Except during emergency restoration procedures, work shall be

discontinued when adverse weather conditions would make the
work hazardous in spite of the work practices required by this
section.

that are presumed to make this work too hazardous to perform,
except under emergency conditions.
..1910.269(r)
(r)
"Line-clearance tree trimming operations." This paragraph provides

additional requirements for line-clearance tree-trimming operations
and for equipment used in these operations.
(r)(1)
"Electrical hazards." This paragraph does not apply to qualified

employees.
(r)(1)(i)
Before an employee climbs, enters, or works around any tree, a

determination shall be made of the nominal voltage of electric
power lines posing a hazard to employees. However, a
determination of the maximum nominal voltage to which an
employee will be exposed may be made instead, if all lines are
considered as energized at this maximum voltage.
(r)(1)(ii)
There shall be a second line-clearance tree trimmer within normal

(that is, unassisted) voice communication under any of the
(r)(1)(ii)(A)
If a line-clearance tree trimmer is to approach more closely than 10

feet (305 cm) any conductor or electric apparatus energized at
more than 750 volts or
(r)(1)(ii)(B)
If branches or limbs being removed are closer to lines energized at

more than 750 volts than the distances listed in Table R -6, Table R-
9, and Table R -10 or
(r)(1)(ii)(C)
If roping is necessary to remove branches or limbs from such

conductors or apparatus.
..1910.269(r)(1)(iii)
(r)(1)(iii)
Line-clearance tree trimmers shall maintain the minimum approach

distances from energized conductors given in Table R-6, Table R-9,
and Table R-10.
(r)(1)(iv)
Branches that are contacting exposed energized conductors or

equipment or that are within the distances specified in Table R -6,
Table R -9, and Table R -10 may be removed only through the use of
insulating equipment.
Note: A tool constructed of a material that the employer can

demonstrate has insulating qualities meeting paragraph (j)(1) of
this section is considered as insulated under this paragraph if the
tool is clean and dry.
(r)(1)(v)
Ladders, platforms, and aerial devices may not be brought closer to

an energized part than the distances listed in Table R-6, Table R-9,
and Table R-10.
(r)(1)(vi)
Line-clearance tree-trimming work may not be performed when
adverse weather conditions make the work hazardous in spite of

the work practices required by this section. Each employee
performing line-clearance tree trimming work in the aftermath of a
storm or under similar emergency conditions shall be trained in the
special hazards related to this type of work.

that are presumed to make line-clearance tree trimming work too
hazardous to perform safely.
(r)(2)
"Brush chippers."
(r)(2)(i)
Brush chippers shall be equipped with a locking device in the

ignition system.
(r)(2)(ii)
Access panels for maintenance and adjustment of the chipper

blades and associated drive train shall be in place and secure
during operation of the equipment.
..1910.269(r)(2)(iii)
(r)(2)(iii)
Brush chippers not equipped with a mechanical infeed system shall

be equipped with an infeed hopper of length sufficient to prevent
employees from contacting the blades or knives of the machine
during operation.
(r)(2)(iv)
Trailer chippers detached from trucks shall be chocked or otherwise

secured.
(r)(2)(v)
Each employee in the immediate area of an operating chipper feed

table shall wear personal protective equipment as required by
Subpart I of this Part.
(r)(3)
"Sprayers and related equipment."
(r)(3)(i)
Walking and working surfaces of sprayers and related equipment

shall be covered with slip-resistant material. If slipping hazards
cannot be eliminated, slip-resistant footwear or handrails and stair
rails meeting the requirements of Subpart D may be used instead
of slip-resistant material.
(r)(3)(ii)
Equipment on which employees stand to spray while the vehicle is

in motion shall be equipped with guardrails around the working
area. The guardrail shall be constructed in accordance with Subpart
D of this Part.
(r)(4)
"Stump cutters."
(r)(4)(i)
Stump cutters shall be equipped with enclosures or guards to

protect employees.
..1910.269(r)(4)(ii)
(r)(4)(ii)
Each employee in the immediate area of stump grinding operations

(including the stump cutter operator) shall wear personal protective
equipment as required by Subpart I of this Part.
(r)(5)
"Gasoline-engine power saws." Gasoline-engine power saw

operations shall meet the requirements of 1910.266(e) and the
following:
(r)(5)(i)
Each power saw weighing more than 15 pounds (6.8 kilograms,

service weight) that is used in trees shall be supported by a
separate line, except when work is performed from an aerial lift and
except during topping or removing operations where no supporting
limb will be available.
(r)(5)(ii)
Each power saw shall be equipped with a control that will return the
saw to idling speed when released.
(r)(5)(iii)
Each power saw shall be equipped with a clutch and shall be so

adjusted that the clutch will not engage the chain drive at idling
speed.
(r)(5)(iv)
A power saw shall be started on the ground or where it is otherwise

firmly supported. Drop starting of saws over 15 pounds (6.8 kg) is
permitted outside of the bucket of an aerial lift only if the area
below the lift is clear of personnel.
..1910.269(r)(5)(v)
(r)(5)(v)
A power saw engine may be started and operated only when all
employees other than the operator are clear of the saw.
(r)(5)(vi)
A power saw may not be running when the saw is being carried up
into a tree by an employee.
(r)(5)(vii)
Power saw engines shall be stopped for all cleaning, refueling,

adjustments, and repairs to the saw or motor, except as the
manufacturer's servicing procedures require otherwise.
(r)(6)
"Backpack power units for use in pruning and clearing."
(r)(6)(i)
While a backpack power unit is running, no one other than the

operator may be within 10 feet (305 cm) of the cutting head of a
brush saw.
(r)(6)(ii)
A backpack power unit shall be equipped with a quick shutoff switch

readily accessible to the operator.
(r)(6)(iii)
Backpack power unit engines shall be stopped for all cleaning,

refueling, adjustments, and repairs to the saw or motor, except as
the manufacturer's servicing procedures require otherwise.
..1910.269(r)(7)
(r)(7)
"Rope."
(r)(7)(i)
Climbing ropes shall be used by employees working aloft in trees.

These ropes shall have a minimum diameter of 0.5 inch (1.2 cm)
with a minimum breaking strength of 2300 pounds (10.2 kN).
Synthetic rope shall have elasticity of not more than 7 percent.
(r)(7)(ii)
Rope shall be inspected before each use and, if unsafe (for

example, because of damage or defect), may not be used.
(r)(7)(iii)
Rope shall be stored away from cutting edges and sharp tools.
Rope contact with corrosive chemicals, gas, and oil shall be
avoided.
(r)(7)(iv)
When stored, rope shall be coiled and piled, or shall be suspended,

so that air can circulate through the coils.
(r)(7)(v)
Rope ends shall be secured to prevent their unraveling.
(r)(7)(vi)
Climbing rope may not be spliced to effect repair.
(r)(7)(vii)
A rope that is wet, that is contaminated to the extent that its

insulating capacity is impaired, or that is otherwise not considered
to be insulated for the voltage involved may not be used near
exposed energized lines.
(r)(8)
"Fall protection." Each employee shall be tied in with a climbing

rope and safety saddle when the employee is working above the
ground in a tree, unless he or she is ascending into the tree.
..1910.269(s)
(s)
"Communication facilities."
(s)(1)
"Microwave transmission."
(s)(1)(i)
The employer shall ensure that no employee looks into an open

waveguide or antenna that is connected to an energized microwave
source.
(s)(1)(ii)
If the electromagnetic radiation level within an accessible area

associated with microwave communications systems exceeds the
radiation protection guide given in 1910.97(a)(2) of this Part, the
area shall be posted with the warning symbol described in 1910.97
(a)(3) of this Part. The lower half of the warning symbol shall
include the following statements or ones that the employer can
demonstrate are equivalent:
Radiation in this area may exceed hazard limitations and special

precautions are required. Obtain specific instruction before
entering.
(s)(1)(iii)
When an employee works in an area where the electromagnetic

radiation could exceed the radiation protection guide, the employer
shall institute measures that ensure that the employee's exposure
is not greater than that permitted by that guide. Such measures
may include administrative and engineering controls and personal
protective equipment.
(s)(2)
"Power line carrier." Power line carrier work, including work on

equipment used for coupling carrier current to power line
conductors, shall be performed in accordance with the
requirements of this section pertaining to work on energized lines.
(t)
"Underground electrical installations." This paragraph provides

additional requirements for work on underground electrical
installations.
..1910.269(t)(1)
(t)(1)
"Access." A ladder or other climbing device shall be used to enter

and exit a manhole or subsurface vault exceeding 4 feet (122 cm)
in depth. No employee may climb into or out of a manhole or vault
by stepping on cables or hangers.
(t)(2)
"Lowering equipment into manholes." Equipment used to lower

materials and tools into manholes or vaults shall be capable of
supporting the weight to be lowered and shall be checked for
defects before use. Before tools or material are lowered into the
opening for a manhole or vault, each employee working in the
manhole or vault shall be clear of the area directly under the
opening.
(t)(3)
"Attendants for manholes."
(t)(3)(i)
While work is being performed in a manhole containing energized

electric equipment, an employee with first aid and CPR training
meeting paragraph (b)(1) of this section shall be available on the
surface in the immediate vicinity to render emergency assistance.
(t)(3)(ii)
Occasionally, the employee on the surface may briefly enter a

manhole to provide assistance, other than emergency.
Note 1: An attendant may also be required under paragraph (e)(7)

of this section. One person may serve to fulfill both requirements.
However, attendants required under paragraph (e)(7) of this
section are not permitted to enter the manhole.
Note 2: Employees entering manholes containing unguarded,

uninsulated energized lines or parts of electric equipment operating
at 50 volts or more are required to be qualified under paragraph (l)
(1) of this section.
(t)(3)(iii)
For the purpose of inspection, housekeeping, taking readings, or

similar work, an employee working alone may enter, for brief
periods of time, a manhole where energized cables or equipment
are in service, if the employer can demonstrate that the employee
will be protected from all electrical hazards.
..1910.269(t)(3)(iv)
(t)(3)(iv)
Reliable communications, through two-way radios or other

equivalent means, shall be maintained among all employees
involved in the job.
(t)(4)
"Duct rods." If duct rods are used, they shall be installed in the
direction presenting the least hazard to employees. An employee
shall be stationed at the far end of the duct line being rodded to
ensure that the required minimum approach distances are
maintained.
(t)(5)
"Multiple cables." When multiple cables are present in a work area,

the cable to be worked shall be identified by electrical means,
unless its identity is obvious by reason of distinctive appearance or
location or by other readily apparent means of identification. Cables
other than the one being worked shall be protected from damage.
(t)(6)
"Moving cables." Energized cables that are to be moved shall be

inspected for defects.
(t)(7)
"Defective cables." Where a cable in a manhole has one or more

abnormalities that could lead to or be an indication of an impending
fault, the defective cable shall be deenergized before any employee
may work in the manhole, except when service load conditions and
a lack of feasible alternatives require that the cable remain
energized. In that case, employees may enter the manhole
provided they are protected from the possible effects of a failure by
shields or other devices that are capable of containing the adverse
effects of a fault in the joint.
Note: Abnormalities such as oil or compound leaking from cable or
joints, broken cable sheaths or joint sleeves, hot localized surface

temperatures of cables or joints, or joints that are swollen beyond
normal tolerance are presumed to lead to or be an indication of an
impending fault.
..1910.269(t)(8)
(t)(8)
"Sheath continuity." When work is performed on buried cable or on

cable in manholes, metallic sheath continuity shall be maintained or
the cable sheath shall be treated as energized.
(u)
"Substations." This paragraph provides additional requirements for

substations and for work performed in them.
(u)(1)
"Access and working space." Sufficient access and working space

shall be provided and maintained about electric equipment to
permit ready and safe operation and maintenance of such
equipment.
Note: Guidelines for the dimensions of access and working space

about electric equipment in substations are contained in American
National Standard - National Electrical Safety Code, ANSI C2-1987.
Installations meeting the ANSI provisions comply with paragraph
(u)(1) of this section. An installation that does not conform to this
ANSI standard will, nonetheless, be considered as complying with
paragraph (u)(1) of this section if the employer can demonstrate
that the installation provides ready and safe access based on the
following evidence:
[1] That the installation conforms to the edition of ANSI C2 that

was in effect at the time the installation was made,
[2] That the configuration of the installation enables employees to

maintain the minimum approach distances required by paragraph
(l)(2) of this section while they are working on exposed, energized
parts, and
[3] That the precautions taken when work is performed on the
installation provide protection equivalent to the protection that

would be provided by access and working space meeting ANSI C2-
1987.
(u)(2)
"Draw-out -type circuit breakers." When draw -out-type circuit

breakers are removed or inserted, the breaker shall be in the open
position. The control circuit shall also be rendered inoperative, if
the design of the equipment permits.
(u)(3)
"Substation fences." Conductive fences around substations shall be

grounded. When a substation fence is expanded or a section is
removed, fence grounding continuity shall be maintained, and
bonding shall be used to prevent electrical discontinuity.
(u)(4)
"Guarding of rooms containing electric supply equipment."
(u)(4)(i)
Rooms and spaces in which electric supply lines or equipment are

installed shall meet the requirements of paragraphs (u)(4)(ii)
through (u)(4)(v) of this section under the following conditions:
..1910.269(u)(4)(i)(A)
(u)(4)(i)(A)
If exposed live parts operating at 50 to 150 volts to ground are

located within 8 feet of the ground or other working surface inside
the room or space,
(u)(4)(i)(B)
If live parts operating at 151 to 600 volts and located within 8 feet
of the ground or other working surface inside the room or space are
guarded only by location, as permitted under paragraph (u)(5)(i) of
this section, or
(u)(4)(i)(C)
If live parts operating at more than 600 volts are located within the
room or space, unless:
(u)(4)(i)(C)(1)
The live parts are enclosed within grounded, metal-enclosed

equipment whose only openings are designed so that foreign
objects inserted in these openings will be deflected from energized
parts, or
(u)(4)(i)(C)(2)
The live parts are installed at a height above ground and any other
working surface that provides protection at the voltage to which
they are energized corresponding to the protection provided by an
8-foot height at 50 volts.
(u)(4)(ii)
The rooms and spaces shall be so enclosed within fences, screens,

partitions, or walls as to minimize the possibility that unqualified
persons will enter.
(u)(4)(iii)
Signs warning unqualified persons to keep out shall be displayed at

entrances to the rooms and spaces.
..1910.269(u)(4)(iv)
(u)(4)(iv)
Entrances to rooms and spaces that are not under the observation
of an attendant shall be kept locked.
(u)(4)(v)
Unqualified persons may not enter the rooms or spaces while the
electric supply lines or equipment are energized.
(u)(5)
"Guarding of energized parts."
(u)(5)(i)
Guards shall be provided around all live parts operating at more

than 150 volts to ground without an insulating covering, unless the
location of the live parts gives sufficient horizontal or vertical or a
combination of these clearances to minimize the possibility of
accidental employee contact.
Note: Guidelines for the dimensions of clearance distances about

electric equipment in substations are contained in American
(u)(5)(i) of this section. An installation that does not conform to
this ANSI standard will, nonetheless, be considered as complying
with paragraph (u)(5)(i) of this section if the employer can
demonstrate that the installation provides sufficient clearance
based on the following evidence:

[2] That each employee is isolated from energized parts at the

point of closest approach, and

would be provided by horizontal and vertical clearances meeting
ANSI C2-1987.
(u)(5)(ii)
Except for fuse replacement and other necessary access by

qualified persons, the guarding of energized parts within a
compartment shall be maintained during operation and
maintenance functions to prevent accidental contact with energized
parts and to prevent tools or other equipment from being dropped
on energized parts.
(u)(5)(iii)
When guards are removed from energized equipment, barriers shall

be installed around the work area to prevent employees who are
not working on the equipment, but who are in the area, from
contacting the exposed live parts.
..1910.269(u)(6)
(u)(6)
"Substation entry."
(u)(6)(i)
Upon entering an attended substation, each employee other than

those regularly working in the station shall report his or her
presence to the employee in charge in order to receive information
on special system conditions affecting employee safety.
(u)(6)(ii)
The job briefing required by paragraph (c) of this section shall

cover such additional subjects as the location of energized
equipment in or adjacent to the work area and the limits of any
deenergized work area.
(v)
"Power generation." This paragraph provides additional

requirements and related work practices for power generating
plants.
(v)(1)
"Interlocks and other safety devices."
(v)(1)(i)
Interlocks and other safety devices shall be maintained in a safe,

operable condition.
(v)(1)(ii)
No interlock or other safety device may be modified to defeat its

function, except for test, repair, or adjustment of the device.
(v)(2)
"Changing brushes." Before exciter or generator brushes are

changed while the generator is in service, the exciter or generator
field shall be checked to determine whether a ground condition
exists. The brushes may not be changed while the generator is
energized if a ground condition exists.
(v)(3)
"Access and working space." Sufficient access and working space

shall be provided and maintained about electric equipment to
permit ready and safe operation and maintenance of such
equipment.
Note: Guidelines for the dimensions of access and working space

about electric equipment in generating stations are contained in
American National Standard - National Electrical Safety Code, ANSI
C2-1987. Installations meeting the ANSI provisions comply with
paragraph (v)(3) of this section. An installation that does not
conform to this ANSI standard will, nonetheless, be considered as
complying with paragraph (v)(3) of this section if the employer can
demonstrate that the installation provides ready and safe access

[2] That the configuration of the installation enables employees to

maintain the minimum approach distances required by paragraph
(l)(2) of this section while they are working on exposed, energized
parts, and

would be provided by access and working space meeting ANSI C2-
1987.
..1910.269(v)(4)
(v)(4)
"Guarding of rooms containing electric supply equipment."
(v)(4)(i)
Rooms and spaces in which electric supply lines or equipment are

installed shall meet the requirements of paragraphs (v)(4)(ii)
through (v)(4)(v) of this section under the following conditions:
(v)(4)(i)(A)
If exposed live parts operating at 50 to 150 volts to ground are

located within 8 feet of the ground or other working surface inside
the room or space,
(v)(4)(i)(B)
If live parts operating at 151 to 600 volts and located within 8 feet
of the ground or other working surface inside the room or space are
guarded only by location, as permitted under paragraph (v)(5)(i) of
this section, or
(v)(4)(i)(C)
If live parts operating at more than 600 volts are located within the
room or space, unless:
(v)(4)(i)(C)(1)
The live parts are enclosed within grounded, metal-enclosed

equipment whose only openings are designed so that foreign
objects inserted in these openings will be deflected from energized
parts, or
(v)(4)(i)(C)(2)
The live parts are installed at a height above ground and any other
working surface that provides protection at the voltage to which
they are energized corresponding to the protection provided by an
8-foot height at 50 volts.
..1910.269(v)(4)(ii)
(v)(4)(ii)
The rooms and spaces shall be so enclosed within fences, screens,

partitions, or walls as to minimize the possibility that unqualified
persons will enter.
(v)(4)(iii)
Signs warning unqualified persons to keep out shall be displayed at

entrances to the rooms and spaces.
(v)(4)(iv)
Entrances to rooms and spaces that are not under the observation
of an attendant shall be kept locked.
(v)(4)(v)
Unqualified persons may not enter the rooms or spaces while the
electric supply lines or equipment are energized.
(v)(5)
"Guarding of energized parts."
(v)(5)(i)
Guards shall be provided around all live parts operating at more

than 150 volts to ground without an insulating covering, unless the
location of the live parts gives sufficient horizontal or vertical or a
combination of these clearances to minimize the possibility of
accidental employee contact.
Note: Guidelines for the dimensions of clearance distances about

electric equipment in generating stations are contained in American
(v)(5)(i) of this section. An installation that does not conform to
this ANSI standard will, nonetheless, be considered as complying
with paragraph (v)(5)(i) of this section if the employer can
demonstrate that the installation provides sufficient clearance

[2] That each employee is isolated from energized parts at the

point of closest approach, and

would be provided by horizontal and vertical clearances meeting
ANSI C2-1987.
(v)(5)(ii)
Except for fuse replacement or other necessary access by qualified

persons, the guarding of energized parts within a compartment
shall be maintained during operation and maintenance functions to
prevent accidental contact with energized parts and to prevent
tools or other equipment from being dropped on energized parts.
..1910.269(v)(5)(iii)
(v)(5)(iii)
When guards are removed from energized equipment, barriers shall

be installed around the work area to prevent employees who are
not working on the equipment, but who are in the area, from
contacting the exposed live parts.
(v)(6)
"Water or steam spaces." The following requirements apply to work

in water and steam spaces associated with boilers:
(v)(6)(i)
A designated employee shall inspect conditions before work is

permitted and after its completion. Eye protection, or full face
protection if necessary, shall be worn at all times when condenser,
heater, or boiler tubes are being cleaned.
(v)(6)(ii)
Where it is necessary for employees to work near tube ends during

cleaning, shielding shall be installed at the tube ends.
(v)(7)
"Chemical cleaning of boilers and pressure vessels." The following

requirements apply to chemical cleaning of boilers and pressure
vessels:
(v)(7)(i)
Areas where chemical cleaning is in progress shall be cordoned off

to restrict access during cleaning. If flammable liquids, gases, or
vapors or combustible materials will be used or might be produced
during the cleaning process, the following requirements also apply:
(v)(7)(i)(A)
The area shall be posted with signs restricting entry and warning of
the hazards of fire and explosion; and
..1910.269(v)(7)(i)(B)
(v)(7)(i)(B)
Smoking, welding, and other possible ignition sources are

prohibited in these restricted areas.
(v)(7)(ii)
The number of personnel in the restricted area shall be limited to

those necessary to accomplish the task safely.
(v)(7)(iii)
There shall be ready access to water or showers for emergency

use.
Note: See 1910.141 of this Part for requirements that apply to the
water supply and to washing facilities.
(v)(7)(iv)
Employees in restricted areas shall wear protective equipment

meeting the requirements of Subpart I of this Part and including,
but not limited to, protective clothing, boots, goggles, and gloves.
(v)(8)
"Chlorine systems."
(v)(8)(i)
Chlorine system enclosures shall be posted with signs restricting

entry and warning of the hazard to health and the hazards of fire
and explosion.
Note: See Subpart Z of this Part for requirements necessary to

protect the health of employees from the effects of chlorine.
(v)(8)(ii)
Only designated employees may enter the restricted area.

Additionally, the number of personnel shall be limited to those
necessary to accomplish the task safely.
(v)(8)(iii)
Emergency repair kits shall be available near the shelter or

enclosure to allow for the prompt repair of leaks in chlorine lines,
equipment, or containers.
..1910.269(v)(8)(iv)
(v)(8)(iv)
Before repair procedures are started, chlorine tanks, pipes, and

equipment shall be purged with dry air and isolated from other
sources of chlorine.
(v)(8)(v)
The employer shall ensure that chlorine is not mixed with materials
that would react with the chlorine in a dangerously exothermic or
other hazardous manner.
(v)(9)
"Boilers."
(v)(9)(i)
Before internal furnace or ash hopper repair work is started,

overhead areas shall be inspected for possible falling objects. If the
hazard of falling objects exists, overhead protection such as

planking or nets shall be provided.
(v)(9)(ii)
When opening an operating boiler door, employees shall stand clear

of the opening of the door to avoid the heat blast and gases which
may escape from the boiler.
(v)(10)
"Turbine generators."
(v)(10)(i)
Smoking and other ignition sources are prohibited near hydrogen or

hydrogen sealing systems, and signs warning of the danger of
explosion and fire shall be posted.
(v)(10)(ii)
Excessive hydrogen makeup or abnormal loss of pressure shall be

considered as an emergency and shall be corrected immediately.
..1910.269(v)(10)(iii)
(v)(10)(iii)
A sufficient quantity of inert gas shall be available to purge the

hydrogen from the largest generator.
(v)(11)
"Coal and ash handling."
(v)(11)(i)
Only designated persons may operate railroad equipment.
(v)(11)(ii)
Before a locomotive or locomotive crane is moved, a warning shall

be given to employees in the area.
(v)(11)(iii)
Employees engaged in switching or dumping cars may not use their

feet to line up drawheads.
(v)(11)(iv)
Drawheads and knuckles may not be shifted while locomotives or

cars are in motion.
(v)(11)(v)
When a railroad car is stopped for unloading, the car shall be

secured from displacement that could endanger employees.
(v)(11)(vi)
An emergency means of stopping dump operations shall be

provided at railcar dumps.
(v)(11)(vii)
The employer shall ensure that employees who work in coal- or

ash-handling conveyor areas are trained and knowledgeable in
conveyor operation and in the requirements of paragraphs (v)(11)
(viii) through (v)(11)(xii) of this section.
..1910.269(v)(11)(viii)
(v)(11)(viii)
Employees may not ride a coal- or ash-handling conveyor belt at

any time. Employees may not cross over the conveyor belt, except
at walkways, unless the conveyor's energy source has been
deenergized and has been locked out or tagged in accordance with
paragraph (d) of this section.
(v)(11)(ix)
A conveyor that could cause injury when started may not be

started until personnel in the area are alerted by a signal or by a
designated person that the conveyor is about to start.
(v)(11)(x)
If a conveyor that could cause injury when started is automatically

controlled or is controlled from a remote location, an audible device
shall be provided that sounds an alarm that will be recognized by
each employee as a warning that the conveyor will start and that
can be clearly heard at all points along the conveyor where
personnel may be present. The warning device shall be actuated by
the device starting the conveyor and shall continue for a period of
time before the conveyor starts that is long enough to allow
employees to move clear of the conveyor system. A visual warning
may be used in place of the audible device if the employer can
demonstrate that it will provide an equally effective warning in the
particular circumstances involved.
Exception: If the employer can demonstrate that the system's

function would be seriously hindered by the required time delay,
warning signs may be provided in place of the audible warning
device. If the system was installed before January 31, 1995,
warning signs may be provided in place of the audible warning
device until such time as the conveyor or its control system is
rebuilt or rewired. These warning signs shall be clear, concise, and
legible and shall indicate that conveyors and allied equipment may
be started at any time, that danger exists, and that personnel must
keep clear. These warning signs shall be provided along the
conveyor at areas not guarded by position or location.
..1910.269(v)(11)(xi)
(v)(11)(xi)
Remotely and automatically controlled conveyors, and conveyors

that have operating stations which are not manned or which are
beyond voice and visual contact from drive areas, loading areas,
transfer points, and other locations on the conveyor path not
guarded by location, position, or guards shall be furnished with
emergency stop buttons, pull cords, limit switches, or similar
emergency stop devices. However, if the employer can
demonstrate that the design, function, and operation of the
conveyor do not expose an employee to hazards, an emergency
stop device is not required.
(v)(11)(xi)(A)
Emergency stop devices shall be easily identifiable in the immediate

vicinity of such locations.
(v)(11)(xi)(B)
An emergency stop device shall act directly on the control of the

conveyor involved and may not depend on the stopping of any
other equipment.
(v)(11)(xi)(C)
Emergency stop devices shall be installed so that they cannot be

overridden from other locations.
(v)(11)(xii)
Where coal-handling operations may produce a combustible

atmosphere from fuel sources or from flammable gases or dust,
sources of ignition shall be eliminated or safely controlled to
prevent ignition of the combustible atmosphere.
Note: Locations that are hazardous because of the presence of

combustible dust are classified as Class II hazardous locations. See
1910.307 of this Part.
(v)(11)(xiii)
An employee may not work on or beneath overhanging coal in coal

bunkers, coal silos, or coal storage areas, unless the employee is
protected from all hazards posed by shifting coal.
..1910.269(v)(11)(xiv)
(v)(11)(xiv)
An employee entering a bunker or silo to dislodge the contents

shall wear a body harness with lifeline attached. The lifeline shall be
secured to a fixed support outside the bunker and shall be attended
at all times by an employee located outside the bunker or facility.
(v)(12)
"Hydroplants and equipment." Employees working on or close to

water gates, valves, intakes, forebays, flumes, or other locations
where increased or decreased water flow or levels may pose a

significant hazard shall be warned and shall vacate such dangerous
areas before water flow changes are made.
(w)
"Special conditions."
(w)(1)
"Capacitors." The following additional requirements apply to work

on capacitors and on lines connected to capacitors.
Note: See paragraphs (m) and (n) of this section for requirements
pertaining to the deenergizing and grounding of capacitor
installations.
(w)(1)(i)
Before employees work on capacitors, the capacitors shall be

disconnected from energized sources and, after a wait of at least 5
minutes from the time of disconnection, short-circuited.
(w)(1)(ii)
Before the units are handled, each unit in series-parallel capacitor

banks shall be short-circuited between all terminals and the
capacitor case or its rack. If the cases of capacitors are on
ungrounded substation racks, the racks shall be bonded to ground.
(w)(1)(iii)
Any line to which capacitors are connected shall be short-circuited

before it is considered deenergized.
..1910.269(w)(2)
(w)(2)
"Current transformer secondaries." The secondary of a current

transformer may not be opened while the transformer is energized.
If the primary of the current transformer cannot be deenergized
before work is performed on an instrument, a relay, or other
section of a current transformer secondary circuit, the circuit shall
be bridged so that the current transformer secondary will not be

opened.
(w)(3)
"Series streetlighting."
(w)(3)(i)
If the open-circuit voltage exceeds 600 volts, the series

streetlighting circuit shall be worked in accordance with paragraph
(q) or (t) of this section, as appropriate.
(w)(3)(ii)
A series loop may only be opened after the streetlighting

transformer has been deenergized and isolated from the source of
supply or after the loop is bridged to avoid an open-circuit
condition.
(w)(4)
"Illumination." Sufficient illumination shall be provided to enable

the employee to perform the work safely.
(w)(5)
"Protection against drowning."
(w)(5)(i)
Whenever an employee may be pulled or pushed or may fall into

water where the danger of drowning exists, the employee shall be
provided with and shall use U.S. Coast Guard approved personal
flotation devices.
(w)(5)(ii)
Each personal flotation device shall be maintained in safe condition

and shall be inspected frequently enough to ensure that it does not
have rot, mildew, water saturation, or any other condition that
could render the device unsuitable for use.
..1910.269(w)(5)(iii)
(w)(5)(iii)
An employee may cross streams or other bodies of water only if a

safe means of passage, such as a bridge, is provided.
(w)(6)
"Employee protection in public work areas."
(w)(6)(i)
Traffic control signs and traffic control devices used for the
protection of employees shall meet the requirements of 1926.200
(g)(2) of this Chapter.
(w)(6)(ii)
Before work is begun in the vicinity of vehicular or pedestrian traffic

that may endanger employees, warning signs or flags and other
traffic control devices shall be placed in conspicuous locations to
alert and channel approaching traffic.
(w)(6)(iii)
Where additional employee protection is necessary, barricades shall

be used.
(w)(6)(iv)
Excavated areas shall be protected with barricades.
(w)(6)(v)
At night, warning lights shall be prominently displayed.
..1910.269(w)(7)
(w)(7)
"Backfeed." If there is a possibility of voltage backfeed from

sources of cogeneration or from the secondary system (for
example, backfeed from more than one energized phase feeding a
common load), the requirements of paragraph (l) of this section
apply if the lines or equipment are to be worked as energized, and

the requirements of paragraphs (m) and (n) of this section apply if
the lines or equipment are to be worked as deenergized.
(w)(8)
"Lasers." Laser equipment shall be installed, adjusted, and

operated in accordance with 1926.54 of this Chapter.
(w)(9)
"Hydraulic fluids." Hydraulic fluids used for the insulated sections of

equipment shall provide insulation for the voltage involved.
(x)
"Definitions."
"Affected employee." An employee whose job requires him or her to

operate or use a machine or equipment on which servicing or
maintenance is being performed under lockout or tagout, or whose
job requires him or her to work in an area in which such servicing
or maintenance is being performed.
"Attendant." An employee assigned to remain immediately outside

the entrance to an enclosed or other space to render assistance as
needed to employees inside the space.
"Authorized employee." An employee who locks out or tags out

machines or equipment in order to perform servicing or
maintenance on that machine or equipment. An affected employee
becomes an authorized employee when that employee's duties
include performing servicing or maintenance covered under this
section.
"Automatic circuit recloser." A self-controlled device for interrupting

and reclosing an alternating current circuit with a predetermined
sequence of opening and reclosing followed by resetting, hold-
closed, or lockout operation.
"Barricade." A physical obstruction such as tapes, cones, or A -

frame type wood or metal structures intended to provide a warning
about and to limit access to a hazardous area.
"Barrier." A physical obstruction which is intended to prevent

contact with energized lines or equipment or to prevent
unauthorized access to a work area.
"Bond." The electrical interconnection of conductive parts designed

to maintain a common electrical potential.
"Bus." A conductor or a group of conductors that serve as a

common connection for two or more circuits.
"Bushing." An insulating structure, including a through conductor or

providing a passageway for such a conductor, with provision for
mounting on a barrier, conducting or otherwise, for the purposes of
insulating the conductor from the barrier and conducting current
from one side of the barrier to the other.
"Cable." A conductor with insulation, or a stranded conductor with

or without insulation and other coverings (single-conductor cable),
or a combination of conductors insulated from one another
(multiple-conductor cable).
"Cable sheath." A conductive protective covering applied to cables.
Note: A cable sheath may consist of multiple layers of which one or

more is conductive.
"Circuit." A conductor or system of conductors through which an

electric current is intended to flow.
"Clearance (between objects)." The clear distance between two

objects measured surface to surface.
"Clearance (for work)." Authorization to perform specified work or

permission to enter a restricted area.
"Communication lines. (See Lines, communication.)"
"Conductor." A material, usually in the form of a wire, cable, or bus

bar, used for carrying an electric current.
"Covered conductor." A conductor covered with a dielectric having

no rated insulating strength or having a rated insulating strength
less than the voltage of the circuit in which the conductor is used.
"Current-carrying part." A conducting part intended to be

connected in an electric circuit to a source of voltage. Non-current-
carrying parts are those not intended to be so connected.
"Deenergized." Free from any electrical connection to a source of

potential difference and from electric charge; not having a potential
different from that of the earth.
Note: The term is used only with reference to current-carrying

parts, which are sometimes energized (alive).
"Designated employee (designated person)." An employee (or

person) who is designated by the employer to perform specific
duties under the terms of this section and who is knowledgeable in
the construction and operation of the equipment and the hazards
involved.
"Electric line truck." A truck used to transport personnel, tools, and

material for electric supply line work.
"Electric supply equipment." Equipment that produces, modifies,

regulates, controls, or safeguards a supply of electric energy.
"Electric supply lines. (See Lines, electric supply.)"
"Electric utility." An organization responsible for the installation,

operation, or maintenance of an electric supply system.
"Enclosed space." A working space, such as a manhole, vault,

tunnel, or shaft, that has a limited means of egress or entry, that is
designed for periodic employee entry under normal operating
conditions, and that under normal conditions does not contain a
hazardous atmosphere, but that may contain a hazardous
atmosphere under abnormal conditions.
Note: Spaces that are enclosed but not designed for employee
entry under normal operating conditions are not considered to be
enclosed spaces for the purposes of this section. Similarly, spaces
that are enclosed and that are expected to contain a hazardous
atmosphere are not considered to be enclosed spaces for the
purposes of this section. Such spaces meet the definition of permit
spaces in 1910.146 of this Part, and entry into them must be
performed in accordance with that standard.
"Energized (alive, live)." Electrically connected to a source of

potential difference, or electrically charged so as to have a potential
significantly different from that of earth in the vicinity.
"Energy isolating device." A physical device that prevents the

transmission or release of energy, including, but not limited to, the
following: a manually operated electric circuit breaker, a disconnect
switch, a manually operated switch, a slide gate, a slip blind, a line
valve, blocks, and any similar device with a visible indication of the
position of the device. (Push buttons, selector switches, and other
control-circuit-type devices are not energy isolating devices.)
"Energy source." Any electrical, mechanical, hydraulic, pneumatic,

chemical, nuclear, thermal, or other energy source that could cause
injury to personnel.
"Equipment (electric)." A general term including material, fittings,

devices, appliances, fixtures, apparatus, and the like used as part
of or in connection with an electrical installation.
"Exposed." Not isolated or guarded.
"Ground." A conducting connection, whether intentional or

accidental, between an electric circuit or equipment and the earth,
or to some conducting body that serves in place of the earth.
"Grounded." Connected to earth or to some conducting body that

serves in place of the earth.
"Guarded." Covered, fenced, enclosed, or otherwise protected, by

means of suitable covers or casings, barrier rails or screens, mats,
or platforms, designed to minimize the possibility, under normal
conditions, of dangerous approach or accidental contact by persons
or objects.
Note: Wires which are insulated, but not otherwise protected, are
not considered as guarded.
"Hazardous atmosphere" means an atmosphere that may expose

employees to the risk of death, incapacitation, impairment of ability
to self -rescue (that is, escape unaided from an enclosed space),
injury, or acute illness from one or more of the following causes:
(x)(1)
Flammable gas, vapor, or mist in excess of 10 percent of its lower

flammable limit (LFL);
(x)(2)
Airborne combustible dust at a concentration that meets or exceeds

its LFL;
Note: This concentration may be approximated as a condition in

which the dust obscures vision at a distance of 5 feet (1.52 m) or
less.
(x)(3)
Atmospheric oxygen concentration below 19.5 percent or above

23.5 percent;
(x)(4)
Atmospheric concentration of any substance for which a dose or a

permissible exposure limit is published in Subpart G, "Occupational
Health and Environmental Control", or in Subpart Z, "Toxic and
Hazardous Substances," of this Part and which could result in
employee exposure in excess of its dose or permissible exposure
limit;
Note: An atmospheric concentration of any substance that is not

capable of causing death, incapacitation, impairment of ability to
self-rescue, injury, or acute illness due to its health effects is not
covered by this provision.
..1910.269(x)(5)
(x)(5)
Any other atmospheric condition that is immediately dangerous to

life or health.
Note: For air contaminants for which OSHA has not determined a
dose or permissible exposure limit, other sources of information,
such as Material Safety Data Sheets that comply with the Hazard
Communication Standard, 1910.1200 of this Part, published

information, and internal documents can provide guidance in
establishing acceptable atmospheric conditions.
"High-power tests." Tests in which fault currents, load currents,

magnetizing currents, and line-dropping currents are used to test
equipment, either at the equipment's rated voltage or at lower
voltages.
"High-voltage tests." Tests in which voltages of approximately 1000

volts are used as a practical minimum and in which the voltage
source has sufficient energy to cause injury.
"High wind." A wind of such velocity that the following hazards

would be present:
[1] An employee would be exposed to being blown from elevated

locations, or
[2] An employee or material handling equipment could lose control

of material being handled, or
[3] An employee would be exposed to other hazards not controlled

by the standard involved.
Note: Winds exceeding 40 miles per hour (64.4 kilometers per

hour), or 30 miles per hour (48.3 kilometers per hour) if material
handling is involved, are normally considered as meeting this
criteria unless precautions are taken to protect employees from the
hazardous effects of the wind.
"Immediately dangerous to life or health (IDLH)" means any

condition that poses an immediate or delayed threat to life or that
would cause irreversible adverse health effects or that would
interfere with an individual's ability to escape unaided from a
permit space.
Note: Some materials - hydrogen fluoride gas and cadmium vapor,

for example - may produce immediate transient effects that, even if
severe, may pass without medical attention, but are followed by
sudden, possibly fatal collapse 12-72 hours after exposure. The
victim "feels normal" from recovery from transient effects until
collapse. Such materials in hazardous quantities are considered to
be "immediately" dangerous to life or health.
"Insulated." Separated from other conducting surfaces by a

dielectric (including air space) offering a high resistance to the
passage of current.
Note: When any object is said to be insulated, it is understood to

be insulated for the conditions to which it is normally subjected.
Otherwise, it is, within the purpose of this section, uninsulated.
"Insulation (cable)." That which is relied upon to insulate the

conductor from other conductors or conducting parts or from
ground.
"Line-clearance tree trimmer." An employee who, through related

training or on-the-job experience or both, is familiar with the
special techniques and hazards involved in line-clearance tree
trimming.
Note 1: An employee who is regularly assigned to a line-clearance

tree-trimming crew and who is undergoing on-the-job training and
who, in the course of such training, has demonstrated an ability to
perform duties safely at his or her level of training and who is
under the direct supervision of a line-clearance tree trimmer is
considered to be a line-clearance tree trimmer for the performance
of those duties.
Note 2: A line-clearance tree trimmer is not considered to be a

"qualified employee" under this section unless he or she has the
training required for a qualified employee under paragraph (a)(2)
(ii) of this section. However, under the electrical safety-related
work practices standard in Subpart S of this Part, a line-clearance
tree trimmer is considered to be a "qualified employee". Tree
trimming performed by such "qualified employees" is not subject to
the electrical safety-related work practice requirements contained
in 1910.331 through 1910.335 of this Part. (See also the note
following 1910.332(b)(3) of this Part for information regarding the
training an employee must have to be considered a qualified
employee under 1910.331 through 1910.335 of this part.)
"Line-clearance tree trimming." The pruning, trimming, repairing,

maintaining, removing, or clearing of trees or the cutting of brush
that is within 10 feet (305 cm) of electric supply lines and
equipment.
"Lines. [1] Communication lines." The conductors and their
supporting or containing structures which are used for public or

private signal or communication service, and which operate at
potentials not exceeding 400 volts to ground or 750 volts between
any two points of the circuit, and the transmitted power of which
does not exceed 150 watts. If the lines are operating at less than
150 volts, no limit is placed on the transmitted power of the
system. Under certain conditions, communication cables may
include communication circuits exceeding these limitations where
such circuits are also used to supply power solely to communication
equipment.
Note: Telephone, telegraph, railroad signal, data, clock, fire, police

alarm, cable television, and other systems conforming to this
definition are included. Lines used for signaling purposes, but not
included under this definition, are considered as electric supply
lines of the same voltage.
[2] "Electric supply lines". Conductors used to transmit electric

energy and their necessary supporting or containing structures.
Signal lines of more than 400 volts are always supply lines within
this section, and those of less than 400 volts are considered as
supply lines, if so run and operated throughout.
"Manhole." A subsurface enclosure which personnel may enter and

which is used for the purpose of installing, operating, and
maintaining submersible equipment or cable.
"Manhole steps." A series of steps individually attached to or set

into the walls of a manhole structure.
"Minimum approach distance." The closest distance an employee is

permitted to approach an energized or a grounded object.
"Qualified employee (qualified person)." One knowledgeable in the

construction and operation of the electric power generation,
transmission, and distribution equipment involved, along with the
associated hazards.
Note 1: An employee must have the training required by paragraph

(a)(2)(ii) of this section in order to be considered a qualified
employee.
Note 2: Except under paragraph (g)(2)(v) of this section, an

employee who is undergoing on-the-job training and who, in the
course of such training, has demonstrated an ability to perform
duties safely at his or her level of training and who is under the
direct supervision of a qualified person is considered to be a
qualified person for the performance of those duties.
"Step bolt." A bolt or rung attached at intervals along a structural

member and used for foot placement during climbing or standing.
"Switch." A device for opening and closing or for changing the

connection of a circuit. In this section, a switch is understood to be
manually operable, unless otherwise stated.
"System operator." A qualified person designated to operate the

system or its parts.
"Vault." An enclosure, above or below ground, which personnel may

enter and which is used for the purpose of installing, operating, or
maintaining equipment or cable.
"Vented vault." A vault that has provision for air changes using
exhaust flue stacks and low level air intakes operating on
differentials of pressure and temperature providing for airflow
which precludes a hazardous atmosphere from developing.
"Voltage." The effective (rms) potential difference between any two

conductors or between a conductor and ground. Voltages are
expressed in nominal values unless otherwise indicated. The
nominal voltage of a system or circuit is the value assigned to a
system or circuit of a given voltage class for the purpose of
convenient designation. The operating voltage of the system may
vary above or below this value.
[59 FR 40672, Aug. 9, 1994; 59 FR 51672, Oct. 12, 1994]
Flow Charts. - 1910.269AppA Page 1 of 7
Text version
Home Index Search
CFR)
Flow Charts. - 1910.269AppA
l Standard Number: 1910.269AppA

l Standard Title: Flow Charts.
l SubPart Number: R
Appendix A to §1910.269 -- Flow Charts
This appendix presents information, in the form of flow charts, that

illustrates the scope and application of 1910.269. This appendix
addresses the interface between 1910.269 and Subpart S of this Part
(Electrical), between 1910.269 and 1910.146 of this Part (Permit-
required confined spaces), and between 1910.269 and 1910.147 of this
Part (The control of hazardous energy (lockout/tagout)). These flow
charts provide guidance for employers trying to implement the
requirements of 1910.269 in combination with other General Industry
Standards contained in Part 1910.
Appendix A-1 to §1910.269 -- Application of §1910.269 and

Subpart S of this Part to Electrical Installations.

Subpart S of this Part to Electrical Safety-Related Work Practices.
Table 1. -- Electrical Safety-Related Work Practices in §1910.269

SubpartS of this Part to Tree-Trimming Operations.
Appendix A-4 to §1910.269 -- Application of §§1910.147,

1910.269 and 1910.333 to Hazardous Energy Control Procedures
(Lockout/Tagout).
Appendix A-5 to §1910.269 -- Application of §§1910.146 and

1910.269 to Permit-Required Confined Spaces.
Working on Exposed Energized Parts. - 1910.269AppB Page 1 of 19
Text version
Home Index Search
CFR)
Working on Exposed Energized Parts. -
1910.269AppB
l Standard Number: 1910.269AppB

l Standard Title: Working on Exposed Energized Parts.
l SubPart Number: R
Appendix B to §1910.269 -- Working on Exposed Energized Parts
I. Introduction
Electric transmission and distribution line installations have been designed

to meet National Electrical Safety Code (NESC), ANSI C2, requirements
and to provide the level of line outage performance required by system
reliability criteria. Transmission and distribution lines are also designed to
withstand the maximum overvoltages expected to be impressed on the
system. Such overvoltages can be caused by such conditions as switching
surges, faults, or lightning. Insulator design and lengths and the
clearances to structural parts (which, for low voltage through extra-high
voltage, or EHV, facilities, are generally based on the performance of the
line as a result of contamination of the insulation or during storms) have,
over the years, come closer to the minimum approach distances used by
workers (which are generally based on non -storm conditions). Thus, as
minimum approach (working) distances and structural distances
(clearances) converge, it is increasingly important that basic
considerations for establishing safe approach distances for performing
work be understood by the designers and the operating and maintenance
personnel involved.
http://www.osha-slc.gov/OshStd_data/1910_0269_APP_B.html 11/9/2001
The information in this Appendix will assist employers in complying with

the minimum approach distance requirements contained in paragraphs (l)
(2) and (q)(3) of this section. The technical criteria and methodology
presented herein is mandatory for employers using reduced minimum
approach distances as permitted in Table R-7 and Table R-8. This
Appendix is intended to provide essential background information and
technical criteria for the development or modification, if possible, of the
safe minimum approach distances for electric transmission and
distribution live-line work. The development of these safe distances must
be undertaken by persons knowledgeable in the techniques discussed in
this appendix and competent in the field of electric transmission and
distribution system design.
II. General
A. Definitions
The following definitions from 1910.269(x) relate to work on or near

transmission and distribution lines and equipment and the electrical
hazards they present.
Exposed. Not isolated or guarded.
Guarded. Covered, fenced, enclosed, or otherwise protected, by means

of suitable covers or casings, barrier rails or screens, mats, or platforms,
designed to minimize the possibility, under normal conditions, of
dangerous approach or accidental contact by persons or objects.
NOTE: Wires which are insulated, but not otherwise protected, are not
considered as guarded.
Insulated. Separated from other conducting surfaces by a dielectric

(including air space) offering a high resistance to the passage of current.
NOTE: When any object is said to be insulated, it is understood to be

insulated for the conditions to which it is normally subjected. Otherwise,
it is, within the purpose of this section, uninsulated.
B. Installations Energized at 50 to 300 Volts
The hazards posed by installations energized at 50 to 300 volts are the

same as those found in many other workplaces. That is not to say that
there is no hazard, but the complexity of electrical protection required
does not compare to that required for high voltage systems. The
employee must avoid contact with the exposed parts, and the protective
equipment used (such as rubber insulating gloves) must provide
insulation for the voltages involved.
C. Exposed Energized Parts Over 300 Volts AC
Table R -6, Table R-7, and Table R -8 of 1910.269 provide safe approach
and working distances in the vicinity of energized electric apparatus so
that work can be done safely without risk of electrical flashover.
The working distances must withstand the maximum transient

overvoltage that can reach the work site under the working conditions
and practices in use. Normal system design may provide or include a
means to control transient overvoltages, or temporary devices may be
employed to achieve the same result. The use of technically correct
practices or procedures to control overvoltages (for example, portable
gaps or preventing the automatic control from initiating breaker
reclosing) enables line design and operation to be based on reduced
transient overvoltage values. Technical information for U.S. electrical
systems indicates that current design provides for the following maximum
transient overvoltage values (usually produced by switching surges): 362
kV and less -- 3.0 per unit; 552 kV -- 2.4 per unit; 800 kV -- 2.0 per unit.
Additional discussion of maximum transient overvoltages can be found in

paragraph IV.A.2, later in this Appendix.
III. Determination of the Electrical Component of Minimum

Approach Distances
A. Voltages of 1.1 kV to 72.5 kV
For voltages of 1.1 kV to 72.5 kV, the electrical component of minimum

approach distances is based on American National Standards Institute
(ANSI)/American Institute of Electrical Engineers (AIEE) Standard No.4,
March 1943, Tables III and IV. (AIEE is the predecessor technical society
to the Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE).) These
distances are calculated by the following formula:
Equation (1) - For voltages of 1.1 kV to 72.5 kV
(For Equation 1, Click Here)
Where:
D = Electrical component of the minimum approach distance in air in

feet
V(max) = Maximum rated line-to-ground rms voltage in kV
pu = Maximum transient overvoltage factor in per unit
Source: AIEE Standard No. 4, 1943.
This formula has been used to generate Table 1.
Table 1. - AC Energized Line-Work Phase-to-Ground Electrical

Component of the Minimum Approach
Distance - 1.1 to 72.5 kV
____________________________________________________________________
|
Maximum anticipated | Phase to phase voltage
per-unit |__________________________________________
transient overvoltage | | | |
| 15,000 | 36,000 | 46,000 | 72,500
_________________________|________|___________|_________|___________
| | | |
3.0..................... | 0.08 | 0.33 | 0.49 | 1.03
_________________________|________|___________|_________|___________
NOTE: The distances given (in feet) are for air as the insulating
medium and provide no additional clearance for inadvertent movement.
B. Voltages of 72.6 kV to 800 kV
For voltages of 72.6 kV to 800 kV, the electrical component of minimum

approach distances is based on ANSI/IEEE Standard 516-1987, "IEEE
Guide for Maintenance Methods on Energized Power Lines." This standard
gives the electrical component of the minimum approach distance based
on power frequency rod -gap data, supplemented with transient
overvoltage information and a saturation factor for high voltages. The
distances listed in ANSI/IEEE Standard 516 have been calculated
according to the following formula:
Equation (2) - For voltages of 72.6 kV to 800 kV
D = (C + a)pu V(MAX)
Where:
D = Electrical component of the minimum approach distance in air in

feet
C = 0.01 to take care of correction factors associated with the
variation of gap sparkover with voltage
a = A factor relating to the saturation of air at voltages of 345 kV
or higher
pu = Maximum anticipated transient overvoltage, in per unit (p.u.)
V(MAX) = Maximum rms system line-to-ground voltage in kilovolts - it
should be the "actual" maximum, or the normal highest

voltage for the range (for example, 10 percent above the
nominal voltage)
SOURCE: Formula developed from ANSI/IEEE Standard No. 516, 1987.
This formula is used to calculate the electrical component of the minimum

approach distances in air and is used in the development of Table 2 and
Table 3.
Table 2. - AC Energized Line-Work Phase-to-Ground Electrical

Component of the Minimum Approach Distance
- 121 to 242 kV
_____________________________________________________________________
|
per-unit |_____________________________________________
transient overvoltage | | | |
| 121,000 | 145,000 | 169,000 | 242,000
_______________________|____________|_________|__________|___________
| | | |
2.0................... | 1.40 | 1.70 | 2.00 | 2.80
2.1................... | 1.47 | 1.79 | 2.10 | 2.94
2.2................... | 1.54 | 1.87 | 2.20 | 3.08
2.3................... | 1.61 | 1.96 | 2.30 | 3.22
2.4................... | 1.68 | 2.04 | 2.40 | 3.35
2.5................... | 1.75 | 2.13 | 2.50 | 3.50
2.6................... | 1.82 | 2.21 | 2.60 | 3.64
2.7................... | 1.89 | 2.30 | 2.70 | 3.76
2.8................... | 1.96 | 2.38 | 2.80 | 3.92
2.9................... | 2.03 | 2.47 | 2.90 | 4.05
3.0................... | 2.10 | 2.55 | 3.00 | 4.29
_______________________|____________|_________|__________|__________
Table 3. - AC Energized Line-Work Phase-to-Ground

Electrical Component of the Minimum
Approach Distance - 362 to 800 kv
____________________________________________________________________
|
per-unit |____________________________________________
transient overvoltage | | |
| 362,000 | 552,000 | 800,000
_______________________|_______________|______________|_____________
| | |
1.5................... | ............. | 4.97 | 8.66
1.6................... | ............. | 5.46 | 9.60
1.7................... | ............. | 5.98 | 10.60
1.8................... | ............. | 6.51 | 11.64
1.9................... | ............. | 7.08 | 12.73
2.0................... | 4.20 | 7.68 | 13.86
2.1................... | 4.41 | 8.27 | ..........
2.2................... | 4.70 | 8.87 | ..........

2.3................... | 5.01 | 9.49 | ..........
2.4................... | 5.34 | 10.21 | ..........
2.5................... | 5.67 | ............ | ..........
2.6................... | 6.01 | ............ | ..........
2.7................... | 6.36 | ............ | ..........
2.8................... | 6.73 | ............ | ..........
2.9................... | 7.10 | ............ | ..........
3.0................... | 7.48 | ............ | ..........
_______________________|_______________|______________|_____________
C. Provisions for Inadvertent Movement
The minimum approach distances (working distances) must include an

"adder" to compensate for the inadvertent movement of the worker
relative to an energized part or the movement of the part relative to the
worker. A certain allowance must be made to account for this possible
inadvertent movement and to provide the worker with a comfortable and
safe zone in which to work. A distance for inadvertent movement (called
the "ergonomic component of the minimum approach distance") must be
added to the electrical component to determine the total safe minimum
approach distances used in live-line work.
One approach that can be used to estimate the ergonomic component of

the minimum approach distance is response time-distance analysis. When
this technique is used, the total response time to a hazardous incident is
estimated and converted to distance travelled. For example, the driver of
a car takes a given amount of time to respond to a "stimulus" and stop
the vehicle. The elapsed time involved results in a distance being
travelled before the car comes to a complete stop. This distance is
dependent on the speed of the car at the time the stimulus appears.
In the case of live-line work, the employee must first perceive that he or
she is approaching the danger zone. Then, the worker responds to the
danger and must decelerate and stop all motion toward the energized
part. During the time it takes to stop, a distance will have been traversed.
It is this distance that must be added to the electrical component of the
minimum approach distance to obtain the total safe minimum approach
distance.
At voltages below 72.5 kV, the electrical component of the minimum

approach distance is smaller than the ergonomic component. At 72.5 kV
the electrical component is only a little more than 1 foot. An ergonomic
component of the minimum approach distance is needed that will provide
for all the worker's unexpected movements. The usual live-line work
method for these voltages is the use of rubber insulating equipment,
frequently rubber gloves. The energized object needs to be far enough
away to provide the worker's face with a safe approach distance, as his or
her hands and arms are insulated. In this case, 2 feet has been accepted
as a sufficient and practical value.
For voltages between 72.6 and 800 kV, there is a change in the work
practices employed during energized line work. Generally, live-line tools
(hot sticks) are employed to perform work while equipment is energized.
These tools, by design, keep the energized part at a constant distance
from the employee and thus maintain the appropriate minimum approach
distance automatically.
The length of the ergonomic component of the minimum approach

distance is also influenced by the location of the worker and by the nature
of the work. In these higher voltage ranges, the employees use work
methods that more tightly control their movements than when the
workers perform rubber glove work. The worker is farther from energized
line or equipment and needs to be more precise in his or her movements
just to perform the work.
For these reasons, a smaller ergonomic component of the minimum

approach distance is needed, and a distance of 1 foot has been selected
for voltages between 72.6 and 800 kV.
Table 4 summarizes the ergonomic component of the minimum approach

distance for the two voltage ranges.
Table 4. - Ergonomic Component of Minimum Approach Distance

____________________________________________________________________
|
Voltage range (kV) | Distance (feet)
________________________________|___________________________________
|
1.1 to 72.5.....................| 2.0
72.6 to 800.....................| 1.0
________________________________|___________________________________
NOTE: This distance must be added to the electrical component of

the minimum approach distance to obtain the full minimum approach
distance.
D. Bare-Hand Live-Line Minimum Approach Distances
Calculating the strength of phase-to-phase transient overvoltages is

complicated by the varying time displacement between overvoltages on
parallel conductors (electrodes) and by the varying ratio between the

positive and negative voltages on the two electrodes. The time
displacement causes the maximum voltage between phases to be less
than the sum of the phase-to-ground voltages. The International
Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) Technical Committee 28, Working
Group 2, has developed the following formula for determining the phase-
to-phase maximum transient overvoltage, based on the per unit (p.u.) of
the system nominal voltage phase-to-ground crest:
pu(p) = pu(g) + 1.6.
Where:
pu(g) = p.u. phase-to-ground maximum transient overvoltage

pu(p) = p.u. phase-to-phase maximum transient overvoltage
This value of maximum anticipated transient overvoltage must be used in

Equation (2) to calculate the phase-to-phase minimum approach
distances for live-line bare-hand work.
E. Compiling the Minimum Approach Distance Tables
For each voltage involved, the distance in Table 4 in this appendix has
been added to the distance in Table 1, Table 2 or Table 3 in this appendix
to determine the resulting minimum approach distances in Table R-6,
Table R -7, and Table R -8 in 1910.269.
F. Miscellaneous Correction Factors
The strength of an air gap is influenced by the changes in the air medium
that forms the insulation. A brief discussion of each factor follows, with a
summary at the end.
1. Dielectric strength of air. The dielectric strength of air in a uniform

electric field at standard atmospheric conditions is approximately 31 kV
(crest) per cm at 60 Hz. The disruptive gradient is affected by the air
pressure, temperature, and humidity, by the shape, dimensions, and
separation of the electrodes, and by the characteristics of the applied
voltage (wave shape).
2. Atmospheric effect. Flashover for a given air gap is inhibited by an

increase in the density (humidity) of the air. The empirically determined
electrical strength of a given gap is normally applicable at standard
atmospheric conditions (20 deg. C, 101.3 kPa, 11 g/cm3 humidity).
The combination of temperature and air pressure that gives the lowest
gap flashover voltage is high temperature and low pressure. These are
conditions not likely to occur simultaneously. Low air pressure is generally
associated with high humidity, and this causes increased electrical
strength. An average air pressure is more likely to be associated with low
humidity. Hot and dry working conditions are thus normally associated
with reduced electrical strength.
The electrical component of the minimum approach distances in Table 1,

Table 2, and Table 3 has been calculated using the maximum transient
overvoltages to determine withstand voltages at standard atmospheric
conditions.
3. Altitude. The electrical strength of an air gap is reduced at high

altitude, due principally to the reduced air pressure. An increase of 3
percent per 300 meters in the minimum approach distance for altitudes
above 900 meters is required. Table R -10 of 1910.269 presents this
information in tabular form.
Summary. After taking all these correction factors into account and after
considering their interrelationships relative to the air gap insulation
strength and the conditions under which live work is performed, one finds
that only a correction for altitude need be made. An elevation of 900
meters is established as the base elevation, and the values of the
electrical component of the minimum approach distances has been
derived with this correction factor in mind. Thus, the values used for
elevations below 900 meters are conservative without any change;
corrections have to be made only above this base elevation.
IV. Determination of Reduced Minimum Approach Distances
A. Factors Affecting Voltage Stress at the Work Site
1. System voltage (nominal). The nominal system voltage range sets

the absolute lower limit for the minimum approach distance. The highest
value within the range, as given in the relevant table, is selected and
used as a reference for per unit calculations.
2. Transient overvoltages. Transient overvoltages may be generated

on an electrical system by the operation of switches or breakers, by the
occurrence of a fault on the line or circuit being worked or on an adjacent
circuit, and by similar activities. Most of the overvoltages are caused by
switching, and the term "switching surge" is often used to refer
generically to all types of overvoltages. However, each overvoltage has
an associated transient voltage wave shape. The wave shape arriving at

the site and its magnitude vary considerably.
The information used in the development of the minimum approach

distances takes into consideration the most common wave shapes; thus,
the required minimum approach distances are appropriate for any
transient overvoltage level usually found on electric power generation,
transmission, and distribution systems. The values of the per unit (p.u.)
voltage relative to the nominal maximum voltage are used in the
calculation of these distances.
3. Typical magnitude of overvoltages. The magnitude of typical

transient overvoltages is given in Table 5.
4. Standard deviation -- air -gap withstand. For each air gap length,
and under the same atmospheric conditions, there is a statistical variation
in the breakdown voltage. The probability of the breakdown voltage is
assumed to have a normal (Gaussian) distribution. The standard
deviation of this distribution varies with the wave shape, gap geometry,
and atmospheric conditions. The withstand voltage of the air gap used in
calculating the electrical component of the minimum approach distance
has been set at three standard deviations (3 sigma (1) ) below the critical
flashover voltage. (The critical flashover voltage is the crest value of the
impulse wave that, under specified conditions, causes flashover on 50
percent of the applications. An impulse wave of three standard deviations
below this value, that is, the withstand voltage, has a probability of
flashover of approximately 1 in 1000.)
Table 5. - Magnitude of Typical Transient Overvoltages
___________________________________________________________________
|
Cause | Magnitude (per unit)
_________________________________________|_________________________
|
Energized 200 mile line without |
closing resistors......................| 3.5
Energized 200 mile line with one step |
closing resistor.......................| 2.1
Energized 200 mile line with multi-step |
resistor...............................| 2.5
Reclosed with trapped charge one step |
resistor...............................| 2.2
Opening surge with single restrike.......| 3.0
Fault initiation unfaulted phase.........| 2.1
Fault initiation adjacent circuit........| 2.5
Fault clearing...........................| 1.7 - 1.9
_________________________________________|_________________________
SOURCE: ANSI/IEEE Standard No. 516, 1987.
5. Broken Insulators. Tests have shown that the insulation strength of

an insulator string with broken skirts is reduced. Broken units may have
lost up to 70% of their withstand capacity. Because the insulating
capability of a broken unit cannot be determined without testing it,
damaged units in an insulator are usually considered to have no
insulating value. Additionally, the overall insulating strength of a string
with broken units may be further reduced in the presence of a live-line
tool alongside it. The number of good units that must be present in a
string is based on the maximum overvoltage possible at the worksite.
B. Minimum Approach Distances Based on Known Maximum Anticipated

Per-Unit Transient Overvoltages
1. Reduction of the minimum approach distance for AC systems.

When the transient overvoltage values are known and supplied by the
employer, Table R-7 and Table R-8 of 1910.269 allow the minimum
approach distances from energized parts to be reduced. In order to
determine what this maximum overvoltage is, the employer must
undertake an engineering analysis of the system. As a result of this
engineering study, the employer must provide new live work procedures,
reflecting the new minimum approach distances, the conditions and
limitations of application of the new minimum approach distances, and
the specific practices to be used when these procedures are implemented.
2. Calculation of reduced approach distance values. The following

method of calculating reduced minimum approach distances is based on
ANSI/IEEE Standard 516:
Step 1. Determine the maximum voltage (with respect to a given

nominal voltage range) for the energized part.
Step 2. Determine the maximum transient overvoltage (normally a

switching surge) that can be present at the work site during work
operation.
Step 3. Determine the technique to be used to control the maximum

transient overvoltage. (See paragraphs IV.C and IV.D of this appendix.)
Determine the maximum voltage that can exist at the work site with that
form of control in place and with a confidence level of 3 sigma. This
voltage is considered to be the withstand voltage for the purpose of
calculating the appropriate minimum approach distance.
Step 4. Specify in detail the control technique to be used, and direct its
implementation during the course of the work.
Step 5. Using the new value of transient overvoltage in per unit (p.u.),
determine the required phase-to-ground minimum approach distance
from Table R-7 or Table R -8 of 1910.269.
C. Methods of Controlling Possible Transient Overvoltage Stress Found on

a System
1. Introduction. There are several means of controlling overvoltages

that occur on transmission systems. First, the operation of circuit
breakers or other switching devices may be modified to reduce switching
transient overvoltages. Second, the overvoltage itself may be forcibly
held to an acceptable level by means of installation of surge arresters at
the specific location to be protected. Third, the transmission system may
be changed to minimize the effect of switching operations.
2. Operation of circuit breakers.(2) The maximum transient

overvoltage that can reach the work site is often due to switching on the
line on which work is being performed. If the automatic-reclosing is
removed during energized line work so that the line will not be re-
energized after being opened for any reason, the maximum switching
surge overvoltage is then limited to the larger of the opening surge or the
greatest possible fault-generated surge, provided that the devices (for
example, insertion resistors) are operable and will function to limit the
transient overvoltage. It is essential that the operating ability of such
devices be assured when they are employed to limit the overvoltage
level. If it is prudent not to remove the reclosing feature (because of
system operating conditions), other methods of controlling the switching
surge level may be necessary.
Transient surges on an adjacent line, particularly for double circuit

construction, may cause a significant overvoltage on the line on which
work is being performed. The coupling to adjacent lines must be
accounted for when minimum approach distances are calculated based on
the maximum transient overvoltage.
3. Surge arresters. The use of modern surge arresters has permitted a

reduction in the basic impulse-insulation levels of much transmission
system equipment. The primary function of early arresters was to protect
the system insulation from the effects of lightning. Modern arresters not
only dissipate lightning-caused transients, but may also control many
other system transients that may be caused by switching or faults.
It is possible to use properly designed arresters to control transient

overvoltages along a transmission line and thereby reduce the requisite
length of the insulator string. On the other hand, if the installation of

arresters has not been used to reduce the length of the insulator string, it
may be used to reduce the minimum approach distance instead. (3)
4. Switching Restrictions. Another form of overvoltage control is the

establishment of switching restrictions, under which breakers are not
permitted to be operated until certain system conditions are satisfied.
Restriction of switching is achieved by the use of a tagging system,
similar to that used for a "permit", except that the common term used for
this activity is a "hold-off" or "restriction". These terms are used to
indicate that operation is not prevented, but only modified during the
live-work activity.
D. Minimum Approach Distance Based on Control of Voltage Stress

(Overvoltages) at the Work Site.
Reduced minimum approach distances can be calculated as follows:
1. First Method -- Determining the reduced minimum approach

distance from a given withstand voltage. (4)
Step 1. Select the appropriate withstand voltage for the protective gap
based on system requirements and an acceptable probability of actual
gap flashover.
Step 2. Determine a gap distance that provides a withstand voltage(5)

greater than or equal to the one selected in the first step.(6)
Step 3. Using 110 percent of the gap's critical flashover voltage,

determine the electrical component of the minimum approach distance
from Equation (2) or Table 6, which is a tabulation of distance vs.
withstand voltage based on Equation (2).
Step 4. Add the 1-foot ergonomic component to obtain the total

minimum approach distance to be maintained by the employee.
2. Second Method -- Determining the necessary protective gap

length from a desired (reduced) minimum approach distance.
Step 1. Determine the desired minimum approach distance for the

employee. Subtract the 1-foot ergonomic component of the minimum
approach distance.
Step 2. Using this distance, calculate the air gap withstand voltage from
Equation (2). Alternatively, find the voltage corresponding to the distance

in Table 6.(7)
Step 3. Select a protective gap distance corresponding to a critical

flashover voltage that, when multiplied by 110 percent, is less than or
equal to the withstand voltage from Step 2.
Step 4. Calculate the withstand voltage of the protective gap (85 percent
of the critical flashover voltage) to ensure that it provides an acceptable
risk of flashover during the time the gap is installed.
Table 6. - Withstand Distances for Transient Overvoltages

____________________________________________________________________
|
Crest voltage (kV) | Withstand distance (in feet) air gap
__________________________|_________________________________________
|
100.......................| 0.71
150.......................| 1.06
200.......................| 1.41
250.......................| 1.77
300.......................| 2.12
350.......................| 2.47
400.......................| 2.83
450.......................| 3.18
500.......................| 3.54
550.......................| 3.89
600.......................| 4.24
650.......................| 4.60
700.......................| 5.17
750.......................| 5.73
800.......................| 6.31
850.......................| 6.91
900.......................| 7.57
950.......................| 8.23
1000......................| 8.94
1050......................| 9.65
1100......................| 10.42
1150......................| 11.18
1200......................| 12.05
1250......................| 12.90
1300......................| 13.79
1350......................| 14.70
1400......................| 15.64
1450......................| 16.61
1500......................| 17.61
1550......................| 18.63
__________________________|_________________________________________
SOURCE: Calculations are based on Equation (2).
NOTE: The air gap is based on the 60-Hz rod-gap withstand distance.
3. Sample protective gap calculations.
Problem 1: Work is to be performed on a 500-kV transmission line that

is subject to transient overvoltages of 2.4 p.u. The maximum operating
voltage of the line is 552 kV. Determine the length of the protective gap
that will provide the minimum practical safe approach distance. Also,
determine what that minimum approach distance is.
Step 1. Calculate the smallest practical maximum transient overvoltage

(1.25 times the crest line-to-ground voltage):(8)
(For Equation in Step 1, Click Here)
This will be the withstand voltage of the protective gap.
Step 2. Using test data for a particular protective gap, select a gap that
has a critical flashover voltage greater than or equal to:
563 kV / 0.85 = 662 kV.
For example, if a protective gap with a 4.0-foot spacing tested to a critical

flashover voltage of 665 kV, crest, select this gap spacing.
Step 3. This protective gap corresponds to a 110 percent of critical

flashover voltage value of:
665 kV X 1.10 = 732 kV.
This corresponds to the withstand voltage of the electrical component of

the minimum approach distance.
Step 4. Using this voltage in Equation (2) results in an electrical

component of the minimum approach distance of:
(For Equation in Step 4, Click Here)
Step 5. Add 1 foot to the distance calculated in step 4, resulting in

a total minimum approach distance of 6.5 feet.
Problem 2: For a line operating at a maximum voltage of 552 kV

subject to a maximum transient overvoltage of 2.4 p.u., find a
protective gap distance that will permit the use of a 9.0 -foot
minimum approach distance. (A minimum approach distance of 11
feet, 3 inches is normally required.)
Step 1. The electrical component of the minimum approach

distance is 8.0 feet (9.0-1.0).
Step 2. From Table 6, select the withstand voltage corresponding to

a distance of 8.0 feet. By interpolation:
_ _
| (8.00 - 7.57) |
900 kV + | 50 X ------------------ | = 933 kV.
| (8.23 - 7.57) |
|_ _|
Step 3. The voltage calculated in Step 2 corresponds to 110 percent of

the critical flashover voltage of the gap that should be employed. Using
test data for a particular protective gap, select a gap that has a critical
flashover voltage less than or equal to:
D=(0.01 + 0.0006) x 732 kV divided by square root of 2
For example, if a protective gap with a 5.8-foot spacing tested to a critical

flashover voltage of 820 kV, crest, select this gap spacing.
Step 4. The withstand voltage of this protective gap would be:
820 kV X 0.85 = 697 kV.
The maximum operating crest voltage would be:
(For Equation (second) in Step 4, Click Here)
The crest withstand voltage of the protective gap in per unit is thus.
697 kV + 449 kV = 1.55 p.u.
If this is acceptable, the protective gap could be installed with a 5.8-foot

spacing, and the minimum approach distance could then be reduced to
9.0 feet.
4. Comments and variations. The 1-foot ergonomic component of the

minimum approach distance must be added to the electrical component of
the minimum approach distance calculated under paragraph IV.D of this

appendix. The calculations may be varied by starting with the protective
gap distance or by starting with the minimum approach distance.
E. Location of Protective Gaps
1. Installation of the protective gap on a structure adjacent to the work

site is an acceptable practice, as this does not significantly reduce the
protection afforded by the gap.
2. Gaps installed at terminal stations of lines or circuits provide a given

level of protection. The level may not, however, extend throughout the
length of the line to the worksite. The use of gaps at terminal stations
must be studied in depth. The use of substation terminal gaps raises the
possibility that separate surges could enter the line at opposite ends,
each with low enough magnitude to pass the terminal gaps without
flashover. When voltage surges are initiated simultaneously at each end
of a line and travel toward each other, the total voltage on the line at the
point where they meet is the arithmetic sum of the two surges. A gap
that is installed within 0.5 mile of the work site will protect against such
intersecting waves. Engineering studies of a particular line or system may
indicate that adequate protection can be provided by even more distant
gaps.
3. If protective gaps are used at the work site, the work site impulse
insulation strength is established by the gap setting. Lightning strikes as
much as 6 miles away from the worksite may cause a voltage surge
greater than the insulation withstand voltage, and a gap flashover may
occur. The flashover will not occur between the employee and the line,
but across the protective gap instead.
4. There are two reasons to disable the automatic-reclosing feature of

circuit-interrupting devices while employees are performing live-line
maintenance:
l To prevent the reenergizing of a circuit faulted by actions of a

worker, which could possibly create a hazard or compound injuries
or damage produced by the original fault;
l To prevent any transient overvoltage caused by the switching surge

that would occur if the circuit were reenergized.
However, due to system stability considerations, it may not always be

feasible to disable the automatic-reclosing feature.
Footnote 1 Sigma is the symbol for standard deviation. (Back to Text)
Footnote 2 The detailed design of a circuit interrupter, such as the

design of the contacts, of resistor insertion, and of breaker timing control,
are beyond the scope of this appendix. These features are routinely
provided as part of the design for the system. Only features that can limit
the maximum switching transient overvoltage on a system are discussed
in this appendix. (Back to Text)
Footnote 3 Surge arrestor application is beyond the scope of this

appendix. However, if the arrestor is installed near the work site, the
application would be similar to protective gaps as discussed in paragraph
IV.D. of this appendix. (Back to Text)
Footnote 4 Since a given rod gap of a given configuration corresponds to

a certain withstand voltage, this method can also be used to determine
the minimum approach distance for a known gap. (Back to Text)
Footnote 5 The withstand voltage for the gap is equal to 85 percent of

its critical flashover voltage. (Back to Text)
Footnote 6 Switch steps 1 and 2 if the length of the protective gap is

known. The withstand voltage must then be checked to ensure that it
provides an acceptable probability of gap flashover. In general, it should
be at least 1.25 times the maximum crest operating voltage. (Back to
Text)
Footnote 7 Since the value of the saturation factor, a, in Equation (2) is

dependent on the maximum voltage, several iterative computations may
be necessary to determine the correct withstand voltage using the
equation. A graph of withstand voltage vs. distance is given in ANSI/IEEE
Std. 516, 1987. This graph could also be used to determine the
appropriate withstand voltage for the minimum approach distance
involved. (Back to Text)
Footnote 8 To eliminate unwanted flashovers due to minor system

disturbances, it is desirable to have the crest withstand voltage no lower
than 1.25 p.u. (Back to Text)
Protection from Step and Touch Potentials. - 1910.269AppC Page 1 of 3
Text version
Home Index Search
CFR)
Protection from Step and Touch Potentials.
- 1910.269AppC
l Standard Number: 1910.269AppC

l Standard Title: Protection from Step and Touch Potentials.
l SubPart Number: R
Appendix C to §1910.269 -- Protection From Step and Touch

Potentials
I. Introduction
When a ground fault occurs on a power line, voltage is impressed on the

"grounded" object faulting the line. The voltage to which this object rises
depends largely on the voltage on the line, on the impedance of the
faulted conductor, and on the impedance to "true," or "absolute," ground
represented by the object. If the object causing the fault represents a
relatively large impedance, the voltage impressed on it is essentially the
phase-to-ground system voltage. However, even faults to well grounded
transmission towers or substation structures can result in hazardous
voltages.(1) The degree of the hazard depends upon the magnitude of the
fault current and the time of exposure.
II. Voltage-Gradient Distribution
A. Voltage-Gradient Distribution Curve
The dissipation of voltage from a grounding electrode (or from the

grounded end of an energized grounded object) is called the ground
http://www.osha-slc.gov/OshStd_data/1910_0269_APP_C.html 11/9/2001
potential gradient. Voltage drops associated with this dissipation of

voltage are called ground potentials. Figure 1 is a typical voltage-gradient
distribution curve (assuming a uniform soil texture). This graph shows
that voltage decreases rapidly with increasing distance from the
grounding electrode.
B. Step and Touch Potentials
"Step potential" is the voltage between the feet of a person standing near
an energized grounded object. It is equal to the difference in voltage,
given by the voltage distribution curve, between two points at different
distances from the "electrode". A person could be at risk of injury during
a fault simply by standing near the grounding point.
"Touch potential" is the voltage between the energized object and the
feet of a person in contact with the object. It is equal to the difference in
voltage between the object (which is at a distance of 0 feet) and a point
some distance away. It should be noted that the touch potential could be
nearly the full voltage across the grounded object if that object is
grounded at a point remote from the place where the person is in contact
with it. For example, a crane that was grounded to the system neutral
and that contacted an energized line would expose any person in contact
with the crane or its uninsulated load line to a touch potential nearly
equal to the full fault voltage.
Step and touch potentials are illustrated in Figure 2.
(For Figure 1, Click Here)

C. Protection From the Hazards of Ground-Potential Gradients.
An engineering analysis of the power system under fault conditions can

be used to determine whether or not hazardous step and touch voltages
will develop. The result of this analysis can ascertain the need for
protective measures and can guide the selection of appropriate
precautions.
Several methods may be used to protect employees from hazardous

ground-potential gradients, including equipotential zones, insulating
equipment, and restricted work areas.
1. The creation of an equipotential zone will protect a worker standing

within it from hazardous step and touch potentials. (See Figure 3.) Such a
zone can be produced through the use of a metal mat connected to the
grounded object. In some cases, a grounding grid can be used to equalize
the voltage within the grid. Equipotential zones will not, however, protect
employees who are either wholly or partially outside the protected area.
Bonding conductive objects in the immediate work area can also be used
to minimize the potential between the objects and between each object
and ground. (Bonding an object outside the work area can increase the
touch potential to that object in some cases, however.)
2. The use of insulating equipment, such as rubber gloves, can protect

employees handling grounded equipment and conductors from hazardous
touch potentials. The insulating equipment must be rated for the highest
voltage that can be impressed on the grounded objects under fault
conditions (rather than for the full system voltage).
3. Restricting employees from areas where hazardous step or touch

potentials could arise can protect employees not directly involved in the
operation being performed. Employees on the ground in the vicinity of
transmission structures should be kept at a distance where step voltages
would be insufficient to cause injury. Employees should not handle
grounded conductors or equipment likely to become energized to
hazardous voltages unless the employees are within an equipotential zone
or are protected by insulating equipment.
Footnote (1) This appendix provides information primarily with respect

to employee protection from contact between equipment being used and
an energized power line. The information presented is also relevant to
ground faults to transmission towers and substation structures; however,
grounding systems for these structures should be designed to minimize
the step and touch potentials involved. (Back to Text)
Methods of Inspecting and Testing Wood Poles. - 1910.269AppD Page 1 of 3
Text version
Home Index Search
CFR)
Methods of Inspecting and Testing Wood
Poles. - 1910.269AppD
l Standard Number: 1910.269AppD

l Standard Title: Methods of Inspecting and Testing Wood Poles.
l SubPart Number: R
I. "Introduction"
When work is to be performed on a wood pole, it is important to

determine the condition of the pole before it is climbed. The weight
of the employee, the weight of equipment being installed, and
other working stresses (such as the removal or retensioning of
conductors) can lead to the failure of a defective pole or one that is
not designed to handle the additional stresses.(1) For these
reasons, it is essential that an inspection and test of the condition
of a wood pole be performed before it is climbed.
__________
Footnote(1) A properly guyed pole in good condition should, at a
minimum, be able to handle the weight of an employee climbing it.
If the pole is found to be unsafe to climb or to work from, it must

be secured so that it does not fail while an employee is on it. The
pole can be secured by a line truck boom, by ropes or guys, or by
lashing a new pole alongside it. If a new one is lashed alongside the
defective pole, work should be performed from the new one.
II. "Inspection of Wood Poles"
http://www.osha-slc.gov/OshStd_data/1910_0269_APP_D.html 11/9/2001
Wood poles should be inspected by a qualified employee for the

following conditions:(2)
__________
Footnote(2) The presence of any of these conditions is an
indication that the pole may not be safe to climb or to work from.
The employee performing the inspection must be qualified to make a
determination as to whether or not it is safe to perform the work
without taking additional precautions.
A. General Condition
The pole should be inspected for buckling at the ground line and for
an unusual angle with respect to the ground. Buckling and odd
angles may indicate that the pole has rotted or is broken.
B. Cracks
The pole should be inspected for cracks. Horizontal cracks

perpendicular to the grain of the wood may weaken the pole.
Vertical ones, although not considered to be a sign of a defective
pole, can pose a hazard to the climber, and the employee should
keep his or her gaffs away from them while climbing.
C. Holes
Hollow spots and woodpecker holes can reduce the strength of a

wood pole.
D. Shell Rot and Decay.
Rotting and decay are cutout hazards and are possible indications
of the age and internal condition of the pole.
E. Knots
One large knot or several smaller ones at the same height on the
pole may be evidence of a weak point on the pole.
F. Depth of Setting
Evidence of the existence of a former ground line substantially

above the existing ground level may be an indication that the pole
is no longer buried to a sufficient extent.
G. Soil Conditions
Soft, wet, or loose soil may not support any changes of stress on
the pole.
H. Burn Marks
Burning from transformer failures or conductor faults could damage

the pole so that it cannot withstand mechanical stress changes.
III. "Testing of Wood Poles"
The following tests, which have been taken from 1910.268(n)(3),

are recognized as acceptable methods of testing wood poles:
A. Hammer Test
Rap the pole sharply with a hammer weighing about 3 pounds,

starting near the ground line and continuing upwards
circumferentially around the pole to a height of approximately 6
feet. The hammer will produce a clear sound and rebound sharply
when striking sound wood. Decay pockets will be indicated by a dull
sound or a less pronounced hammer rebound. Also, prod the pole
as near the ground line as possible using a pole prod or a
screwdriver with a blade at least 5 inches long. If substantial decay
is encountered, the pole is considered unsafe.
B. Rocking Test
Apply a horizontal force to the pole and attempt to rock it back and
forth in a direction perpendicular to the line. Caution must be
exercised to avoid causing power lines to swing together. The force
may be applied either by pushing with a pike pole or pulling with a
rope. If the pole cracks during the test, it shall be considered
unsafe.
Introduction. - 1910.301 Page 1 of 2
Text version
Home Index Search
CFR)
Introduction. - 1910.301

l Standard Title: Introduction.
l SubPart Number: S
l SubPart Title: Electrical - General
This subpart addresses electrical safety requirements that are

necessary for the practical safeguarding of employees in their
workplaces and is divided into four major divisions as follows:
(a)
Design safety standards for electrical systems. These regulations

are contained in 1910.302 through 1910.330. Sections 1910.302
through 1910.308 contain design safety standards for electric
utilization systems. Included in this category are all electric
equipment and installations used to provide electric power and light
for employee workplaces. Sections 1910.309 through 1910.330 are
reserved for possible future design safety standards for other
electrical systems.
(b)
Safety-related work practices. These regulations will be contained

in 1910.331 through 1910.360.
(c)
Safety-related maintenance requirements. These regulations will be
Introduction. - 1910.301 Page 2 of 2
contained in 1910.361 through 1910.380.
(d)
Safety requirements for special equipment. These regulations will

be contained in 1910.381 through 1910.398.
(e)
Definitions. Definitions applicable to each division are contained in

1910.399.
[46 FR 4056, Jan. 16, 1982; 46 FR 40185, Aug. 7, 1981]
Electric utilization systems. - 1910.302 Page 1 of 5
Text version
Home Index Search
CFR)
Electric utilization systems. - 1910.302

l Standard Title: Electric utilization systems.
l SubPart Number: S
l SubPart Title: Electrical - Design Safety Standards for Electrical
Systems
Interpretation(s)
Sections 1910.302 through 1910.308 contain design safety

standards for electric utilization systems.
(a)
Scope -
(a)(1)
Covered. The provisions of 1910.302 through 1910.308 of this

subpart cover electrical installations and utilization equipment
installed or used within or on buildings, structures, and other
premises including:
(a)(1)(i)
Yards,
(a)(1)(ii)
Carnivals,
(a)(1)(iii)
Parking and other lots,
(a)(1)(iv)
Mobile homes,
(a)(1)(v)
Recreational vehicles,
(a)(1)(vi)
Industrial substations,
(a)(1)(vii)
Conductors that connect the installations to a supply of electricity,

and
(a)(1)(viii)
Other outside conductors on the premises.
..1910.302(a)(2)
(a)(2)
Not covered. The provisions of 1910.302 through 1910.308 of this

subpart do not cover:
(a)(2)(i)
Installations in ships, watercraft, railway rolling stock, aircraft, or

automotive vehicles other than mobile homes and recreational
vehicles.
(a)(2)(ii)
Installations underground in mines.
(a)(2)(iii)
Installations of railways for generation, transformation,

transmission, or distribution of power used exclusively for operation
of rolling stock or installations used exclusively for signaling and
communication purposes.
(a)(2)(iv)
Installations of communication equipment under the exclusive

control of communication utilities, located outdoors or in building
spaces used exclusively for such installations.
(a)(2)(v)

purpose of communication or metering; or for the generation,
control, transformation, transmission, and distribution of electric
energy located in buildings used exclusively by utilities for such
purposes or located outdoors on property owned or leased by the
utility or on public highways, streets, roads, etc., or outdoors by
established rights on private property.
..1910.302(b)
(b)
Extent of application.
(b)(1)
The requirements contained in the sections listed below shall apply

to all electrical installations and utilization equipment, regardless of
when they were designed or installed.
Sections:
1910.303(b).................... Examination, installation, and

use of equipment.
1910.303(c).................... Splices.
1910.303(d).................... Arcing parts.
1910.303(e).................... Marking.
1910.303(f).................... Identification of disconnecting means.
1910.303(g)(2)................. Guarding of live parts.
1910.304(e)(1)(i).............. Protection of conductors and equipment.
1910.304(e)(1)(iv)............. Location in or on premises.
1910.304(e)(1)(v).............. Arcing or suddenly moving parts.

1910.304(f)(1)(ii)............. 2-Wire DC systems to be grounded:
1910.304(f)(1)(iii)
and 1910.304(f)(1)(iv)......... AC Systems to be grounded.
1910.304(f)(1)(v).............. AC Systems 50 to 1000 volts not
required to be grounded.
1910.304(f)(3)................. Grounding connections.
1910.304(f)(4)................. Grounding path.
1910.304(f)(5)(iv)(a)
through 1910.304(f)(5)(iv)(d).. Fixed equipment required to be grounded.
1910.304(f)(5)(v).............. Grounding of equipment connected by
cord and plug.
1910.304(f)(5)(vi)............. Grounding of nonelectrical equipment.
1910.304(f)(6)(i).............. Methods of grounding fixed equipment.
1910.305(g)(1)(i)
and 1910.305(g)(1)(ii)......... Flexible cords and cables,uses.
1910.305(g)(1)(iii)............ Flexible cords and cables prohibited.
1910.305(g)(2)(ii)............. Flexible cords and cables, splices.
1910.305(g)(2)(iii)............ Pull at joints and terminals of
flexible cords and cables.
1910.307....................... Hazardous (classified) locations.
(b)(2)
Every electric utilization system and all utilization equipment

installed after March 15, 1972, and every major replacement,
modification, repair, or rehabilitation, after March 15, 1972, of any
part of any electric utilization system or utilization equipment
installed before March 15, 1972, shall comply with the provisions of
1910.302 through 1910.308.
NOTE: "Major replacements, modifications, repairs, or

rehabilitations" include work similar to that involved when a new
building or facility is built, a new wing is added, or an entire floor is
renovated.
(b)(3)
The following provisions apply to electric utilization systems and

utilization equipment installed after April 16, 1981:
1910.303(h)(4) (i) and (ii)... Entrance and access to workspace

(over 600 volts).
1910.304(e)(1)(vi)(b)......... Circuit breakers operated vertically.
1910.304(e)(1)(vi)(c)......... Circuit breakers used as switches.
1910.304(f)(7)(ii)............ Grounding of systems of 1000 volts or
more supplying portable or mobile
equipment.
1910.305(j)(6)(ii)(b)......... Switching series capacitors over
600 volts.
1910.306(c)(2)................ Warning signs for elevators and
escalators.
1910.306(i)................... Electrically controlled irrigation
machines.
1910.306(j)(5)................ Ground-fault circuit interrupters
for fountains.
1910.308(a)(1)(ii)............ Physical protection of conductors
over 600 volts.
1910.308(c)(2)................ Marking of Class 2 and Class 3 power
supplies.
1910.308(d)................... Fire protective signaling circuits.
[46 FR 4056, Jan. 16, 1981; 46 FR 40185, Aug. 7, 1981]
General requirements. - 1910.303 Page 1 of 10
Text version
Home Index Search
CFR)
General requirements. - 1910.303

l Standard Title: General requirements.
l SubPart Number: S
Systems
Interpretation(s)
(a)
Approval. The conductors and equipment required or permitted by
this subpart shall be acceptable only if approved.
(b)
Examination, installation, and use of equipment --
(b)(1)
Examination. Electrical equipment shall be free from recognized
hazards that are likely to cause death or serious physical harm to
employees. Safety of equipment shall be determined using the
following considerations:
(b)(1)(i)
Suitability for installation and use in conformity with the provisions
of this subpart. Suitability of equipment for an identified purpose
may be evidenced by listing or labeling for that identified purpose.
(b)(1)(ii)
Mechanical strength and durability, including, for parts designed to

enclose and protect other equipment, the adequacy of the
protection thus provided.
(b)(1)(iii)
Electrical insulation.
(b)(1)(iv)
Heating effects under conditions of use.
..1910.303(b)(1)(v)
(b)(1)(v)
Arcing effects.
(b)(1)(vi)
Classification by type, size, voltage, current capacity, specific use.
(b)(1)(vii)
Other factors which contribute to the practical safeguarding of
employees using or likely to come in contact with the equipment.
(b)(2)
Installation and use. Listed or labeled equipment shall be used or
installed in accordance with any instructions included in the listing
or labeling.
(c)
Splices. Conductors shall be spliced or joined with splicing devices
suitable for the use or by brazing, welding, or soldering with a
fusible metal or alloy. Soldered splices shall first be so spliced or
joined as to be mechanically and electrically secure without solder
and then soldered. All splices and joints and the free ends of
conductors shall be covered with an insulation equivalent to that of
the conductors or with an insulating device suitable for the
purpose.
(d)
Arcing parts. Parts of electric equipment which in ordinary
operation produce arcs, sparks, flames, or molten metal shall be
enclosed or separated and isolated from all combustible material.
..1910.303(e)
(e)
Marking. Electrical equipment may not be used unless the
manufacturer's name, trademark, or other descriptive marking by
which the organization responsible for the product may be
identified is placed on the equipment. Other markings shall be
provided giving voltage, current, wattage, or other ratings as
necessary. The marking shall be of sufficient durability to withstand
the environment involved.
(f)
Identification of disconnecting means and circuits. Each
disconnecting means required by this subpart for motors and
appliances shall be legibly marked to indicate its purpose, unless
located and arranged so the purpose is evident. Each service,
feeder, and branch circuit, at its disconnecting means or
overcurrent device, shall be legibly marked to indicate its purpose,
unless located and arranged so the purpose is evident. These
markings shall be of sufficient durability to withstand the
environment involved.
(g)
600 Volts, nominal, or less --
(g)(1)
Working space about electric equipment. Sufficient access and
working space shall be provided and maintained about all electric
equipment to permit ready and safe operation and maintenance of
such equipment.
..1910.303(g)(1)(i)
(g)(1)(i)
Working clearances. Except as required or permitted elsewhere
in this subpart, the dimension of the working space in the direction
of access to live parts operating at 600 volts or less and likely to
require examination, adjustment, servicing, or maintenance while
alive may not be less than indicated in Table S-1. In addition to the
dimensions shown in Table S-1, workspace may not be less than 30
inches wide in front of the electric equipment. Distances shall be
measured from the live parts if they are exposed, or from the
enclosure front or opening if the live parts are enclosed. Concrete,
brick, or tile walls are considered to be grounded. Working space is
not required in back of assemblies such as dead-front switchboards
or motor control centers where there are no renewable or
adjustable parts such as fuses or switches on the back and where

all connections are accessible from locations other than the back.
TABLE S-1 - WORKING CLEARANCES
Minimum clear distance

for condition (2) (ft)
Nominal voltage to
(a) (b) (c)
ground
0-150 (1) 3 (1) 3 3

151-600 (1) 3 3 1/2 4
(1) Minimum clear distances may be 2 feet 6
inches for installations built prior to April 16,
1981.
(2) Conditions (a), (b), and (c), are as follows:

(a) Exposed live parts on one side and no live or
grounded parts on the other side of the working
space, or exposed live parts on both sides
effectively guarded by suitable wood or other
insulating material. Insulated wire or insulated
busbars operating at not over 300 volts are not
considered live parts. (b) Exposed live parts on
one side and grounded parts on the other side.
(c) Exposed live parts on both sides of the
workspace [not guarded as provided in
Condition (a)] with the operator between.
(g)(1)(ii)
Clear spaces. Working space required by this subpart may not be
used for storage. When normally enclosed live parts are exposed
for inspection or servicing, the working space, if in a passageway or
general open space, shall be suitably guarded.
(g)(1)(iii)
Access and entrance to working space. At least one entrance of
sufficient area shall be provided to give access to the working space
about electric equipment.
..1910.303(g)(1)(iv)
(g)(1)(iv)
Front working space. Where there are live parts normally
exposed on the front of switchboards or motor control centers, the
working space in front of such equipment may not be less than 3
feet.
(g)(1)(v)
Illumination. Illumination shall be provided for all working spaces
about service equipment, switchboards, panelboards, and motor
control centers installed indoors.
(g)(1)(vi)
Headroom. The minimum headroom of working spaces about
service equipment, switchboards, panel-boards, or motor control
centers shall be 6 feet 3 inches.
NOTE: As used in this section a motor control center is an assembly
of one or more enclosed sections having a common power bus and
principally containing motor control units.
(g)(2)
Guarding of live parts.
(g)(2)(i)
Except as required or permitted elsewhere in this subpart, live
parts of electric equipment operating at 50 volts or more shall be
guarded against accidental contact by approved cabinets or other
forms of approved enclosures, or by any of the following means:
(g)(2)(i)(A)
By location in a room, vault, or similar enclosure that is accessible
only to qualified persons.
..1910.303(g)(2)(i)(B)
(g)(2)(i)(B)
By suitable permanent, substantial partitions or screens so
arranged that only qualified persons will have access to the space
within reach of the live parts. Any openings in such partitions or
screens shall be so sized and located that persons are not likely to
come into accidental contact with the live parts or to bring
conducting objects into contact with them.
(g)(2)(i)(C)
By location on a suitable balcony, gallery, or platform so elevated

and arranged as to exclude unqualified persons.
(g)(2)(i)(D)
By elevation of 8 feet or more above the floor or other working
surface.
(g)(2)(ii)
In locations where electric equipment would be exposed to physical
damage, enclosures or guards shall be so arranged and of such
strength as to prevent such damage.
(g)(2)(iii)
Entrances to rooms and other guarded locations containing exposed
live parts shall be marked with conspicuous warning signs
forbidding unqualified persons to enter.
(h)
Over 600 volts, nominal --
(h)(1)
General. Conductors and equipment used on circuits exceeding
600 volts, nominal, shall comply with all applicable provisions of
paragraphs (a) through (g) of this section and with the following
provisions which supplement or modify those requirements. The
provisions of paragraphs (h)(2), (h)(3), and (h)(4) of this section
do not apply to equipment on the supply side of the service
conductors.
..1910.303(h)(2)
(h)(2)
Enclosure for electrical installations. Electrical installations in a
vault, room, closet or in an area surrounded by a wall, screen, or
fence, access to which is controlled by lock and key or other
approved means, are considered to be accessible to qualified
persons only. A wall, screen, or fence less than 8 feet in height is
not considered to prevent access unless it has other features that
provide a degree of isolation equivalent to an 8 foot fence. The
entrances to all buildings, rooms, or enclosures containing exposed
live parts or exposed conductors operating at over 600 volts,
nominal, shall be kept locked or shall be under the observation of a
qualified person at all times.
(h)(2)(i)
Installations accessible to qualified persons only. Electrical
installations having exposed live parts shall be accessible to
qualified persons only and shall comply with the applicable
provisions of paragraph (h)(3) of this section.
(h)(2)(ii)
Installations accessible to unqualified persons. Electrical
installations that are open to unqualified persons shall be made
with metal-enclosed equipment or shall be enclosed in a vault or in
an area, access to which is controlled by a lock. If metal-enclosed
equipment is installed so that the bottom of the enclosure is less
than 8 feet above the floor, the door or cover shall be kept locked.
Metal-enclosed switchgear, unit substations, transformers, pull
boxes, connection boxes, and other similar associated equipment
shall be marked with appropriate caution signs. If equipment is
exposed to physical damage from vehicular traffic, suitable guards
shall be provided to prevent such damage. Ventilating or similar
openings in metal-enclosed equipment shall be designed so that
foreign objects inserted through these openings will be deflected
from energized parts.
..1910.303(h)(3)
(h)(3)
Workspace about equipment. Sufficient space shall be provided
and maintained about electric equipment to permit ready and safe
operation and maintenance of such equipment. Where energized
parts are exposed, the minimum clear workspace may not be less
than 6 feet 6 inches high (measured vertically from the floor or
platform), or less than 3 feet wide (measured parallel to the
equipment). The depth shall be as required in Table S-2. The
workspace shall be adequate to permit at least a 90-degree
opening of doors or hinged panels.
(h)(3)(i)
Working space. The minimum clear working space in front of
electric equipment such as switchboards, control panels, switches,
circuit breakers, motor controllers, relays, and similar equipment
may not be less than specified in Table S-2 unless otherwise
specified in this subpart. Distances shall be measured from the live
parts if they are exposed, or from the enclosure front or opening if
the live parts are enclosed. However, working space is not required
in back of equipment such as deadfront switchboards or control
assemblies where there are no renewable or adjustable parts (such

as fuses or switches) on the back and where all connections are
accessible from locations other than the back. Where rear access is
required to work on deenergized parts on the back of enclosed
equipment, a minimum working space of 30 inches horizontally
shall be provided.
TABLE S-2 - MINIMUM DEPTH OF CLEAR WORKING SPACE IN

FRONT OF ELECTRIC EQUIPMENT
Conditions (2a) (ft)
Nominal voltage to ground (a) (b) (c)
601 to 2,500 3 4 5
2,501 to 9,000 4 5 6
9,001 to 25,000 5 6 9
25,001 to 75kV (1a) 6 8 10
Above 75kV(1a) 8 10 12
(1a) Minimum depth of clear working space in
front of electric equipment with a nominal
voltage to ground above 25,000 volts may be
the same as for 25,000 volts under Conditions
(a), (b), and (c) for installations built prior to
April 16, 1981.
(2a) Conditions (a), (b), and (c) are as follows:

(a) Exposed live parts on one side and no live or
grounded parts on the other side of the working
space, or exposed live parts on both sides
effectively guarded by suitable wood or other
insulating materials. Insulated wire or insulated
busbars operating at not over 300 volts are not
considered live parts. (b) Exposed live parts on
one side and grounded parts on the other side.
Concrete, brick, or tile walls will be considered
as grounded surfaces. (c) Exposed live parts on
both sides of the workspace not guarded as
provided in Condition (a) with the operator
between.
..1910.303(h)(3)(ii)
(h)(3)(ii)
Illumination. Adequate illumination shall be provided for all
working spaces about electric equipment. The lighting outlets shall
be so arranged that persons changing lamps or making repairs on
the lighting system will not be endangered by live parts or other
equipment. The points of control shall be so located that persons
are not likely to come in contact with any live part or moving part
of the equipment while turning on the lights.
(h)(3)(iii)
Elevation of unguarded live parts. Unguarded live parts above
working space shall be maintained at elevations not less than
specified in Table S -3.
TABLE S-3 - ELEVATION OF UNGUARDED ENERGIZED

PARTS ABOVE WORKING SPACE
Nominal voltage be -
Minimum elevation
tween phases
601 to 7,500 *8 feet 6 inches.
7,501 to 35,000 9 feet.
Over 35kV 9 feet + 0.37 inches
kV above
35kV.
*Note. -- Minimum elevation may be 8 feet 0
inches for installations built prior to April 16,
1981 if the nominal voltage between phases is
in the range of 601-6600 volts.
(h)(4)
Entrance and access to workspace. (See §1910.302(b)(3).)
(h)(4)(i)
At least one entrance not less than 24 inches wide and 6 feet 6
inches high shall be provided to give access to the working space
about electric equipment. On switchboard and control panels
exceeding 48 inches in width, there shall be one entrance at each
end of such board where practicable. Where bare energized parts at
any voltage or insulated energized parts above 600 volts are
located adjacent to such entrance, they shall be suitably guarded.
(h)(4)(ii)
Permanent ladders or stairways shall be provided to give safe

access to the working space around electric equipment installed on
platforms, balconies, mezzanine floors, or in attic or roof rooms or
spaces.
[46 FR 4056, Jan. 16, 1981; 46 FR 40185, Aug. 7, 1981]
Wiring design and protection. - 1910.304 Page 1 of 16
Text version
Home Index Search
CFR)
Wiring design and protection. - 1910.304

l Standard Title: Wiring design and protection.
l SubPart Number: S
Systems
Interpretation(s)
(a)
Use and identification of grounded and grounding conductors.
(a)(1)
Identification of conductors. A conductor used as a grounded

conductor shall be identifiable and distinguishable from all other
conductors. A conductor used as an equipment grounding
conductor shall be identifiable and distinguishable from all other
conductors.
(a)(2)
Polarity of connections. No grounded conductor may be attached to

any terminal or lead so as to reverse designated polarity.
(a)(3)
Use of grounding terminals and devices. A grounding terminal or
grounding-type device on a receptacle, cord connector, or

attachment plug may not be used for purposes other than
grounding.
(b)
Branch circuits -
(b)(1)
[Reserved]
(b)(2)
Outlet devices. Outlet devices shall have an ampere rating not less
than the load to be served.
..1910.304(c)
(c)
Outside conductors, 600 volts, nominal, or less. Paragraphs (c)(1),

(c)(2), (c)(3), and (c)(4) of this section apply to branch circuit,
feeder, and service conductors rated 600 volts, nominal, or less
and run outdoors as open conductors. Paragraph (c)(5) applies to
lamps installed under such conductors.
(c)(1)
Conductors on poles. Conductors supported on poles shall provide a

horizontal climbing space not less than the following:
(c)(1)(i)
Power conductors below communication conductors - 30 inches.
(c)(1)(ii)
Power conductors alone or above communication conductors: 300

volts or less - 24 inches; more than 300 volts - 30 inches.
(c)(1)(iii)
Communication conductors below power conductors with power
conductors 300 volts or less - 24 inches; more than 300 volts - 30

inches.
(c)(2)
Clearance from ground. Open conductors shall conform to the

following minimum clearances:
(c)(2)(i)
10 feet - above finished grade, sidewalks, or from any platform or

projection from which they might be reached.
(c)(2)(ii)
12 feet - over areas subject to vehicular traffic other than truck

traffic.
(c)(2)(iii)
15 feet - over areas other than those specified in paragraph (c)(2)

(iv) of this section that are subject to truck traffic.
..1910.304(c)(2)(iv)
(c)(2)(iv)
18 feet - over public streets, alleys, roads, and driveways.
(c)(3)
Clearance from building openings. Conductors shall have a

clearance of at least 3 feet from windows, doors, porches, fire
escapes, or similar locations. Conductors run above the top level of
a window are considered to be out of reach from that window and,
therefore, do not have to be 3 feet away.
(c)(4)
Clearance over roofs. Conductors shall have a clearance of not less

than 8 feet from the highest point of roofs over which they pass,
except that:
(c)(4)(i)
Where the voltage between conductors is 300 volts or less and the
roof has a slope of not less than 4 inches in 12, the clearance from
roofs shall be at least 3 feet, or
(c)(4)(ii)
Where the voltage between conductors is 300 volts or less and the
conductors do not pass over more than 4 feet of the overhang
portion of the roof and they are terminated at a through-the-roof
raceway or approved support, the clearance from roofs shall be at
least 18 inches.
..1910.304(c)(5)
(c)(5)
Location of outdoor lamps. Lamps for outdoor lighting shall be

located below all live conductors, transformers, or other electric
equipment, unless such equipment is controlled by a disconnecting
means that can be locked in the open position or unless adequate
clearances or other safeguards are provided for relamping
operations.
(d)
Services -
(d)(1)
Disconnecting means -
(d)(1)(i)
General. Means shall be provided to disconnect all conductors in a

building or other structure from the service-entrance conductors.
The disconnecting means shall plainly indicate whether it is in the
open or closed position and shall be installed at a readily accessible
location nearest the point of entrance of the service-entrance
conductors.
(d)(1)(ii)
Simultaneous opening of poles. Each service disconnecting means

shall simultaneously disconnect all ungrounded conductors.
(d)(2)
Services over 600 volts, nominal. The following additional

requirements apply to services over 600 volts, nominal.
(d)(2)(i)
Guarding. Service-entrance conductors installed as open wires shall

be guarded to make them accessible only to qualified persons.
(d)(2)(ii)
Warning signs. Signs warning of high voltage shall be posted where

other than qualified employees might come in contact with live
parts.
(e)
Overcurrent protection.
(e)(1)
600 volts, nominal, or less. The following requirements apply to

overcurrent protection of circuits rated 600 volts, nominal, or less.
..1910.304(e)(1)(i)
(e)(1)(i)
Protection of conductors and equipment. Conductors and

equipment shall be protected from overcurrent in accordance with
their ability to safely conduct current.
(e)(1)(ii)
Grounded conductors. Except for motor running overload

protection, overcurrent devices may not interrupt the continuity of
the grounded conductor unless all conductors of the circuit are
opened simultaneously.
(e)(1)(iii)
Disconnection of fuses and thermal cutouts. Except for service
fuses, all cartridge fuses which are accessible to other than

qualified persons and all fuses and thermal cutouts on circuits over
150 volts to ground shall be provided with disconnecting means.
This disconnecting means shall be installed so that the fuse or
thermal cutout can be disconnected from its supply without
disrupting service to equipment and circuits unrelated to those
protected by the overcurrent device.
(e)(1)(iv)
Location in or on premises. Overcurrent devices shall be readily

accessible to each employee or authorized building management
personnel. These overcurrent devices may not be located where
they will be exposed to physical damage nor in the vicinity of easily
ignitable material.
(e)(1)(v)
Arcing or suddenly moving parts. Fuses and circuit breakers shall

be so located or shielded that employees will not be burned or
otherwise injured by their operation.
..1910.304(e)(1)(vi)
(e)(1)(vi)
Circuit breakers.
(e)(1)(vi)(A)
Circuit breakers shall clearly indicate whether they are in the open
(off) or closed (on) position.
(e)(1)(vi)(B)
Where circuit breaker handles on switchboards are operated

vertically rather than horizontally or rotationally, the up position of
the handle shall be the closed (on) position. (See 1910.302(b)(3).)
(e)(1)(vi)(C)
If used as switches in 120-volt, fluorescent lighting circuits, circuit

breakers shall be approved for the purpose and marked
"SWD." (See 1910.302(b)(3).)
(e)(2)
Over 600 volts, nominal. Feeders and branch circuits over 600
volts, nominal, shall have short -circuit protection.
(f)
Grounding. Paragraphs (f)(1) through (f)(7) of this section contain

grounding requirements for systems, circuits, and equipment.
(f)(1)
Systems to be grounded. The following systems which supply

premises wiring shall be grounded:
(f)(1)(i)
All 3-wire DC systems shall have their neutral conductor grounded.
(f)(1)(ii)
Two-wire DC systems operating at over 50 volts through 300 volts

between conductors shall be grounded unless:
..1910.304(f)(1)(ii)(A)
(f)(1)(ii)(A)
They supply only industrial equipment in limited areas and are

equipped with a ground detector; or
(f)(1)(ii)(B)
They are rectifier-derived from an AC system complying with

paragraphs (f)(1)(iii), (f)(1)(iv), and (f)(1)(v) of this section; or
(f)(1)(ii)(C)
They are fire-protective signaling circuits having a maximum

current of 0.030 amperes.
(f)(1)(iii)
AC circuits of less than 50 volts shall be grounded if they are

installed as overhead conductors outside of buildings or if they are
supplied by transformers and the transformer primary supply
system is ungrounded or exceeds 150 volts to ground.
(f)(1)(iv)
AC systems of 50 volts to 1000 volts shall be grounded under any

of the following conditions, unless exempted by paragraph (f)(1)(v)
of this section:
(f)(1)(iv)(A)
If the system can be so grounded that the maximum voltage to

ground on the ungrounded conductors does not exceed 150 volts;
(f)(1)(iv)(B)
If the system is nominally rated 480Y/277 volt, 3-phase, 4-wire in

which the neutral is used as a circuit conductor;
(f)(1)(iv)(C)
If the system is nominally rated 240/120 volt, 3-phase, 4-wire in

which the midpoint of one phase is used as a circuit conductor; or
..1910.304(f)(1)(iv)(D)
(f)(1)(iv)(D)
If a service conductor is uninsulated.
(f)(1)(v)
AC systems of 50 volts to 1000 volts are not required to be

grounded under any of the following conditions:
(f)(1)(v)(A)
If the system is used exclusively to supply industrial electric

furnaces for melting, refining, tempering, and the like.
(f)(1)(v)(B)
If the system is separately derived and is used exclusively for

rectifiers supplying only adjustable speed industrial drives.
(f)(1)(v)(C)
If the system is separately derived and is supplied by a transformer

that has a primary voltage rating less than 1000 volts, provided all
of the following conditions are met:
(f)(1)(v)(C)(1)
The system is used exclusively for control circuits,
(f)(1)(v)(C)(2)
The conditions of maintenance and supervision assure that only

qualified persons will service the installation,
(f)(1)(v)(C)(3)
Continuity of control power is required, and
(f)(1)(v)(C)(4)
Ground detectors are installed on the control system.
..1910.304(f)(1)(v)(D)
(f)(1)(v)(D)
If the system is an isolated power system that supplies circuits in

health care facilities.
(f)(2)
Conductors to be grounded. For AC premises wiring systems the

identified conductor shall be grounded.
(f)(3)
Grounding connections.
(f)(3)(i)
For a grounded system, a grounding electrode conductor shall be

used to connect both the equipment grounding conductor and the
grounded circuit conductor to the grounding electrode. Both the
equipment grounding conductor and the grounding electrode
conductor shall be connected to the grounded circuit conductor on
the supply side of the service disconnecting means, or on the
supply side of the system disconnecting means or overcurrent
devices if the system is separately derived.
(f)(3)(ii)
For an ungrounded service-supplied system, the equipment

grounding conductor shall be connected to the grounding electrode
conductor at the service equipment. For an ungrounded separately
derived system, the equipment grounding conductor shall be
connected to the grounding electrode conductor at, or ahead of, the
system disconnecting means or overcurrent devices.
(f)(3)(iii)
On extensions of existing branch circuits which do not have an

equipment grounding conductor, grounding-type receptacles may
be grounded to a grounded cold water pipe near the equipment.
..1910.304(f)(4)
(f)(4)
Grounding path. The path to ground from circuits, equipment, and

enclosures shall be permanent and continuous.
(f)(5)
Supports, enclosures, and equipment to be grounded -
(f)(5)(i)
Supports and enclosures for conductors. Metal cable trays, metal

raceways, and metal enclosures for conductors shall be grounded,
except that:
(f)(5)(i)(A)
Metal enclosures such as sleeves that are used to protect cable
assemblies from physical damage need not be grounded; or
(f)(5)(i)(B)
Metal enclosures for conductors added to existing installations of

open wire, knob-and-tube wiring, and nonmetallic-sheathed cable
need not be grounded if all of the following conditions are met:
(f)(5)(i)(B)(1)
Runs are less than 25 feet;
(f)(5)(i)(B)(2)
enclosures are free from probable contact with ground, grounded

metal, metal laths, or other conductive materials; and
(f)(5)(i)(B)(3)
enclosures are guarded against employee contact.
(f)(5)(ii)
Service equipment enclosures. Metal enclosures for service

equipment shall be grounded.
..1910.304(f)(5)(iii)
(f)(5)(iii)
Frames of ranges and clothes dryers. Frames of electric ranges,

wall-mounted ovens, counter-mounted cooking units, clothes
dryers, and metal outlet or junction boxes which are part of the
circuit for these appliances shall be grounded.
(f)(5)(iv)
Fixed equipment. Exposed non -current-carrying metal parts of fixed

equipment which may become energized shall be grounded under
any of the following conditions:
(f)(5)(iv)(A)
If within 8 feet vertically or 5 feet horizontally of ground or
grounded metal objects and subject to employee contact.
(f)(5)(iv)(B)
If located in a wet or damp location and not isolated.
(f)(5)(iv)(C)
If in electrical contact with metal.
(f)(5)(iv)(D)
If in a hazardous (classified) location.
(f)(5)(iv)(E)
If supplied by a metal-clad, metal-sheathed, or grounded metal

raceway wiring method.
(f)(5)(iv)(F)
If equipment operates with any terminal at over 150 volts to

ground; however, the following need not be grounded:
(f)(5)(iv)(F)(1)
Enclosures for switches or circuit breakers used for other than

service equipment and accessible to qualified persons only;
..1910.304(f)(5)(iv)(F)(2)
(f)(5)(iv)(F)(2)
Metal frames of electrically heated appliances which are

permanently and effectively insulated from ground; and
(f)(5)(iv)(F)(3)
The cases of distribution apparatus such as transformers and

capacitors mounted on wooden poles at a height exceeding 8 feet
above ground or grade level.
(f)(5)(v)
Equipment connected by cord and plug. Under any of the conditions

described in paragraphs (f)(5)(v)(A) through (f)(5)(v)(C) of this
section, exposed non-current-carrying metal parts of cord - and
plug-connected equipment which may become energized shall be
grounded.
(f)(5)(v)(A)
If in hazardous (classified) locations (see 1910.307).
(f)(5)(v)(B)
If operated at over 150 volts to ground, except for guarded motors

and metal frames of electrically heated appliances if the appliance
frames are permanently and effectively insulated from ground.
(f)(5)(v)(C)
If the equipment is of the following types:
(f)(5)(v)(C)(1)
Refrigerators, freezers, and air conditioners;
(f)(5)(v)(C)(2)
Clothes-washing, clothes-drying and dishwashing machines, sump

pumps, and electrical aquarium equipment;
(f)(5)(v)(C)(3)
Hand-held motor -operated tools;
..1910.304(f)(5)(v)(C)(4)
(f)(5)(v)(C)(4)
Motor-operated appliances of the following types: hedge clippers,

lawn mowers, snow blowers, and wet scrubbers;
(f)(5)(v)(C)(5)
Cord- and plug-connected appliances used in damp or wet locations
or by employees standing on the ground or on metal floors or

working inside of metal tanks or boilers;
(f)(5)(v)(C)(6)
Portable and mobile X-ray and associated equipment;
(f)(5)(v)(C)(7)
Tools likely to be used in wet and conductive locations; and
(f)(5)(v)(C)(8)
Portable hand lamps.
Tools likely to be used in wet and conductive locations need not be

grounded if supplied through an isolating transformer with an
ungrounded secondary of not over 50 volts. Listed or labeled
portable tools and appliances protected by an approved system of
double insulation, or its equivalent, need not be grounded. If such a
system is employed, the equipment shall be distinctively marked to
indicate that the tool or appliance utilizes an approved system of
double insulation.
(f)(5)(vi)
Nonelectrical equipment. The metal parts of the following

nonelectrical equipment shall be grounded: frames and tracks of
electrically operated cranes; frames of nonelectrically driven
elevator cars to which electric conductors are attached; hand
operated metal shifting ropes or cables of electric elevators, and
metal partitions, grill work, and similar metal enclosures around
equipment of over 750 volts between conductors.
..1910.304(f)(6)
(f)(6)
Methods of grounding fixed equipment.
(f)(6)(i)
Non-current-carrying metal parts of fixed equipment, if required to

be grounded by this subpart, shall be grounded by an equipment
grounding conductor which is contained within the same raceway,

cable, or cord, or runs with or encloses the circuit conductors. For
DC circuits only, the equipment grounding conductor may be run
separately from the circuit conductors.
(f)(6)(ii)
Electric equipment is considered to be effectively grounded if it is

secured to, and in electrical contact with, a metal rack or structure
that is provided for its support and the metal rack or structure is
grounded by the method specified for the non-current-carrying
metal parts of fixed equipment in paragraph (f)(6)(i) of this
section. For installations made before April 16, 1981, only, electric
equipment is also considered to be effectively grounded if it is
secured to, and in metallic contact with, the grounded structural
metal frame of a building. Metal car frames supported by metal
hoisting cables attached to or running over metal sheaves or drums
of grounded elevator machines are also considered to be effectively
grounded.
(f)(7)
Grounding of systems and circuits of 1000 volts and over (high

voltage.) -
(f)(7)(i)
General. If high voltage systems are grounded, they shall comply

with all applicable provisions of paragraphs (f)(1) through (f)(6) of
this section as supplemented and modified by this paragraph (f)(7).
(f)(7)(ii)
Grounding of systems supplying portable or mobile equipment.

(See 1910.302(b)(3).) Systems supplying portable or mobile high
voltage equipment, other than substations installed on a temporary
basis, shall comply with the following:
..1910.304(f)(7)(ii)(A)
(f)(7)(ii)(A)
Portable and mobile high voltage equipment shall be supplied from

a system having its neutral grounded through an impedance. If a
delta-connected high voltage system is used to supply the

equipment, a system neutral shall be derived.
(f)(7)(ii)(B)
Exposed non-current-carrying metal parts of portable and mobile

equipment shall be connected by an equipment grounding
conductor to the point at which the system neutral impedance is
grounded.
(f)(7)(ii)(C)
Ground-fault detection and relaying shall be provided to

automatically deenergize any high voltage system component
which has developed a ground fault. The continuity of the
equipment grounding conductor shall be continuously monitored so
as to deenergize automatically the high voltage feeder to the
portable equipment upon loss of continuity of the equipment
grounding conductor.
(f)(7)(ii)(D)
The grounding electrode to which the portable or mobile equipment

system neutral impedance is connected shall be isolated from and
separated in the ground by at least 20 feet from any other system
or equipment grounding electrode, and there shall be no direct
connection between the grounding electrodes, such as buried pipe,
fence, etc.
(f)(7)(iii)
Grounding of equipment. All non-current-carrying metal parts of

portable equipment and fixed equipment including their associated
fences, housings, enclosures, and supporting structures shall be
grounded. However, equipment which is guarded by location and
isolated from ground need not be grounded. Additionally, pole-
mounted distribution apparatus at a height exceeding 8 feet above
ground or grade level need not be grounded.
[46 FR 4056, Jan. 16, 1981; 46 FR 40185, Aug. 7, 1981, as

amended at 55 FR 32015, Aug. 6, 1990]
Wiring methods, components, and equipment for general use. - 1910.305 Page 1 of 21
Text version
Home Index Search
CFR)
Wiring methods, components, and
equipment for general use. - 1910.305

l Standard Title: Wiring methods, components, and equipment for
general use.
l SubPart Number: S
Systems
Interpretation(s)
(a)
Wiring methods. The provisions of this section do not apply to the

conductors that are an integral part of factory-assembled
equipment.
(a)(1)
General requirements -
(a)(1)(i)
Electrical continuity of metal raceways and enclosures. Metal

raceways, cable armor, and other metal enclosures for conductors
shall be metallically joined together into a continuous electric
conductor and shall be so connected to all boxes, fittings, and
cabinets as to provide effective electrical continuity.
(a)(1)(ii)
Wiring in ducts. No wiring systems of any type shall be installed in

ducts used to transport dust, loose stock or flammable vapors. No
wiring system of any type may be installed in any duct used for
vapor removal or for ventilation of commercial-type cooking
equipment, or in any shaft containing only such ducts.
(a)(2)
Temporary wiring. Temporary electrical power and lighting wiring

methods may be of a class less than would be required for a
permanent installation. Except as specifically modified in this
paragraph, all other requirements of this subpart for permanent
wiring shall apply to temporary wiring installations.
..1910.305(a)(2)(i)
(a)(2)(i)
Uses permitted, 600 volts, nominal, or less. Temporary electrical

power and lighting installations 600 volts, nominal, or less may be
used only:
(a)(2)(i)(A)
During and for remodeling, maintenance, repair, or demolition of

buildings, structures, or equipment, and similar activities;
(a)(2)(i)(B)
For experimental or development work, and
(a)(2)(i)(C)
For a period not to exceed 90 days for Christmas decorative

lighting, carnivals, and similar purposes.
(a)(2)(ii)
Uses permitted, over 600 volts, nominal. Temporary wiring over

600 volts, nominal, may be used only during periods of tests,
experiments, or emergencies.
(a)(2)(iii)
General requirements for temporary wiring.
(a)(2)(iii)(A)
Feeders shall originate in an approved distribution center. The

conductors shall be run as multiconductor cord or cable assemblies,
or, where not subject to physical damage, they may be run as open
conductors on insulators not more than 10 feet apart.
..1910.305(a)(2)(iii)(B)
(a)(2)(iii)(B)
Branch circuits shall originate in an approved power outlet or

panelboard. Conductors shall be multiconductor cord or cable
assemblies or open conductors. If run as open conductors they
shall be fastened at ceiling height every 10 feet. No branch-circuit
conductor may be laid on the floor. Each branch circuit that
supplies receptacles or fixed equipment shall contain a separate
equipment grounding conductor if run as open conductors.
(a)(2)(iii)(C)
Receptacles shall be of the grounding type. Unless installed in a

complete metallic raceway, each branch circuit shall contain a
separate equipment grounding conductor and all receptacles shall
be electrically connected to the grounding conductor.
(a)(2)(iii)(D)
No bare conductors nor earth returns may be used for the wiring of
any temporary circuit.
(a)(2)(iii)(E)
Suitable disconnecting switches or plug connectors shall be

installed to permit the disconnection of all ungrounded conductors
of each temporary circuit.
(a)(2)(iii)(F)
Lamps for general illumination shall be protected from accidental

contact or breakage. Protection shall be provided by elevation of at
least 7 feet from normal working surface or by a suitable fixture or
lampholder with a guard.
(a)(2)(iii)(G)
Flexible cords and cables shall be protected from accidental

damage. Sharp corners and projections shall be avoided. Where
passing through doorways or other pinch points, flexible cords and
cables shall be provided with protection to avoid damage.
..1910.305(a)(3)
(a)(3)
Cable trays.
(a)(3)(i)
Uses permitted.
(a)(3)(i)(A)
Only the following may be installed in cable tray systems:
(a)(3)(i)(A)(1)
Mineral-insulated metal-sheathed cable (Type MI);
(a)(3)(i)(A)(2)
Armored cable (Type AC);
(a)(3)(i)(A)(3)
Metal-clad cable (Type MC);
(a)(3)(i)(A)(4)
Power -limited tray cable (Type PLTC);
(a)(3)(i)(A)(5)
Nonmetallic-sheathed cable (Type NM or NMC);
(a)(3)(i)(A)(6)
Shielded nonmetallic-sheathed cable (Type SNM);
(a)(3)(i)(A)(7)
Multiconductor service-entrance cable (Type SE or USE);
(a)(3)(i)(A)(8)
Multiconductor underground feeder and branch-circuit cable (Type

UF);
(a)(3)(i)(A)(9)
Power and control tray cable (Type TC);
(a)(3)(i)(A)(10)
Other factory-assembled, multiconductor control, signal, or power

cables which are specifically approved for installation in cable trays;
or
..1910.305(a)(3)(i)(A)(11)
(a)(3)(i)(A)(11)
Any approved conduit or raceway with its contained conductors.
(a)(3)(i)(B)
In industrial establishments only, where conditions of maintenance

and supervision assure that only qualified persons will service the
installed cable tray system, the following cables may also be
installed in ladder, ventilated trough, or 4 inch ventilated channel-
type cable trays:
(a)(3)(i)(B)(1)
Single conductor cables which are 250 MCM or larger and are Types
RHH, RHW, MV, USE, or THW, and other 250 MCM or larger single
conductor cables if specifically approved for installation in cable

trays. Where exposed to direct rays of the sun, cables shall be
sunlight-resistant.
(a)(3)(i)(B)(2)
Type MV cables, where exposed to direct rays of the sun, shall be

sunlight-resistant.
(a)(3)(i)(C)
Cable trays in hazardous (classified) locations shall contain only the

cable types permitted in such locations.
(a)(3)(ii)
Uses not permitted. Cable tray systems may not be used in

hoistways or where subjected to severe physical damage.
(a)(4)
Open wiring on insulators -
(a)(4)(i)
Uses permitted. Open wiring on insulators is only permitted on

systems of 600 volts, nominal, or less for industrial or agricultural
establishments and for services.
..1910.305(a)(4)(ii)
(a)(4)(ii)
Conductor supports. Conductors shall be rigidly supported on

noncombustible, nonabsorbent insulating materials and may not
contact any other objects.
(a)(4)(iii)
Flexible nonmetallic tubing. In dry locations where not exposed to

severe physical damage, conductors may be separately enclosed in
flexible nonmetallic tubing. The tubing shall be in continuous
lengths not exceeding 15 feet and secured to the surface by straps
at intervals not exceeding 4 feet 6 inches.
(a)(4)(iv)
Through walls, floors, wood cross members, etc. Open conductors

shall be separated from contact with walls, floors, wood cross
members, or partitions through which they pass by tubes or
bushings of noncombustible, nonabsorbent insulating material. If
the bushing is shorter than the hole, a waterproof sleeve of
nonconductive material shall be inserted in the hole and an
insulating bushing slipped into the sleeve at each end in such a
manner as to keep the conductors absolutely out of contact with
the sleeve. Each conductor shall be carried through a separate tube
or sleeve.
(a)(4)(v)
Protection from physical damage. Conductors within 7 feet from the

floor are considered exposed to physical damage. Where open
conductors cross ceiling joints and wall studs and are exposed to
physical damage, they shall be protected.
..1910.305(b)
(b)
Cabinets, boxes, and fittings -
(b)(1)
Conductors entering boxes, cabinets, or fittings. Conductors

entering boxes, cabinets, or fittings shall also be protected from
abrasion, and openings through which conductors enter shall be
effectively closed. Unused openings in cabinets, boxes, and fittings
shall be effectively closed.
(b)(2)
Covers and canopies. All pull boxes, junction boxes, and fittings
shall be provided with covers approved for the purpose. If metal
covers are used they shall be grounded. In completed installations
each outlet box shall have a cover, faceplate, or fixture canopy.
Covers of outlet boxes having holes through which flexible cord
pendants pass shall be provided with bushings designed for the
purpose or shall have smooth, well-rounded surfaces on which the
cords may bear.
(b)(3)
Pull and junction boxes for systems over 600 volts, nominal. In
addition to other requirements in this section for pull and junction
boxes, the following shall apply to these boxes for systems over
600 volts, nominal:
(b)(3)(i)
Boxes shall provide a complete enclosure for the contained

conductors or cables.
(b)(3)(ii)
Boxes shall be closed by suitable covers securely fastened in place.

Underground box covers that weigh over 100 pounds meet this
requirement. Covers for boxes shall be permanently marked "HIGH
VOLTAGE." The marking shall be on the outside of the box cover
and shall be readily visible and legible.
..1910.305(c)
(c)
Switches -
(c)(1)
Knife switches. Single-throw knife switches shall be so connected

that the blades are dead when the switch is in the open position.
Single-throw knife switches shall be so placed that gravity will not
tend to close them. Single-throw knife switches approved for use in
the inverted position shall be provided with a locking device that
will ensure that the blades remain in the open position when so set.
Double-throw knife switches may be mounted so that the throw will
be either vertical or horizontal. However, if the throw is vertical a
locking device shall be provided to ensure that the blades remain in
the open position when so set.
(c)(2)
Faceplates for flush-mounted snap switches. Flush snap switches
that are mounted in ungrounded metal boxes and located within

reach of conducting floors or other conducting surfaces shall be
provided with faceplates of nonconducting, noncombustible
material.
(d)
Switchboards and panelboards. Switchboards that have any

exposed live parts shall be located in permanently dry locations and
accessible only to qualified persons. Panelboards shall be mounted
in cabinets, cutout boxes, or enclosures approved for the purpose
and shall be dead front. However, panelboards other than the dead
front externally-operable type are permitted where accessible only
to qualified persons. Exposed blades of knife switches shall be dead
when open.
(e)
Enclosures for damp or wet locations.
(e)(1)
Cabinets, cutout boxes, fittings, boxes, and panelboard enclosures

in damp or wet locations shall be installed so as to prevent
moisture or water from entering and accumulating within the
enclosures. In wet locations the enclosures shall be weatherproof.
(e)(2)
Switches, circuit breakers, and switchboards installed in wet

locations shall be enclosed in weatherproof enclosures.
..1910.305(f)
(f)
Conductors for general wiring. All conductors used for general

wiring shall be insulated unless otherwise permitted in this Subpart.
The conductor insulation shall be of a type that is approved for the
voltage, operating temperature, and location of use. Insulated
conductors shall be distinguishable by appropriate color or other
suitable means as being grounded conductors, ungrounded
conductors, or equipment grounding conductors.
(g)
Flexible cords and cables -
(g)(1)
Use of flexible cords and cables.
(g)(1)(i)
Flexible cords and cables shall be approved and suitable for

conditions of use and location. Flexible cords and cables shall be
used only for:
(g)(1)(i)(A)
Pendants;
(g)(1)(i)(B)
Wiring of fixtures;
(g)(1)(i)(C)
Connection of portable lamps or appliances;
(g)(1)(i)(D)
Elevator cables;
(g)(1)(i)(E)
Wiring of cranes and hoists;
(g)(1)(i)(F)
Connection of stationary equipment to facilitate their frequent

interchange;
(g)(1)(i)(G)
Prevention of the transmission of noise or vibration;
(g)(1)(i)(H)
Appliances where the fastening means and mechanical connections

are designed to permit removal for maintenance and repair; or
..1910.305(g)(1)(i)(i)
(g)(1)(i)(i)
Data processing cables approved as a part of the data processing

system.
(g)(1)(ii)
If used as permitted in paragraphs (g)(1)(i)(c), (g)(1)(i)(f), or (g)

(1)(i)(h) of this section, the flexible cord shall be equipped with an
attachment plug and shall be energized from an approved
receptacle outlet.
(g)(1)(iii)
Unless specifically permitted in paragraph (g)(1)(i) of this section,

flexible cords and cables may not be used:
(g)(1)(iii)(A)
As a substitute for the fixed wiring of a structure;
(g)(1)(iii)(B)
Where run through holes in walls, ceilings, or floors;
(g)(1)(iii)(C)
Where run through doorways, windows, or similar openings;
(g)(1)(iii)(D)
Where attached to building surfaces; or
(g)(1)(iii)(E)
Where concealed behind building walls, ceilings, or floors.
(g)(1)(iv)
Flexible cords used in show windows and showcases shall be Type

S, SO, SJ, SJO, ST, STO, SJT, SJTO, or AFS except for the wiring of
chain-supported lighting fixtures and supply cords for portable
lamps and other merchandise being displayed or exhibited.
..1910.305(g)(2)
(g)(2)
Identification, splices, and terminations.
(g)(2)(i)
A conductor of a flexible cord or cable that is used as a grounded

conductor or an equipment grounding conductor shall be
distinguishable from other conductors. Types SJ, SJO, SJT, SJTO, S,
SO, ST, and STO shall be durably marked on the surface with the
type designation, size, and number of conductors.
(g)(2)(ii)
Flexible cords shall be used only in continuous lengths without

splice or tap. Hard service flexible cords No. 12 or larger may be
repaired if spliced so that the splice retains the insulation, outer
sheath properties, and usage characteristics of the cord being
spliced.
(g)(2)(iii)
Flexible cords shall be connected to devices and fittings so that

strain relief is provided which will prevent pull from being directly
transmitted to joints or terminal screws.
(h)
Portable cables over 600 volts, nominal. Multiconductor portable

cable for use in supplying power to portable or mobile equipment at
over 600 volts, nominal, shall consist of No. 8 or larger conductors
employing flexible stranding. Cables operated at over 2,000 volts
shall be shielded for the purpose of confining the voltage stresses
to the insulation. Grounding conductors shall be provided.
Connectors for these cables shall be of a locking type with

provisions to prevent their opening or closing while energized.
Strain relief shall be provided at connections and terminations.
Portable cables may not be operated with splices unless the splices
are of the permanent molded, vulcanized, or other approved type.
Termination enclosures shall be suitably marked with a high voltage
hazard warning, and terminations shall be accessible only to
authorized and qualified personnel.
..1910.305(i)
(i)
Fixture wires -
(i)(1)
General. Fixture wires shall be approved for the voltage,

temperature, and location of use. A fixture wire which is used as a
grounded conductor shall be identified.
(i)(2)
Uses permitted. Fixture wires may be used:
(i)(2)(i)
For installation in lighting fixtures and in similar equipment where

enclosed or protected and not subject to bending or twisting in use;
or
(i)(2)(ii)
For connecting lighting fixtures to the branch-circuit conductors

supplying the fixtures.
(i)(3)
Uses not permitted. Fixture wires may not be used as branch-circuit

conductors except as permitted for Class 1 power limited circuits.
(j)
Equipment for general use -
(j)(1)
Lighting fixtures, lampholders, lamps, and receptacles.
(j)(1)(i)
Fixtures, lampholders, lamps, rosettes, and receptacles may have

no live parts normally exposed to employee contact. However,
rosettes and cleat-type lampholders and receptacles located at
least 8 feet above the floor may have exposed parts.
(j)(1)(ii)
Handlamps of the portable type supplied through flexible cords

shall be equipped with a handle of molded composition or other
material approved for the purpose, and a substantial guard shall be
attached to the lampholder or the handle.
..1910.305(j)(1)(iii)
(j)(1)(iii)
Lampholders of the screw-shell type shall be installed for use as

lampholders only. Lampholders installed in wet or damp locations
shall be of the weatherproof type.
(j)(1)(iv)
Fixtures installed in wet or damp locations shall be approved for the

purpose and shall be so constructed or installed that water cannot
enter or accumulate in wireways, lampholders, or other electrical
parts.
(j)(2)
Receptacles, cord connectors, and attachment plugs (caps).
(j)(2)(i)
Receptacles, cord connectors, and attachment plugs shall be

constructed so that no receptacle or cord connector will accept an
attachment plug with a different voltage or current rating than that
for which the device is intended. However, a 20-ampere T -slot
receptacle or cord connector may accept a 15-ampere attachment

plug of the same voltage rating.
(j)(2)(ii)
A receptacle installed in a wet or damp location shall be suitable for

the location.
(j)(3)
Appliances.
(j)(3)(i)
Appliances, other than those in which the current-carrying parts at

high temperatures are necessarily exposed, may have no live parts
normally exposed to employee contact.
(j)(3)(ii)
A means shall be provided to disconnect each appliance.
..1910.305(j)(3)(iii)
(j)(3)(iii)
Each appliance shall be marked with its rating in volts and amperes
or volts and watts.
(j)(4)
Motors. This paragraph applies to motors, motor circuits, and

controllers.
(j)(4)(i)
In sight from. If specified that one piece of equipment shall be "in

sight from" another piece of equipment, one shall be visible and not
more than 50 feet from the other.
(j)(4)(ii)
Disconnecting means.
(j)(4)(ii)(A)
A disconnecting means shall be located in sight from the controller

location. However, a single disconnecting means may be located
adjacent to a group of coordinated controllers mounted adjacent to
each other on a multi-motor continuous process machine. The
controller disconnecting means for motor branch circuits over 600
volts, nominal, may be out of sight of the controller, if the
controller is marked with a warning label giving the location and
identification of the disconnecting means which is to be locked in
the open position.
(j)(4)(ii)(B)
The disconnecting means shall disconnect the motor and the

controller from all ungrounded supply conductors and shall be so
designed that no pole can be operated independently.
..1910.305(j)(4)(ii)(C)
(j)(4)(ii)(C)
If a motor and the driven machinery are not in sight from the
controller location, the installation shall comply with one of the
(j)(4)(ii)(C)(1)
The controller disconnecting means shall be capable of being locked

in the open position.
(j)(4)(ii)(C)(2)
A manually operable switch that will disconnect the motor from its
source of supply shall be placed in sight from the motor location.
(j)(4)(ii)(D)
The disconnecting means shall plainly indicate whether it is in the

open (off) or closed (on) position.
(j)(4)(ii)(E)
The disconnecting means shall be readily accessible. If more than

one disconnect is provided for the same equipment, only one need
be readily accessible.
(j)(4)(ii)(F)
An individual disconnecting means shall be provided for each

motor, but a single disconnecting means may be used for a group
of motors under any one of the following conditions:
(j)(4)(ii)(F)(1)
If a number of motors drive special parts of a single machine or

piece of apparatus, such as a metal or woodworking machine,
crane, or hoist;
(j)(4)(ii)(F)(2)
If a group of motors is under the protection of one set of branch-

circuit protective devices; or
..1910.305(j)(4)(ii)(F)(3)
(j)(4)(ii)(F)(3)
If a group of motors is in a single room in sight from the location of

the disconnecting means.
(j)(4)(iii)
Motor overload, short-circuit, and ground-fault protection. Motors,

motor-control apparatus, and motor branch-circuit conductors shall
be protected against overheating due to motor overloads or failure
to start, and against short-circuits or ground faults. These
provisions shall not require overload protection that will stop a
motor where a shutdown is likely to introduce additional or
increased hazards, as in the case of fire pumps, or where continued
operation of a motor is necessary for a safe shutdown of equipment
or process and motor overload sensing devices are connected to a
supervised alarm.
(j)(4)(iv)
Protection of live parts - all voltages.
(j)(4)(iv)(A)
Stationary motors having commutators, collectors, and brush

rigging located inside of motor end brackets and not conductively
connected to supply circuits operating at more than 150 volts to
ground need not have such parts guarded. Exposed live parts of
motors and controllers operating at 50 volts or more between
terminals shall be guarded against accidental contact by any of the
following:
(j)(4)(iv)(A)(1)
By installation in a room or enclosure that is accessible only to

qualified persons;
..1910.305(j)(4)(iv)(A)(2)
(j)(4)(iv)(A)(2)
By installation on a suitable balcony, gallery, or platform, so

elevated and arranged as to exclude unqualified persons; or
(j)(4)(iv)(A)(3)
By elevation 8 feet or more above the floor.
(j)(4)(iv)(B)
Where live parts of motors or controllers operating at over 150

volts to ground are guarded against accidental contact only by
location, and where adjustment or other attendance may be
necessary during the operation of the apparatus, suitable insulating
mats or platforms shall be provided so that the attendant cannot
readily touch live parts unless standing on the mats or platforms.
(j)(5)
Transformers.
(j)(5)(i)
The following paragraphs cover the installation of all transformers

except the following:
(j)(5)(i)(A)
Current transformers;
(j)(5)(i)(B)
Dry-type transformers installed as a component part of other

apparatus;
(j)(5)(i)(C)
Transformers which are an integral part of an X -ray, high

frequency, or electrostatic-coating apparatus;
..1910.305(j)(5)(i)(D)
(j)(5)(i)(D)
Transformers used with Class 2 and Class 3 circuits, sign and

outline lighting, electric discharge lighting, and power-limited fire-
protective signaling circuits; and
(j)(5)(i)(E)
Liquid-filled or dry-type transformers used for research,

development, or testing, where effective safeguard arrangements
are provided.
(j)(5)(ii)
The operating voltage of exposed live parts of transformer

installations shall be indicated by warning signs or visible markings
on the equipment or structure.
(j)(5)(iii)
Dry-type, high fire point liquid-insulated, and askarel -insulated

transformers installed indoors and rated over 35kV shall be in a
vault.
(j)(5)(iv)
If they present a fire hazard to employees, oil-insulated
transformers installed indoors shall be in a vault.
(j)(5)(v)
Combustible material, combustible buildings and parts of buildings,

fire escapes, and door and window openings shall be safeguarded
from fires which may originate in oil-insulated transformers
attached to or adjacent to a building or combustible material.
(j)(5)(vi)
Transformer vaults shall be constructed so as to contain fire and

combustible liquids within the vault and to prevent unauthorized
access. Locks and latches shall be so arranged that a vault door can
be readily opened from the inside.
..1910.305(j)(5)(vii)
(j)(5)(vii)
Any pipe or duct system foreign to the vault installation may not
enter or pass through a transformer vault.
(j)(5)(viii)
Materials may not be stored in transformer vaults.
(j)(6)
Capacitors.
(j)(6)(i)
All capacitors, except surge capacitors or capacitors included as a

component part of other apparatus, shall be provided with an
automatic means of draining the stored charge after the capacitor
is disconnected from its source of supply.
(j)(6)(ii)
Capacitors rated over 600 volts, nominal, shall comply with the
following additional requirements:
(j)(6)(ii)(A)
Isolating or disconnecting switches (with no interrupting rating)

shall be interlocked with the load interrupting device or shall be
provided with prominently displayed caution signs to prevent
switching load current.
(j)(6)(ii)(B)
For series capacitors (see 1910.302(b)(3)), the proper switching

shall be assured by use of at least one of the following:
(j)(6)(ii)(B)(1)
Mechanically sequenced isolating and bypass switches,
(j)(6)(ii)(B)(2)
Interlocks, or
..1910.305(j)(6)(ii)(B)(3)
(j)(6)(ii)(B)(3)
Switching procedure prominently displayed at the switching

location.
(j)(7)
Storage batteries. Provisions shall be made for sufficient diffusion

and ventilation of gases from storage batteries to prevent the
accumulation of explosive mixtures.
[46 FR 4056, Jan. 16, 1981; 46 FR 40185, Aug. 7, 1981]
Specific purpose equipment and installations. - 1910.306 Page 1 of 15
Text version
Home Index Search
CFR)
Specific purpose equipment and
installations. - 1910.306

l Standard Title: Specific purpose equipment and installations.
l SubPart Number: S
Systems
(a)
Electric signs and outline lighting -
(a)(1)
Disconnecting means. Signs operated by electronic or

electromechanical controllers located outside the sign shall have a
disconnecting means located inside the controller enclosure or
within sight of the controller location, and it shall be capable of
being locked in the open position. Such disconnecting means shall
have no pole that can be operated independently, and it shall open
all ungrounded conductors that supply the controller and sign. All
other signs, except the portable type, and all outline lighting
installations shall have an externally operable disconnecting means
which can open all ungrounded conductors and is within the sight of
the sign or outline lighting it controls.
(a)(2)
Doors or covers giving access to uninsulated parts of indoor signs
or outline lighting exceeding 600 volts and accessible to other than

qualified persons shall either be provided with interlock switches to
disconnect the primary circuit or shall be so fastened that the use
of other than ordinary tools will be necessary to open them.
..1910.306(b)
(b)
Cranes and hoists. This paragraph applies to the installation of

electric equipment and wiring used in connection with cranes,
monorail hoists, hoists, and all runways.
(b)(1)
Disconnecting means. A readily accessible disconnecting means -
(b)(1)(i)
shall be provided between the runway contact conductors and the

power supply.
(b)(1)(ii)
Another disconnecting means, capable of being locked in the open

position, shall be provided in the leads from the runway contact
conductors or other power supply on any crane or monorail hoist.
(b)(1)(ii)(A)
If this additional disconnecting means is not readily accessible from

the crane or monorail hoist operating station, means shall be
provided at the operating station to open the power circuit to all
motors of the crane or monorail hoist.
(b)(1)(ii)(B)
The additional disconnect may be omitted if a monorail hoist or

hand-propelled crane bridge installation meets all of the following:
(b)(1)(ii)(B)(1)
The unit is floor controlled;
(b)(1)(ii)(B)(2)
The unit is within view of the power supply disconnecting means;

and
(b)(1)(ii)(B)(3)
No fixed work platform has been provided for servicing the unit.
..1910.306(b)(2)
(b)(2)
Control. A limit switch or other device shall be provided to prevent

the load block from passing the safe upper limit of travel of any
hoisting mechanism.
(b)(3)
Clearance. The dimension of the working space in the direction of

access to live parts which may require examination, adjustment,
servicing, or maintenance while alive shall be a minimum of 2 feet
6 inches. Where controls are enclosed in cabinets, the door(s) shall
either open at least 90 degrees or be removable.
(c)
Elevators, dumbwaiters, escalators, and moving walks -
(c)(1)
Disconnecting means. Elevators, dumbwaiters, escalators, and

moving walks shall have a single means for disconnecting all
ungrounded main power supply conductors for each unit.
(c)(2)
Warning signs. If interconnections between control panels are

necessary for operation of the system on a multicar installation that
remains energized from a source other than the disconnecting
means, a warning sign shall be mounted on or adjacent to the
disconnecting means. The sign shall be clearly legible and shall
read "Warning - Parts of the control panel are not de-energized by
this switch." (See 1910.302(b)(3).)
(c)(3)
Control panels. If control panels are not located in the same space
as the drive machine, they shall be located in cabinets with doors
or panels capable of being locked closed.
..1910.306(d)
(d)
Electric welders - disconnecting means.
(d)(1)
A disconnecting means shall be provided in the supply circuit for

each motor-generator arc welder, and for each AC transformer and
DC rectifier arc welder which is not equipped with a disconnect
mounted as an integral part of the welder.
(d)(2)
A switch or circuit breaker shall be provided by which each

resistance welder and its control equipment can be isolated from
the supply circuit. The ampere rating of this disconnecting means
may not be less than the supply conductor ampacity.
(e)
Data processing systems - disconnecting means. A disconnecting

means shall be provided to disconnect the power to all electronic
equipment in data processing or computer rooms. This
disconnecting means shall be controlled from locations readily
accessible to the operator at the principal exit doors. There shall
also be a similar disconnecting means to disconnect the air
conditioning system serving this area.
(f)
X-Ray equipment. This paragraph applies to X -ray equipment for

other than medical or dental use.
(f)(1)
(f)(1)(i)
A disconnecting means shall be provided in the supply circuit. The

disconnecting means shall be operable from a location readily
accessible from the X-ray control. For equipment connected to a
120-volt branch circuit of 30 amperes or less, a grounding-type
attachment plug cap and receptacle of proper rating may serve as a
disconnecting means.
..1910.306(f)(1)(ii)
(f)(1)(ii)
If more than one piece of equipment is operated from the same

high-voltage circuit, each piece or each group of equipment as a
unit shall be provided with a high-voltage switch or equivalent
disconnecting means. This disconnecting means shall be
constructed, enclosed, or located so as to avoid contact by
employees with its live parts.
(f)(2)
Control -
(f)(2)(i)
Radiographic and fluoroscopic types. Radiographic and fluoroscopic-

type equipment shall be effectively enclosed or shall have interlocks
that de-energize the equipment automatically to prevent ready
access to live current-carrying parts.
(f)(2)(ii)
Diffraction and irradiation types. Diffraction- and irradiation -type

equipment shall be provided with a means to indicate when it is
energized unless the equipment or installation is effectively
enclosed or is provided with interlocks to prevent access to live
current-carrying parts during operation.
(g)
Induction and dielectric heating equipment -
(g)(1)
Scope. Paragraphs (g)(2) and (g)(3) of this section cover induction

and dielectric heating equipment and accessories for industrial and
scientific applications, but not for medical or dental applications or
for appliances.
(g)(2)
Guarding and grounding.
(g)(2)(i)
Enclosures. The converting apparatus (including the DC line) and

high-frequency electric circuits (excluding the output circuits and
remote-control circuits) shall be completely contained within
enclosures of noncombustible material.
..1910.306(g)(2)(ii)
(g)(2)(ii)
Panel controls. All panel controls shall be of dead -front

construction.
(g)(2)(iii)
Access to internal equipment. Where doors are used for access to

voltages from 500 to 1000 volts AC or DC, either door locks or
interlocks shall be provided. Where doors are used for access to
voltages of over 1000 volts AC or DC, either mechanical lockouts
with a disconnecting means to prevent access until voltage is
removed from the cubicle, or both door interlocking and mechanical
door locks, shall be provided.
(g)(2)(iv)
Warning labels. "Danger" labels shall be attached on the equipment

and shall be plainly visible even when doors are open or panels are
removed from compartments containing voltages of over 250 volts
AC or DC.
(g)(2)(v)
Work applicator shielding. Protective cages or adequate shielding

shall be used to guard work applicators other than induction
heating coils. Induction heating coils shall be protected by
insulation and/or refractory materials. Interlock switches shall be
used on all hinged access doors, sliding panels, or other such
means of access to the applicator. Interlock switches shall be
connected in such a manner as to remove all power from the
applicator when any one of the access doors or panels is open.
Interlocks on access doors or panels are not required if the
applicator is an induction heating coil at DC ground potential or
operating at less than 150 volts AC.
..1910.306(g)(2)(vi)
(g)(2)(vi)
Disconnecting means. A readily accessible disconnecting means

shall be provided by which each unit of heating equipment can be
isolated from its supply circuit.
(g)(3)
Remote control. If remote controls are used for applying power, a

selector switch shall be provided and interlocked to provide power
from only one control point at a time. Switches operated by foot
pressure shall be provided with a shield over the contact button to
avoid accidental closing of the switch.
(h)
Electrolytic cells.
(h)(1)
Scope. These provisions for electrolytic cells apply to the

installation of the electrical components and accessory equipment
of electrolytic cells, electrolytic cell lines, and process power supply
for the production of aluminum, cadmium, chlorine, copper,
fluorine, hydrogen peroxide, magnesium, sodium, sodium chlorate,
and zinc. Cells used as a source of electric energy and for
electroplating processes and cells used for production of hydrogen
are not covered by these provisions.
(h)(2)
Definitions applicable to this paragraph.
Cell line: An assembly of electrically interconnected electrolytic cells

supplied by a source of direct-current power.
Cell line attachments and auxiliary equipment: Cell line

attachments and auxiliary equipment include, but are not limited
to: auxiliary tanks; process piping; duct work; structural supports;
exposed cell line conductors; conduits and other raceways; pumps;
positioning equipment and cell cutout or by-pass electrical devices.
Auxiliary equipment also includes tools, welding machines,
crucibles, and other portable equipment used for operation and
maintenance within the electrolytic cell line working zone. In the
cell line working zone, auxiliary equipment includes the exposed
conductive surfaces of ungrounded cranes and crane -mounted cell-
servicing equipment.
Cell line working zone: The cell line working zone is the space
envelope wherein operation or maintenance is normally performed
on or in the vicinity of exposed energized surfaces of cell lines or
their attachments.
Electrolytic Cells: A receptacle or vessel in which electrochemical

reactions are caused by applying energy for the purpose of refining
or producing usable materials.
(h)(3)
Application. Installations covered by paragraph (h) of this section

shall comply with all applicable provisions of this subpart, except as
follows:
..1910.306(h)(3)(i)
(h)(3)(i)
Overcurrent protection of electrolytic cell DC process power circuits

need not comply with the requirements of 1910.304(e).
(h)(3)(ii)
Equipment located or used within the cell line working zone or

associated with the cell line DC power circuits need not comply with
the provisions of 1910.304(f).
(h)(3)(iii)
Electrolytic cells, cell line conductors, cell line attachments, and the
wiring of auxiliary equipment and devices within the cell line
working zone need not comply with the provisions of 1910.303, and
1910.304 (b) and (c).
(h)(4)
(h)(4)(i)
If more than one DC cell line process power supply serves the same
cell line, a disconnecting means shall be provided on the cell line
circuit side of each power supply to disconnect it from the cell line
circuit.
(h)(4)(ii)
Removable links or removable conductors may be used as the

disconnecting means.
..1910.306(h)(5)
(h)(5)
Portable electric equipment.
(h)(5)(i)
The frames and enclosures of portable electric equipment used

within the cell line working zone may not be grounded. However,
these frames and enclosures may be grounded if the cell line circuit
voltage does not exceed 200 volts DC or if the frames are guarded.
(h)(5)(ii)
Ungrounded portable electric equipment shall be distinctively

marked and may not be interchangeable with grounded portable
electric equipment.
(h)(6)
Power supply circuits and receptacles for portable electric

equipment.
(h)(6)(i)
Circuits supplying power to ungrounded receptacles for hand-held,

cord- and plug-connected equipment shall be electrically isolated
from any distribution system supplying areas other than the cell
line working zone and shall be ungrounded. Power for these circuits
shall be supplied through isolating transformers.
(h)(6)(ii)
Receptacles and their mating plugs for ungrounded equipment may

not have provision for a grounding conductor and shall be of a
configuration which prevents their use for equipment required to be
grounded.
(h)(6)(iii)
Receptacles on circuits supplied by an isolating transformer with an

ungrounded secondary shall have a distinctive configuration, shall
be distinctively marked, and may not be used in any other location
in the plant.
..1910.306(h)(7)
(h)(7)
Fixed and portable electric equipment.
(h)(7)(i)
AC systems supplying fixed and portable electric equipment within

the cell line working zone need not be grounded.
(h)(7)(ii)
Exposed conductive surfaces, such as electric equipment housings,

cabinets, boxes, motors, raceways and the like that are within the
cell line working zone need not be grounded.
(h)(7)(iii)
Auxiliary electrical devices, such as motors, transducers, sensors,

control devices, and alarms, mounted on an electrolytic cell or
other energized surface, shall be connected by any of the following
means:
(h)(7)(iii)(A)
Multiconductor hard usage or extra hard usage flexible cord;
(h)(7)(iii)(B)
Wire or cable in suitable raceways; or
(h)(7)(iii)(C)
Exposed metal conduit, cable tray, armored cable, or similar

metallic systems installed with insulating breaks such that they will
not cause a potentially hazardous electrical condition.
(h)(7)(iv)
Fixed electric equipment may be bonded to the energized

conductive surfaces of the cell line, its attachments, or auxiliaries.
If fixed electric equipment is mounted on an energized conductive
surface, it shall be bonded to that surface.
..1910.306(h)(8)
(h)(8)
Auxiliary nonelectric connections. Auxiliary nonelectric connections,

such as air hoses, water hoses, and the like, to an electrolytic cell,
its attachments, or auxiliary equipment may not have continuous
conductive reinforcing wire, armor, braids, and the like. Hoses shall
be of a nonconductive material.
(h)(9)
Cranes and hoists.
(h)(9)(i)
The conductive surfaces of cranes and hoists that enter the cell line
working zone need not be grounded. The portion of an overhead
crane or hoist which contacts an energized electrolytic cell or

energized attachments shall be insulated from ground.
(h)(9)(ii)
Remote crane or hoist controls which may introduce hazardous

electrical conditions into the cell line working zone shall employ one
or more of the following systems:
(h)(9)(ii)(A)
Insulated and ungrounded control circuit;
(h)(9)(ii)(B)
Nonconductive rope operator;
(h)(9)(ii)(C)
Pendant pushbutton with nonconductive supporting means and

having nonconductive surfaces or ungrounded exposed conductive
surfaces; or
(h)(9)(ii)(D)
Radio.
(i)
Electrically driven or controlled irrigation machines. (See 1910.302

(b)(3).)
..1910.306(i)(1)
(i)(1)
Lightning protection. If an electrically driven or controlled irrigation

machine has a stationary point, a driven ground rod shall be
connected to the machine at the stationary point for lightning
protection.
(i)(2)
Disconnecting means. The main disconnecting means for a center
pivot irrigation machine shall be located at the point of connection

of electrical power to the machine and shall be readily accessible
and capable of being locked in the open position. A disconnecting
means shall be provided for each motor and controller.
(j)
Swimming pools, fountains, and similar installations -
(j)(1)
Scope. Paragraphs (j)(2) through (j)(5) of this section apply to

electric wiring for and equipment in or adjacent to all swimming,
wading, therapeutic, and decorative pools and fountains, whether
permanently installed or storable, and to metallic auxiliary
equipment, such as pumps, filters, and similar equipment.
Therapeutic pools in health care facilities are exempt from these
provisions.
(j)(2)
Lighting and receptacles -
(j)(2)(i)
Receptacles. A single receptacle of the locking and grounding type

that provides power for a permanently installed swimming pool
recirculating pump motor may be located not less than 5 feet from
the inside walls of a pool. All other receptacles on the property shall
be located at least 10 feet from the inside walls of a pool.
Receptacles which are located within 15 feet of the inside walls of
the pool shall be protected by ground-fault circuit interrupters.
Note: In determining these dimensions, the distance to be

measured is the shortest path the supply cord of an appliance
connected to the receptacle would follow without piercing a floor,
wall, or ceiling of a building or other effective permanent barrier.
..1910.306(j)(2)(ii)
(j)(2)(ii)
Lighting fixtures and lighting outlets.
(j)(2)(ii)(A)
Unless they are 12 feet above the maximum water level, lighting
fixtures and lighting outlets may not be installed over a pool or
over the area extending 5 feet horizontally from the inside walls of
a pool. However, a lighting fixture or lighting outlet which has been
installed before April 16, 1981, may be located less than 5 feet
measured horizontally from the inside walls of a pool if it is at least
5 feet above the surface of the maximum water level and shall be
rigidly attached to the existing structure. It shall also be protected
by a ground-fault circuit interrupter installed in the branch circuit
supplying the fixture.
(j)(2)(ii)(B)
Unless installed 5 feet above the maximum water level and rigidly
attached to the structure adjacent to or enclosing the pool, lighting
fixtures and lighting outlets installed in the area extending between
5 feet and 10 feet horizontally from the inside walls of a pool shall
be protected by a ground-fault circuit interrupter.
(j)(3)
Cord- and plug-connected equipment. Flexible cords used with the

following equipment may not exceed 3 feet in length and shall have
a copper equipment grounding conductor with a grounding-type
attachment plug.
(j)(3)(i)
Cord- and plug-connected lighting fixtures installed within 16 feet

of the water surface of permanently installed pools.
(j)(3)(ii)
Other cord - and plug-connected, fixed or stationary equipment

used with permanently installed pools.
(j)(4)
Underwater equipment.
(j)(4)(i)
A ground-fault circuit interrupter shall be installed in the branch

circuit supplying underwater fixtures operating at more than 15
volts. Equipment installed underwater shall be approved for the
purpose.
..1910.306(j)(4)(ii)
(j)(4)(ii)
No underwater lighting fixtures may be installed for operation at

over 150 volts between conductors.
(j)(5)
Fountains. All electric equipment operating at more than 15 volts,

including power supply cords, used with fountains shall be
protected by ground-fault circuit interrupters. (See 1910.302(b)
(3).)
[46 FR 4056, Jan. 16, 1981; 46 FR 40185, Aug. 7, 1981]
Hazardous (classified) locations. - 1910.307 Page 1 of 4
Text version
Home Index Search
CFR)
Hazardous (classified) locations. -
1910.307

l Standard Title: Hazardous (classified) locations.
l SubPart Number: S
Systems
Interpretation(s)
(a)
Scope. This section covers the requirements for electric equipment

and wiring in locations which are classified depending on the
properties of the flammable vapors, liquids or gases, or
combustible dusts or fibers which may be present therein and the
likelihood that a flammable or combustible concentration or
quantity is present. Hazardous (classified) locations may be found
in occupancies such as, but not limited to, the following: aircraft
hangars, gasoline dispensing and service stations, bulk storage
plants for gasoline or other volatile flammable liquids, paint-
finishing process plants, health care facilities, agricultural or other
facilities where excessive combustible dusts may be present,
marinas, boat yards, and petroleum and chemical processing
plants. Each room, section or area shall be considered individually
in determining its classification. These hazardous (classified)
locations are assigned six designations as follows:
Class I, Division 1 Class I, Division 2 Class II, Division 1 Class II,

Division 2 Class III, Division 1 Class III, Division 2
For definitions of these locations see 1910.399(a). All applicable

requirements in this subpart shall apply to hazardous (classified)
locations, unless modified by provisions of this section.
(b)
Electrical installations. Equipment, wiring methods, and installations

of equipment in hazardous (classified) locations shall be intrinsically
safe, approved for the hazardous (classified) location, or safe or for
the hazardous (classified) location. Requirements for each of these
options are as follows:
..1910.307(b)(1)
(b)(1)
Intrinsically safe. Equipment and associated wiring approved as

intrinsically safe shall be permitted in any hazardous (classified)
location for which it is approved.
(b)(2)
Approved for the hazardous (classified) location.
(b)(2)(i)
Equipment shall be approved not only for the class of location but
also for the ignitable or combustible properties of the specific gas,
vapor, dust, or fiber that will be present.
Note: NFPA 70, the National Electrical Code, lists or defines

hazardous gases, vapors, and dusts by "Groups" characterized by
their ignitable or combustible properties.
(b)(2)(ii)
Equipment shall be marked to show the class, group, and operating

temperature or temperature range, based on operation in a 40
degrees C ambient, for which it is approved. The temperature
marking may not exceed the ignition temperature of the specific
gas or vapor to be encountered. However, the following provisions

modify this marking requirement for specific equipment:
(b)(2)(ii)(A)
Equipment of the non-heat-producing type, such as junction boxes,

conduit, and fittings, and equipment of the heat-producing type
having a maximum temperature not more than 100 degrees C (212
degrees F) need not have a marked operating temperature or
temperature range.
(b)(2)(ii)(B)
Fixed lighting fixtures marked for use in Class I, Division 2 locations

only, need not be marked to indicate the group.
..1910.307(b)(2)(ii)(C)
(b)(2)(ii)(C)
Fixed general-purpose equipment in Class I locations, other than

lighting fixtures, which is acceptable for use in Class I, Division 2
locations need not be marked with the class, group, division, or
operating temperature.
(b)(2)(ii)(D)
Fixed dust-tight equipment, other than lighting fixtures, which is

acceptable for use in Class II, Division 2 and Class III locations
need not be marked with the class, group, division, or operating
temperature.
(b)(3)
Safe for the hazardous (classified) location. Equipment which is

safe for the location shall be of a type and design which the
employer demonstrates will provide protection from the hazards
arising from the combustibility and flammability of vapors, liquids,
gases, dusts, or fibers.
Note: The National Electrical Code, NFPA 70, contains guidelines for
determining the type and design of equipment and installations
which will meet this requirement. The guidelines of this document
address electric wiring, equipment, and systems installed in
hazardous (classified) locations and contain specific provisions for

the following: wiring methods, wiring connections; conductor
insulation, flexible cords, sealing and drainage, transformers,
capacitors, switches, circuit breakers, fuses, motor controllers,
receptacles, attachment plugs, meters, relays, instruments,
resistors, generators, motors, lighting fixtures, storage battery
charging equipment, electric cranes, electric hoists and similar
equipment, utilization equipment, signaling systems, alarm
systems, remote control systems, local loud speaker and
communication systems, ventilation piping, live parts, lightning
surge protection, and grounding. Compliance with these guidelines
will constitute one means, but not the only means, of compliance
with this paragraph.
(c)
Conduits. All conduits shall be threaded and shall be made wrench-

tight. Where it is impractical to make a threaded joint tight, a
bonding jumper shall be utilized.
(d)
Equipment in Division 2 locations. Equipment that has been

approved for a Division 1 location may be installed in a Division 2
location of the same class and group. General-purpose equipment
or equipment in general-purpose enclosures may be installed in
Division 2 locations if the equipment does not constitute a source of
ignition under normal operating conditions.
[46 FR 4056, Jan. 16, 1981; 46 FR 40185, Aug. 7, 1981]
Special systems. - 1910.308 Page 1 of 11
Text version
Home Index Search
CFR)
Special systems. - 1910.308

l Standard Title: Special systems.
l SubPart Number: S
Systems
(a)
Systems over 600 volts, nominal. Paragraphs (a) (1) through (4) of
this section cover the general requirements for all circuits and
equipment operated at over 600 volts.
(a)(1)
Wiring methods for fixed installations.
(a)(1)(i)
Above-ground conductors shall be installed in rigid metal conduit,

in intermediate metal conduit, in cable trays, in cablebus, in other
suitable raceways, or as open runs of metal-clad cable suitable for
the use and purpose. However, open runs of non -metallic-sheathed
cable or of bare conductors or busbars may be installed in locations
accessible only to qualified persons. Metallic shielding components,
such as tapes, wires, or braids for conductors, shall be grounded.
Open runs of insulated wires and cables having a bare lead sheath
or a braided outer covering shall be supported in a manner
designed to prevent physical damage to the braid or sheath.
(a)(1)(ii)
Conductors emerging from the ground shall be enclosed in

approved raceways. (See 1910.302(b)(3).)
..1910.308(a)(2)
(a)(2)
Interrupting and isolating devices.
(a)(2)(i)
Circuit breaker installations located indoors shall consist of metal-

enclosed units or fire-resistant cell-mounted units. In locations
accessible only to qualified personnel, open mounting of circuit
breakers is permitted. A means of indicating the open and closed
position of circuit breakers shall be provided.
(a)(2)(ii)
Fused cutouts installed in buildings or transformer vaults shall be of

a type approved for the purpose. They shall be readily accessible
for fuse replacement.
(a)(2)(iii)
A means shall be provided to completely isolate equipment for

inspection and repairs. Isolating means which are not designed to
interrupt the load current of the circuit shall be either interlocked
with an approved circuit interrupter or provided with a sign warning
against opening them under load.
(a)(3)
Mobile and portable equipment.
(a)(3)(i)
Power cable connections to mobile machines. A metallic enclosure

shall be provided on the mobile machine for enclosing the terminals
of the power cable. The enclosure shall include provisions for a solid
connection for the ground wire(s) terminal to effectively ground the
machine frame. The method of cable termination used shall prevent

any strain or pull on the cable from stressing the electrical
connections. The enclosure shall have provision for locking so only
authorized qualified persons may open it and shall be marked with
a sign warning of the presence of energized parts.
..1910.308(a)(3)(ii)
(a)(3)(ii)
Guarding live parts. All energized switching and control parts shall
be enclosed in effectively grounded metal cabinets or enclosures.
Circuit breakers and protective equipment shall have the operating
means projecting through the metal cabinet or enclosure so these
units can be reset without locked doors being opened. Enclosures
and metal cabinets shall be locked so that only authorized qualified
persons have access and shall be marked with a sign warning of
the presence of energized parts. Collector ring assemblies on
revolving-type machines (shovels, draglines, etc.) shall be guarded.
(a)(4)
Tunnel installation -
(a)(4)(i)
Application. The provisions of this paragraph apply to installation

and use of high-voltage power distribution and utilization
equipment which is portable and/or mobile, such as substations,
trailers, cars, mobile shovels, draglines, hoists, drills, dredges,
compressors, pumps, conveyors, and underground excavators.
(a)(4)(ii)
Conductors. Conductors in tunnels shall be installed in one or more

of the following:
(a)(4)(ii)(A)
Metal conduit or other metal raceway,
(a)(4)(ii)(B)
Type MC cable, or
(a)(4)(ii)(C)
Other approved multiconductor cable.
Conductors shall also be so located or guarded as to protect them

from physical damage. Multiconductor portable cable may supply
mobile equipment. An equipment grounding conductor shall be run
with circuit conductors inside the metal raceway or inside the
multiconductor cable jacket. The equipment grounding conductor
may be insulated or bare.
(a)(4)(iii)
Guarding live parts. Bare terminals of transformers, switches,

motor controllers, and other equipment shall be enclosed to
prevent accidental contact with energized parts. Enclosures for use
in tunnels shall be drip-proof, weatherproof, or submersible as
required by the environmental conditions.
..1910.308(a)(4)(iv)
(a)(4)(iv)
Disconnecting means. A disconnecting means that simultaneously

opens all ungrounded conductors shall be installed at each
transformer or motor location.
(a)(4)(v)
Grounding and bonding. All nonenergized metal parts of electric

equipment and metal raceways and cable sheaths shall be
effectively grounded and bonded to all metal pipes and rails at the
portal and at intervals not exceeding 1000 feet throughout the
tunnel.
(b)
Emergency power systems -
(b)(1)
Scope. The provisions for emergency systems apply to circuits,

systems, and equipment intended to supply power for illumination
and special loads, in the event of failure of the normal supply.
(b)(2)
Wiring methods. Emergency circuit wiring shall be kept entirely

independent of all other wiring and equipment and may not enter
the same raceway, cable, box, or cabinet or other wiring except
either where common circuit elements suitable for the purpose are
required, or for transferring power from the normal to the
emergency source.
(b)(3)
Emergency illumination. Where emergency lighting is necessary,

the system shall be so arranged that the failure of any individual
lighting element, such as the burning out of a light bulb, cannot
leave any space in total darkness.
..1910.308(c)
(c)
Class 1, Class 2, and Class 3 remote control, signaling, and power-

limited circuits -
(c)(1)
Classification. Class 1, Class 2, or Class 3 remote control, signaling,

or power-limited circuits are characterized by their usage and
electrical power limitation which differentiates them from light and
power circuits. These circuits are classified in accordance with their
respective voltage and power limitations as summarized in
paragraphs (c)(1)(i) through (c)(1)(iii) of this section.
(c)(1)(i)
Class 1 circuits.
(c)(1)(i)(A)
A Class 1 power-limited circuit is supplied from a source having a

rated output of not more than 30 volts and 1000 volt-amperes.
(c)(1)(i)(B)
A Class 1 remote control circuit or a Class 1 signaling circuit has a

voltage which does not exceed 600 volts; however, the power
output of the source need not be limited.
(c)(1)(ii)
Class 2 and Class 3 circuits.
(c)(1)(ii)(A)
Power for Class 2 and Class 3 circuits is limited either inherently (in
which no overcurrent protection is required) or by a combination of
a power source and overcurrent protection.
(c)(1)(ii)(B)
The maximum circuit voltage is 150 volts AC or DC for a Class 2

inherently limited power source, and 100 volts AC or DC for a Class
3 inherently limited power source.
(c)(1)(ii)(C)
The maximum circuit voltage is 30 volts AC and 60 volts DC for a

Class 2 power source limited by overcurrent protection, and 150
volts AC or DC for a Class 3 power source limited by overcurrent
protection.
..1910.308(c)(1)(iii)
(c)(1)(iii)
The maximum circuit voltages in paragraphs (c)(1)(i) and (c)(1)(ii)

of this section apply to sinusoidal AC or continuous DC power
sources, and where wet contact occurrence is not likely.
(c)(2)
Marking. A Class 2 or Class 3 power supply unit shall be durably

marked where plainly visible to indicate the class of supply and its
electrical rating. (See 1910.302(b)(3).)
(d)
Fire protective signaling systems. (See 1910.302(b)(3).)
(d)(1)
Classifications. Fire protective signaling circuits shall be classified

either as non -power limited or power limited.
(d)(2)
Power sources. The power sources for use with fire protective
signaling circuits shall be either power limited or nonlimited as
follows:
(d)(2)(i)
The power supply of non-power-limited fire protective signaling

circuits shall have an output voltage not in excess of 600 volts.
(d)(2)(ii)
The power for power-limited fire protective signaling circuits shall

be either inherently limited, in which no overcurrent protection is
required, or limited by a combination of a power source and
overcurrent protection.
..1910.308(d)(3)
(d)(3)
Non-power-limited conductor location. Non -power-limited fire

protective signaling circuits and Class 1 circuits may occupy the
same enclosure, cable, or raceway provided all conductors are
insulated for maximum voltage of any conductor within the
enclosure, cable, or raceway. Power supply and fire protective
signaling circuit conductors are permitted in the same enclosure,
cable, or raceway only if connected to the same equipment.
(d)(4)
Power -limited conductor location. Where open conductors are

installed, power -limited fire protective signaling circuits shall be
separated at least 2 inches from conductors of any light, power,
Class 1, and non-power-limited fire protective signaling circuits
unless a special and equally protective method of conductor
separation is employed. Cables and conductors of two or more
power-limited fire protective signaling circuits or Class 3 circuits are

permitted in the same cable, enclosure, or raceway. Conductors of
one or more Class 2 circuits are permitted within the same cable,
enclosure, or raceway with conductors of power -limited fire
protective signaling circuits provided that the insulation of Class 2
circuit conductors in the cable, enclosure, or raceway is at least
that needed for the power -limited fire protective signaling circuits.
(d)(5)
Identification. Fire protective signaling circuits shall be identified at

terminal and junction locations in a manner which will prevent
unintentional interference with the signaling circuit during testing
and servicing. Power-limited fire protective signaling circuits shall
be durably marked as such where plainly visible at terminations.
..1910.308(e)
(e)
Communications systems -
(e)(1)
Scope. These provisions for communication systems apply to such

systems as central-station-connected and non-central-station-
connected telephone circuits, radio and television receiving and
transmitting equipment, including community antenna television
and radio distribution systems, telegraph, district messenger, and
outside wiring for fire and burglar alarm, and similar central station
systems. These installations need not comply with the provisions of
1910.303 through 1910.308(d), except 1910.304(c)(1) and
1910.307(b).
(e)(2)
Protective devices.
(e)(2)(i)
Communication circuits so located as to be exposed to accidental

contact with light or power conductors operating at over 300 volts
shall have each circuit so exposed provided with a protector
approved for the purpose.
(e)(2)(ii)
Each conductor of a lead -in from an outdoor antenna shall be

provided with an antenna discharge unit or other suitable means
that will drain static charges from the antenna system.
(e)(3)
Conductor location -
(e)(3)(i)
Outside of buildings.
(e)(3)(i)(a)
Receiving distribution lead-in or aerial-drop cables attached to

buildings and lead-in conductors to radio transmitters shall be so
installed as to avoid the possibility of accidental contact with
electric light or power conductors.
(e)(3)(i)(b)
The clearance between lead-in conductors and any lightning

protection conductors may not be less than 6 feet.
..1910.308(e)(3)(ii)
(e)(3)(ii)
On poles. Where practicable, communication conductors on poles

shall be located below the light or power conductors.
Communications conductors may not be attached to a crossarm
that carries light or power conductors.
(e)(3)(iii)
Inside of buildings. Indoor antennas, lead-ins, and other

communication conductors attached as open conductors to the
inside of buildings shall be located at least 2 inches from
conductors of any light or power or Class 1 circuits unless a special
and equally protective method of conductor separation, approved
for the purpose, is employed.
(e)(4)
Equipment location. Outdoor metal structures supporting antennas,

as well as self-supporting antennas such as vertical rods or dipole
structures, shall be located as far away from overhead conductors
of electric light and power circuits of over 150 volts to ground as
necessary to avoid the possibility of the antenna or structure falling
into or making accidental contact with such circuits.
(e)(5)
Grounding -
(e)(5)(i)
Lead-in conductors. If exposed to contact with electric light and

power conductors, the metal sheath of aerial cables entering
buildings shall be grounded or shall be interrupted close to the
entrance to the building by an insulating joint or equivalent device.
Where protective devices are used, they shall be grounded in an
approved manner.
..1910.308(e)(5)(ii)
(e)(5)(ii)
Antenna structures. Masts and metal structures supporting

antennas shall be permanently and effectively grounded without
splice or connection in the grounding conductor.
(e)(5)(iii)
Equipment enclosures. Transmitters shall be enclosed in a metal

frame or grill or separated from the operating space by a barrier,
all metallic parts of which are effectively connected to ground. All
external metal handles and controls accessible to the operating
personnel shall be effectively grounded. Unpowered equipment and
enclosures shall be considered grounded where connected to an
attached coaxial cable with an effectively grounded metallic shield.
[46 FR 4056, Jan. 16, 1981; 46 FR 40185, Aug. 7, 1981]
Scope - 1910.331 Page 1 of 4
Text version
Home Index Search
CFR)
Scope - 1910.331

l Standard Title: Scope
l SubPart Number: S
l SubPart Title: Electrical - Safety-Related Work Practices
Interpretation(s)
(a)
Covered work by both qualified and unqualified persons. The

provisions of 1910.331 through 1910.335 cover electrical safety
work practices for both qualified persons (those who have training
in avoiding the electrical hazards of working on or near exposed
energized parts) and unqualified persons (those with little or no
such training) working on, near, or with the following installations:
(a)(1)
Premises wiring. Installations of electric conductors and equipment

within or on buildings or other structures, and on other premises
such as yards, carnival, parking, and other lots, and industrial
substations;
(a)(2)
Wiring for connection to supply. Installations of conductors that

connect to the supply of electricity; and
Scope - 1910.331 Page 2 of 4
(a)(3)
Other wiring. Installations of other outside conductors on the

premises.
(a)(4)
Optical fiber cable. Installations of optical fiber cable where such

installations are made along with electric conductors.
Note: See 1910.399 for the definition of "qualified person." See

1910.332 for training requirements that apply to qualified and
unqualified persons.
..1910.331(b)
(b)
Other covered work by unqualified persons. The provisions of

1910.331 through 1910.335 also cover work performed by
unqualified persons on, near, or with the installations listed in
paragraphs (c)(1) through (c)(4) of this section.
(c)
Excluded work by qualified persons. The provisions of 1910.331

through 1910.335 do not apply to work performed by qualified
persons on or directly associated with the following installations:
(c)(1)
Generation, transmission, and distribution of electric energy

(including communication and metering) located in buildings used
for such purposes or located outdoors.
Note 1: Work on or directly associated with installations of

utilization equipment used for purposes other than generating,
transmitting, or distributing electric energy (such as installations
which are in office buildings, warehouses, garages, machine shops,
or recreational buildings, or other utilization installations which are
not an integral part of a generating installation, substation, or
control center) is covered under paragraph (a)(1) of this section.
Scope - 1910.331 Page 3 of 4
Note 2: For work on or directly associated with utilization

installations, an employer who complies with the work practices of
1910.269 (electric power generation, transmission, and
distribution) will be deemed to be in compliance with 1910.333(c)
and 1910.335. However, the requirements of 1910.332, 1910.333
(a), 1910.333(b), and 1910.334 apply to all work on or directly
associated with utilization installations, regardless of whether the
work is performed by qualified or unqualified persons.
Note 3: Work on or directly associated with generation,

transmission, or distribution installations includes:
{1} Work performed directly on such installations, such as

repairing overhead or underground distribution lines or repairing a
feed-water pump for the boiler in a generating plant.
{2} Work directly associated with such installations, such as line-

clearance tree trimming and replacing utility poles.
{3} Work on electric utilization circuits in a generating plant

provided that:
{A} Such circuits are commingled with installations of power

generation equipment or circuits, and
{B} The generation equipment or circuits present greater electrical

hazards than those posed by the utilization equipment or circuits
(such as exposure to higher voltages or lack of overcurrent
protection).
This work is covered by 1910.269 of this Part.
(c)(2)
Communications installations. Installations of communication

equipment to the extent that the work is covered under 1910.268.
(c)(3)
Installations in vehicles. Installations in ships, watercraft, railway

rolling stock, aircraft or automotive vehicles other than mobile
homes and recreational vehicles.
Scope - 1910.331 Page 4 of 4
(c)(4)
Railway installations. Installations of railways for generation,

transformation, transmission, or distribution of power used
exclusively for operation of rolling stock or installations of railways
used exclusively for signaling and communication purposes.
[55 FR 32016, Aug. 6, 1990; 59 FR 4476, Jan. 31, 1994]
Training - 1910.332 Page 1 of 3
Text version
Home Index Search
CFR)
Training - 1910.332

l Standard Title: Training
l SubPart Number: S
Interpretation(s)
(a)
Scope. The training requirements contained in this section apply to

employees who face a risk of electric shock that is not reduced to a
safe level by the electrical installation requirements of 1910.303
through 1910.308.
Note: Employees in occupations listed in Table S-4 face such a risk

and are required to be trained. Other employees who also may
reasonably be expected to face comparable risk of injury due to
electric shock or other electrical hazards must also be trained.
(b)
Content of training.
(b)(1)
Practices addressed in this standard. Employees shall be trained in

and familiar with the safety-related work practices required by
1910.331 through 1910.335 that pertain to their respective job
assignments.
(b)(2)
Additional requirements for unqualified persons. Employees who

are covered by paragraph (a) of this section but who are not
qualified persons shall also be trained in and familiar with any
electrically related safety practices not specifically addressed by
1910.331 through 1910.335 but which are necessary for their
safety.
(b)(3)
Additional requirements for qualified persons. Qualified persons

(i.e. those permitted to work on or near exposed energized parts)
shall, at a minimum, be trained in and familiar with the following:
..1910.332(b)(3)(i)
(b)(3)(i)
The skills and techniques necessary to distinguish exposed live

parts from other parts of electric equipment.
(b)(3)(ii)
The skills and techniques necessary to determine the nominal

voltage of exposed live parts, and
(b)(3)(iii)
The clearance distances specified in 1910.333(c) and the

corresponding voltages to which the qualified person will be
exposed.
Note 1: For the purposes of 1910.331 through 1910.335, a person

must have the training required by paragraph (b)(3) of this section
in order to be considered a qualified person.
Note 2: Qualified persons whose work on energized equipment

involves either direct contact or contact by means of tools or
materials must also have the training needed to meet 1910.333(C)
(2).
(c)
Type of training. The training required by this section shall be of

the classroom or on -the-job type. The degree of training provided
shall be determined by the risk to the employee.
TABLE S-4. -- Typical Occupational Categories of Employees

Facing a Higher Than Normal Risk of Electrical Accident
_________________________________________________________________________
Occupation
_________________________________________________________________________
Blue collar supervisors(1)

Electrical and electronic engineers(1)
Electrical and electronic equipment assemblers(1)
Electrical and electronic technicians(1)
Electricians
Industrial machine operators(1)
Material handling equipment operators(1)
Mechanics and repairers(1)
Painters(1)
Riggers and roustabouts(1)
Stationary engineers(1)
Welders
_________________________________________________________________________
Footnote(1) Workers in these groups do not need to be trained if their
work or the work of those they supervise does not bring them or the
employees the supervise close enough to exposed parts of electric circuits
operating at 50 volts or more to ground for a hazard to exist.
[55 FR 32016, Aug. 6, 1990]
Selection and use of work practices - 1910.333 Page 1 of 13
Text version
Home Index Search
CFR)
Selection and use of work practices -
1910.333

l Standard Title: Selection and use of work practices
l SubPart Number: S
Interpretation(s)
(a)
"General." Safety-related work practices shall be employed to

prevent electric shock or other injuries resulting from either direct
or indirect electrical contacts, when work is performed near or on
equipment or circuits which are or may be energized. The specific
safety-related work practices shall be consistent with the nature
and extent of the associated electrical hazards.
(a)(1)
"Deenergized parts." Live parts to which an employee may be

exposed shall be deenergized before the employee works on or
near them, unless the employer can demonstrate that deenergizing
introduces additional or increased hazards or is infeasible due to
equipment design or operational limitations. Live parts that operate
at less than 50 volts to ground need not be deenergized if there will
be no increased exposure to electrical burns or to explosion due to
electric arcs.
Note 1: Examples of increased or additional hazards include

interruption of life support equipment, deactivation of emergency
alarm systems, shutdown of hazardous location ventilation
equipment, or removal of illumination for an area.
Note 2: Examples of work that may be performed on or near

energized circuit parts because of infeasibility due to equipment
design or operational limitations include testing of electric circuits
that can only be performed with the circuit energized and work on
circuits that form an integral part of a continuous industrial process
in a chemical plant that would otherwise need to be completely
shut down in order to permit work on one circuit or piece of
equipment.
Note 3: Work on or near deenergized parts is covered by paragraph

(b) of this section.
..1910.333(a)(2)
(a)(2)
"Energized parts." If the exposed live parts are not deenergized

(i.e., for reasons of increased or additional hazards or infeasibility),
other safety-related work practices shall be used to protect
employees who may be exposed to the electrical hazards involved.
Such work practices shall protect employees against contact with
energized circuit parts directly with any part of their body or
indirectly through some other conductive object. The work practices
that are used shall be suitable for the conditions under which the
work is to be performed and for the voltage level of the exposed
electric conductors or circuit parts. Specific work practice
requirements are detailed in paragraph (c) of this section.
(b)
"Working on or near exposed deenergized parts."
(b)(1)
"Application." This paragraph applies to work on exposed

deenergized parts or near enough to them to expose the employee
to any electrical hazard they present. Conductors and parts of
electric equipment that have been deenergized but have not been
locked out or tagged in accordance with paragraph (b) of this

section shall be treated as energized parts, and paragraph (c) of
this section applies to work on or near them.
(b)(2)
"Lockout and Tagging." While any employee is exposed to contact

with parts of fixed electric equipment or circuits which have been
deenergized, the circuits energizing the parts shall be locked out or
tagged or both in accordance with the requirements of this
paragraph. The requirements shall be followed in the order in which
they are presented (i.e., paragraph (b)(2)(i) first, then paragraph
(b)(2)(ii), etc.).
Note 1: As used in this section, fixed equipment refers to

equipment fastened in place or connected by permanent wiring
methods.
Note 2: Lockout and tagging procedures that comply with

paragraphs (c) through (f) of 1910.147 will also be deemed to
comply with paragraph (b)(2) of this section provided that:
[1] The procedures address the electrical safety hazards covered by

this Subpart; and
[2] The procedures also incorporate the requirements of

paragraphs (b)(2)(iii)(D) and (b)(2)(iv)(B) of this section.
(b)(2)(i)
"Procedures." The employer shall maintain a written copy of the

procedures outlined in paragraph (b)(2) and shall make it available
for inspection by employees and by the Assistant Secretary of
Labor and his or her authorized representatives.
Note: The written procedures may be in the form of a copy of

paragraph (b) of this section.
..1910.333(b)(2)(ii)
(b)(2)(ii)
"Deenergizing equipment."
(b)(2)(ii)(A)
Safe procedures for deenergizing circuits and equipment shall be

determined before circuits or equipment are deenergized.
(b)(2)(ii)(B)
The circuits and equipment to be worked on shall be disconnected

from all electric energy sources. Control circuit devices, such as
push buttons, selector switches, and interlocks, may not be used as
the sole means for deenergizing circuits or equipment. Interlocks
for electric equipment may not be used as a substitute for lockout
and tagging procedures.
(b)(2)(ii)(C)
Stored electric energy which might endanger personnel shall be

released. Capacitors shall be discharged and high capacitance
elements shall be short-circuited and grounded, if the stored
electric energy might endanger personnel.
Note: If the capacitors or associated equipment are handled in

meeting this requirement, they shall be treated as energized.
(b)(2)(ii)(D)
Stored non -electrical energy in devices that could reenergize

electric circuit parts shall be blocked or relieved to the extent that
the circuit parts could not be accidentally energized by the device.
(b)(2)(iii)
"Application of locks and tags."
(b)(2)(iii)(A)
A lock and a tag shall be placed on each disconnecting means used

to deenergize circuits and equipment on which work is to be
performed, except as provided in paragraphs (b)(2)(iii)(C) and (b)
(2)(iii)(E) of this section. The lock shall be attached so as to
prevent persons from operating the disconnecting means unless
they resort to undue force or the use of tools.
..1910.333(b)(2)(iii)(B)
(b)(2)(iii)(B)
Each tag shall contain a statement prohibiting unauthorized

operation of the disconnecting means and removal of the tag.
(b)(2)(iii)(C)
If a lock cannot be applied, or if the employer can demonstrate that

tagging procedures will provide a level of safety equivalent to that
obtained by the use of a lock, a tag may be used without a lock.
(b)(2)(iii)(D)
A tag used without a lock, as permitted by paragraph (b)(2)(iii)(C)

of this section, shall be supplemented by at least one additional
safety measure that provides a level of safety equivalent to that
obtained by use of a lock. Examples of additional safety measures
include the removal of an isolating circuit element, blocking of a
controlling switch, or opening of an extra disconnecting device.
(b)(2)(iii)(E)
A lock may be placed without a tag only under the following

conditions:
(b)(2)(iii)(E)(1)
Only one circuit or piece of equipment is deenergized, and
(b)(2)(iii)(E)(2)
The lockout period does not extend beyond the work shift, and
(b)(2)(iii)(E)(3)
Employees exposed to the hazards associated with reenergizing the

circuit or equipment are familiar with this procedure.
..1910.333(b)(2)(iv)
(b)(2)(iv)
Verification of deenergized condition. The requirements of this

paragraph shall be met before any circuits or equipment can be
considered and worked as deenergized.
(b)(2)(iv)(A)
A qualified person shall operate the equipment operating controls

or otherwise verify that the equipment cannot be restarted.
(b)(2)(iv)(B)
A qualified person shall use test equipment to test the circuit

elements and electrical parts of equipment to which employees will
be exposed and shall verify that the circuit elements and equipment
parts are deenergized. The test shall also determine if any
energized condition exists as a result of inadvertently induced
voltage or unrelated voltage backfeed even though specific parts of
the circuit have been deenergized and presumed to be safe. If the
circuit to be tested is over 600 volts, nominal, the test equipment
shall be checked for proper operation immediately after this test.
(b)(2)(v)
"Reenergizing equipment." These requirements shall be met, in the

order given, before circuits or equipment are reenergized, even
temporarily.
(b)(2)(v)(A)
A qualified person shall conduct tests and visual inspections, as

necessary, to verify that all tools, electrical jumpers, shorts,
grounds, and other such devices have been removed, so that the
circuits and equipment can be safely energized.
..1910.333(b)(2)(v)(B)
(b)(2)(v)(B)
Employees exposed to the hazards associated with reenergizing the

circuit or equipment shall be warned to stay clear of circuits and
equipment.
(b)(2)(v)(C)
Each lock and tag shall be removed by the employee who applied it
or under his or her direct supervision. However, if this employee is
absent from the workplace, then the lock or tag may be removed
by a qualified person designated to perform this task provided that:
(b)(2)(v)(C)(1)
The employer ensures that the employee who applied the lock or
tag is not available at the workplace, and
(b)(2)(v)(C)(2)
The employer ensures that the employee is aware that the lock or
tag has been removed before he or she resumes work at that
workplace.
(b)(2)(v)(D)
There shall be a visual determination that all employees are clear of

the circuits and equipment.
(c)
"Working on or near exposed energized parts."
(c)(1)
"Application." This paragraph applies to work performed on

exposed live parts (involving either direct contact or by means of
tools or materials) or near enough to them for employees to be
exposed to any hazard they present.
..1910.333(c)(2)
(c)(2)
"Work on energized equipment." Only qualified persons may work

on electric circuit parts or equipment that have not been
deenergized under the procedures of paragraph (b) of this section.
Such persons shall be capable of working safely on energized
circuits and shall be familiar with the proper use of special
precautionary techniques, personal protective equipment, insulating
and shielding materials, and insulated tools.
(c)(3)
"Overhead lines." if work is to be performed near overhead lines,

the lines shall be deenergized and grounded, or other protective
measures shall be provided before work is started. If the lines are
to be deenergized, arrangements shall be made with the person or
organization that operates or controls the electric circuits involved
to deenergize and ground them. If protective measures, such as
guarding, isolating, or insulating, are provided, these precautions
shall prevent employees from contacting such lines directly with
any part of their body or indirectly through conductive materials,
tools, or equipment.
Note: The work practices used by qualified persons installing

insulating devices on overhead power transmission or distribution
lines are covered by 1910.269 of this Part, not by 1910.332
through 1910.335 of this Part. Under paragraph (c)(2) of this
section, unqualified persons are prohibited from performing this
type of work.
(c)(3)(i)
"Unqualified persons."
(c)(3)(i)(A)
When an unqualified person is working in an elevated position near

overhead lines, the location shall be such that the person and the
longest conductive object he or she may contact cannot come
closer to any unguarded, energized overhead line than the
following distances:
(c)(3)(i)(A)(1)
For voltages to ground 50kV or below - 10 feet (305 cm);
(c)(3)(i)(A)(2)
For voltages to ground over 50kV - 10 feet (305 cm) plus 4 inches
(10 cm) for every 10kV over 50kV.
..1910.333(c)(3)(i)(B)
(c)(3)(i)(B)
When an unqualified person is working on the ground in the vicinity

of overhead lines, the person may not bring any conductive object
closer to unguarded, energized overhead lines than the distances
given in paragraph (c)(3)(i)(A) of this section.
Note: For voltages normally encountered with overhead power line,

objects which do not have an insulating rating for the voltage
involved are considered to be conductive.
(c)(3)(ii)
"Qualified persons." When a qualified person is working in the

vicinity of overhead lines, whether in an elevated position or on the
ground, the person may not approach or take any conductive
object without an approved insulating handle closer to exposed
energized parts than shown in Table S-5 unless:
(c)(3)(ii)(A)
The person is insulated from the energized part (gloves, with

sleeves if necessary, rated for the voltage involved are considered
to be insulation of the person from the energized part on which
work is performed), or
(c)(3)(ii)(B)
The energized part is insulated both from all other conductive

objects at a different potential and from the person, or
(c)(3)(ii)(C)
The person is insulated from all conductive objects at a potential

different from that of the energized part.
TABLE S-5 - APPROACH DISTANCES FOR QUALIFIED

EMPLOYEES - ALTERNATING CURRENT
______________________________________________________________
|
Voltage range (phase to phase) | Minimum approach distance
__________________________________|___________________________
|
300V and less ....................| Avoid Contact
Over 300V, not over 750V .........| 1 ft. 0 in. (30.5 cm).
Over 750V, not over 2kV ..........| 1 ft. 6 in. (46 cm).
Over 2kV, not over 15kV ..........| 2 ft. 0 in. (61 cm).
Over 15kV, not over 37kV .........| 3 ft. 0 in. (91 cm).
Over 37kV, not over 87.5kV .......| 3 ft. 6 in. (107 cm).
Over 87.5kV, not over 121kV ......| 4 ft. 0 in. (122 cm).
Over 121kV, not over 140kV .......| 4 ft. 6 in. (137 cm).
__________________________________|___________________________
..1910.333(c)(3)(iii)
(c)(3)(iii)
"Vehicular and mechanical equipment."
(c)(3)(iii)(A)
Any vehicle or mechanical equipment capable of having parts of its

structure elevated near energized overhead lines shall be operated
so that a clearance of 10 ft. (305 cm) is maintained. If the voltage
is higher than 50kV, the clearance shall be increased 4 in. (10 cm)
for every 10kV over that voltage. However, under any of the
following conditions, the clearance may be reduced:
(c)(3)(iii)(A)(1)
If the vehicle is in transit with its structure lowered, the clearance

may be reduced to 4 ft. (122 cm). If the voltage is higher than
50kV, the clearance shall be increased 4 in. (10 cm) for every 10
kV over that voltage.
(c)(3)(iii)(A)(2)
If insulating barriers are installed to prevent contact with the lines,

and if the barriers are rated for the voltage of the line being
guarded and are not a part of or an attachment to the the vehicle
or its raised structure, the clearance may be reduced to a distance
within the designed working dimensions of the insulating barrier.
(c)(3)(iii)(A)(3)
If the equipment is an aerial lift insulated for the voltage involved,

and if the work is performed by a qualified person, the clearance
(between the uninsulated portion of the aerial lift and the power
line) may be reduced to the distance given in Table S-5.
(c)(3)(iii)(B)
Employees standing on the ground may not contact the vehicle or

mechanical equipment or any of its attachments, unless:
(c)(3)(iii)(B)(1)
The employee is using protective equipment rated for the voltage;

or
..1910.333(c)(3)(iii)(B)(2)
(c)(3)(iii)(B)(2)
The equipment is located so that no uninsulated part of its

structure (that portion of the structure that provides a conductive
path to employees on the ground) can come closer to the line than
permitted in paragraph (c)(3)(iii) of this section.
(c)(3)(iii)(C)
If any vehicle or mechanical equipment capable of having parts of

its structure elevated near energized overhead lines is intentionally
grounded, employees working on the ground near the point of
grounding may not stand at the grounding location whenever there
is a possibility of overhead line contact. Additional precautions,
such as the use of barricades or insulation, shall be taken to protect
employees from hazardous ground potentials, depending on earth
resistivity and fault currents, which can develop within the first few
feet or more outward from the grounding point.
(c)(4)
"Illumination."
(c)(4)(i)
Employees may not enter spaces containing exposed energized

parts, unless illumination is provided that enables the employees to
perform the work safely.
(c)(4)(ii)
Where lack of illumination or an obstruction precludes observation

of the work to be performed, employees may not perform tasks
near exposed energized parts. Employees may not reach blindly
into areas which may contain energized parts.
..1910.333(c)(5)
(c)(5)
"Confined or enclosed work spaces." When an employee works in a

confined or enclosed space (such as a manhole or vault) that
contains exposed energized parts, the employer shall provide, and
the employee shall use, protective shields, protective barriers, or
insulating materials as necessary to avoid inadvertent contact with
these parts. Doors, hinged panels, and the like shall be secured to
prevent their swinging into an employee and causing the employee
to contact exposed energized parts.
(c)(6)
"Conductive materials and equipment." Conductive materials and

equipment that are in contact with any part of an employee's body
shall be handled in a manner that will prevent them from
contacting exposed energized conductors or circuit parts. If an
employee must handle long dimensional conductive objects (such
as ducts and pipes) in areas with exposed live parts, the employer
shall institute work practices (such as the use of insulation,
guarding, and material handling techniques) which will minimize
the hazard.
(c)(7)
"Portable ladders." Portable ladders shall have nonconductive

siderails if they are used where the employee or the ladder could
contact exposed energized parts.
(c)(8)
"Conductive apparel." Conductive articles of jewelry and clothing

(such a watch bands, bracelets, rings, key chains, necklaces,
metalized aprons, cloth with conductive thread, or metal headgear)
may not be worn if they might contact exposed energized parts.
However, such articles may be worn if they are rendered
nonconductive by covering, wrapping, or other insulating means.
..1910.333(c)(9)
(c)(9)
"Housekeeping duties." Where live parts present an electrical

contact hazard, employees may not perform housekeeping duties
at such close distances to the parts that there is a possibility of
contact, unless adequate safeguards (such as insulating equipment
or barriers) are provided. Electrically conductive cleaning materials
(including conductive solids such as steel wool, metalized cloth, and
silicon carbide, as well as conductive liquid solutions) may not be
used in proximity to energized parts unless procedures are followed
which will prevent electrical contact.
(c)(10)
"Interlocks." Only a qualified person following the requirements of

paragraph (c) of this section may defeat an electrical safety
interlock, and then only temporarily while he or she is working on
the equipment. The interlock system shall be returned to its
operable condition when this work is completed.
[55 FR 32016, Aug. 6, 1990; 55 FR 42053, Nov. 1, 1990; as

amended at 59 FR 4476, Jan. 31, 1994]
Use of equipment. - 1910.334 Page 1 of 5
Text version
Home Index Search
CFR)
Use of equipment. - 1910.334

l Standard Title: Use of equipment.
l SubPart Number: S
(a)
"Portable electric equipment." This paragraph applies to the use of

cord and plug connected equipment, including flexible cord sets
(extension cords).
(a)(1)
"Handling." Portable equipment shall be handled in a manner which

will not cause damage. Flexible electric cords connected to
equipment may not be used for raising or lowering the equipment.
Flexible cords may not be fastened with staples or otherwise hung
in such a fashion as could damage the outer jacket or insulation.
(a)(2)
"Visual inspection."
(a)(2)(i)
Portable cord and plug connected equipment and flexible cord sets
(extension cords) shall be visually inspected before use on any shift
for external defects (such as loose parts, deformed and missing
pins, or damage to outer jacket or insulation) and for evidence of

possible internal damage (such as pinched or crushed outer jacket).
Cord and plug connected equipment and flexible cord sets
(extension cords) which remain connected once they are put in
place and are not exposed to damage need not be visually
inspected until they are relocated.
..1910.334(a)(2)(ii)
(a)(2)(ii)
If there is a defect or evidence of damage that might expose an

employee to injury, the defective or damaged item shall be
removed from service, and no employee may use it until repairs
and tests necessary to render the equipment safe have been made.
(a)(2)(iii)
When an attachment plug is to be connected to a receptacle

(including an on a cord set), the relationship of the plug and
receptacle contacts shall first be checked to ensure that they are of
proper mating configurations.
(a)(3)
"Grounding type equipment."
(a)(3)(i)
A flexible cord used with grounding type equipment shall contain an

equipment grounding conductor.
(a)(3)(ii)
Attachment plugs and receptacles may not be connected or altered

in a manner which would prevent proper continuity of the
equipment grounding conductor at the point where plugs are
attached to receptacles. Additionally, these devices may not be
altered to allow the grounding pole of a plug to be inserted into
slots intended for connection to the current-carrying conductors.
(a)(3)(iii)
Adapters which interrupt the continuity of the equipment grounding
connection may not be used.
..1910.334(a)(4)
(a)(4)
"Conductive work locations." Portable electric equipment and

flexible cords used in highly conductive work locations (such a
those inundated with water or other conductive liquids), or in job
locations where employees are likely to contact water or conductive
liquids,shall be approved for those locations.
(a)(5)
"Connecting attachment plugs."
(a)(5)(i)
Employees' hands may not be wet when plugging and unplugging

flexible cords and cord and plug connected equipment, if energized
equipment is involved.
(a)(5)(ii)
Energized plug and receptacle connections may be handled only

with insulating protective equipment if the condition of the
connection could provide a conducting path to the employee's hand
(if, for example, a cord connector is wet from being immersed in
water).
(a)(5)(iii)
Locking type connectors shall be properly secured after connection.
(b)
"Electric power and lighting circuits."
(b)(1)
"Routine opening and closing of circuits." Load rated switches,

circuit breakers, or other devices specifically designed as
disconnecting means shall be used for the opening, reversing, or
closing of circuits under load conditions. Cable connectors not of
the load break type, fuses, terminal lugs, and cable splice
connections may not be used for such purposes, except in an
emergency.
..1910.334(b)(2)
(b)(2)
"Reclosing circuits after protective device operation." After a circuit

is deenergized by a circuit protective device, the circuit protective
device, the circuit may not be manually reenergized until it has
been determined that the equipment and circuit can be safely
energized. The repetitive manual reclosing of circuit breakers or
reenergizing circuits through replaced fuses is prohibited.
Note: When it can be determined from the design of the circuit and
the overcurrent devices involved that the automatic operation of a
device was caused by an overload rather than a fault condition, no
examination of the circuit or connected equipment is needed before
the circuit is reenergized.
(b)(3)
"Overcurrent protection modification." Overcurrent protection of

circuits and conductors may not be modified, even on a temporary
basis, beyond that allowed by 1910.304(e), the installation safety
requirements for overcurrent protection.
(c)
"Test instruments and equipment."
(c)(1)
"Use." Only qualified persons may perform testing work on electric

circuits or equipment.
(c)(2)
"Visual inspection." Test instruments and equipment and all

associated test leads, cables, power cords, probes, and connectors
shall be visually inspected for external defects and damage before
the equipment is used. If there is a defect or evidence of damage
that might expose an employee to injury, the defective or damaged
item shall be removed from service, and no employee may use it

until repairs and tests necessary to render the equipment safe have
been made.
(c)(3)
"Rating of equipment." Test instruments and equipment and their

accessories shall be rated for the circuits and equipment to which
they will be connected and shall be designed for the environment in
which they will be used.
..1910.334(d)
(d)
"Occasional use of flammable or ignitable materials." Where

flammable materials are present only occasionally, electric
equipment capable of igniting them shall not be used, unless
measures are taken to prevent hazardous conditions from
developing. Such materials include, but are not limited to:
flammable gases, vapors, or liquids; combustible dust; and
ignitable fibers or flyings.
Note: Electrical installation requirements for locations where

flammable materials are present on a regular basis are contained in
1910.307.
[55 FR 32016, Aug. 6, 1990; 55 FR 46054, Nov. 1, 1990]
Safeguards for personnel protection. - 1910.335 Page 1 of 4
Text version
Home Index Search
CFR)
Safeguards for personnel protection. -
1910.335

l Standard Title: Safeguards for personnel protection.
l SubPart Number: S
Interpretation(s)
(a)
Use of protective equipment.
(a)(1)
Personal protective equipment.
(a)(1)(i)
Employees working in areas where there are potential electrical

hazards shall be provided with, and shall use, electrical protective
equipment that is appropriate for the specific parts of the body to
be protected and for the work to be performed.
Note: Personal protective equipment requirements are contained in

subpart I of this part.
(a)(1)(ii)
Protective equipment shall be maintained in a safe, reliable

condition and shall be periodically inspected or tested, as required
by 1910.137.
(a)(1)(iii)
If the insulating capability of protective equipment may be subject

to damage during use, the insulating material shall be protected.
(For example, an outer covering of leather is sometimes used for
the protection of rubber insulating material.)
(a)(1)(iv)
Employees shall wear nonconductive head protection wherever

there is a danger of head injury from electric shock or burns due to
contact with exposed energized parts.
..1910.335(a)(1)(v)
(a)(1)(v)
Employees shall wear protective equipment for the eyes or face

wherever there is danger of injury to the eyes or face from electric
arcs or flashes or from flying objects resulting from electrical
explosion.
(a)(2)
General protective equipment and tools.
(a)(2)(i)
When working near exposed energized conductors or circuit parts,

each employee shall use insulated tools or handling equipment if
the tools or handling equipment might make contact with such
conductors or parts. If the insulating capability of insulated tools or
handling equipment is subject to damage, the insulating material
shall be protected.
(a)(2)(i)(A)
Fuse handling equipment, insulated for the circuit voltage, shall be

used to remove or install fuses when the fuse terminals are
energized.
(a)(2)(i)(B)
Ropes and handlines used near exposed energized parts shall be

nonconductive.
(a)(2)(ii)
Protective shields, protective barriers, or insulating materials shall

be used to protect each employee from shock, burns, or other
electrically related injuries while that employee is working near
exposed energized parts which might be accidentally contacted or
where dangerous electric heating or arcing might occur. When
normally enclosed live parts are exposed for maintenance or repair,
they shall be guarded to protect unqualified persons from contact
with the live parts.
..1910.335(b)
(b)
Alerting techniques. The following alerting techniques. The

following alerting techniques shall be used to warn and protect
employees from hazards which could cause injury due to electric
shock, burns, or failure of electric equipment parts:
(b)(1)
Safety signs and tags. Safety signs, safety symbols, or accident

prevention tags shall be used where necessary to warn employees
about electrical hazards which may endanger them, as required by
1910.145.
(b)(2)
Barricades. Barricades shall be used in conjunction with safety

signs where it is necessary to prevent or limit employee access to
work areas exposing employees to uninsulated energized
conductors or circuit parts. Conductive barricades may not be used
where they might cause an electrical contact hazard.
(b)(3)
Attendants. If signs and barricades do not provide sufficient
warning and protection from electrical hazards, an attendant shall

be stationed to warn and protect employees.
[55 FR 32016, Aug. 6, 1990]
Definitions applicable to this subpart. - 1910.399 Page 1 of 19
Text version
Home Index Search
CFR)
Definitions applicable to this subpart. -
1910.399

l Standard Title: Definitions applicable to this subpart.
l SubPart Number: S
l SubPart Title: Electrical - Definitions
Interpretation(s)
(a) Definitions applicable to 1910.302 through 1910.330 -

Acceptable. An installation or equipment is acceptable to the
Assistant Secretary of Labor, and approved within the meaning of
this Subpart S:
(i) If it is accepted, or certified, or listed, or labeled, or otherwise
determined to be safe by a nationally recognized testing laboratory;
or
(ii) With respect to an installation or equipment of a kind which no
nationally recognized testing laboratory accepts, certifies, lists,
labels, or determines to be safe, if it is inspected or tested by
another Federal agency, or by a State, municipal, or other local
authority responsible for enforcing occupational safety provisions of
the National Electrical Code, and found in compliance with the
provisions of the National Electrical Code as applied in this subpart;
or
(iii) With respect to custom-made equipment or related installations
which are designed, fabricated for, and intended for use by a
particular customer, if it is determined to be safe for its intended
use by its manufacturer on the basis of test data which the

employer keeps and makes available for inspection to the Assistant
Secretary and his authorized representatives. Refer to 1910.7 for
definition of nationally recognized testing laboratory.
Accepted. An installation is "accepted" if it has been inspected and
found by a nationally recognized testing laboratory to conform to
specified plans or to procedures of applicable codes.
Accessible. (As applied to wiring methods.) Capable of being
removed or exposed without damaging the building structure or
finish, or not permanently closed in by the structure or finish of the
building. (See "concealed" and "exposed.")
Accessible. (As applied to equipment.) Admitting close approach;
not guarded by locked doors, elevation, or other effective means.
(See "Readily accessible.")
Ampacity. Current-carrying capacity of electric conductors
expressed in amperes.
Appliances. Utilization equipment, generally other than industrial,
normally built in standardized sizes or types, which is installed or
connected as a unit to perform one or more functions such as
clothes washing, air conditioning, food mixing, deep frying, etc.
Approved. Acceptable to the authority enforcing this subpart. The
authority enforcing this subpart is the Assistant Secretary of Labor
for Occupational Safety and Health. The definition of "acceptable"
indicates what is acceptable to the Assistant Secretary of Labor,
and therefore approved within the meaning of this Subpart.
Approved for the purpose. Approved for a specific purpose,
environment, or application described in a particular standard
requirement.
Suitability of equipment or materials for a specific purpose,
environment or application may be determined by a nationally
recognized testing laboratory, inspection agency or other
organization concerned with product evaluation as part of its listing
and labeling program. (See "Labeled" or "Listed.")
Armored cable. Type AC armored cable is a fabricated assembly
of insulated conductors in a flexible metallic enclosure.
Askarel. A generic term for a group of nonflammable synthetic
chlorinated hydrocarbons used as electrical insulating media.
Askarels of various compositional types are used. Under arcing
conditions the gases produced, while consisting predominantly of
noncombustible hydrogen chloride, can include varying amounts of
combustible gases depending upon the askarel type.

Attachment plug (Plug cap)(Cap). A device which, by insertion
in a receptacle, establishes connection between the conductors of
the attached flexible cord and the conductors connected
permanently to the receptacle.
Automatic. Self-acting, operating by its own mechanism when
actuated by some impersonal influence, as, for example, a change
in current strength, pressure, temperature, or mechanical
configuration.
Bare conductor. See Conductor.
Bonding. The permanent joining of metallic parts to form an
electrically conductive path which will assure electrical continuity
and the capacity to conduct safely any current likely to be imposed.
Bonding jumper. A reliable conductor to assure the required
electrical conductivity between metal parts required to be
electrically connected.
Branch circuit. The circuit conductors between the final
overcurrent device protecting the circuit and the outlet(s).
Building. A structure which stands alone or which is cut off from
adjoining structures by fire walls with all openings therein protected
by approved fire doors.
Cabinet. An enclosure designed either for surface or flush
mounting,and provided with a frame, mat, or trim in which a
swinging door or doors are or may be hung.
Cable tray system. A cable tray system is a unit or assembly of
units or sections, and associated fittings, made of metal or other
noncombustible materials forming a rigid structural system used to
support cables. Cable tray systems include ladders, troughs,
channels, solid bottom trays, and other similar structures.
Cablebus. Cablebus is an approved assembly of insulated
conductors with fittings and conductor terminations in a completely
enclosed, ventilated, protective metal housing.
Center pivot irrigation machine. A center pivot irrigation
machine is a multi-motored irrigation machine which revolves
around a central pivot and employs alignment switches or similar
devices to control individual motors.
Certified. Equipment is "certified" if it (a) has been tested and
found by a nationally recognized testing laboratory to meet
nationally recognized standards or to be safe for use in a specified
manner, or (b) is of a kind whose production is periodically

inspected by a nationally recognized testing laboratory, and (c) it
bears a label, tag, or other record of certification.
Circuit breaker. (i) (600 volts nominal, or less). A device designed
to open and close a circuit by nonautomatic means and to open the
circuit automatically on a predetermined overcurrent without injury
to itself when properly applied within its rating.
(ii) (Over 600 volts, nominal). A switching device capable of
making, carrying, and breaking currents under normal circuit
conditions, and also making, carrying for a specified time, and
breaking currents under specified abnormal circuit conditions, such
as those of short circuit.
Class I locations. Class I locations are those in which flammable
gases or vapors are or may be present in the air in quantities
sufficient to produce explosive or ignitable mixtures. Class I
locations include the following:
(i) Class I, Division 1. A Class I, Division 1 location is a location:
(a) in which hazardous concentrations of flammable gases or
vapors may exist under normal operating conditions; or (b) in
which hazardous concentrations of such gases or vapors may exist
frequently because of repair or maintenance operations or because
of leakage; or (c) in which breakdown or faulty operation of
equipment or processes might release hazardous concentrations of
flammable gases or vapors, and might also cause simultaneous
failure of electric equipment.
Note: This classification usually includes locations where volatile
flammable liquids or liquefied flammable gases are transferred from
one container to another; interiors of spray booths and areas in the
vicinity of spraying and painting operations where volatile
flammable solvents are used; locations containing open tanks or
vats of volatile flammable liquids; drying rooms or compartments
for the evaporation of flammable solvents; locations containing fat
and oil extraction equipment using volatile flammable solvents;
portions of cleaning and dyeing plants where flammable liquids are
used; gas generator rooms and other portions of gas manufacturing
plants where flammable gas may escape; inadequately ventilated
pump rooms for flammable gas or for volatile flammable liquids;
the interiors of refrigerators and freezers in which volatile
flammable materials are stored in open, lightly stoppered, or easily
ruptured containers; and all other locations where ignitable
concentrations of flammable vapors or gases are likely to occur in
the course of normal operations.
(ii) Class I, Division 2. A Class I, Division 2 location is a location:

(a) in which volatile flammable liquids or flammable gases are
handled, processed, or used, but in which the hazardous liquids,
vapors, or gases will normally be confined within closed containers
or closed systems from which they can escape only in case of
accidental rupture or breakdown of such containers or systems, or
in case of abnormal operation of equipment; or (b) in which
hazardous concentrations of gases or vapors are normally
prevented by positive mechanical ventilation, and which might
become hazardous through failure or abnormal operations of the
ventilating equipment; or (c) that is adjacent to a Class I, Division
1 location, and to which hazardous concentrations of gases or
vapors might occasionally be communicated unless such
communication is prevented by adequate positive-pressure
ventilation from a source of clean air, and effective safeguards
against ventilation failure are provided.
Note: This classification usually includes locations where volatile
flammable liquids or flammable gases or vapors are used, but
which would become hazardous only in case of an accident or of
some unusual operating condition. The quantity of flammable
material that might escape in case of accident, the adequacy of
ventilating equipment, the total area involved, and the record of
the industry or business with respect to explosions or fires are all
factors that merit consideration in determining the classification
and extent of each location.
Piping without valves, checks, meters, and similar devices would
not ordinarily introduce a hazardous condition even though used for
flammable liquids or gases. Locations used for the storage of
flammable liquids or a liquefied or compressed gases in sealed
containers would not normally be considered hazardous unless also
subject to other hazardous conditions.
Electrical conduits and their associated enclosures separated from
process fluids by a single seal or barrier are classed as a Division 2
location if the outside of the conduit and enclosures is a
nonhazardous location.
Class II locations. Class II locations are those that are hazardous
because of the presence of combustible dust. Class II locations
include the following:
(i) Class II, Division 1. A Class II, Division 1 location is a
location: (a) In which combustible dust is or may be in suspension
in the air under normal operating conditions, in quantities sufficient
to produce explosive or ignitable mixtures; or (b) where mechanical
failure or abnormal operation of machinery or equipment might

cause such explosive or ignitable mixtures to be produced, and
might also provide a source of ignition through simultaneous failure
of electric equipment, operation of protection devices, or from other
causes, or (c) in which combustible dusts of an electrically
conductive nature may be present.
Note: This classification may include areas of grain handling and
processing plants, starch plants, sugar -pulverizing plants, malting
plants, hay-grinding plants, coal pulverizing plants, areas where
metal dusts and powders are produced or processed, and other
similar locations which contain dust producing machinery and
equipment (except where the equipment is dust-tight or vented to
the outside). These areas would have combustible dust in the air,
under normal operating conditions, in quantities sufficient to
produce explosive or ignitable mixtures. Combustible dusts which
are electrically nonconductive include dusts produced in the
handling and processing of grain and grain products, pulverized
sugar and cocoa, dried egg and milk powders, pulverized spices,
starch and pastes, potato and woodflour, oil meal from beans and
seed, dried hay, and other organic materials which may produce
combustible dusts when processed or handled. Dusts containing
magnesium or aluminum are particularly hazardous and the use of
extreme caution is necessary to avoid ignition and explosion.
(ii) Class II, Division 2. A Class II, Division 2 location is a location
in which: (a) combustible dust will not normally be in suspension in
the air in quantities sufficient to produce explosive or ignitable
mixtures, and dust accumulations are normally insufficient to
interfere with the normal operation of electrical equipment or other
apparatus; or (b) dust may be in suspension in the air as a result of
infrequent malfunctioning of handling or processing equipment, and
dust accumulations resulting therefrom may be ignitable by
abnormal operation or failure of electrical equipment or other
apparatus.
Note: This classification includes locations where dangerous
concentrations of suspended dust would not be likely but where
dust accumulations might form on or in the vicinity of electric
equipment. These areas may contain equipment from which
appreciable quantities of dust would escape under abnormal
operating conditions or be adjacent to a Class II Division 1 location,
as described above, into which an explosive or ignitable
concentration of dust may be put into suspension under abnormal
operating conditions.
Class III locations. Class III locations are those that are
hazardous because of the presence of easily ignitable fibers or

flyings but in which such fibers or flyings are not likely to be in
suspension in the air in quantities sufficient to produce ignitable
mixtures. Class III locations include the following:
(i) Class III, Division 1. A Class III, Division 1 location is a
location in which easily ignitable fibers or materials producing
combustible flyings are handled, manufactured, or used.
Note: Such locations usually include some parts of rayon, cotton,
and other textile mills; combustible fiber manufacturing and
processing plants; cotton gins and cotton-seed mills; flax-
processing plants; clothing manufacturing plants; woodworking
plants, and establishments; and industries involving similar
hazardous processes or conditions.
Easily ignitable fibers and flyings include rayon, cotton (including
cotton linters and cotton waste), sisal or henequen, istle, jute,
hemp, tow, cocoa fiber, oakum, baled waste kapok, Spanish moss,
excelsior, and other materials of similar nature.
(ii) Class III, Division 2. A Class III, Division 2 location is a
location in which easily ignitable fibers are stored or handled,
except in process of manufacture.
Collector ring. A collector ring is an assembly of slip rings for
transferring electrical energy from a stationary to a rotating
member.
Concealed. Rendered inaccessible by the structure or finish of the
building. Wires in concealed raceways are considered concealed,
even though they may become accessible by withdrawing them.
[See Accessible. (As applied to wiring methods.)]
Conductor. (i) Bare. A conductor having no covering or electrical
insulation whatsoever.
(ii) Covered. A conductor encased within material of composition
or thickness that is not recognized as electrical insulation.
(iii) Insulated. A conductor encased within material of composition
and thickness that is recognized as electrical insulation.
Conduit body. A separate portion of a conduit or tubing system
that provides access through a removable cover(s) to the interior of
the system at a junction of two or more sections of the system or
at a terminal point of the system. Boxes such as FS and FD or
larger cast or sheet metal boxes are not classified as conduit
bodies.
Controller. A device or group of devices that serves to govern, in
some predetermined manner, the electric power delivered to the

apparatus to which it is connected.
Cooking unit, counter -mounted. A cooking appliance designed
for mounting in or on a counter and consisting of one or more
heating elements, internal wiring, and built-in or separately
mountable controls. (See Oven, wall-mounted.)
Covered conductor. See Conductor.
Cutout. (Over 600 volts, nominal.) An assembly of a fuse support
with either a fuseholder, fuse carrier, or disconnecting blade. The
fuseholder or fuse carrier may include a conducting element (fuse
link), or may act as the disconnecting blade by the inclusion of a
nonfusible member.
Cutout box. An enclosure designed for surface mounting and
having swinging doors or covers secured directly to and telescoping
with the walls of the box proper. (See Cabinet.)
Damp location. See Location.
Dead front. Without live parts exposed to a person on the
operating side of the equipment.
Device. A unit of an electrical system which is intended to carry
but not utilize electric energy.
Dielectric heating. Dielectric heating is the heating of a nominally
insulating material due to its own dielectric losses when the
material is placed in a varying electric field.
Disconnecting means. A device, or group of devices, or other
means by which the conductors of a circuit can be disconnected
from their source of supply.
Disconnecting (or Isolating) switch. (Over 600 volts, nominal.)
A mechanical switching device used for isolating a circuit or
equipment from a source of power.
Dry location. See Location.
Electric sign. A fixed, stationary, or portable self-contained,
electrically illuminated utilization equipment with words or symbols
designed to convey information or attract attention.
Enclosed. Surrounded by a case, housing, fence or walls which will
prevent persons from accidentally contacting energized parts.
Enclosure. The case or housing of apparatus, or the fence or walls
surrounding an installation to prevent personnel from accidentally
contacting energized parts, or to protect the equipment from
physical damage.
Equipment. A general term including material, fittings, devices,
appliances, fixtures, apparatus, and the like, used as a part of, or in
connection with, an electrical installation.
Equipment grounding conductor. See Grounding conductor,
equipment.
Explosion-proof apparatus. Apparatus enclosed in a case that is
capable of withstanding an explosion of a specified gas or vapor
which may occur within it and of preventing the ignition of a
specified gas or vapor surrounding the enclosure by sparks, flashes,
or explosion of the gas or vapor within, and which operates at such
an external temperature that it will not ignite a surrounding
flammable atmosphere.
Exposed. (As applied to live parts.) Capable of being inadvertently
touched or approached nearer than a safe distance by a person. It
is applied to parts not suitably guarded, isolated, or insulated. (See
Accessible. and Concealed.)
Exposed. (As applied to wiring methods.) On or attached to the
surface or behind panels designed to allow access. [See
Accessible. (As applied to wiring methods.)]
Exposed. (For the purposes of 1910.308(e), Communications
systems.) Where the circuit is in such a position that in case of
failure of supports or insulation, contact with another circuit may
result.
Externally operable. Capable of being operated without exposing
the operator to contact with live parts.
Feeder. All circuit conductors between the service equipment, or
the generator switchboard of an isolated plant, and the final
branch-circuit overcurrent device.
Fitting. An accessory such as a locknut, bushing, or other part of a
wiring system that is intended primarily to perform a mechanical
rather than an electrical function.
Fuse. (Over 600 volts, nominal.) An overcurrent protective device
with a circuit opening fusible part that is heated and severed by the
passage of overcurrent through it. A fuse comprises all the parts
that form a unit capable of performing the prescribed functions. It
may or may not be the complete device necessary to connect it into
an electrical circuit.
Ground. A conducting connection, whether intentional or
accidental, between an electrical circuit or equipment and the
earth, or to some conducting body that serves in place of the earth.

Grounded. Connected to earth or to some conducting body that
serves in place of the earth.
Grounded, effectively. (Over 600 volts, nominal.) Permanently
connected to earth through a ground connection of sufficiently low
impedance and having sufficient ampacity that ground fault current
which may occur cannot build up to voltages dangerous to
personnel.
Grounded conductor. A system or circuit conductor that is
intentionally grounded.
Grounding conductor. A conductor used to connect equipment or
the grounded circuit of a wiring system to a grounding electrode or
electrodes.
Grounding conductor, equipment. The conductor used to
connect the non-current-carrying metal parts of equipment,
raceways, and other enclosures to the system grounded conductor
and/or the grounding electrode conductor at the service equipment
or at the source of a separately derived system.
Grounding electrode conductor. The conductor used to connect
the grounding electrode to the equipment grounding conductor
and/or to the grounded conductor of the circuit at the service
equipment or at the source of a separately derived system.
Ground-fault circuit-interrupter. A device whose function is to
interrupt the electric circuit to the load when a fault current to
ground exceeds some predetermined value that is less than that
required to operate the overcurrent protective device of the supply
circuit.
Guarded. Covered, shielded, fenced, enclosed, or otherwise
protected by means of suitable covers, casings, barriers, rails,
screens, mats, or platforms to remove the likelihood of approach to
a point of danger or contact by persons or objects.
Health care facilities. Buildings or portions of buildings and
mobile homes that contain, but are not limited to, hospitals,
nursing homes, extended care facilities, clinics, and medical and
dental offices, whether fixed or mobile.
Heating equipment. For the purposes of 1910.306(g), the term
"heating equipment" includes any equipment used for heating
purposes if heat is generated by induction or dielectric methods.
Hoistway. Any shaftway, hatchway, well hole, or other vertical
opening or space in which an elevator or dumbwaiter is designed to
operate.
Identified. Identified, as used in reference to a conductor or its
terminal, means that such conductor or terminal can be readily
recognized as grounded.
Induction heating. Induction heating is the heating of a nominally
conductive material due to its own I 2 R losses when the material is
placed in a varying electromagnetic field.
Insulated conductor. See Conductor.
Interrupter switch. (Over 600 volts, nominal.) A switch capable
of making, carrying, and interrupting specified currents.
Irrigation machine. An irrigation machine is an electrically driven
or controlled machine, with one or more motors, not hand portable,
and used primarily to transport and distribute water for agricultural
purposes.
Isolated. Not readily accessible to persons unless special means
for access are used.
Isolated power system. A system comprising an isolating
transformer or it equivalent, a line isolation monitor, and its
ungrounded circuit conductors.
Labeled. Equipment is "labeled" if there is attached to it a label,
symbol, or other identifying mark of a nationally recognized testing
laboratory which, (a) makes periodic inspections of the production
of such equipment, and (b) whose labeling indicates compliance
with nationally recognized standards or tests to determine safe use
in a specified manner.
Lighting outlet. An outlet intended for the direct connection of a
lampholder, a lighting fixture, or a pendant cord terminating in a
lampholder.
Line-clearance tree trimming. The pruning, trimming, repairing,
maintaining, removing, or clearing of trees or cutting of brush that
is within 10 feet (305 cm) of electric supply lines and equipment.
Listed. Equipment is "listed" if it is of a kind mentioned in a list
which, (a) is published by a nationally recognized laboratory which
makes periodic inspection of the production of such equipment, and
(b) states such equipment meets nationally recognized standards
or has been tested and found safe for use in a specified manner.
Location - (i) Damp location. Partially protected locations under
canopies, marquees, roofed open porches, and like locations, and
interior locations subject to moderate degrees of moisture, such as
some basements, some barns, and some cold-storage warehouses.

(ii) Dry location. A location not normally subject to dampness or
wetness. A location classified as dry may be temporarily subject to
dampness or wetness, as in the case of a building under
construction.
(iii) Wet location. Installations underground or in concrete slabs
or masonry in direct contact with the earth, and locations subject to
saturation with water or other liquids, such as vehicle-washing
areas, and locations exposed to weather and unprotected.
May. If a discretionary right, privilege, or power is abridged or if an
obligation to abstain from acting is imposed, the word "may" is
used with a restrictive "no," "not," or "only." (E.g., no employer
may ...; an employer may not ...; only qualified persons may ...)
Medium voltage cable. Type MV medium voltage cable is a single
or multiconductor solid dielectric insulated cable rated 2000 volts or
higher.
Metal-clad cable. Type MC cable is a factory assembly of one or
more conductors, each individually insulated and enclosed in a
metallic sheath of interlocking tape, or a smooth or corrugated
tube.
Mineral-insulated metal-sheathed cable. Type MI mineral-
insulated metal-sheathed cable is a factory assembly of one or
more conductors insulated with a highly compressed refractory
mineral insulation and enclosed in a liquidtight and gastight
continuous copper sheath.
Mobile X-ray. X-ray equipment mounted on a permanent base
with wheels and/or casters for moving while completely assembled.
Nonmetallic-sheathed cable. Nonmetallic-sheathed cable is a
factory assembly of two or more insulated conductors having an
outer sheath of moisture resistant, flame-retardant, nonmetallic
material. Nonmetallic sheathed cable is manufactured in the
following types:
(i) Type NM. The overall covering has a flame-retardant and
moisture-resistant finish.
(ii) Type NMC. The overall covering is flame-retardant, moisture-
resistant, fungus-resistant, and corrosion-resistant.
Oil (filled) cutout. (Over 600 volts, nominal.) A cutout in which
all or part of the fuse support and its fuse link or disconnecting
blade are mounted in oil with complete immersion of the contacts
and the fusible portion of the conducting element (fuse link), so
that arc interruption by severing of the fuse link or by opening of

the contacts will occur under oil.
Open wiring on insulators. Open wiring on insulators is an
exposed wiring method using cleats, knobs, tubes, and flexible
tubing for the protection and support of single insulated conductors
run in or on buildings, and not concealed by the building structure.
Outlet. A point on the wiring system at which current is taken to
supply utilization equipment.
Outline lighting. An arrangement of incandescent lamps or
electric discharge tubing to outline or call attention to certain
features such as the shape of a building or the decoration of a
window.
Oven, wall-mounted. An oven for cooking purposes designed for
mounting in or on a wall or other surface and consisting of one of
more heating elements, internal wiring, and built-in or separately
mountable controls. (See Cooking unit, counter -mounted.)
Overcurrent. Any current in excess of the rated current of
equipment or the ampacity of a conductor. It may result from
overload (see definition), short circuit, or ground fault. A current in
excess of rating may be accommodated by certain equipment and
conductors for a given set of conditions. Hence the rules for
overcurrent protection are specific for particular situations.
Overload. Operation of equipment in excess of normal, full load
rating, or of a conductor in excess of rated ampacity which, when it
persists for a sufficient length of time, would cause damage or
dangerous overheating. A fault, such as a short circuit or ground
fault, is not an overload. (See Overcurrent.)
Panelboard. A single panel or group of panel units designed for
assembly in the form of a single panel; including buses, automatic
overcurrent devices, and with or without switches for the control of
light, heat, or power circuits; designed to be placed in a cabinet or
cutout box placed in or against a wall or partition and accessible
only from the front. (See Switchboard.)
Permanently installed decorative fountains and reflection
pools. Those that are constructed in the ground, on the ground or
in a building in such a manner that the pool cannot be readily
disassembled for storage and are served by electrical circuits of any
nature. These units are primarily constructed for their aesthetic
value and not intended for swimming or wading.
Permanently installed swimming pools, wading and
therapeutic pools. Those that are constructed in the ground, on
the ground, or in a building in such a manner that the pool cannot

be readily disassembled for storage whether or not served by
electrical circuits of any nature.
Portable X-ray. X-ray equipment designed to be hand-carried.
Power and control tray cable. Type TC power and control tray
cable is a factory assembly of two or more insulated conductors,
with or without associated bare or covered grounding conductors
under a nonmetallic sheath, approved for installation in cable trays,
in raceways, or where supported by a messenger wire.
Power fuse. (Over 600 volts, nominal.) See Fuse.
Power-limited tray cable. Type PLTC nonmetallic-sheathed
power limited tray cable is a factory assembly of two or more
insulated conductors under a nonmetallic jacket.
Power outlet. An enclosed assembly which may include
receptacles, circuit breakers, fuseholders, fused switches, buses
and watt-hour meter mounting means; intended to supply and
control power to mobile homes, recreational vehicles or boats, or to
serve as a means for distributing power required to operate mobile
or temporarily installed equipment.
Premises wiring system. That interior and exterior wiring,
including power, lighting, control, and signal circuit wiring together
with all of its associated hardware, fittings, and wiring devices, both
permanently and temporarily installed, which extends from the load
end of the service drop, or load end of the service lateral
conductors to the outlet(s). Such wiring does not include wiring
internal to appliances, fixtures, motors, controllers, motor control
centers, and similar equipment.
Qualified person. One familiar with the construction and operation
of the equipment and the hazards involved.
Note 1: Whether an employee is considered to be a "qualified
person" will depend upon various circumstances in the workplace.
It is possible and, in fact, likely for an individual to be considered
qualified" with regard to certain equipment in the workplace, but
"unqualified" as to other equipment.(See 1910.332(b)(3) for
training requirements that specifically apply to qualified persons.)
Note 2: An employee who is undergoing on-the-job training and
who, in the course of such training, has demonstrated an ability to
perform duties safely at his or her level of training and who is
under the direct supervision of a qualified person is considered to
be a qualified person for the performance of those duties.
Raceway. A channel designed expressly for holding wires, cables,

or busbars, with additional functions as permitted in this subpart.
Raceways may be of metal or insulating material, and the term
includes rigid metal conduit, rigid nonmetallic conduit, intermediate
metal conduit,liquidtight flexible metal conduit, flexible metallic
tubing, flexible metal conduit, electrical metallic tubing, underfloor
raceways, cellular concrete floor raceways, cellular metal floor
raceways, surface raceways, wireways, and busways.
Readily accessible. Capable of being reached quickly for
operation, renewal, or inspections, without requiring those to whom
ready access is requisite to climb over or remove obstacles or to
resort to portable ladders, chairs, etc. (See Accessible.)
Receptacle. A receptacle is a contact device installed at the outlet
for the connection of a single attachment plug. A single receptacle
is a single contact device with no other contact device on the same
yoke. A multiple receptacle is a single device containing two or
more receptacles.
Receptacle outlet. An outlet where one or more receptacles are
installed.
Remote-control circuit. Any electric circuit that controls any
other circuit through a relay or an equivalent device.
Sealable equipment. Equipment enclosed in a case or cabinet
that is provided with a means of sealing or locking so that live parts
cannot be made accessible without opening the enclosure. The
equipment may or may not be operable without opening the
enclosure.
Separately derived system. A premises wiring system whose
power is derived from generator, transformer, or converter winding
and has no direct electrical connection, including a solidly
connected grounded circuit conductor, to supply conductors
originating in another system.
Service. The conductors and equipment for delivering energy from
the electricity supply system to the wiring system of the premises
served.
Service cable. Service conductors made up in the form of a cable.
Service conductors. The supply conductors that extend from the
street main or from transformers to the service equipment of the
premises supplied.
Service drop. The overhead service conductors from the last pole
or other aerial support to and including the splices, if any,
connecting to the service-entrance conductors at the building or

other structure.
Service-entrance cable. Service-entrance cable is a single
conductor or multiconductor assembly provided with or without an
overall covering, primarily used for services and of the following
types:
(i) Type SE, having a flame-retardant, moisture-resistant covering,
but not required to have inherent protection against mechanical
abuse.
(ii) Type USE, recognized for underground use, having a moisture-
resistant covering, but not required to have a flame-retardant
covering or inherent protection against mechanical abuse. Single-
conductor cables having an insulation specifically approved for the
purpose do not require an outer covering.
Service-entrance conductors, overhead system. The service
conductors between the terminals of the service equipment and a
point usually outside the building, clear of building walls, where
joined by tap or splice to the service drop.
Service entrance conductors, underground system. The
service conductors between the terminals of the service equipment
and the point of connection to the service lateral. Where service
equipment is located outside the building walls, there may be no
service-entrance conductors, or they may be entirely outside the
building.
Service equipment. The necessary equipment, usually consisting
of a circuit breaker or switch and fuses, and their accessories,
located near the point of entrance of supply conductors to a
building or other structure, or an otherwise defined area, and
intended to constitute the main control and means of cutoff of the
supply.
Service raceway. The raceway that encloses the service-entrance
conductors.
Shielded nonmetallic-sheathed cable. Type SNM, shielded
nonmetallic-sheathed cable is a factory assembly of two or more
insulated conductors in an extruded core of moisture-resistant,
flame-resistant nonmetallic material, covered with an overlapping
spiral metal tape and wire shield and jacketed with an extruded
moisture-, flame-, oil-, corrosion-, fungus-, and sunlight-resistant
nonmetallic material.
Show window. Any window used or designed to be used for the
display of goods or advertising material, whether it is fully or partly
enclosed or entirely open at the rear and whether or not it has a

platform raised higher than the street floor level.
Sign. See Electric Sign.
Signaling circuit. Any electric circuit that energizes signaling
equipment.
Special permission. The written consent of the authority having
jurisdiction.
Storable swimming or wading pool. A pool with a maximum
dimension of 15 feet and a maximum wall height of 3 feet and is so
constructed that it may be readily disassembled for storage and
reassembled to its original integrity.
Switchboard. A large single panel, frame, or assembly of panels
which have switches, buses, instruments, overcurrent and other
protective devices mounted on the face or back or both.
Switchboards are generally accessible from the rear as well as from
the front and are not intended to be installed in cabinets. (See
Panelboard.)
Switches.
General-use switch. A switch intended for use in general
distribution and branch circuits. It is rated in amperes, and it is
capable of interrupting its rated current at its rated voltage.
(ii) General-use snap switch. A form of general-use switch so
constructed that it can be installed in flush device boxes or on
outlet box covers, or otherwise used in conjunction with wiring
systems recognized by this subpart.
(iii) Isolating switch. A switch intended for isolating an electric
circuit from the source of power. It has no interrupting rating, and
it is intended to be operated only after the circuit has been opened
by some other means.
(iv) Motor-circuit switch. A switch, rated in horsepower, capable
of interrupting the maximum operating overload current of a motor
of the same horsepower rating as the switch at the rated voltage.
Switching devices. (Over 600 volts, nominal.) Devices designed
to close and/or open one or more electric circuits. Included in this
category are circuit breakers, cutouts, disconnecting (or isolating)
switches, disconnecting means, interrupter switches, and oil (filled)
cutouts.
Transportable X-ray. X-ray equipment installed in a vehicle or
that may readily be disassembled for transport in a vehicle.
Utilization equipment. Utilization equipment means equipment

which utilizes electric energy for mechanical, chemical, heating,
lighting, or similar useful purpose.
Utilization system. A utilization system is a system which
provides electric power and light for employee workplaces, and
includes the premises wiring system and utilization equipment.
Ventilated. Provided with a means to permit circulation of air
sufficient to remove an excess of heat, fumes, or vapors.
Volatile flammable liquid. A flammable liquid having a flash point
below 38 degrees C (100 degrees F) or whose temperature is
above its flash point.
Voltage (of a circuit). The greatest root-mean-square (effective)
difference of potential between any two conductors of the circuit
concerned.
Voltage, nominal. A nominal value assigned to a circuit or system
for the purpose of conveniently designating its voltage class (as
120/240, 480Y/277, 600, etc.). The actual voltage at which a
circuit operates can vary from the nominal within a range that
permits satisfactory operation of equipment.
Voltage to ground. For grounded circuits, the voltage between
the given conductor and that point or conductor of the circuit that
is grounded; for ungrounded circuits, the greatest voltage between
the given conductor and any other conductor of the circuit.
Watertight. So constructed that moisture will not enter the
enclosure.
Weatherproof. So constructed or protected that exposure to the
weather will not interfere with successful operation. Rainproof,
raintight, or watertight equipment can fulfill the requirements for
weatherproof where varying weather conditions other than
wetness, such as snow, ice, dust, or temperature extremes, are not
a factor.
Wet location. See Location.
Wireways. Wireways are sheet-metal troughs with hinged or
removable covers for housing and protecting electric wires and
cable and in which conductors are laid in place after the wireway
has been installed as a complete system.
(b) Definitions applicable to 1910.331 through 1910.360
[Reserved]
(c) Definitions applicable to 1910.360 through 1910.380 [Reserved]
(d) Definitions applicable to 1910.381 through 1910.398

[Reserved]
[46 FR 4056, Jan. 16, 1981; 46 FR 40185, Aug. 7, 1981; as
amended at 53 FR 12123, Apr. 12, 1988; 55 FR 32020, Aug. 6,
1990; 55 FR 46054, Nov. 1, 1990]
Authority for 1910 Subpart S - 1910SubpartS Page 1 of 1
Text version
Home Index Search
CFR)
Authority for 1910 Subpart S -
1910SubpartS
l Standard Number: 1910SubpartS

l Standard Title: Authority for 1910 Subpart S
l SubPart Number: S
l SubPart Title: Electrical
Interpretation(s)
AUTHORITY: Secs. 4, 6, 8, Occupational Safety and Health Act of

1970 (29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of Labor's Order No. 8-
76 (41 FR 25059) or 1-90 (55 FR 9033), as applicable; 29 CFR Part
1911.
[55 FR 32015, Aug. 6, 1990; 55 FR 46054, Nov. 1, 1990; 59 FR

4475, Jan. 31, 1994]
http://www.osha-slc.gov/OshStd_data/1910_SUBPART_S.html 11/9/2001
Reference Documents - 1910SubpartSAppA Page 1 of 3
Text version
Home Index Search
CFR)
Reference Documents - 1910SubpartSAppA
l Standard Number: 1910SubpartSAppA

l Standard Title: Reference Documents
l SubPart Number: S
The following references provide information which can be helpful

in understanding and complying with the requirements contained in
Subpart S:
ANSI A17.1-71 Safety Code for Elevators, Dumbwaiters, Escalators and

Moving Walks.
ANSI B9.1-71 Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration.
ANSI B30.2-76 Safety Code for Overhead and Gantry Cranes.
ANSI B30.3-75 Hammerhead Tower Cranes.
ANSI B30.4-73 Safety Code for Portal, Tower, and Pillar Cranes.
ANSI B30.5-68 Safety Code for Crawler, Locomotive, and Truck Cranes.
ANSI B30.6-77 Derricks.
ANSI B30.7-77 Base Mounted Drum Hoists.
ANSI B30.8-71 Safety Code for Floating Cranes and Floating Derricks.
ANSI B30.11-73 Monorail Systems and Underhung Cranes.
ANSI B30.12-75 Handling Loads Suspended from Rotorcraft.
ANSI B30.13-77 Controlled Mechanical Storage Cranes.
ANSI B30.15-73 Safety Code for Mobile Hydraulic Cranes.
ANSI B30.16-73 Overhead Hoists.
ANSI C2-81 National Electrical Safety Code.
ANSI C33.27-74 Safety Standard for Outlet Boxes and Fittings for Use in
Hazardous Locations, Class I, Groups A, B, C, and D, and
Class II, Groups E, F, and G.
ANSI K61.1-72 Safety Requirements for the Storage and Handling of
Anhydrous Ammonia.
ASTM D2155-66 Test Method for Autoignition Temperature of Liquid
Petroleum Products.
ASTM D3176-74 Method for Ultimate Analysis of Coal and Coke.
ASTM D3180-74 Method for Calculating Coal and Coke Analyses from As
Determined to Different Bases.
http://www.osha-slc.gov/OshStd_data/1910_SUBPART_S_APP_A.html 11/9/2001
IEEE 463-77 Standard for Electrical Safety Practices in Electrolytic

Cell Line Working Zones.
NFPA 20-76 Standard for the Installation of Centrifugal Fire Pumps.
NFPA 30-78 Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code.
NFPA 32-74 Standard for Drycleaning Plants.
NFPA 33-73 Standard for Spray Application Using Flammable and
Combustible Materials.
NFPA 34-74 Standard for Dip Tanks Containing Flammable or
Combustible Liquids.
NFPA 35-76 Standard for the Manufacture of Organic Coatings.
NFPA 36-74 Standard for Solvent Extraction Plants.
NFPA 40-74 Standard for the Storage and Handling of Cellulose Nitrate
Motion Picture Film.
NFPA 56A-73 Standard for the Use of Inhalation Anesthetics (Flammable
and Nonflammable).
NFPA 56F-74 Standard for Nonflammable Medical Gas Systems.
NFPA 58-76 Standard for the Storage and Handling of Liquefied
Petroleum Gases.
NFPA 59-76 Standard for the Storage and Handling of Liquefied
Petroleum Gases at Utility Gas Plants.
NFPA 70-78 National Electrical Code.
NFPA 70C-74 Hazardous Locations Classification.
NFPA 70E Standard for the Electrical Safety Requirements for
Employee Workplaces.
NFPA 71-77 Standard for the Installation, Maintenance, and Use of
Central Station Signaling Systems.
NFPA 72A-75 Standard for the Installation, Maintenance, and Use of
Local Protective Signaling Systems for Watchman, Fire
Alarm, and Supervisory Service.
NFPA 72B-75 Standard for the Installation, Maintenance, and Use of
Auxiliary Protective Signaling Systems for Fire Alarm
Service.
NFPA 72C-75 Standard for the Installation, Maintenance, and Use of
Remote Station Protective Signaling Systems.
NFPA 72D-75 Standard for the Installation, Maintenance, and Use of
Proprietary Protective Signaling Systems for Watchman,
Fire Alarm, and Supervisory Service.
NFPA 72E-74 Standard for Automatic Fire Detectors.
NFPA 74-75 Standard for Installation, Maintenance, and Use of
Household Fire Warning Equipment.
NFPA 76A-73 Standard for Essential Electrical Systems for Health
Care Facilities.
NFPA 77-72 Recommended Practice on Static Electricity.
NFPA 80-77 Standard for Fire Doors and Windows.
NFPA 86A-73 Standard for Ovens and Furnaces; Design, Location and
Equipment.
NFPA 88A-73 Standard for Parking Structures.
NFPA 88B-73 Standard for Repair Garages.
NFPA 91-73 Standard for the Installation of Blower and Exhaust
Systems for Dust, Stock, and Vapor Removal, or
Conveying.
NFPA 101-78 Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and
Structures. (Life Safety Code.)
NFPA 325M-69 Fire-Hazard Properties of Flammable Liquids, Gases, and
Volatile Solids.
NFPA 493-75 Standard for Intrinsically Safe Apparatus for Use in
Class I Hazardous Locations and Its Associated Apparatus.
NFPA 496-74 Standard for Purged and Pressurized Enclosures for
Electrical Equipment in Hazardous Locations.

NFPA 497-75 Recommended Practice for Classification of Class I
Hazardous Locations for Electrical Installations in
Chemical Plants.
NFPA 505-75 Fire Safety Standard for Powered Industrial Trucks
Including Type Designations and Areas of Use.
NMAB 353-1-79 Matrix of Combustion-Relevant Properties and
Classification of Gases, Vapors, and Selected Solids.
NMAB 353-2-79 Test Equipment for Use in Determining Classifications of
Combustible Dusts.
NMAB 353-3-80 Classification of Combustible Dusts in Accordance with
the National Electrical Code.
[46 FR 4056, Jan. 16, 1981; 46 FR 40185, Aug. 7, 1981; 55 FR

32020, Aug. 6, 1990]
Explanatory Data - 1910SubpartSAppB Page 1 of 1
Text version
Home Index Search
CFR)
Explanatory Data - 1910SubpartSAppB
l Standard Number: 1910SubpartSAppB

l Standard Title: Explanatory Data
l SubPart Number: S
[Reserved]
http://www.osha-slc.gov/OshStd_data/1910_SUBPART_S_APP_B.html 11/9/2001
Tables, Notes, and Charts - 1910SubpartSAppC Page 1 of 1
Text version
Home Index Search
CFR)
Tables, Notes, and Charts -
1910SubpartSAppC
l Standard Number: 1910SubpartSAppC

l Standard Title: Tables, Notes, and Charts
l SubPart Number: S
[Reserved]
http://www.osha-slc.gov/OshStd_data/1910_SUBPART_S_APP_C.html 11/9/2001

Es WP Not Annotated

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Es WP Not Annotated

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ChevronTexaco Electrical

Safe Work Practice

5.0 Safe Work Practices 16

Revision 3 TOC-i November 2001

5.3.3 Testing and Verification Techniques for Isolation 24

November 2001 TOC-ii Revision 3

5.10.3 When Grounding is Impractical or Presents a Hazard 46

6.0 New Design, Modifications and Construction 51

7.0 Operation and Maintenance 60

Revision 3 TOC-iii November 2001

7.2 Guarding Live Parts During Operation and Maintenance 60

8.0 Inspection and Testing of Insulating Rubber Products, Tools, and

9.0 Employee Training 64

10.0 Facility Work 69

November 2001 TOC-iv Revision 3

10.3 Non-qualified and Non-authorized Personnel 70

11.0 Power System and Electrical Installation Security (Locking) 71

Appendix A Clearance and Approach Boundaries Figures and Tables 75

Appendix B Limits of Approach 83

Appendix D Sample Calculation of Flash Protection Boundary DC, Arc in

Appendix E Recommended Personal Protective Equipment 96

Appendix F Work Area Protection 101

Appendix G Job Briefing Checklist 103

Appendix H Substation Project Installation Safety Assessment Checklist 104

Appendix I Substation Inspection Checklist 107

Appendix J Electrical Control Room Inspection Checklist 111

Appendix K Test Procedure for Daily Inspection of Rubber Gloves 112

Appendix L Safety Tags 113

Revision 3 TOC-v November 2001

Appendix M Grounding Cable and Jumper Ratings 114

Appendix N Equipotential Grounding Techniques 115

Appendix O Principles of Electrical Safety 116

Appendix P OSHA Regulations (Standards - 29 CFR) 117

November 2001 TOC-vi Revision 3

November 2001 1 of 117 Revision 3

Revision 3 2 of 117 November 2001

One who can demonstrate by experience and training (as stated in

A self-controlled device for interrupting and reclosing an alternating

A physical obstruction such as tapes, ropes, cones, or A-frame type

A physical obstruction intended to prevent contact with equipment or

The electrical interconnection of conductive parts designed to

A conductor or group of conductors that serves as a common

November 2001 3 of 117 Revision 3

NESC Clearance (Between Objects)

Revision 3 4 of 117 November 2001

Current-carrying Part NESC

A truck used to transport personnel, tools, and material for electric

An organization responsible for the installation, operation, and

A state in which the conductor or circuit part to be worked on or near

November 2001 5 of 117 Revision 3

Revision 3 6 of 117 November 2001

Exposed (Live Parts)

A dangerous condition associated with the possible release of energy

November 2001 7 of 117 Revision 3

OSHA 1910.269(x) Hazardous Atmosphere (as applied to confined/enclosed

Revision 3 8 of 117 November 2001

Insulation (Cable) NESC

That which is relied upon to insulate the conductor from other

A shock protection boundary to be crossed by only qualified

Electric conductors, buses, terminals, or components that are

The placement of a lockout device on an energy-isolating device in

November 2001 9 of 117 Revision 3

Revision 3 10 of 117 November 2001